38C-009 i
Narrative Report, sequence of operation section
Flow measuring devices—pitot for backflow flush
Smoke
Magnets
Communication radios
Section 3—Approval Requirements
a) Method of approval required from code official that system satisfies all
operational code compliance requirements—written.
b) Documentation to be submitted to code officials at completion verifying that
systems are in compliance with all laws, regulations and standards and pre-
approved narrative reports.
Robt. W. Hall, Consulting Engineers provide written confirmation
c) Documentation as required by 780 CMR, Section 903.4
Robt W. Hall, Consulting Engineers will certify sprinkler system
Sprinkler contractor will provide record drawings
Sprinkler contractor will provide copies of Materials, Test, Performance,
and Completion certificates
DEFINITIONS
Fire Protection Systems Fire Protection Systems—Automatic sprinkler systems, fire
detection system, fire alarm notification system, smoke control system, suppression
system, etc.
Building Life Safety System Building Life Safety System—A combination of fire
protection systems and other building fire protection features such as automatic door
closers, emergency egress lighting, etc., interconnected or integrated with multiple fire
protection systems functioning simultaneously when activated.
Preaarer of Narrative Resort—An individual who has taken charge of a project and
has knowledge of required and non-required fire protection systems and buildings life
safety systems. The designer I charge of a specific design for a fire protection system
may prepare their portion of the Narrative Report to be submitted to the individual who
has"taken charge". The individual who has"taken charge" shall compile the data from
the designer of each system and prepare a single, comprehensive and coordinated final
Narrative Report describing each system and when applicable a description of how each
system interfaces with the building life safety system's integration and sequence of
operation. The take-charge individual may be the architect, engineer of record, and the
designer of any of the fire protection systems or an independent qualified consultant.
b) Robt. W. Hall Consulting Engineers will require the following tests to be
performed:
1. Water Flow Test prior to the installation of sprinkler system.
2. Robt. W. Hall, Consulting Engineers must perform a walkthrough after
system completion.
3. Robt W. Hall will perform a final walkthrough, witness backflow flush,
witness pressure tests, and witness alarm tests.
4. The Sprinkler Sub-Contractor will provide a certificate of completion for
the sprinkler system upon project completion.
5. The fire alarm system manufacturer shall provide a certificate of
completion for the fire alarm system upon project completion.
C) System criteria:
Wet Sprinkler System:
Hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 200 psi for two hours without a loss in
pressure.
Opening of the inspectors test connection shall initiate an alarm at the main fire
alarm panel and building within 90 seconds.
Conduct forward flow test of backflow preventer at a rate required for 2 sprinkler
heads.
d) Fire Alarm System
1. The fire alarm system and components of the system will be tested in
accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 7 as applicable.
2. Robt. W. Hall, Consulting Engineers must be present for final testing of
system.
3. The manufactures technician must be present for the testing of the system
as well as the Electrical Sub-Contractor, Designated Owner's
Representative, Local Fire Department Authority and the Local Building
Inspector.
The fire alarm system will be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 Article 7-2 as
applicable.
Section 2—Equipment and Tools
a) Identification of equipment and procedures to be used to verify system
performance
Manufacturer's instructions
Specifier's special instructions
4. Closed contract will send signal through local alarm panel to central
station, central station will then notify fire department.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1. The building will consist of a zoned fire alarm system for the sprinkler
system.
2. The activation of any water flow switch shall automatically:
a. Sound the exterior bell associated with the sprinkler system, and
all audio/visual units inside the units.
b. Flash an alarm LED and sound an audible signal at the FACP.
Upon Acknowledgement the alarm LED shall light steadily and the
audible shall silence. Subsequent alarms shall re-initiate this
sequence.
C. Initiate the transmission of an alarm signal to an off-site UL central
station monitoring facility.
d. Visually indicate the alarm initiating device and location via the
FACP LED display.
e. All installations shall be in accordance with the Northampton Fire
Department Fire Prevention Features for New Construction &
Renovations.
f. A Knox Box shall be provided as directed by the Northampton Fire
Department and shall be keyed to the City of Northampton. In
addition, a red strobe light (at least 1,000,000 foot candles or 120
candela) must be mounted a minimum of 2' above the Knox box
and should flash upon fire alarm activation.
g. A permanently mounted framed graphic illustration of the building
will be located directly inside the fire alarm entrance(above fire
alarm panel of annunciation panel as directed).
h. Individual occupant protection will be provided with tandem wired
120-volt smoke detectors with sounder and battery back-up. The
detectors in the barrier free units shall be equipped with 177
candela visual strobes.
i. Tamper switches shall indicate a trouble signal at the FACP.
903.1.1 (1.c) TESTING CRITERIA
Section 1 —Testing Criteria
Personnel
a) GC shall coordinate all testing and schedule Robt W. Hall Consulting Engineers
and the local authorities for witnessing the sprinkler contractor and electrical
contractors tests.
provides calculations to confirm the design criteria. The PE reviews and approves
the installing contractor's final layout and calculations. The PE is considered the
engineer of record and certifies system installation for code compliance at
completion.
Section 4—Fire Protection Systems to be installed
a) New Water supply and fire mains.
b) New Automatic sprinkler systems and components
c) Fire alarm control panel to monitor sprinkler system-in accordance with NFPA
72.
d) Individual occupant protection in accordance with NFPA 72.
e) Audio/visual units in each unit plus visual only units in toilet rooms of all barrier
free units.
Section 3—Features Used in the Design Methodology
a) Building occupant notification and evacuation procedures
The building is provided with a fire alarm control panel for the sprinkler system.
If a fire is detected by the sprinkler system flow switches, the building occupants
will be notified via the exterior bell associated with this system, and the
audio/visual unit located inside each unit.
Individual unit protection will be provided utilizing 120-volt tandem wired smoke
detectors.
903.1.1 (Lb) SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Section 1
a) An operational description of either a system or specific devices within a system
and the"resulting action" associated with the operation of the system or specific
devices.
WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM
System operates automatically upon the fusing of a single fire sprinkler.
Operational Sequence:
1. The activation of a single sprinkler will discharge water and close the
contacts of a vane type flow switch.
2. Closed contact on the flow switch will provide an alarm contact for the
alarm control panel.
3. Closed contact will activate local alarm indication(exterior bell), and
audio/visual units inside the units.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS NARRATIVE REPORTS
The interaction of fire protection systems can be extremely complex. The detection of a
fire in a building by an automatic device may be designed to initiate other life saving fire
protection systems or devices, or other mechanical systems. In some circumstances
different individuals or different companies may design safety systems, which are
required to interact. The narrative report is intended to provide a single document, which
describes the design rationale of all fire protection systems and the interface between
systems. It is an invaluable tool for building officials, fire officials, building owners and
maintenance personnel. 780 CMR 903.1.1 requires the submission of so called fire
protection systems narrative reports as part of the construction documents, which must be
filed in order to obtain a building permit (or permit in part).
903.1.1 (La) BASIS(METHODOLOGY) OF DESIGN
Section 1—Building Description
a) Building"Use" Group—R-2 Residential Multifamily, Construction Classification
5B combustible unprotected.
b) Total square footage of buildings—
Building: 4,236 sq. ft.
Porch: 1,466 sq. ft.
c) Building height above grade: 3 F-0"
d) Number of floors above grade— I
e) Number of floors below grade—0
f) Total Square footage: 5,702 sq. ft.
g) Type(s) of occupancies(hazards)within the building—Light Hazard, Ordinary
Hazard.
h) High storage of commodities within a building usually over 12 ft. —none
Section 2—Applicable Laws,Regulations and Standards
a) 780 CMR code sections "Fire Protection System Requirements"
- 904.3 requires sprinkler protection
917.4.1 requires a fire protective signaling system
b) NFPA Standards and Edition used for design of each specific fire protection
system
NFPA 13R"Sprinkler Systems", 2002 ed
NFPA 24"Underground fire service mains"
NFPA 72. "National Fire Alarm Code."
Section 3—Design Responsibility for Fire Protection Systems (sprinkler system)
a) The professional engineer (PE) provides a partial design and specifies the design
criteria to be used by the installing contractor who finalizes the system layout,
i
Fire Protection Construction Documents
Narrative Report for
Mary McColgan Apartments
North Hampton Housing Authority
122 Grove Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
DHCD Project No. 214034
By
Robt.W.Hall Consulting Engineers, Inc.
540 Meadow Street Ext.
Agawam, MA 01001
Tel: (413) 789-0960
November 1, 2005
�w
NO
40
w
IM
wa
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
lubricated, aligned and/or ready for proper and safe operation. Motor
rotation shall be checked and corrected, if necessary.
D. Make connections to other building equipment as required. Data on the
drawings of equipment actually purchased before starting this work of
its rough in. Each piece of equipment, and each motor shall be provided
with an approved disconnect and over-current protection as required by
Code.
E. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for the 120-volt wiring
of the Boiler/Hot Water Heating system including all wiring from
terminal strip to service switch, circulator relays, system circulators and
boiler circulators all in accordance with approved manufacturers wiring
diagrams.
END OF SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL 16000 -35
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.06 SPLICES
A. Make splices for 910 or smaller conductors with UL approved solderless
connectors based on 3M Co. "Scotch-lock" Type Y, R, G or B, Buchanan,
or T&B "Stakon". Make splices, cable taps, and terminals for#8 or larger
conductors with UL approved bolted pressure conductors of bronze or
copper construction equal to those manufactured by T&B or Burndy.
3.07 GENERAL NOTES
A All work shall be done in accordance with the 2005 N.E.C. and local
codes.
B. Verify all conditions and measurements in the field.
C. All raceways shall be routed concealed in all "finished" areas. Where
raceways cannot be routed concealed because of building construction, the
Architect will advise on how to route these raceways in a surface metal
raceway system.
D. Where corrosion resistance is indicated, the preferred method is non-metal
raceways,boxes, covers, etc.
E. Refer to equipment layouts,final layout plans and reflected ceiling plans
for exact locations and/or mounting heights. ..
F. All feeders and Branch circuits shall contain insulated ground wire. ..
3.08 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install, all disconnect switches,
thermal protection and starters for all heating and cooling and plumbing
equipment except where such are an integral part of the equipment.
B. Provide required electrical connections for the building mechanical
equipment. Wiring shall be as necessary to provide proper operation of
the equipment including power and temperature control and as indicated �.
on the plans.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall, before energizing any motor or other
piece of mechanical equipment, verify that it is proper voltage, properly
ELECTRICAL 16000-34 ,�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
w 3.05 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics.
Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has
been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry.
B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all
piping and ductwork is in place. Lighting fixture layout shown on the
drawings is typical layout but may be modified to provide adequate lighting
of the equipment space according to final construction conditions. Any
relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed
by the Architect/Engineer, at no expense to the Owner.
an
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of
all lighting fixture locations. Provide separate support for all fixtures
me mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling
Contractor and Ventilating Contractor and mechanization equipment to
coordinate lighting system with other trades.
D. Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted to fixture stud in outlet boxes. Malleable
OR iron hickies or extension pieces shall be provided where required.
E. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box
„ where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover.
F. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-
plated brass screws and gasketed.
G. Pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height
from the floor and hang plumb.
H. Each fixture shall be completely prewired in Code approved manner with
#12 AWG copper conductors with an insulation rating approved by Code.
I. Circuit wiring running through the fixtures shall be No. 12 AWG with type
THMN insulation. There shall be no joints in the wires other than those
absolutely required. The fixture wires shall be of sufficient length for
making approved connections at the fixture outlets and at the lamp-holders or
ballasts.
J. Joints and splices within fixtures to be either secured by wire nuts or indent
type lug fasteners.
ELECTRICAL 16000-33
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall make any tests
necessary to satisfy the Owner and the Architect or his representative that ..
the true intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications has been
carried out. Contractor shall provide all instruments and labor necessary to
make such tests. Such tests shall include voltage tests at incoming service
and at every panel and switchboard. Any work showing faults under test,
and any work not in accordance with the specifications, shall be made good
by the Contractor at his own expense.
C. All tests shall be typed to include page number and number of pages in report.
Handwritten reports will be rejected.
3.04 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS *
A. All conduits shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run
with not more than the equivalent of three (3) 90-degree bends in a single
run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Subcontractor shall
provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be
suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof.
Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using
insulated bushings on all conduit 1'/4" or larger. Grounding bushing shall be .�.
provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have a minimum of 18 inches of
greenfield to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts
of the building, with cable jumper across greenfieid and fittings.
E. Run conduit to avoid low pockets that might collect water. During
installation cap open ends.
F. In general, install conduit in the structural floor slab only where slab is of
sufficient thickness to conceal crossovers of conduit and turns.
G. Maintain conduits in position during the pouring of floor concrete.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -32 �,
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.w *Adjust quantity (if needed)to match number of conduits in run.
"Where Where phase leg conductor ampacity exceeds over-current device, increase-
grounding conductor as if the overcurrent device size matched the phase leg
ampacity.
M. Grounding electrode conductor and conductors used for bonding on the
supply side of the service device shall be sized in accordance with the
following table:
SIZING OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS AND MAIN
(AND SUPPLY SIDE OF SERVICE)BONDING JUMPERS
*� SERVICE CONDUCTOR GROUNDING ELEC-TRODE BONDING
JUMPER
SIZE CABLE BUS CONDUCTOR
SIZE --------CU SIZE--CU CU CU
92 100 #8 98
3/0 max. 200 #4 #4
500 MCM.max. 400 1/0 1/0
2050. MCM.max 600 2/0 2/0
2x500. MCM max 800 2/0 2/0
4x350 MCM max 1200 3/0 250 MCM
5x400 MCM max 1600 3/0 400 MCM
N. Connections of ground wires shall be in accordance with the following:
wM
LOCATION GROUND WIRE CONNECTION
Main switchboard Switchboard ground bus
Junction box at which Metal body of junction box
non-metallic conduits
terminate
s. Secondary voltage to Transformer
secondary voltage ground stud
transformer
3.03 TESTS
A All wiring and connections shall be tested for continuity, grounds and short
circuits before the fixtures, devices and equipment are connected.
ELECTRICAL 16000-31
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,
G. Each grounding type bushing shall have the maximum ground wire
accommodation available in standard manufacture for the particular conduit
size. Connection to bushing shall be with wire of this maximum size.
H. Provide a #6 AWG in 3/4" minimum conduit green.insulated copper ground
wire connection to cold water pipe or other main building service grounding
electrode for the main telephone equipment room.
I. The central equipment for the fire protection alarm system shall have its
grounding terminal connected to the nearest metallic cold water main by ..
means of a #6 green coded insulated conductor, run in 3/4" threaded metallic
conduit. Utilize a ground clamp of a type specifically manufactured for the
purpose. ...
J. Conductors utilized for grounding and bonding shall have Type"TW" or
better insulation, color-coded green. *�
K. Bonding conductors on the load side of the service device and equipment
grounding conductors shall be sized in relation to the fuse or trip size of the
overcurrent device supplying the circuit in accordance with the following
table:
L. SIZING OF EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY GROUNDING
CONDUCTORS AND LOAD SIDE OF SERVICE BONDING JUMPERS
OVERCURRENT DEVICE GROUNDING CONDUCT OR
BONDING JUMPER ..
FUSE OR TRIP SIZE SIZE -- CU (AL)
(AMPS)** .�
15 - 20 #12 (#10)
25 - 60 #10 (# 8) '"
70 - 100 # 8 (# 6)
110 - 200 # 4 (#4)
225 -400 #2 (1/0)
500, 600 * 2 x#1 (2 x 2/0)
700, 800 * 2x 1/0 (2 x 3/0)
1000 * 3 x2/0 (3 x 4/0)
1200 * 4 x 3/0 (4 x 250)
ELECTRICAL 16000-30 ,.�
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
on DHCD Project No. 214034
or T&B "Stakon". Make splices, cable taps and terminals for#8 or larger
4M conductors with U.L. approved bolted pressure conductors of bronze or
copper construction equal to those manufactured by T&B or Burndy.
on K. Do not use aluminum conductors.
L. Panel board designations as indicated on the drawings are for identification
purposes only. The owner will direct the exact designations for the legend
plates. The electrical sub-contractor shall implement these designations
on the as-builds.
3.02 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
R
A. Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with best industry
practice and the following:
B. Establish a ground bonding connection from structural building steel to
each cold water main entering the building. Each bonding connection shall
consist of green insulated conductors run in threaded steel conduit, and
sized as indicated hereinafter for grounding electrode conductors.
C. Provide grounding bonds between all metallic conduits of the light and
power system that enter and leave cable chambers or other non-metallic
cable pulling and splicing boxes. Accomplish this by equipping the
conduit with bushings of the grounding type individually cross-connected.
D. Bond metallic conduits containing grounding electrode conductors and
" main bonding conductors to the ground bus service enclosure and/or
grounding electrode at both ends of each run utilizing grounding bushings
and jumpers.
E. Provide grounding bonds for all metallic conduits of the light and power
system which terminate in pits below equipment for which a ground bus is
specified. Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the
grounding type connected individually to the ground bus.
F. Provide supplementary ground bonding where metallic conduits terminate
at metal clad equipment (or at the metal pull box of equipment)for which a
ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with
bushings of the grounding type connected individually by means of jumpers
to the ground bus.
ELECTRICAL 16000-29
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 3 —EXECUTION .�
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. This Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a
manner as to cause no delay in the construction work by other trades.
B. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for
the correctness of it. No allowance will be made for differences between
actual measurements and those shown on the plans. "
C. If, in laying out his work, this Contractor finds that the work of other
trades might interfere with him, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified
at once. The right is hereby reserved by the Architect/Engineer to make
reasonable changes in arrangement of equipment, piping, etc., prior to �.
roughing-in,if interference is found,without additional cost to the Owner.
D. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to be readily accessible for
maintenance, repair and operation. The Architect/Engineer must approve
deviations from the plans without additional cost to the Owner.
E. The locations of outlets, apparatus and equipment are approximate only and
the runs of feeders, mains and branches are not necessarily to be made
exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be
determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades
and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation
shall conform to the latest issue of the National Electrical Code and local
inspection authorities.
F. Verify exact circuit breaker, feeder and outlet requirements and locations for
all equipment in accordance with design layout. Incorporate any changes
necessary in design to accommodate such.
G. In areas where finish may be of a different color,the Architect will advise on
finish.
H. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, controls and
apparatus, shall be made accessible. ,
I. There shall be no splices in new wire except where circuits are branched.
J. Make splices for#10 or smaller conductors with U.L. approved solderless
connectors based on MMM Co. "Scotchlock" Type S, M, or L,Buchanan,
ELECTRICAL 16000 -28
we
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
4, DHCD Project No. 214034
4"
E. FINAL TEST
1. The final test must be conducted by an Underwriters Laboratories fisted
UUJS Company. A copy of the final test shall be submitted upon
completion. Provide File number with submittal.
F. GUARANTEE
1. All equipment and wiring shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from
date of acceptance or final test performed in presence of Fire Department.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -27
4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ...
4. All equipment shall be UL listed and all fire equipment shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 72.
B. SYSTEM OPERATION
1. The actuation of flow switch shall cause the following:
a. Exterior electric bell to sound.
b. Indicate the device in alarm at the main control panel.
c. Notify the local fire department via communicator.
d. Audio/visual devices shall be engaged. ..�
C. EQUIPMENT
1. Supply and install an SFP-2404 Alarm System with 41 IUD
communicator. Provide Direct Dialer and a connection to Northampton
Fire Department for Alarm supervision.
2. Batteries PS 12120 for 60 hours standby.
3. Beacon SL-5.
4. Knox Box 3200. Verify with Architect whether flush or surface
mounted and exact location with the Fire Department.
5. Provide separate zone for each tamper and flow switch and wiring.
6. Remote annunciation panel. Exact location as per Fire Department.
7. Provide inside each unit a P 1224MC audio/visual unit.
8. Provide in toilet room of each barrier free unit a F1224 visual only unit.
D. WIRING
I. Provide in accordance with the manufacturers instruction all wiring,
conduit and outlet boxes as required for the installation of a complete
system as described here-in and shown on the drawings.
2. Final connections between the equipment and the wiring system shall be
made under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer.
3. Provide dedicated 120-volt source of power from owner's panel.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -26 ,�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Provide 120 volt un-switched power for chimes.
2.29 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS(PROPRIETARY ITEM)
A. Furnish and install in locations shown, 120-volt carbon monoxide
detectors. Detectors shall be ceiling mounted with 9VDC battery back
up as an auxiliary power source in the event of and electrical failure.
B. Approved manufacturer: BRK Model CO 5120B or equal.
2.30 RELAYS
A. Furnish and install solid-state relays as shown and detailed on the plans. Relays
to be in a steel housing with a hinged cover as shown on the plans. Relay
contacts to be 20 amp., 120 volt.. Coil voltage shall be as indicated on the
plans.
B. Relays shall be provided for System Circulators associated with the Boilers/Hot
water heating system.
C. Approved Manufacturers: Asco, Square D, Allen Bradley.
2.31 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM(FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM)
A. GENERAL
1. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system as described herein
and as shown on the drawings. The entire installation shall be done in
accordance with the Northampton Fire Department Fire Prevention
Features for New Construction/Renovations, latest edition dated 2/12/2003.
2. All panels and devices shall be the standard product of a single
manufacturer.
3. The catalog numbers specified under this section are those of Notifier and
constitute the type, quality and desired operation. Complete systems by
EST or Siemens will be considered.
!.
on ELECTRICAL 16000-25
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Combination devices shall be in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure as noted
on the drawings.
C. Combination devices shall be SQ. D. Class 8538 or equal by Allen Bradley,
Cutler-Hammer, GE or Siemens.
2.25 TELEPHONE SYSTEM .,
A. Furnish and install Telephone raceways, outlet boxes, telephone jack and
category 5 cables, connections at terminals and all final connections at jacks.
B. All raceways shall be concealed and of a size as shown on plans.
C. The entire installation shall be coordinated with the engineer and the
owner.
D. Data jack shall be dual wired to telephone and to CATV system.
2.26 CATV SYSTEM .w
A. Furnish and install CATV raceways, outlet boxes and furnished RG6U
cables.
B. All final connections at jacks and splitters and head end equipment shall be
by Comcast.
C. All raceways/cables shall be concealed and of a size as shown on the plans.
D. The entire installation shall be coordinated with the owner and Comcast.
E. Verify the exact location of outlet in all units with the Architect prior to
installation.
2.27 DOORBELL SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans Two-Entry Chime Kit
consisting of the following components:
1. Two (2)Nutone#PB-9LWH lighted pushbuttons.
2. One(1)Nutone#CD-125WH chime(2 notes).
3. One(1) 101 T 16V., l OW. transformer. �.►
B. All wiring shall be low voltage 20 gauge bell wire. Wire chimes so that 2
notes indicate front door and one note indicates rear door.
ELECTRICAL 16000-24 .�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.23 STARTERS
A. Manual Starters:
1. Manual starters shall be fractional horsepower type with thermal
overload relay, red pilot light to indicate power "ON" and hand-off-
auto switch where indicated on plans.
2. Starter shall be Square D Class 2510 or equal by GE, Cutler-
Hammer or ITE.
B. Magnetic Starters:
1. Magnetic starters shall be FVNR type with interchangeable thermal
overload relays.
2. Size starters with capacity to handle load.
3. Provide proper size ambient compensated thermal overloads in each
phase leg.
4. Coil voltage shall be 120 volt maximum.
5. Provide hand-off-automatic switch integral with each starter as
noted on plans.
6. Provide control transformer sized as required in starter to properly
operate control devices.
7. Provide NEMA 1, NEMA 3R, or NEMA 4 enclosure as noted on
drawings.
8. Starters shall be Square D Class 8536 or equal by GE, Cutler-
Hammer or ITE.
2.24 COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH
A. Provide combination full voltage non-reversing magnetic starters and fusible
disconnect switch where indicated on the drawings. Wall mount or provide
unistrut channels secured to the structure for mounting. Devices shall have
HOA switch and one set of N.O. and N. C. auxiliary contacts. Starters shall
have replaceable thermal overload units in each phase leg. Coil voltage shall
be 120V maximum. Provide control transformers sized as required to
+ . properly operate control devices.
ELECTRICAL 16000-23
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Circuit breakers shall be plug-on type and full size. Half size or tandem
breakers will not be accepted. All hinges shall be metallic. Non-metallic `
hinges will be rejected. Where GFI breakers are indicated the E. C. shall
provide a separate neutral for circuit. Provide "arc-fault circuit breakers as
indicated. All panels shall be lockable and all shall be keyed alike with 6
keys turned over to the owner.
D. Load centers and related circuit breakers shall be equal in all respects to ■*
Square D "QO" series throughout. Load centers by Siemens or General
Electric will be acceptable.
2.22 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required where pipes, ducts and conduits
leave or enter any vertical pipe/duct shaft way at all floors and through
all walls above or below any Class "A" acoustical tile ceiling, or any
space without any type of finish ceiling.
B. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts or conduit
penetrations through rated walls or partitions, and at positions
separating smoke zones from each other -- if smoke zones or plenums .
are employed in the building. Each of the principle trades -- plumbing,
sprinklers, HVAC and electrical -- are to provide their own pipe and
duct sleeves and to do their own firesafing and smoke seal work.
C. Firesafing and smoke seal of pipe and duct penetrations through non-
rated secondary walls within a rated larger area need not require
firesafing and smoke seal work until they penetrate the rated walls.
D. Firesafing and smoke seal materials are as follows:
1. "Poke-through" fire containment, USG "THERNW113ER", fire
test CEG 4-11-78; USG 6-2-76; CEG 8-7-85.
2. USG "THERMAFIBER" Rigid-type, various thicknesses.
3. USG "THERMAFIBER" SMOKE SEAL COMPOUND-- UL
No. R11327-L; UL No, R11327-R.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -22 .,�
x.
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Raceways and feeders.
3. Modular metering center
�. B. The Utility Company will provide the following:
1. Secondary connections at utility pole.
2. All necessary meters.
2.20 MODULAR METERING CENTER
A. Building main disconnect and residential metering center shall be equal
' in all respects to a Square D"EZM" modular metering system' and shall
be arranged as indicated on the contract drawings. Complete assembly
shall be listed by UL and shall be rated for short circuit fault currents as
determined by WMECO. Service entrance voltage characteristics shall
be 120/240V. 1-phase, 4 wire.
B. Raintight Metering Center shall be:
1. Square D#EZM-400 amp 1 phase main breaker,NEMA 3R.
2. Square D#EZM-3 high single phase ringless type sockets.
3. Square D#QO2125VH 125 amp 2 pole circuit breakers
2.21 APARTMENT UNIT LOAD CENTERS
A. Load Centers shall be rated as indicated in the panel board schedules as to
type and voltage class. Load centers shall be plug-on type with plated bus
assembly running full length. Load centers shall have main lugs only, have
fronts with door and be provided with a typewritten directory for circuit
identification. Load center shall have a solid neutral assembly as well as a
separate equipment ground bus assembly. The AIC rating shall be
10,000AIC for all load centers. No series rated equipment will be
acceptable. Load center fronts with door shall be delivered primed only to
the site. The painting contractor will field paint.
B. Apartment load centers shall be UL listed and meet all NEMA standards
and applicable federal specifications. Load centers shall be located as per
Architect.
„ ELECTRICAL 16000 -21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
F. Photo cell assembly shall be mounted on North wall, approximately 12'-
0" above finished grade and shall be aimed north. See drawing E-1 for
location.
a.
2.17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
am
A. Rating: Poles, voltage and HP as indicated on the
plans. No
B. Type: Single throw.
C. Specification: Federal W-S-865-C, NEMA KSI-1969.
D. Duty: Heavy duty.
E. Enclosure: NEMA 1 outdoors, NEMA 3R outdoors.
F. Fuses: Size according to motor current.
G. Approved Manufacturer: Square D or pre-approved equal
by Siemens or G.E.
2.18 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
A Furnish and install Telephone raceways and backboards, leaving entire
installation ready for installation of cables by Verizon to telephone terminal
board and telephone wiring from jacks to terminals by the electrical sub-
contractor.
B. All raceways shall be concealed and of a size as shown on plans.
C. Furnish and install nylon pull wire in each raceway to facilitate pulling of
cables in the future.
D. The entire installation shall be coordinated with the engineer and through
the owner.
2.19 ELECTRIC SERVICE ENTRANCE
A The new electric service is rated 400A, 120/240 single four-wire. The
Electrical Contractor will be responsible for providing the following.
I. Concrete encased conduits for secondary feeder installation
as required by MECO.
ELECTRICAL 16000-20 ,,,
ear
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
„ DHCD Project No. 214034
2.15 ADA COMPLIANT SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTORS
' (PROPRIETARY ITEM)
A. Furnish and install in locations shown, single station 120-volt
smoke detectors, new ceiling mounted detectors. Detectors shall
be Single station smoke alarm/detectors to provide early warning of
w smoke with photoelectric sensing with 177-candella visual and 90
decibel audible signal, all in one device.
Standard Features
177 candela rating(UL 197 1)
• Solid-state, non-latching 90 dB Horn
"" • Patented, three-position test switch
• 9 VDC battery backup w/audible low battery chirp
• Nominal 2.5% sensitivity
• 5:1 signal-to-noise ratio
• Pulsing LED sensing chamber
• Fully insect screened
'" • Solid State LED condition indicator
• Form "C" auxiliary relay contacts for remote
�. annunciation (CS models)
• Tandem connection up to 6 detectors per
system(CS models)
,� • Mounting hardware adapts to standard junction boxes
• On-site maintenance washing program
• 1 year warranty from date of purchase
B. Approved Manufacturer shall be Gentex Model#7139CS or equal.
2.16 PHOTO CELL ASSEMBLY
A. Photo Cell 120 volt, 1800 Watts-Stonco#P-400-A or equal.
B. Receptacle Twistlock in die-cast aluminum housing Stonco
#P-400-R or equal.
■
C. Adjustable switch Size 1/2 Stonco#107A or equal.
D. Box Cover Single gang, over-sized Stonco#4A or equal.
E. Approved Manufacturer: Tork, or Paragon or Intermatic.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -19
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
P. Approved manufacturers shall be as schedules by type on the drawings
and as follows. The Architect/Engineer shall review substitutions, only
during the bidding period.
2.14 SINGLE STATION SMOKE DETECTORS (PROPRIETARY ITEM) �.
A. Furnish and install in locations shown, single station 120- ..
volt smoke detectors, new ceiling mounted detectors. Detectors shall
be photoelectric smoke alarm/detector with 9VDC battery back up as
an auxiliary power source in the event of and electrical failure. *"
Features a warning signal for low or missing battery per UL 217, UL
1730, applicable UBCIUFC and IBC/IFC Standards and NFPA
101/NFPA 72 Chapter 2.
Standard Features
120VAC with 9VDC battery back-up
Low or missing battery indicator
9VDC alkaline battery included
• Patented three-position test switch .•
Includes 90db piezo solid state non-latching horn
• Nominal 3.01/6 sensitivity
5:1 signal-to-noise ratio **
Pulsing LED sensing chamber
Fully insect screen
• Solid State LED condition indicator
Quick-disconnect wiring harness
• Mounting hardware adapts to standard junction boxes
Protective high air velocity gasket
On-site maintenance washing program
I year warranty from date of purchase
• NFPA 74 Requirements/NFPA 72, CH.2 2.4.5.5. and
CH 7-3.2.1 Integral test means to check sensitivity
B. Approved Manufacturer shall be Gentex Model#9120 or equal. ..
ELECTRICAL 16000-18
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
G. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
H. Provide 101/6 spare lamps for all types specified and 2 spare lenses/diffusers
for each type of fixture in schedule.
I. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics.
Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coats of paint have
been applied to building and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. Electrical
Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of all lighting
fixture locations.
J. Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted to fixture stud in outlet boxes. Malleable
iron hickies, or extension pieces shall be provided where required. Support
shall be provided for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling.
Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box
where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. Provide end caps on all
industrial fluorescent fixtures.
K. Circuit wiring running through the fixture shall be No. 12 AWG with Type
AF insulation. There shall be no joints in the wires other than those
absolutely required. The fixture wires shall be of sufficient length for making
approved connections at the fixture outlets and at the lamp holders or
ballasts. Joints and splices within fixtures shall be either soldered and taped
with plastic electrician's tape or secured by wire nuts or indent type lug
fasteners.
L. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting
equipment, they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect
condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance,
alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and
other light controlling or modifying appurtenances.
M. Lighting fixtures and lamps shall be as described in the Lighting Fixture
Schedule located on Contract Drawing. (Refer to Section 16000 of the
Specification, paragraph 1.20,Reference to Materials by Name.)
N. Exact fixture colors shall be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's
standard color charts.
O. All recessed fixtures shall be compatible with the system specified. The
Electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing appropriate trim for
either flanged or grid ceilings.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -17
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.13 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. All luminaries and other lighting equipment shall be delivered to the job
complete, wired and including all supporting means such as plaster frames,
supports, hangers, canopies, sockets, holders, all current or voltage
modifiers, such as ballasts, starters, all light control materials; specifically
diffusers, louvers, lenses, reflectors and refractors. All lighting fixtures shall
be constructed and installed in accordance with local building codes and
directives by the National Board of Fire Underwriters and shall bear the
label of approval of the Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. All materials shall
be new and of best grade of approved manufacturing standards.
Workmanship shall be of the highest order to assure trouble-free operation .,
and durability of equipment.
B. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with Class P thermally protected ..
parallel-wired electronic ballasts. Electronic ballast shall be manufactured
by Magnetic Triad, Valmont, or EBT and be UL listed and on Utility
company rebate list. All electronics ballasts shall be guaranteed for Five(5) *'►
years.
C. Compact and double twin tube fluorescent ballasts shall be high power
factor indoors and shall be 0 degrees ballast outdoors. HID ballasts shall be
high power factor type CWA designed to operate in —20 degree F.
temperature. Lamps shall be as recommended by fixture manufacturer.
D. Fluorescent lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Octron 800 Series T8
lamps: 36" lamp F025/35K, 2225 lumens, 48" lamp F032/35K, 3000
lumens; 24" lamp F017/35K, 1400 lumens. Incandescent lamps shall be
equal to Osram/Sylvania Capsylite "A" line or Par Series. Compact
fluorescent and double twin tube fluorescent lamp shall be equal to
Osram/Sylvania's compact and twin tube fluorescent lamps with a color
temperature of 3500K. Circline lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania
Rapid Start Designer 3000K Series. 2D lamps shall be equal to GE 4 pin
lamps with 2700K color. HID lamps to be as recommended by fixture
manufacturer.
E. For each fixture with exposed fluorescent lamps, provide Detch Electric
No.GL40 lamp locks for bi-pin lamps and No.Super 1217 lamp locks for
single pin or power groove lamps.
F. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of stated type. All lamps *�
of each type shall be by the same manufacturer to insure uniformity of color.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -16
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.11 SWITCHES (all rated 20 Amp. 120/277 VAC)
A. Single pole—Bryant#4701-I
B. Three way—Bryant#4903-I
C. Four way—Bryant#4904-I
' D. Toilet room fan/light switch and timer — Marktime 42 Series or pre-
approved equal.
E. Cover plates shall be stainless steel or lexan as selected by Architect.
F. Device and wall plate colors by Architect.
G. Approved equals: Hubbell,Bryant or Leviton.
2.12 RECEPTACLES
A Simplex receptacle 20A, 125V with lexan Bryant #5361-I, wallplate - 1
Bryant#72091.
„ B. Duplex receptacle 20A, 125V with lexan Bryant #5362-I, wall plate —
Bryant#72101.
C. Duplex GFCI receptacle (with lockout action) Leviton # 8599-I (15A.)
&Leviton# 8899-I (20A.)
D. Range receptacle shall be rated 50 ampere 3pole 4 wire and shall match
equipment plug.
E. Cover plates shall be stainless steel or lexan as selected by Architect. Plates
shall be blue for all clean power receptacles for computers.
F. Exterior receptacle weatherproof cover shall comply with MEC 410-57(b)
and shall be Taymac #20310 or RacoBell or Intermatic, and shall be clear
and ADA compliant.Projection from wall shall not exceed 4".
G. Device and wall plate colors shall be ivory unless noted otherwise.
H. Approved equals: Hubbell,Bryant or Leviton.
4W
go ELECTRICAL 16000-15
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Where parallel banks of conduit are installed, support them by means of
horizontal angles below the conduit with vertical hanger rods at both ends.
2.7 MARKING FEEDERS
A. Permanent tags should be attached to all feeders at intermediate pull boxes
to provide identification for future use.
B. All feeders shall be identified with colored tape. Colors are as follows:
120/240 Volts
Black-Phase A
Red-Phase B
White-Neutral
Green-Ground
2.8 METERING
A. Service entrance voltage characteristics shall be 120/240V. 1-phase, 4 wire.
The E.C. shall be responsible for coordinating the arrangement and meter
sockets required by MECO prior to shop drawing submittal. Contact
Robert Noel: Supervisor of Metering Services @ 413-582-7493 for
acceptable manufacturers. Prior approval by MECO is required.
2.9 EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install empty conduit systems with pull wires and bushings on
all open ends for wiring by others.
2.10 SLEEVES AND INSERTS
A. The Electrical contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves and inserts
required for his work, prior to the pouring of the concrete. The Architect
shall approve any conduits passing through footings or grade beams.
B. Should the Electrical contractor neglect to install sleeves and inserts
before poured, he shall, at his own expense, cut and patch the building
construction as required for the installation of his work.
C. Sleeves shall be OZ/Gedney FSK Series seals or approved equal .�
ELECTRICAL 16000 -14
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Boxes used for pendant feeds to lighting fixtures shall be equipped with
swivel hangers.
E. All surface mounted boxes shall be "FS" type with appropriate covers and
plates.
F. Pull Boxes: In general, and where applicable, specifications for pull boxes
shall be same as for junction boxes. Pull boxes shall be installed as indicated
on the plans and wherever else as necessary to facilitate conductor
installation. Pull boxes shall be installed in runs of more than 100 feet or
runs having more than the equivalent of 3 right angle bends. Location of
pull boxes shall be agreed with the Engineer and shall be "accessible" as
defined in NEC. Boxes shall be supported independently of entering
conduits. PVC pull boxes for new underground services shall be as
indicated on the plans.
40
2.5 JUNCTION BOXES
A Where shown on plans, and where necessary to terminate tap-off or redirect
multiple conduit runs, provide appropriately designed junction boxes.
Boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel and shall have full access screw
covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.
B. Covers shall be flush or surface-mounted as required.
C. Weatherproof junction boxes shall be of the flanged type.
D. Box size shall be in accordance with N.E.C.
E. Where intermediate supports are necessary because of box dimension,
provide removable cross brackets.
F. All surface mounted boxes shall be "FS" type with appropriate covers and
plates.
16 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Under steel construction, use beam clamps for hangers. Under concrete
construction, use inserts or expansion shields. Under wood construction,
use lag screws or bolts.
B. Hold small conduit in place along walls or columns,where exposed,by one-
hole malleable pipe clips and all metal expansion shield.
ELECTRICAL 16000-13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. All feeder cables shall be type "THWN" and shall be insulated for 600 volts.
Where indicated, provide 75°feeders.
D. Branch circuit wiring in raceway shall be type THWN, and shall be insulated
for 600 volts color-coded over its entire length. Temperature rating of .R
conductors shall match the rating of circuit breaker terminals.
E. Lighting circuit conductors in fixture raceways shall be #12 AWG
minimum, Type AVA, AVB, AWM, FE or equal as approved.
F. Approved solderless fittings shall be used at all joints and terminals.
G. Wire and cable to be by General Electric, Okonite, American Insulated Wire
Corp., or approved equal. w
H. All special system wiring shall be of a type and size as indicated by
manufacturer for equipment.
I. Branch circuit wiring throughout apartment interiors may be non-metallic
sheathed cable(type NM copper with equipment ground conductor)except
where indicated otherwise on drawings or specifications. Minimum size to
be#12 AWG unless otherwise noted on drawings.
J. Feeder cables to the unit load centers in the individual units from panel
boards throughout the facility shall be SER cable. All conductors shall be
copper, rated for 600V and have a temperature rating of 75°C in wet
locations and 90°C for dry locations.
K. Non-metallic (NM) sheathed cable shall be suitable for operation at 600V.
Cable assembly, plus paper separation to be jacketed with 75°C rated PVC
compound. Conductors shall be copper with color-coded insulation.
2.4 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be pressed galvanized code gauge unless
otherwise noted or required by the N.E.C. Boxes shall be of size and type
to accommodate(1) structural conditions, (2) size and number of raceways,
conductors and/or cable, and(3)device or fixture.
B. Boxes used for supporting fixtures shall include a 3/8"fixture stud.
C. Where multiple devices are located at one point, the appropriate gang box
shall be used.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -12
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
4W DHCD Project No. 214034
go
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in
accordance with applicable rules of the National Electric Code. To be of
code gauge steel and supported as required by Code.
2.2 RACEWAYS
A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be run where exposed or where
concealed in masonry. EMT shall be electro-galvanized and meet
A.N.S.I. standards unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
++ Minimum size shall be 1/2" minimum; all home runs shall be 1/2".
Couplings and connector shall be threadless-type specifically designed for
the purpose. Exposed raceway shall be run parallel to and at right angles
to building features. Raceway shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
Pull or junction boxes shall be furnished and secured as required by
building construction. Approved manufacturer, Allied Tube, Integral
Corp.,Wheatland Tube or equal.
B. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be used underground for power,
telephone, CATV, fire alarm, CCTV and data services. Conduit shall be
Schedule 40 heavy wall PVC. All joints shall be solvent cemented in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Bends shall
be formed using bending plugs, bending guide and field-bending heater.
C. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in areas subject to corrosion and as
required by Code and as indicated. Rigid steel conduit and conduit fittings
shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with factory-galvanized threads.
Approved manufacturer: Allied Tube, Integral Corp.,Wheatland or equal.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. All wire shall be copper, soft, drawn and annealed, shall be of 98%
" conductivity, shall be smooth and true and of cylindrical form and shall be
within 1%of the actual size called for. All conductors shall be stranded.
B. For power and lighting systems, no wire smaller than 912 AWG shall be
used.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -11
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.20 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME
A. Specific reference in the specification, or on contract drawings, to any
article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction, etc.,
by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a
standard of quality, and shall not be construed as limiting the competition,
and the Contractor in such cases, may at his option use any article, device,
product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which, in the
judgment of the Architect/Engineer, is equal to that named, and further
provided approval of any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned
is obtained prior to the close of the interpretation period. The interpretation
period is the time allowed for the filed sub-bid.
B. Alternate equals to be considered shall be brought to the attention of this
Engineer no later than seven (7) days prior to the end of this interpretation
period. This will allow sufficient time for an addendum to be issued listing aw
all additional approved equals. No exceptions to this(7) day period will be
considered. If no equals are submitted, items as specified shall be provided.
1.21 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SIESMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, accessories and
components shall be in accordance with the seismic requirements
identified in the Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth Edition(6th
Edition).
ELECTRICAL 16000-10
+�s
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
recommendations, will be returned to the appropriate subcontractors who
shall then each, at their own expense, prepare a complete set of record "as-
built" tracings by obtaining, through arrangement with the Contractor, An
AutoCAD prepared drawing(s) on CD's a set of mylar transparency prints
of the original tracings, and revising same to incorporate the same
information. Quality of drafting shall be equal to that on originals.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. Equipment furnished and installed under this specification shall be
guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance
thereof against defective materials, design and workmanship.
1.17 EQUIPMENT CLEARANCES
A. Deliver equipment knocked down if necessary.
B. Install equipment with adequate clearances for maintenance and operation
+ + both of the equipment and of adjacent equipment.
1.18 PRELIMINARY OPERATION
A. Operate electrical systems with required supervision for at least two full
days prior to substantial completion. Make necessary adjustment, and
check proper operation.
1.19 TESTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Tests shall be attended by representative of Electrical Subcontractor,
equipped with instruments required to demonstrate proper functioning of
systems, as specified. Demonstrate the following:
B. Equipment installed and operating in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications and instructions and with these specifications.
C. Safety controls operating as specified.
D. Motors equipped with proper overload protection and not operating under
overload. Obtain ammeter readings.
E. Submit report in triplicate listing system tested, date, results and description
of fault corrections,if any.
wr
ELECTRICAL 16000-9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Electrical Subcontractor himself were present. The foreman or
superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express ,.
approval of the Architect/Engineer after construction work begins.
1.13 TEMPORARY LIGHT&POWER
A See Section 01500 construction facilities and temporary controls for
description of temporary light and power.
1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the time of final acceptance, the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish
four (4) sets of operating instructions for all equipment for delivery to the
Owner.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the ow
operation of all electrical systems.
C. The Contractor shall provide a schedule and instructions for preventative
maintenance of all items requiring it.
1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor will furnish to the Subcontractor a complete and separate
set of blue line prints of pertinent portions of the Contract Drawings for ow
record. On this set of record drawings on which he shall accurately show
the actual installation of all his work and indicating thereon any variations
from the basic Contract Drawings. All changes, including those issued by *�^
addendum, formal changes, other instructions by the Architect and the
Engineer and those due to all other causes shall be recorded. Include,but do
not limit to, changes in sizes, grades, locations, and dimensions showing
locations of all Switchboards, Panel boards, Primary and Secondary
Services, Transformers, Feeders, Pull Boxes, Manholes, Handholds, all
other electrical equipment and devices as shown in plans and other pertinent
data.
B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining ..
the progress of the work installed. They shall be inspected monthly by the
appropriate electrical engineering consultant of the Architect and shall be
corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete.
C. Before completion of the project, the record drawing prints shall be ,w
submitted to the appropriate engineering consultant, through the Architect,
for final inspection and comments. The prints, along with comments and
ELECTRICAL 16000-8
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall refer to the drawings for a full
comprehension of the work to be done and for conditions affecting the
locations and placements of his equipment and materials. These
specifications are intended to compliment the drawings, and any work
indicated, mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by
both. Should the character of the work herein be insufficiently explained in
the specifications or drawings,the Electrical Subcontractor may apply to the
Architect/Engineer for further information and shall confirm to such when
given, as it may be consistent with the original intent. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in
location prior to installation at no expense to the Owner. All items are
diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
1.11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify electrical equipment and systems unless their function and identity
are obvious.
B. Legend plates shall be provided on a panel boards, starters and switches,
and disconnect switches. Black/white core. Letters shall be '/a" high and
legend shall consist of panel designations as shown on drawings and the
voltage. All disconnect switches shall be identified with engraved legend
plates; letters and color shall be the same as described for panel boards.
These legend plates shall be engraved with equipment-serviced information:
Voltage, panel board and circuit number. All legend plates shall be
fastened with screws;adhesive will not be permitted.
C. Provide on inside cover of all new and existing panel boards affected by this
Contract, neatly typed indexes giving the circuit number. Opposite each
number, give the area or equipment, which that circuit controls. Number
circuits in agreement with circuit numbering shown on drawings so that
future reference to circuit control can be obtained easily.
D. Panel boards shall have their directories identify their feeder origin.
1.12 OPERATING PROCEDURE
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall at all times have a foreman on the project
authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
w ELECTRICAL 16000-7
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. In some cases, drawings are based on products of one manufacturer, as
listed on the drawings and specifications. Contractors shall be responsible
for modifications made necessary by substitution of products of other
manufacturers.
F. Coordinate work with work specified in other sections. Relocate work if
required for proper installation and functioning of other systems.
G. Install products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Notify
Architect if contract documents conflict with manufacturers' instructions.
Comply with Architect's interpretations.
H. Provide brackets, supports, anchors and frames required for installation of
work specified in this division.
I. Do not install part of a system until all critical components of the system and
related system have been approved. Coordinate parts of system.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A Tools, Scaffolding, under 8 ft., Etc: All necessary tools, machinery, '*
scaffolding and transportation for completion of this contract shall be
provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
B. Waste Material: the Electrical Subcontractor shall remove all rubbish
created by the Electrical Subcontractor.
1.8 PROTECTION
A
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss to others. Any injury or loss, which may occur,
shall be made without expense to the Owner. The Electrical Subcontractor
shall be responsible for the proper protection of his materials until the
Owner accepts the building.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Materials and workmanship shall be the best of their respective kinds and
in full accordance with the most modern construction methods. Electrical
materials and equipment of type for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories Standards, shall conform to their requirements and be so
labeled.
ELECTRICAL 16000-6
so
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
„W DHCD Project No. 214034
ow Submittals will be required for:
1. Load centers.
2. 120 volt tandem wired fire alarm system.
3. Modular metering center.
4. wiring devices.
5. Intercom doorbell system.
6. Lighting fixtures,ballasts, lamps, and switches.
7. Carbon Monoxide Detectors.
G. When shop drawings are submitted listing manufacturers to be considered
subject to availability, they will only be considered when all mentioned are
submitted for approval. Those actually used shall appear in the O & M
manuals.
H. All work performed and materials furnished shall be in strict compliance
with all applicable rules, regulations, laws, ordinances and tests
of municipal, state or other public agencies having jurisdiction over such
�. matters.
1.6 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and
installation of this work.
B. Install work as closely as possible to layouts shown on drawings. Modify
work as necessary to meet job conditions and to clear other equipment.
Consult Architect before making changes, which affect its function or
appearance of systems.
C. Dimensions, elevations and locations are shown approximately. Verify
measures in field.
D. Architect reserves the right to order changes in layout of such items as
switches, fixtures and outlets if such changes do not substantially affect
costs and if affected items have not been fabricated or installed.
ELECTRICAL 16000-5
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 Im
D. The entire installation, removal of existing components and downtime
associated with such changes shall be strictly coordinated with MECO, 'w
Verizon,Comcast, the City of Northampton and the owner.
.w
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Ow
A. Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and supportive literature
for all work in accordance with the General Conditions. Approval by the
Architect/Engineer must be obtained prior to delivery of materials to the am
site.
B. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken .W
with respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturer's detail
drawings to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all to the
Architect, until he returns such to the submitter carrying either the notation *
"Approved" or"Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the Architect or his
Engineer. An "Approved as Corrected" notation means that changes as
indicated must be incorporated or the qualifying acceptance will be
considered void.
C. If a re-submittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the
Contractor of equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer
reserves the right to directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for
review of these shop drawings prior to their release at a rate of$90.00 per 4W
hour with a two(2)hour minimum.
D. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during the review do ..
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply with the
requirements of the drawings and specifications. This review is only to
check for general conformance with the design concept of the project and
general compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains
responsible for: Confirming and correlating all dimensions and quantities;
selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating
the work of the trades; and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory
manner. ,■„
E. Shop drawings listing various manufacturers to be considered subject to
availability are not acceptable and will be rejected.
F. Within thirty(30) days of award of contract this Subcontractor shall submit
for the Architect/Engineer's approval, six (6) copies of the manufacturer's
shop drawings, detail prints, and data sheets for the following items:
ELECTRICAL 16000.4
no
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
O. Install CATV cables furnished by Comcast. Comcast shall make final
connections at their terminals and shall furnish and install CATV jacks.
P. Furnish and install Carbon Monoxide Alarms.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A- The following items of work, associated with the electrical work, will be
performed in accordance with other sections of these specifications.
1. Excavation, Back filling, concrete encasing, Drilling, Cutting and
Patching.
2. Removal of existing any utility company owned cables or devices,
except as otherwise indicated.
B. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on drawings
numbered:
ES-1,E-1 &E-2.
1.4 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS
A. Comply with all codes and ordinances applying to this work. Bidders shall
inform themselves of Code requirements. In case of conflict between the
contract documents and a governing code or ordinance, the higher standard
�. shall govern.
B. All permits and fees required shall be obtained and paid for by the Electrical
Subcontractor. The owner shall pay for all charges of MECO, Verizon and
Comcast for their related service charges for services to the building.
C. Particular attention is directed to:
1. Latest Massachusetts Electric Code.
2 Local Electric Wiring Ordinance.
3. Requirements of the City of Northampton and the Owner.
4. Requirements of Verizon and Comcast.
5. Requirements of the Fire Department.
ELECTRICAL 16000 -3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
five percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by any other
form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: None
1.2 SUNUViARY
4W
Work included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to
complete the work of this section, including, but not limited to the
following:
A. Furnish and install new 240/120V Secondary conduits and conductors
modular Metering Center and Panel boards.
B. Furnish and install new tandem wired fire alarm system. .�
C. Furnish and install new doorbell system.
D. Furnish and install new secondary service raceways.
E. Furnish and install new raceways and feeders.
F. Furnish and install new lighting fixtures.
G. Furnish and install new telephone jacks and wiring.
H. Furnish and install new telephone and conduits.
I. Furnish and install new branch circuit wiring and devices.
J. Furnish and install new junction boxes and pull boxes.
K. Furnish and install new wiring devices.
L. Furnish and install temporary light and power.
M. Record documents and submittals, provide as-built drawings to architect.
N. Provide power & connections to mechanical equipment requiring such to
include water heater, cooking equipment and other equipment requiring
such. .,
ELECTRICAL 16000 -2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 16000-ELECTRICAL
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
4W PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of
Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Contract as amended and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
MW
B. Time, Manner and Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids:
1. Sub-Bids for the work under this Section shall be for the
complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the
Northampton Housing Authority, at a time and place stipulated
in the"Notice to Contractors."
2. The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the
envelope:
40
NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION ELECTRICAL
3. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on
furnished forms, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of
the General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained
a�
at the office of the Architect.
4. Sub-bids filed shall be accompanied by a BID BOND or CASH
or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S CHECK or
"® CASHIERS CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust
company payable to the City of Northampton in the amount of
ELECTRICAL 16000-1
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 +w
c. Design and actual GPM. ow
d. Design and actual pressure differential.
.m
g. Water balance procedure shall include:
1. Setting all balance valves to design requirements. go
2. Mark all balance valves in their final positions.
3. Balance all pumps to design requirements.
END OF SECTION 15600
..
OR
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-52 aw
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
* DHCD Project No. 214034
d. Exhaust CFM.
e. Duct size, number velocity readings and average velocity.
f System Design and Delivered Conditions:
g. Design CFM and FPM.
h. Final CFM and FPM.
i. Manufacturer and type.
40
J. Instrument and method used.
9. Perform water balancing as follows:
a. Balancing Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to balancing
w. devices and pumps to obtain flows indicated or called for in the Contract
Documents in accordance with ASHRAE and standards of good practice.
b. Prior to start of balancing, Balancing Engineer shall perform the following:
c. Check rotation of all pumps.
d. Check position of all shut-off valves.
e. Check position of all balance valves.
,f, f Compile the following data for each pump and system:
1. Pump Descriptive Data:
on
2. System identification.
+0 a. Pump manufacturer.
b. Pump size and model number.
c. Pump horsepower.
3. Pump Performance Data:
a. Brake horsepower.
vw
b. Voltage and phase, nameplate and actual amperage for each phase.
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-51
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,..
4. Furnish the Balancing Contractor with a complete set of mechanical plans,
specifications, equipment shop drawings and other necessary information.
5. Notify Engineer prior to start of work, and arrange for meeting with all concerned
parties to review the desired system operation and method of balancing.
6. Upon completion of work, Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of
balancing report for review and approval, and shall certify all systems are properly
balanced within five percent(5%) of design conditions.
7. Balancing Contractor shall be available at the project during final inspection to
verify balancing data if required by Engineer.
.w
8. Perform Air Balancing as follows:
a. Prior to submitting fan and system performance data for approval, Balancing *m
Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to obtain air flow as called
for in Contract Documents, in accordance with ASHRAE, AABC, NEBB and
standards of good practice. or
b. Prior to start of balancing, Balancing Engineer shall perform the following:
MW
1. Check rotation of fans.
2. Adjust fan speed to design conditions. aw
c. Compile the following data for each fan and system:
1. Fan Descriptive Data: .�
a. System identification.
b. Location or area served.
c. Fan manufacturer.
d. Fan size and model number.
2. Fan Design and Delivered Conditions:
a. Fan and motor RPM.
b. Voltage and phase. nameplate and actual amperage for each phase.
c. Total suction static pressure.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-50
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.1I SYSTEM BALANCING
A. After completion of systems installation and prior to acceptance, systems shall be
balanced to design conditions shown on drawings or specified by an independent agency
operating and specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems. Systems to
be balanced shall including the following:
B. All fan systems.
' C. All hydronic piping systems.
1. Balancing Contractor shall be a certified AABC or NEBB independent agency
specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems.
1 Engineer shall approve agency.
D. Mechanical Contractor shall not perform system balance unless he can substantiate his
ability, performance, certification by AABC or NEBB, and instrumentation, and obtain
written approval by Engineer prior to bid.
40 E. Work shall include balancing and adjusting of all mechanical apparatus, exhaust air
systems and appurtenances, and all water circulating systems and appurtenances.
F. Provide all instruments, gauges, sensing and flow devices, and accessories required to
perform the tests and shall make their own provisions for insertion of testing instruments.
G. All holes made in ductwork shall be drilled, no punching allowed. Contractor shall plug
all holes in an approved manner.
+�► H. All instruments used in procedure shall be certified to have been calibrated within six
month period prior to work. Types, series numbers, and dates of calibration shall be
included in report.
1. Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Furnish and install water balancing devices where required to obtain desired water
flow for each system and branch.
2. Arrange to have Sheet Metal Contractor available to assist Balancing Contractor
and to furnish and install manual air volume dampers, splitters, turning vanes, and
other devices for exhaust ducts necessary to obtain specified air quantities.
3. Arrange to have Temperature Control Contractor available to assist Balancing
Contractor and make necessary adjustments to control systems.
vww
" HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-49
am
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 so
6. Factory Authorized Service representative shall provide the initial Burner lightoff 4W
and One (1) Year of Warranty Burner service. This requirement shall not be
waived, nor shall the responsibility for the Service Contract be assumed by any
other party unless previously approved by the Consulting Engineer in writing. 4W
7. Authorized manufacturers service representative shall furnish One (1) Year of
Warranty Burner Service on the Burner(s) and Control(s) which shall commence "®
from the Date of Original Lightoff and shall continue Warranty Burner Service
coverage up to and including the First Anniversary of Burner Lightoff.
8. Warranty burner service shall include labor and materials to replace any parts or
controls which might fail in service as the result of a defect in materials or
manufacture. Normal wear and tear on parts as the result of daily operation will not
be included as "no charge" items (nozzles, igniters, etc.) and other such devices,
which may require replacement as the result of operation during the Warranty
Service Contract shall not be included. Preventative maintenance, in the form of
yearly tune-up and bi-yearly cleanings and adjustments shall be the responsibility of
the Installing Contractor throughout the duration of the Warranty Contract while the
equipment is under his control. Preventative maintenance, cleaning and routine
adjustments shall not be performed by the warranty service Contractor but by the
Owners obligated Service Company.
3.10 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All ductwork shall conform to SMACNA manuals and NFPA bulletins and shall be
made leaktight.
B. Provide a complete duct system as indicated on the plans for connecting exhaust air fans
making all necessary changes in cross section, offsets, etc. whether specifically indicated
to meet building conditions, and installing a damper at every branch take-off from main
truck. Provide air turns where center line of elbow is less than 150% of width shown on
plans.
C. Ductwork shall be arranged to clear other trades. No pipe shall pass through ducts. If
the duct cannot be run as shown on the drawings, the Contractor must install the duct
between the required points by any route available, subject to the approval of the
Engineer. .�
D. Types of joints and details of reinforcing shall be submitted for approval.
4W
E. Duct-mate or equal type comnection systems are approved with gaskets and sealants.
F. Install all duct transformations required to connect roof caps, etc. s'
so
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-48 so
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
0. Commissioning:
1. An authorized representative of the Boiler or Burner manufacturer shall perform the
'W initial start-up, final adjusting and testing of the Burners and Controls in the
presence of the Gas Inspector and the gas Company representative and the Owners
Operating Personnel.
ear
2. The process of Start-Up and Commissioning shall include Purging of the Boiler;
Burner Operation Tests, including CO sampling, Stack Temperature: CO,
go sampling, Tests for Venting, Ignition Tests; Pilot Turndown Tests; Manifold
Pressure Tests— Instruction to the Owner and all other such procedures as may be
directed by the Consulting Engineer.
�r
3. The final results of a Combustion Efficiency Test with all pertinent Combustion
Data shall be logged onto a check sheet which shall be submitted to the Consulting
Engineer to prove compliance with this section of the Specifications and for Record
purposes. Lightoff Burner Technician shall certify, in writing, that the Bumer(s)
have been properly tuned and set-up with no flame impingement on the cast iron
40 surfaces.
a. Combustion efficiency testing shall include no less than the following:
an
1. Clock and adjust Burner input at the Meter to establish correct rate of fire
and set each Burner to rated input at High Fire. Set Main Gas regulator
we and provide all adjustments to both Primary and Secondary Air as
necessary to ensure proper flame shape at 100% input with no direct
impingement upon heating surfaces and with good quality combustion
me with not more than 0.04%CO in the flue gas analysis.
2. CO, in the flue gas with recorded Gross and Net Stack Temperatures to
on establish stack loss value. Each Burner shall be set to operate at the
overall best performance and combustion efficiency for which the
equipment is designed and capable of
b. Adjustment and checkout of all aquastat controls, limits, switches, operating
controls, low water cutoff devices, gas valves, pressure regulators, combustion
controls, high and low gas pressure switches and all Lockout conditions.
4. He shall supervise purging of the Boiler(s) and shall conduct Pilot turndown tests.
All required tests for proper venting which shall include setting and adjusting the
Boiler outlet damper to the Boiler manufacturers specifications.
5. Provide instruction to the Owners Operating Personnel in the procedures to resolve
a "Lockout" condition. Operating personnel shall also be instructed in the
Operation and routine daily maintenance of the Burner and controls during the
40 lightoff process. The Owner shall arrange to have the personnel who require
training to be present at the Lightoff.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-47
as
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 so
G. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall be repeated as often as necessary and as .w
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that all mill scale, core sand, rust, dirt and
debris, cutting oils and thread sealers or any other contaminants have sufficiently been
eliminated from the Boiler(s) and to produce a condition of the Boiler water that is clean ..
and considered acceptable to the Consulting Engineer.
H. All field tests after the Boiler(s) have been installed and connected to the system shall be
limited to not more than 80 PSI. Installing Contractor shall furnish all equipment,
piping, labor, staging, fittings, valves, hoses and other materials and shall pay all
required permits for Inspection as may be required to perform such tests as may be .•
directed by these Contract Documents and as required by the Consulting Engineer and
the State Boiler Inspector.
I. An initial hydrostatic pressure test of 80 PSI shall be conducted on each Boiler for a
period of not less than 5 hours. Tests shall be of such duration as necessary and as
directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that the Boilers have been installed and .�
piped correctly with no leaks or other improper operating conditions.
J. Installing Contractor shall contact and notify the State Boiler Inspector when the
installation of the Boiler(s), Burner(s) and controls is substantially complete. Installing
Contractor shall request an inspection of the Boilers to be conducted by the State Boiler
Inspector and to have a Certificate of Inspection issued upon satisfactory inspection. ..
K. After receipt of certificate of Inspection, Installing Contractor shall furnish a suitable
glass front frame in which to place said certificate. Frame, with Inspection certificate +
inserted therein, shall then be placed on or posted in a suitable location within the Boiler
room in which the new Boilers have been installed.
L. Installing Contractor shall maintain all apparatus in satisfactory operating condition.
Perform periodic Burner tune-up and cleaning of the Boiler fireside surfaces when dirty,
provide preventative maintenance, perform turndown tests, conduct tests for Flame **
Safeguard, Combustion Efficiency, Draft tests, Limit Control tests and Safety Valve
tests, check the ignition system and adjust, repair or replace any as necessary while the
heating system is under his ownership and control a and until such time as the Owner ,
accepts the equipment, issues the Final certificate of Payment and assumes the full
obligation of Ownership.
M. Installing Contractor shall note that any Warranty Service (Hereinafter specified) as may
be absorbed by the authorized Service representative shall in no way absolve the
Installing Contractor from any and all responsibility for the Care, Service and ..
Preventative Maintenance for Materials furnished to this Contract, while the Heating
System is under his Control, and until final acceptance by the Owner.
N. Installing Contractor shall guarantee the entire installation for a period of One (1) Year
from the date of Owner Acceptance and beneficial usage by the Owner and Date of Final
Payment.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-46 **�
go
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
H. All firesafing and smoke seal shall be performed as work progresses so as to protect each
area, room or floor in the building.
3.9 BOILER/BURNER SYSTEM
A. Install each Boiler in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. Boiler manufacturer shall provide the services of a Representative to
supervise the installing contractor with the assembly and erection of each Boiler. Upon
completion of the Boiler assemblies, the Boiler manufacturers representative shall certify
40 the proper assembly and connection of each Boiler prior to startup.
B. Boiler drain valves shall be connected to the lowest water space available and shall be
e installed with pipe and fittings to connect the bottom blowoff full size to drain. Each
blowoff valve shall be Brass, ball type, not less than 1-1/4" inch minimum and rated
equal to the pressure stamped on the Boiler and to a temperature rating of not less than
250°F. and all blowdown discharges shall be arranged so as to allow the Operator to
view the water that is discharged to drain. Ends of blowdown piping shall be cut at a 45°
Degree angle to prevent a cap or plug from being installed.
C. All Boiler discharges shall be piped to floor drains or as indicated by the Consulting
Engineer. Furnish and install all necessary pipe and fittings to connect the pressure relief
valve discharge full size (Minimum Acceptable) to floor drain. Discharge shall be
arranged so that there will be no danger of scalding Boiler room personnel in the event of
a pressure relief situation. Size and arrangement of discharge piping shall be such that
any pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the relieving capacity of the relief
valve below that required to protect the Boiler. All such discharge piping shall be
supported by hangar or standoff to prevent the valve body from undue stress or strain.
D. Installing Contractor shall utilize capped tees at all turns in the return piping to the back
section of each Boiler for cleaning of the return piping at or near each Boiler. Feedwater,
makeup water and/or water treatment shall be introduced into the Boiler water through
the return piping only. Provisions shall be made for the expansion and contraction of all
hot water mains connected to each Boiler by providing substantial anchorage at suitable
" + points and by providing swing joints so there will be no stress or strain transmitted to any
Boiler. Stop valves shall be provided in the supply and return pipe connections to each
Boiler permitting draining either Boiler without emptying the entire system.
E. After final assembly and connection, each Boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned internally
following the manner described within the Boiler manufacturers installation instructions.
or by ASME Section VI. either method acceptable by the Engineer.
F. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall include the use of a boil-out compound of
Caustic Soda or Tri-Sodium Phosphate at the rate of one (1) pound of either chemical
per 50 Gallons of total water in the system being cleaned. This cleaning shall include
Boiler Cleanout, Surface Blowoff. Blowdown and a wash as directed and detailed in
referenced instructions.
'" HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-45
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
F. Maintain vapor barrier integrity throughout.
G. Wipe dirt from all insulation surfaces prior to applying tapes and adhesives. Any
improperly applied insulation jackets,tapes,or covers shall be removed and replaced.
H. Insulation on ducting shall be adhered with noncombustible insulation bonding adhesive
applied as recommended by manufacturer.
4P
I. Seal all duct joints and seams with pressure-sensitive tape or glue after stapling.
J. All sealants and adhesives shall be NFPA and NBFU labeled and approved for use.
K. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's ..�
recommendations.
L. Install metal jackets with a 2" overlap at longitudinal and transverse joints. The laps ,
shall be in orientated in a direction that will shed water. Seal butt joints with a
weatherproof sealant recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Secure the jacket
with stainless steel draw bands 12"on center and at but joints.
3.8 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL
A. Clean surfaces to receive firestopping materials. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose
materials,rust or other substances that may affect installation of the fire resistance.
B. Refer to Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory; "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)" and "Fill Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW)"
for Manufacturers UL System plates. Also refer to 3M Fire Protection Products .�
"Applications and Specifier's Guide".
C. Install firestopping materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's ,
instructions.
D. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective fire stop. .�
E. Examine firestopping areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing
firestopped areas.
F. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection (and approval) by applicable
code authorities.
G. All sealants and compounds shall be neatly applied to each end of opening of ceiling,
floor or wall penetrations and in accordance with code requirements. All penetrations
shall be minimum size possible.
Im
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-44
am
an
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Install each with separable well so that thermometer may be removed without draining
system.
C. Where required, install a separable well for all temperature sensors for EMS system.
Wells shall be compatible with sensors to be used.
3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Install pumps with valve on suction and triple-duty valves on discharge; connect piping
„ with flexible connectors.
B. Align pumps per manufacturer's directions.
C. Install air separator,connect piping.
aura D. Install expansion tank.
E. Install PRV with 3-valve by-pass.
3.6 FANS
A. Set all units in place on vibration isolators securing isolators to structure and units to
isolators. Suspended units shall be supported with threaded hanger rods and vibration
isolators from structure.
w�
B. Entire installations shall be vibration free.
C. All ducting connections to fans shall be made with flexible connections unless units
have internal fan isolation.
3.7 INSULATION
A. Insulate piping with material specified. Unions shall not be insulated.
w
B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated to equal thickness with flexible matching
insulation and covers applied.
C. Provide wood blocking or calcium silicate insulation sections at all hanger protection
saddles so as not to crush insulation.
aaw
D. Insulate ducting with material specified.
E. All insulation shall be installed to provide a neat and finished appearance with no
unfinished edges,tears,raw ends or peeling tape.
aeu
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-43
40
MW
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.W
R. Provide strainers at inlet of all control valves,traps and as shown.
3.2 SUPPORTS,BRACKETS AND HANGERS
A. Fabricate all supports and brackets required for installation of equipment, piping and .�
ductwork.
B. Provide all rods, steel angles,channels,beams and flat stock as required.
C. Adequately secure all supports, brackets and hangers to structure with proper devices to
suit construction. .�
D. Support pipes independently of each other and in accordance with details.
E. Support piping with structurally adequate hangers and supports.
F. Support piping to equipment and control valves to permit removal of equipment without
additional support of pipes.
G. Support piping at intervals indicated on straight runs and at changes of direction.
Support copper tubing to 1 inch size,6 feet or less on centers.
am
H. Do not use wire or wood fasteners for pipe supports.
1. Supports shall be attached to top chord of joists.
J. Support pipe from concrete structure by concrete inserts, or expansion shields. Support
horizontal piping with malleable iron universal-type supports.
K. Riser clamps shall be wrought steel,to fit tightly around pipes,with extension lugs.
L. Install insulation protection saddles on hangers.
3.3 GAUGES
A. Install on all pump suction and discharge piping.
B. Each gauge shall be furnished with a gauge cock.
3.4 THERMOMETERS •»
A. All thermometers installed 6'-0" or more above floor shall be installed at an oblique
angle,to be readable from floor. *"
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-42
MW
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING
A. Minimum pipe size shall be 3/4' unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Piping as indicated on drawings is diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the
approval of the Architect/Engineer.
w
C. Pipe shall be run straight and true at the proper pitch and shall be firmly supported
without undue stress.
D. All elbows shall be long-radius type.
E. All piping shall be new unless otherwise noted. No piping or devices shall be reused.
F. Install flanges where required with gaskets.
G. Ream ends of all pipes. Pipe compounds on male ends only.
40
H. All connections to pieces of equipment and all changes in direction of mains shall be
made with screwed,welded or flanged fittings. Allow for expansion or contraction.
L No mitered fittings will be approved.
J. Install all valves furnished by Temperature Control Subcontractor.
K. Provisions for expansion in mains shall be made by the installation of expansion joints
and/or expansion compensators, offsets, or pipe loops with anchors and guides,
wherever indicated on the plans,or as may be required.
L. Install anchors and pipe guides as detailed and as per manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Install isolating valves on each item of equipment and on all branch mains and risers.
a�as
N. Install balancing valve on each item of hydronic equipment.
+ . O. Eccentric fittings shall be used at all changes in pipe size.
P. Weld-O-Let fittings may be used where branches connect to mains.
Q. All piping entering or leaving building shall be made watertight.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-41
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3. Panels:
a. Control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 cabinets with all metal
construction. Cabinets shall have hinged door with locking latch on cover
plate. All cabinet locks shall be common keyed. Cabinets shall be wall
mounted or freestanding as required.
b. All indicating devices manually adjusted during routine operations of system .�
shall be located on cabinet door. All control devices shall be located within the
cabinet mounted to sub-panel.
4W
as
am
no
am
am
so
go
w+
am
�r
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-40 00
40
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
+® 2. Operator Testing: The ATC Contractor shall provide all training materials required
to instruct four operator personnel on:
a. System overview.
3. Maintenance Testing: The ATC Contractor shall provide all instructional materials
required to instruct 4 maintenance personnel on:
a. General operation of the equipment.
*�* b. Diagnostics.
c. Troubleshooting and repair instructions.
L. Instrumentation and Control:
rwe I. Input Devices:
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as
indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating
of within I percent of the temperature range of their intended use. Sensors
must be capable of being calibrated.
** b. OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-5(F. to 152(F. and an
accuracy of within 1(F. in this temperature range.
w 2. Pressure Instruments:
a. Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors: Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA
go output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall
withstand up to 150 percent of rated pressure, without damaging the device.
Accuracy shall be within 2 percent of full scale. Sensors shall be
go manufactured by Leeds & Northrup, Setra, Robertshaw, Dwyer Instruments.
Rosemont, or be approved equal.
b. Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of 2
40 percent of range and withstand up to 150 percent of rated pressure. Sensors
shall be diaphragm or bourbon tube design. Switch operation shall be
adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an
"" application rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy.
silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Dwyer
Instruments, or approved equal.
go
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-39
am
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 so
stem. This feature shall allow disassembly of the valve top, inspection and 00
packing replacement without system shutdown, or valve body removal. Valve
body ratings shall be NSI Class 125 for screwed or union fittings and ANSI
Class 250 for flared fittings. **
b. All water valves shall be sized for 5 psig (11.5 ft. hd.) maximum pressure
drop. A,
c. All valves shall be capable of modulating throughout their entire range without
creating any objectionable noise. Valves creating objectionable noise (in the
engineers opinion) shall be replaced with valves that do not create ""
objectionable noise.
J. Acceptance Test and Acceptance:
1. Upon completion of the installation, the ATC Contractor shall start up the system
and perform all necessary calibration, testing, and debugging operations. An
acceptance test shall be performed by the ATC Contractor in the presence of the
Owner's representative.
2. The following two-part tests shall be performed by the ATC Contractor and
scheduled after completion of the equipment and installation:
a. The first part includes an operational test of all field equipment. Perform
detailed cross check of each sensor by making a comparison between reading at
the sensor and a standard test instrument. Note all results and deviations for ■*
review. All materials and equipment shall have passed the calibration and
operational tests before commencing the performance test.
b. The second part includes performance testing. These tests shall validate the
functionality of all control sequences. During the test period, all possible
control sequences shall be exercised either by normal control operation or
forced operation as required. Log and submit all results. ..
3. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory in whole by the Engineer, the
system parts will be accepted for beneficial use and placed under warranty. At this
time, a "notice of completion" shall be issued by the Engineer and the warranty
period shall start.
K. Owner's Instructions:
I. The ATC Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors to provide
full instructions to designated personnel in the operation and of the systems. The
training shall be specifically oriented to the system and interfacing equipment
installed.
No
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-38 ow
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
been physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are in
fact under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation.
3. Control system shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all
conditions of the sequence of operations have been attached and all temperatures are
maintained within specified limits at all operating conditions.
4. Provide coordination with equipment manufacturer, HVAC Subcontractor, and
Electrical Subcontractor for proper sequence of operation and for interlock required
�e with smoke and fire alarm systems, etc. (See SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
WORK).
*�* H. Local Control Panels:
1. All temperature controls and related electronic devices, etc. shall be mounted in an
enclosed control panel, with a hinged door. All temperature settings, adjustments,
and calibrations shall be made at the system control panel.
2. Details of the panels shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Locations
of panels are to be convenient for adjustment and service.
3. All electrical devices with the panels shall be factory pre-wired to a numbered
terminal strip. Wiring within the panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL
Standard and shall meet all local codes.
L Material Standards
1. Thermostats
a. Thermostats for the residential units shall be equal to Honeywell T827 heating
only thermostat.
b. Thermostats for the common areas shall be equal to Honeywell T834 and be
suitable for the equipment controlled. Provide with a heavy duty thermostat
guard.
2. Temperature Sensors:
a. All pipe sensors shall have an accessible NEMA 1 electrical box for
connections and termination's.
�. Valves:
a. Where indicated, provide automatic temperature control valves complete with
actuator sized to close-off against system pressure for the service required.
Valves shall be straight through or mixing type as required. The valves shall be
bronze or forged brass body with replaceable disc and a dual sealing valve
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-37
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
6. Domestic Hot Water Control: Domestic hot water heater thermostat shall include a
lead/lag toggle switch(designed boiler"A"and boiler"B")wired to the Ultra Boilers
(2)terminals 3 &4 marked domestic hot water for this purpose. One boiler shall be
selected (and manually switched on a maintenance schedule by the Owner) as the
primary for domestic hot water. A signal shall be sent to the "lead" boiler to disable
it's circulator and enable the domestic hot water circulator to provide hot water as
required. 120 Volt power to the relay and circulator shall be by Electrical
Subcontractor.
F. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings are to be complete with all devices identified by numbers and letters
and those same identifying numbers used in the description of operation for positive .a
ease in cross-referencing. Descriptive bulletins shall be included for all devices,
these bulletins identified by the same key numbers and letters shall be used on the
control layout. Description bulletins and/or control layout shall include data on
sensitivity, pressure ranges, temperature ranges, means of adjustment, means of
calibration, ranges, and all other data necessary for the Architect-Engineer to check
use and fimction of each device for its intended application.
2. Valve schedules shall be submitted.
.m
3. At the completion of the job, final corrected "As Installed" record shop drawings
shall be furnished complete with all final settings, ranges, temperature ranges,
sample times, throttling ranges, and temperature control settings. In addition, a .�
print out of all control strategies which match the above drawings will be submitted
as part of the "As-Installed" drawings. These are to be sent to the Architect-
Engineer for review prior to submitting them to the Owner.
G. Adjustment, Calibration, and Coordination with Other Trades:
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Subcontractor shall completely adjust, ready for
use, all thermostats, valves and relays provided under this Contract and be present
for functional tests of the systems. The ATC Subcontractor shall provide a complete ,
instruction manual covering the function and operation of all control components on
the job which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual
shall be furnished to the Owner and shall show the total integrated control system.
A competent technician shall be provided for instruction purposes. Refer to PART
3. for "System Start-up/Tests and Balancing", and cooperate with other Contractors
in their phase of the work.
2. Before the Architect/Engineer is asked to supervise and/or witness the adjustments
called for in this Specification, the Control Manufacturer, though the HVAC
Subcontractor, shall state in writing that the entire system is complete, that the
controls have been calibrated, and that the controlled devices and/or equipment have
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-36
Is
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
go 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in
temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC Subcontractor
specifically for that purpose.
7. All interconnecting wiring to thermostats, sensors, controlled devices, auxiliary
devices, switches, transformers, relays, protective devices, control panels, clocks,
terminal strips,accessories and appurtenances.
8. All wiring shall comply with National, State and local Electrical Codes.
D. Power wiring: All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical
Subcontractor.Power wiring shall be defined as follows:
1. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects,starters,and electric motors.
2. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required.
3. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
R
E. Related Work:
1. Installation of Valves and Wells: Automatic temperature control valves and
separable wells for the immersion element, and couplings for flow and pressure
switches furnished by the Control Manufacturer, shall be installed by the HVAC
Subcontractor under the ATC Subcontractor's supervision.
2. Painting: All finished painting required for control piping and equipment shall be
done by the General Contractor.
3. Cutting and Patching: All cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the
control system shall be done by the General Contractor.
4. Boiler/Bumer Controls: ATC Subcontractor shall install the Boiler Control System
specified in Paragraph 2.22 of this section and shall provide all wiring and
appurtenances necessary for a complete and operating system. 120 Volt power to
the boilers shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor.
5. Radiant Floor Controls: ATC Subcontractor shall install the Radiant Floor Control
System specified in Paragraph 2.19 of this section and shall provide all wiring and
appurtenances necessary for a complete and operating system.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-35
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
4. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Subcontractor and shall
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 -
ELECTRICAL WORK. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by
prevailing codes.
5. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates, isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope:
1. The ATC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment,accessories,wiring,
instruments,and appurtenances required for a complete and functioning system. ,w
2. The system, as specified, shall independently control the building's HVAC
equipment to maintain a comfortable environment in an energy efficient manner. ow
3. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured for this and/or other systems, and not custom designed especially for ow
this project.All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
A.
4. The ATC Subcontractor shall demonstrate that this capability to execute this
Contract will evidence that he has actively engaged in the business of installing
similar systems. Submit evidence that the manufacturer has factory supervised
service facilities and competent technicians to service systems within the area
covered by the Local Office.
5. The ATC Subcontractor shall provide a list of no less than five similar projects
which have building control systems as specified. These projects must be on-line
and functional such that the Owner's representative would observe the control
system in full operation.
C. Control Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and tenninated by the .�
ATC Subcontractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components,such as,but not limited to,high and low limit protective devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from
terminal strips to field mounted devices. ow
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off-auto switches on the units being
controlled by the ATC Subcontractor. MW
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-34
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect/Engineer.
3. Valves located above ceilings shall be marked by colored dots approximately 1/4"in
diameter applied to the ceiling grid. The color code shall be:
w a. Hot Water Red
D. Mechanical Equipment Identification:
1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or
near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as
specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs
for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:
w a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Meters, gages,thermometers and similar units.
c. Fuel-burning units including boilers,and heaters.
an
d. Pumps, and similar motor-driven units.
e. Fans,and blowers.
2.32 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements:
1. Except as noted, all components of the system shall be furnished and installed by
Automated Logic, Johnson Service Company, Landis and Gyr/Powers Company,
or Honeywell.
2. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics
regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. The control system
shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion
thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and
a complete system of control wiring
3. Control system for the BoilerBumer and Radiant Floor Heat are furnished under
other paragraphs. This systems shall be installed and adjusted by the ATC
'? contractor.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AER CONDITIONING 15600-33
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Valve tag identification shall conform to valve chart listing. .�
C. All other equipment including fans, pumps, shall be provided with a suitable laminated
plastic nameplate with '/4" letters fastened with appropriate screws or rivets.
D. Provide framed in glass,typed charts for valves and install where directed.
2.31 IDENTIFICATION,COLOR CODING&FLOW DIRECTION
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,
install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification
prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
B. Piping System Identification:
1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system
indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of
flow: .A
a. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and
contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2"
beyond ends of lettering.
b. Plastic pipe markers,with application system as indicated under "Materials"
in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot
non-insulated pipes.
2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to
view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts,
tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Near each valve and
control device. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and
terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow
pattern. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non-accessible enclosures. Near major equipment items and other points of
origination and termination. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50'
along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping
and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit
intermediately spaced markers.
C. Valve Identification:
1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping
system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, .�
and similar rough-in connections of end-use and units. List each tagged valve in
valve schedule for each piping system.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-32
w
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
40
on H. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the
insulation.
I. The rating of the firestops shall be 1,2,3,&4 hour(s),but in no case less than the rating
of the time-rated floor or wall assembly.
2.27 FANS
A. The fans shall be of the centrifugal direct drive type. The fan shall be constructed of
heavy gauge galvanized steel. The fan shall be resiliently mounted within an
acoustically lined enclosure. The outlet duct collar shall include an aluminum backdraft
damper. The fan shall be controlled by a motion sensor with time delay. The fan
disconnect is internal and is of the plug in type. The fan wheel shall be forward curved
and shall be dynamically balanced. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for
sound and air flow performance and shall be UL listed. Fans shall be Panasonic or
equal.
w
2.28 ACCESS PANELS
A. Steel access panels,as manufactured by Karp,Milcor or Wilkinson for access to valves,
dampers, vents, controls, etc. Panel door shall have flush screw driver lock. 16-gauge
frame, 13-gauge hinged door; rating of door shall be equal to the fire rating of wall,
ceiling or floor,which it is installed into.
B. Install in each location where valves, dampers, vents, controls, etc. are concealed by
construction to non-accessible areas of walls,ceilings and floors.
2.29 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS
A. As manufactured by Keflex,Flexonics or Anaconda. Model number is Keflex.
B. Type KSSPC-FLG braided flexible connector. Constructed of stainless steel annular
corrugated metal surrounded with a woven wire braid of high tensile stainless steel.
C. Carbon steel plate flanges ASA 150#bolt hole patterns on all pipes 3"and over,carbon
steel male nipples to 2'h"sizes.
D. Flexible Connectors shall not be used to correct misalignment.
2.30 TAGS,NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS
A. Each valve, control, switch and piece of apparatus installed under this contract shall be
properly identified. Valves shall be provided with a 1'/2" diameter brass tag with '/z"
high numbers and/or letters fastened with nylon ties. Beaded chain will not be
acceptable.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-31
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3. Provide bellmouths, conical tees, laterals, reducers and other low loss fittings as
shown in SMACNA Standards.
2.26 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL �.
A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts and conduit penetrations
through all walls, floors, partitions or leaving or entering any vertical pipe/duct
shaflway at all floors and through all walls. This Subcontractor shall provide his own
pipe and duct sleeves and do his own firesafing and smoke seal work.
B. Elastomeric intumescent firestopping material as manufactured by 3M Construction
Markets,Dow-Corning,or approved equal.
C. Components to be used as follows:
1. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25N/S No Sag Caulk. .�
2. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Self Leveling Caulk.
3. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25 W Caulk.
4. 3M Brand Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip.
5. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet.
6. 3M Brand Fire Barrier 7900 Series Penetration Sealing Systems.
7. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix.
8. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads.
D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective
barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM
E814,UL 1479,and UL Fire Resistance Directory. *"
E. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by BOCA,Massachusetts state code and
all other applicable codes. Assemblies shall be UL listed.
F. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code and NFPA 70 -
National Electrical Code.
G. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass,
plastic and insulated pipe.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-30
so
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
6. Exterior piping and fittings shall be finished in a 0.016" aluminum jacket
conforming to ASTM B209,3003 Alloy,H-14 temper.
B. Ductwork:
1. Insulate all ductwork as described with materials and thickness as specified.
40 SERVICE THICKNESS
Exhaust air ducting 1'/2"
�s
2. Duct insulation in all concealed spaces shall be flexible fiberglass 1.5 lb density
with FSK vapor barrier facing. Staple and seal all seams and joints with self-
W adhering foil tape.
3. Ductwork insulated as follows:
a. Exhaust air
4. Insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning,Knauf,Certain-teed,or SPI.
5. Duct insulation tape as manufactured by Compac type 110-7 or equivalent grade
approved equal.
6. All insulation pipe and duct sealants, adhesives, coatings as manufactured by
Childers,3M,or MEI and UL approved.
C. Equipment
1. Air separators shall be insulated with 1"armaflex.
2.25 SHEET METAL WORK
A. Ductwork: Fabricated from galvanized zinc-coated sheet steel in accordance with
NFPA and SMACNA manuals. Gauges as listed in SMACNA manuals; minimum
gauge shall be 24.
a B. Round Ducts:
1. All round ductwork shall be round spiral lock seam construction. Spiral duct
gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards.
2. Elbows: Diameters 3 through 8 inches shall be two section die stamped, all others
shall be gored construction, maximum 18° angle, with all seams continuously
welded. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion
resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.
40
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-29
4P
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. 2" rigid polyurethane foam insulation
3. Corrugated stainless steel inner tank.
4. Provide with 0012 Taco Circulator per manufacturer's instructions.
5. '/4"NPT brass tee, drain valve and automatic air vent.
D. Control shall be provided for the domestic hot water as described in the Temperature
Controls paragraph 2.32 of this specification.
224 INSULATION
A. Piping
1. Insulate all piping including: heating water supply and return, condensate drains
and cold water make-up, and all fittings and valves. Insulation thickness as
indicated below:
SERVICE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Heating water runouts to 12 ft. up to 1" '/2"
Heating water All 1 '/2"
Cold water All '/2"
2. Piping insulation except condensate drain shall be heavy density rigid fiberglass
with an "R" value of 4.5 per 1" thickness at 75°F mean temperature and flame
spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Owens Corning, Knauf or Certainteed.
A/C Condensate shall be flexible unicellular.
3. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness flexible fiberglass of pre-
formed rigid fiberglass.
4. Insulation shall be covered with a Kraft reinforced ASJ jacket having longitudinal
stapled seams. Self-sealing butt strips shall be installed on circumferential joints
and shall be stapled. UL 25/35 rating.
5. Fittings and valves shall be covered with pre-formed fitting covers of high-impact,
UV-resistant poly-vinyl chloride vapor retarding jackets. Covers shall be installed
with staples. Equal by Zeston.
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-28 .•
AN
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
P DHCD Project No. 214034
+ 4. Boiler Trim
a. All electrical components to be high quality manufacture and bear UL label.
b. Water boiler(s) controls furnished:
1. High limit temperature control (190 degrees F maximum allowable boiler
water temperature).
2. Combination pressure-temperature gauge. Gauge dial clearly marked and
easy to read.
.� 3. ASME certified pressure relief valve, set to relieve at 30 PSIG.
4. Flue gas, outlet water temperature, and return water temperature sensors.
aw
5. Low water protection.
40 6. Built-in freeze protection.
7. 0011 Taco Circulator
40
2.23 INDIRECT FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
on A. General Requirements
1. Furnish and install indirect fired water heater.
on
2. Install packaged water heaters according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
All work to be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.
3. Water heaters shall be equal to Weil-McLain Plus 120.
B. Water heater shall meet or exceed the following:
L 510 gallon per hour first hour rating
2. 120 gallon storage
3. 42 square foot heating surface.
C. Construction
1. Steel outer tank
w
+* HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-27
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 �*
B. Product
1. Boiler shall be Weil-McLain Ultra 105 proprietary or equal. Other manufacturers or
other Weil-McLain boiler must comply with the full intent of these specifications.
2. Boiler Construction
a. Boiler heat exchanger: Cast aluminum mono block heat exchanger.
b. Boiler(s) main components: .W
1. The combustion chamber will be sealed and located at the top of the mono
block casting which will be of counterflow design, to assure that sediment ,m
and any lime that might form will fall to the bottom, away from the crown
sheet area.
..
2. Boiler(s) shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative
pressure regulation (fan suction "pulls"gas through valve rather than gas
pressure "pushing"gas through valve). This enables the boiler to operate am
in a safe condition at a derated output, even if the inlet gas pressure
should drop to as low as 4 inches W.C. The inlet (natural) (propane) gas
pressure to the boiler gas valve should be a minimum of 4" W.C. and a ..o
maximum of 13" W.C. If inlet gas pressure exceeds 13" W.C., a 100%
lock-up type gas pressure regulator of adequate size must be installed in
gas supply piping and adjusted to prevent pressure in excess of 13"W.C.
3. The burner shall be premix combustion type, made with stainless steel and
a woven metal fiber outer covering providing a wide range of modulating .�
firing rates.
4. The boiler shall be equipped with a variable speed blower system, capable
of modulating the boiler firing rate.
5. The boiler shall be equipped with a device capable of controlling the
air/fuel ratio through a 5 to 1 turndown ratio.
6. The control system shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up_
boiler status, and boiler diagnostics.
3. Venting and Combustion Air
a. Boiler(s) must be capable of using outside air piped directly to boiler for
combustion. Inlet and termination of these pipes must be connected to either..
through the roof or sidewall terminations as recommended by the manufacture.
b. The boiler shall be direct vent using Schedule 40 PVC. ABS or CPVC.
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-26
so
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
G. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size and voltage called for on
the Drawings. Motor shall be of the premium efficiency type. It shall have heavy duty,
grease lubricated ball bearings, completely adequate for the maximum load for which the
pump is designed.
H. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be
w thoroughly cleaned and painted with high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.
2.22 BOILERS
A. General Requirements
1. Furnish and install two (2)packaged, modulating, sealed combustion, power-vented,
high efficiency gas-fired boiler(s) with cast aluminum heat exchangers that use
outside air for combustion.
2. Install packaged boiler unit(s) according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
All work to be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.
�w
3. Boiler shall be capable of burning natural or propane gas.
4. Boiler(s) shall have I=B=R Hydronics Institute gross output at 100% fire rate 94
MBH per boiler.
5. Boiler shall be 92.8% minimum DOE efficient as required by National Energy
Conservation Act or ASHRAE 90.1.
40
6. Boiler shall be capable of full modulation firing with a turn down of up to 5 to 1
WX 7. Boiler shall be manufactured by ISO 9001 registered company to conform to
Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
8. Individual cast aluminum mono block to be fire tested and hydrostatically pressure
tested at factory in accordance with ASME requirements.
9. Maximum allowable working pressure 30 PSIG water as listed on the rating label.
10. Regulatory Requirements
a. Boiler shall meet or exceed the SCAQD (South Coast Air Quality District of
California) Low Nox emission requirement of 40NG/J.
"w b. Boiler and controls to comply with applicable regulations.
c. Boiler shall meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and Department of
„o Energy guidelines for"Energy Star"energy efficiency.
so HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-25
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
tire valve)to facilitate the on-site charging of the tanks to meet system requirements. The
tank must be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code and be stamped for 125-psi working pressure. Tank shall be
Armstrong, Amtrol or ITT Bell & Gossett. Tank shall be installed in strict accordance *
with the manufacturer's installation and charging procedures.
B. Microbubble Air Separator: Spirotherm proprietary or equal. All fittings shall be
fabricated of steel, rated for 150psig design pressure and shall be selected for less than a
1' pressure drop and velocities not exceeding 4 fps. The units shall include an internal
copper coalescing medium to facilitate air removal. Provide an integral high capacity *+�
float actuated air vent at the top fitting of the tank. The unit shall have a bottom blow
down connection.
4W
C. Pressure-Reducing Valve: Setting as noted on drawings, all bronze.
D. Triple-Duty Valves: Straight pattern valve to perform the functions of non-slam check,
throttling valve, shut-off valve, calibrated balancing valve and system flow meter. The
valve shall be heavy-duty cast iron construction with standard flanged connections and
rated for a maximum working pressure of 175 psig. The valve shall be fitted with a .a
bronze seat replaceable bronze disc, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing springs.
The valve design shall permit repacking under system full pressure. Each valve shall be
equipped with brass readout valves with integral checks. Valves shall be Armstrong •
Pump or Bell &Gossett Triple duty valve or approved equal.
2.21 INLINE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Inline mounted pumps shall be Taco proprietary or equal.
B. Furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be
inline type, close coupled single stage design, for installation in vertical or horizontal
position and capable of being serviced with disturbing piping connections. aw
C. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron. The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed type.
dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew. go
D. The pump shall be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve.
E. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally flushed
mechanical seal with ceramic seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation
at 225°F. A bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal.
F. Pumps shall be rated for a minimum of 175 psi working pressure. The pump case shall
have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and will include vent and drain +.B
ports.
AM
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-24 dW
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
MR DHCD Project No. 214034
no 9. Controls shall consist of a weather responsive controller with room temperature
sensor. The outdoor air controller and room sensor shall activate/deactivate the
pump and shall modulate the header control valve to maintain room set point.
qW
H. Installation:
40 L Pextron tubing shall be secured to a welded wire fabric or approved equal. Fabric
(by G.C.) with ties provided by the tubing manufacturer. Do not use wire ties.
Spacing of ties shall be a maximum of 36 inches for straight lengths and a minimum
'ft of three ties per 180-degree turn.
2. Provide labor for field looping and tie down.
3. Supplier to instruct and supervise contractor of the installation of the manifolds and
loop piping.
4. Contractor shall prepare the site for installation of tubing prior to arrival of
suppliers representative. This includes preparation of trenches for manifolds and
installation of wire mesh.
40 5. Schedule pouring of concrete floor not later than 7 days after installation of piping
and not before successful pressure and leak testing. Contractor to supply field
coordination and supervision of the pressure testing of the loop tubing. The system
W shall be pressure tested to 100 psi for a minimum of 24 hours prior to and during
concrete application until concrete is cured. Test equipment to be supplied and
installed by the contractor. The contractor shall provide the engineer with written
notice of when the tubing installation is complete and when the concrete pour is
scheduled. The engineer shall inspect the tubing before the pour and shall inspect
during the pour.
6. A water test is preferred but the test can be completed by using compressed air.
7. In the event of freezing weather, the contractor shall protect the system from
freezing. See Architect's specification referring to weather protection.
1. Warranty: The system shall be covered by a product liability insurance policy covering
$3,250,000M ($US) per case for consequential damage and repair for the first 10 years.
The tubing shall carry a minimum of 30-year product limited warranty covering
manufacturer related tubing defects.
2.20 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Expansion Tank: Furnish and install, of size and capacity as shown on plans, a
pre-charged vertical or horizontal as indicated, steel expansion tank with integral heave
duty Butyl rubber diaphragm. The tank shall have a charging valve connection (standard
" HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-23
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Manifold Header:
1. The manifold header is pre-assembled for wall mounting and suitable for direct
connection to heat source, pressure tested and supplied with the following
components:
a. Header is 1 1/4" solid brass, each return is fitted with an internal shutoff valve •"
suitable to receive optional 24v power head for thermostatic control, drain
purge, fill capability, and compression fitting to receive tubing.
D. Slab Tubing: Piping shall be installed in one continuous piece with no splices being
allowed in the piping between the supply and return headers.
E. Coordination: Supply field coordination and supervision of the pressure testing of the
field piping by the Mechanical Contractor.
F. Pressure Testing: The system shall be hydronically pressure tested to 100 psi 24 hours
before pour and leave pressurized until slab is cured. Test equipment to be supplied and
installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
G. Controls: The control system shall be supplied by the in-floor manufacturer and shall
consist of
1. Electronic room thermostat.
aw
2. 24V power heads suitable for mounting on the shut-off valves located at the
distribution station for thermostatic control.
3. Wiring junction box for zone control on multiple power heads and thermostat zone
wiring.
4. Outdoor reset control for temperature modulation complete with the following
features: 4 way mixing valve modulation and pump control (24V, 60Hz), freeze
protection and seasonal system start-up and shut down. .R
5. Outdoor sensor.
6. Strap on sensor.
7. Temperature high limit valve kit installed at the distribution station, adjustment tool
included.
8. 24V reversible motor for distribution station.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-22
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.17 FIRE DAMPER
A. Fire Dampers: Type "B" 1-1/2 hr rated and stamped, UL label and construction, curtain
style, horizontal and vertical with sleeve and 165 Deg. F. fusible link. For rectangular
duct sleeve.
2.18 VENTS
A. Large Capacity Air Vents (Located at Air Separators)
1. Float actuated modulating high capacity air vent with positive shut off to 150 psig
at a maximum temperature of 250 degrees. The design of the vent shall not allow air
to be drawn into the system if the system pressure were to drop below ambient
pressures. The vent shall be constructed of cast iron with type 313 stainless steel,
brass, EPDM and silicone rubber. The vent shall be by Spirovent proprietary.
2.19 RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM
A. Furnish a radiant floor heating system. The system shall be as manufactured by Viega or
approved equal. The quantities of tubing and tubing layout shall be designed by the
W radiant floor manufacturer. 1/4"= F-0" scale drawings shall be submitted with all
supporting calculations. The system shall consist of cross linked polyethylene tubing with
oxygen diffusion barrier, prefabricated manifolds consisting of circuit balancing and
10 shut-off valves, circulator and control valve, and a complete control system. The tubing
manufacturer shall provide instruction to the installing contractor and shall certify in
writing that the installing contractor has been trained to meet the manufacturers
go standards. The installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations
completely.
40 B. Tubing is electronically cross-linked by means of a high-energy electron beam. Tubing is
rated with the maximum operating temperature no less than 203 deg. F and a maximum
operating pressure of 100psi, in accordance of ASTM F876-90. The tubing is listed with
„W BOCA evaluation Services, Inc. The tubing is enclosed with an oxygen diffusion barrier
capable of limiting oxygen diffusion through the tube no greater than 0.075mg/l/24 at
203 F or 0.003mg/1/24h at 104F and in accordance with DIN#4726. The tubing is rated
4. with the highest resistance to stress cracking and chemical solvents (water additives,
antifreeze solutions, concrete additives) with the lowest possible linear thermal
expansion. The tubing has high tensile strength and high form stability, suitable for high
resistance to abrasion and deformation. The minimum bending radius for the tubing at
ambient temperatures of 50F or lower shall not be less than 8 times the outside diameter.
The minimum bending radius for the tubing at ambient temperatures 68F or higher shall
40 not be less than 5 times the tubing outside diameter.
40
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-21
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
G. Butterfly Valves
1. The valves shall be designed and tested in accordance with Manufacturers
Standardization Society (MSS) standard MSS-SP-67 and American Petroleum *+
Institute API-609.
2. Butterfly Valves shall be cast iron body, full lug design, with stainless steel disc.
Valves shall have stainless steel stems supported on 3 self-lubricated bronze or
TFE coated stainless steel bearings. Valve seats and liners shall be EPDM. Valve
operators shall be lever lock handle for 4". Valves in exposed locations that are 6
feet(center line)above the floor shall be provided with chain wheel operators. All
valves shall be provided with extended necks to allow 2"of insulation.
3. Valves shall be Milwaukee M series or equal by Centerline, Stockham or Nibco.
2.15 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES •
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent
of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.
B. Venturi Type bronze, steel,or cast iron with bronze throat,with valved pressure sensing
taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Flow Measuring/Balance Valve
1. Minimal read out accuracy plus or minus 5%. Valve manufacturer shall furnish
with submittal a valve schedule showing service,flow rate,pressure drop and valve
size.
2. Balancing Valves shall be equal percentage globe style valves. 90 degree stoke
valves shall not be acceptable. Valves shall be available in sweat or soldered .�
configuration in 1/2" to 2" diameter. Valves shall have two pressure read out ports
and two drain ports. Read out and drain ports shall be interchangeable. To allow
for future modifications valves with fixed orifices shall not be considered ,.►
acceptable. Valve manufacturer shall furnish on hot or chilled water service a
pre-formed insulation kit that shall meet ASTM flame spread rating of 25 or less
and a smoke development rating of 50 or less.
3. Acceptable manufacturers are Armstrong Pumps Inc., Tour Anderson,Amtrol, and
MNG.
2.16 AIR TRANSFER GRILLES
A. Air transfer grilles shall be by Titus, Metalaire, Krueger or approved equal. Sizes as
indicated on the drawing. Baked enamel finish.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-20
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
H. Fittings:
1. Valves: '/4"brass lever handle gauge cock.
2. Siphons: Steam service shall have 1/4"NPT brass siphons.
+ ► 3. Snubbers: Pulsating service shall have piston type snubbers.
I. Gauges and fittings shall be as manufactured by Wika,Weksler or Ashcroft
2.13 STRAINERS
A. Strainers shall be as manufactured by Hayward, Mueller, Sarco or Armstrong. Strainers
used with steel pipe shall be cast iron body. Strainers used with copper pipe or tube
shall be bronze body.
go
B. Y Strainers
1. Strainers shall be provided with stainless steel screens. Screens for water service
and 3"and under pipe size shall have 0.045-inch perforations. Strainers 2-1/2"and
smaller shall be threaded end connections with a pressure rating of 125 psi (Steam
! ► Working Pressure).
2.14 VALVES
we
A. As manufactured by Hammond or equal by Stockham, or Nibco; model numbers are
Hammond.
R0
B. Gate valves up to 21/2": Class 150 SWP,300 PSI,WOG, screwed ends,rising stem, solid
wedge, bronze stem, bronze body, malleable iron hand wheel, meeting MSS SP80.
r Model IB-646.
C. Check valves up to 21/2": Class 125 SWP,200 PSI, WOG, screwed ends, 5 degree swing
00 check,B-62 bronze body and cap,meeting MSS SP80. Model IB-904.
D. Ball valves up to 2": Rated 150 SWP, 600 PSI, WOG, meeting WWV 35C Type 11,
Class A, Style 3. Two-piece threaded body, solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome
ball. Teflon seats and seals. Blowout proof stem design with threaded adjustable
packing follower. Packing retained under full working pressure with handle or handle
00 nut removed.Zinc plated handle with plastisol grip.Model 8501.
E. Drain valves: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, bronze, screwed or solder end,threaded
40 bonnet,adjustable packing nut,hose adapter with cap,malleable iron hand wheel.
F. Boiler drain: Same as Ball valves as specified above.
no
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-19
40
am
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 aw
D. Separable socket thermowells:
1. 3/4"NPT brass thermowell with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe to
hold fixed thermometer stem.
2. Material: Brass for use in copper or steel pipe.
3. Extension: Lagging extension for insulated pipe.
4. Insertion length shall extend to the center of the pipe.
E. Thermometers and thermowells shall be as manufactured by Wika,Weksler or Ashcroft
Aw
2.10 UNIONS
om
A. Steel Pipe: Shall be malleable iron with bronze seats.
B. Copper Pipe: Shall be cast brass. MW
2.11 GASKETS
4W
A. Gaskets and sheet packing shall be Garlock, Crane or Johns-Manville Co.'s make,
designed for service,pressure and temperature for their respective use. Use best quality
1/16"thick sheet rubber,cut to bolt circle and notched on bolts.
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be manufactured to ASME B40.1 Grade IA.
B. Phosphor-bronze bourdon tube type with bottom connection. W
C. Case: Stainless steel with matte finish. 4 '/2" diameter case with a snap in acrylic
window. am
D. Connection:Brass 1/4"NPT.
am
E. Dial: White aluminum with stop pin black markings.
F. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. ••
G. Range:
1W
1. Vacuum: 30"Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
2. Fluids under pressure: Two times the operating pressure. am
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-18 am
No
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
on DHCD Project No. 214034
5. Riser clamp,Figure 261.
6. Pipe Alignment Guides Figure 255 or 256
2.8 HANGER RODS
A. Secured to structure with adequate anchors,bolts,unistrut or concrete inserts.
PIPE SIZE THREADED ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING
Up to 1'/4" Y4" 8'-011
1 Y2"to 2" 3/8" 8'-0"
B. Maximum spacing is recommended as a guide.The requirements shall be in accordance
with the Manufacturers Standardization Standard (MSS) SP-69. Provide additional
hangers where required to adequately support piping, valves, short lengths of pipe, and
where flexible connections would be subject to strain from weight of piping.
2.9 THERMOMETERS
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges are as follows:
1. Hot Water Heating: 30 to 300 degrees F.with 5 degree scale divisions.
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division
to a maximum of 1.5 percent range span.
C. Materials:
1. Case: Textured black finish, V-shaped molded plastic or aluminum case. Spring
mounted heavy glass window.Nine inch scale
2. Adjustable Joint: Joint completely encloses capillary for thermal system protection.
180 degree adjustment in vertical plane. 360 degree adjustment in the horizontal
plane with locking device.
40
3. Tube: Mercury filled red reading magnifying lens tube. Spirit fill is available.
OR 4. Scale: Permanently baked on, bold black graduations printed on white coasted
aluminum.
40 5. Stem: Precision ground aluminum, tapered for a close tolerance metal to metal
contact with a matching tapered thermowell. Length shall be 3 Yz"or longer to suit
installation.
40
40 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-17
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,.
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS .�.
A. Steel pipe to 2'/z": 150-pound malleable iron, ANSI B16.3. 125-pound cast iron, ANSI
B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron, except for steam piping. Bushing *■
reduction of a single pipe size,or use of close nipples,is not acceptable.
B. Copper pipe: Cast bronze or brass sweat fittings,95/5 lead-free solder.
C. Flanges: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, 150 pound, conforming to ASTM A105,
gasketed with temperature rating suitable for the service. Flange bolting: Carbon steel �*
machine bolts or studs and nuts,ASTM A307,Grade B.
2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES +
A. Screwed Joints shall be made tight with a Teflon tape or compound applied to the male
threads only. *"
B. Welded Joints shall mate properly and have continuous leak-tight weld.
C. Flanged Fittings shall be used for connection to all equipment requiring same, flanges
and drilling to match the mating joint, 150-psi rating. Fitted with machine bolts of
proper size and number with locking washer under each hexagon nut.
D. Soldered Fittings shall be neat and wiped clean of excess solder and paste.
2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion compensator elements shall be capable of withstanding system operating
temperatures and pressures. Expansion compensators for hot water piping up to 4"shall
be Keefex Quadraslide high pressure or equal by American Boa. Bellows shall be multi-
ply type 300 series stainless steel with telescopic shrouds to fit snugly around the
bellows. End fittings shall match the pipe fittings herein before specified. Compensators
shall be equipped with set screw and drain holes and shall have a steel casing.
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. As manufactured by Grinnel,C&P or Crane; numbers are Grinnel.
1. Steel pipe to 2'/z",Figure 65 or 260.
2. Pipe roll stand,all sizes,Figure 271.
3. Pipe saddle,all sizes,Figure 258. «
4. Copper and brass pipe,Figure CT-99C.
HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-16
40
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
4" DHCD Project No. 214034
40 PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES
40
A. Materials specified for the work on all systems shall be new, unless specifically noted
otherwise, and shall be manufactured in conformance with the specified codes or
standards. Where materials are not specified, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish
the best of the respective kind.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS
A. Provide all necessary steel and fabricate brackets, hangers and supports stands as
required for all ceiling and floor-mounted equipment such as fans ductwork,piping,etc.
B. Hangers:Adequate to support equipment and not cause vibrations.
C. Anchoring: Properly secured to building structure by Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Contractor,by welding,nuts and bolts,clamps,etc.
D. Any improperly secured or fabricated supports shall be removed and replaced if in the
Architect or Engineer's opinion they are inadequate.
2.3 PIPING
A. Hot Water Piping above grade,2!/2"&under:
1. Black Steel schedule 40 ERW or seamless conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B
2. Copper type K, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88
B. Heating water supply&return,under slab: Crosslinked Polyethylene
C. Condensate drains:
1. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)schedule 40 conforming to ASTM D1784 and D1785.
D. Domestic cold water: Copper type K,seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88
E. Vents: Black Steel Schedule 40
F. Sleeves: Black Steel Schedule 40
00
G. Drains: Black Steel Schedule 40
40 HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-15
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.20 GUARANTEE WARRANTY
A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall and hereby does
..
warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be
free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one(1)year.
u6
B. Any equipment or material, which offers extended guarantee/warranty, shall be issued
to Owners at completion of the project.
1.21 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. All engineering time required to modify design or construction documents to
accommodate substituted materials shall be billed to the HVAC contractor at an hourly
rate of$75.00 per hour. When submitting substituted materials the contractor will be
provided with estimates of engineering time associated with the substitutions. �..
Substantial Completion will not be granted until all bills associated with additional
engineering services, due to substitutions, have been paid.
am
aw
4W
no
.m
ow
.m
4W
go
am
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-14 -.
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No 214034
B. Arrange the work essentially as shown, except layout to be made on the job to suit
actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all work will be
installed in proper relationship. Precise location of parts to coordinate with other work
is the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor.
C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings.
no
D. Indicated equipment connections are based on equipment of a given manufacturer.
Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, ducts, etc. to
connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment
manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and
connection of all equipment. In case of conflict between manufacturer's instructions and
me the contract documents, notify the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. No equipment
installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's
warranty.
4
E. Install all work in a neat and workmanlike manner using only workmen thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties they are to perfonn. Rough work will be rejected.
40
F. All material shall be new. No old pipe, ductwork or equipment shall be used.
G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete systems, which are free from
objectionable generating noise or of excessive vibration. In the opinion of the
Mechanical Engineer, any items found in either of these conditions shall be corrected
and noises or vibration dampened as directed.
1.19 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical work will be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor, unless
specifically required otherwise by this specification. Installation and wiring of motor
starters shall be by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Provide diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Subcontractor to make
connections properly.
C. Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance with Electrical
Specifications and applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and local
ordinances.
D. Verify all electric characteristics prior to ordering equipment.
w
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-13
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 .�
5. Chart of the numbers, location and function of each valve. Additionally the
contractor shall provide a set of record drawings with the service, function and
location of each valve.
6. Step by step operating instruction including preparation for starting, summer
operation, winter operation, shutdown and draining.
7. Maintenance instructions
8. Possible breakdowns and repairs ""
9. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment listed on the
equipment schedule, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers. 4W
10. As installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer
11. Description of sequence of operation by the control manufacturer
12. Parts list of major equipment, including recommended items to be stocked as spare
parts
13. As installed, color-coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller
connections and interlock connections.
.r�
14. All balance test reports.
15. As-Built drawings for each trade drawn using a computer - aided drafting (CAD)
software package. Drawing files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing
shall be provided.
16. At the time of final acceptance, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Subcontractor shall furnish four (4) sets of equipment manuals for all equipment
for delivery to the Owner
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's
representative in the operation of all heating apparatus and systems to the satisfaction
of O-vvner's representative and shall provide videotapes of all instructions, maintenance.
and service procedures.
1.18 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK .,
A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation
of this work.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-12
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
ew items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of eyebolts
and other lifting equipment.
+�• D. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in order to
accomplish the requirements of coordination.
40 E. Coordination Drawings are required. Any work installed prior to approval of
coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk.
40 F. All equipment, such as the pumps, fans, boilers, etc., shall fit the space shown on the
project drawings, and provide accessibility for servicing, repairing and inspecting
apparatus at least equal to that shown. Each item of equipment shall be installed
OR without damage to the building, building equipment or the item of equipment.
1.15 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
me
A. Coordination Drawings showing the size and location of mechanical pipes, ducts,
equipment and appurtenances, relative to the work of other trades shall be prepared
4M before materials are purchased or work is begun.
B. All coordination drawings are to be produced using CAD software compatible with
"" AutoCAD Release 14. Architect will furnish background drawing files that show
ceiling grid layouts, ceiling heights, lights and walls.
10 C. Coordination Drawings for the following trades shall be submitted: sheet metal, fire
protection, electrical and other HVAC trades.
w 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The Contractor will furnish and submit the instruction manuals in accordance with
Section 01700 containing the following additional materials:
40 1. Brief description of each system and EMS operating features
2. Manufacturer's name and model numbers of all components of the system listed on
the equipment schedule drawing, control and wiring diagrams on controllers.
3. Provide a list of the mechanical contractor and all major subcontractors who have
worked on the HVAC portions of the project.
4. Provide a list of the Manufacturers representative for all equipment listed on the
schedule drawings. The list shall include Company Name, Address, Telephone
Number and Contact Person.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-11
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME
A. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture,
form or type of construction by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as + +
establishing a standard of quality. This shall not be construed as limiting the
competition.
B. Approval of any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned shall be obtained
prior to the close of the interpretation period.
C. The Contractor may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture.
form or type of construction that in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer is equal to
that named. *■
1.12 WASTE MATERIAL
4W
A. The I VAC Subcontractor on a regular basis and at least once each week shall remove
all rubbish created by the HVAC Subcontractor.
so
B. All material shall be properly disposed of in accordance with all prevailing codes, rules
and regulations.
aw
1.13 PROTECTION
A. This Subcontractor shall at all times fully protect his work and materials from injury or .m
loss by others. Anv injury or loss that may occur shall be made good without additional
expense to the Owner. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
all his materials until the Owner accepts the project.
B. This Subcontractor shall also protect building and equipment from damage by
installation of his work, and shall pay for all damages thereto. ..
1.14 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. Coordinate the work of different trades so that interference between mechanical_
electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be
avoided.
B. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for .�
operation. repair, removal and testing of mechanical and other equipment will be
provided.
C. Pipes, ducts and similar items shall be kept close as possible to joists, above walls and
columns. to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, ducts, equipment and similar
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-10
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. HVAC contractor is responsible for the information shown on all the drawings in the
contract set. Listing of HVAC Drawings above does not limit responsibility of
determining full extent of work required by the Contract Documents. Refer to
Architectural, Plumbing, Electrical, Structural and other Drawings and other Sections
that indicate types of construction in which work must be installed and work of other
trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated.
C. This Sub-contractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to
be done and for conditions affecting the location and placement of equipment and
materials. Locations shown on the HVAC Drawings shall be checked against general
and detailed Drawings of the construction proper.
OR D. Drawings are intended to be supplementary to the Specifications. Any work indicated,
mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by both.
OR E. Drawings are diagrarrunatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work
included in Contract. Information and components shown on riser diagrams and details
but not shown on plans shall apply or be provided as if expressly required on both.
*s Additionally, information shown on the plans but not shown on riser diagrams and
details shall be provided.
40 F. Drawings are not intended to show every offset, fitting or component; however,
Contract Documents require components and materials whether or not indicated or
specified as necessary to make HVAC installation complete and operational.
G. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location
prior to installation at no expense to the Owner.
H. Address questions regarding Contract Documents to Architect in writing prior to award
of contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of meaning and intent of Contract
Documents shall be final.
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As work progresses, maintain complete and separate set of black line prints of Contract
Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and changes from original
00 Contract Drawings, clearly and accurately. Valve tags shall be recorded as they are
installed.
4" B. At completion of work, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings for each trade to
architect for review and approval. As-Built drawings are to be drawn using a
computer-aided drafting (CAD) software package. Contractor shall provide drawing
ON files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing.
on
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-9
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Where the provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or
regulations, the latter shall govern.
2. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the Contract Provisions shall govern unless otherwise directed by the
Architect.
B. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications of a
manufacturer of any of the following shall comply with the requirements of the current
specifications or standard listed.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
w
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
3. Institute of Boiler Rating (IBR)
4. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
6. American Gas Association (AGA)
7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ..
8. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU)
9. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
a.
10. United States of America Standards Association (USAS)
11. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA).
1.8 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary
pen-nits and approval of the work by the local authorities. The HVAC Subcontractor
shall obtain all other permits. licenses or certificates of approval, arrange for all
inspections and pay all fees and charges in connection therewith.
1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Section is shown primarily on the following Drawings: M1.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-8
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
W 10. Fire safing
11. All caulking, sealants, adhesives and tapes
12. Valve tags and pipe identification.
13. EMS automatic system of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning controls
14. All wiring diagrams
B. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect
to items requiring shop drawings, manufacturer's detail drawings or submittals of
information until the items are reviewed and approved.
C. If a resubmittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the Contractor of
equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer reserves the right to
directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for review of these shop drawings prior
to their release at a rate of$75.00 per hour with a two (2)hour minimum.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials used under this section of the specifications shall be new and the best
product of the manufacturer. All materials are to be without defects and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended.
B. This Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced tradesmen,
thoroughly experienced in the installation of all materials specified under this section of
the specifications and able to work in harmony with all other tradesmen employed on
the project.
C. This Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his material to the building site
when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and
that of other trades.
1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this section will
be determined in accordance with the approval of the Engineer.
40
1.7 CODES, STANDARDS. ORDINANCES
go A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations governing such
work. as may be required by local and state ordinances.
40
so HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-7
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Related Sections:
1. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under
the designated sections.
a. Cutting and patching
ow
b. Flashing and counter flashing unless noted otherwise noted or shown.
MW
C. Painting
d. All electrical wiring to equipment installed under this contract including ,,w
starters and disconnect switches, unless specifically noted herein. All
temperature control wiring shall be under Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Contractor's section of work and shall be by Temperature no
Control Subcontractor, including transformers from 120 VAC to control
voltage and any 120 VAC control wiring required to power operators, etc.
am
2. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed for
work of this section.
40
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quantity of shop and/or manufacturer's drawings as called for in Gcncral Provisions JW
shall be submitted to the Architect for review, for the following:
1. Boiler/burners MW
2. Indirect fired water heater.
am
3. Pumps and hydronic specialties
4. Valves, strainers, vents, piping, fittings and accessories
5. Thermometers, gauges
MW
6. Exhaust fans.
7. Fire Dampers .o
8. An-Transfer Grilles
9. Radiant Floor Heating Svstem.
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-6 ..
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
40 2. New indirect fired water heater.
3. Radiant Floor Heating System
40
4. Pumps and hydronic specialties
5. Valves and piping accessories
40 6. Systems of exhaust ducting.
7. Exhaust fans.
so
8. Piping, ducting and equipment insulation
40 9. Fire safing for all piping and ducting
10. System of Heating controls
11. Water and air balancing
12. Start-ups, test and shake down of systems.
13. Valve tags. charts, pipe identification.
14. Maintenance manuals
15. Guarantee.
16. Coordination drawings
B. This contractor shall include as part of his contract, all charges for start-up, checking,
adjusting and field inspections and service representatives for all special systems and
equipment. Provide signed documentation for above procedures from factory or service
representative. Systems included:
1. Boiler/burner
40 2. Temperature Control System
3. All other systems and equipment requiring manufacturers installation rev'
40
me
40 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-5
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 o•
name in said paragraph E for any such class of work or part thereof and perform ow
that work with persons on his own payroll_ if such Sub-Bidder, after Sub-Bid
openings, shows to the satisfaction of the Northampton Housing Authority that he
does customarily perform such class of work or the part thereof with persons on A.
his own payroll and is qualified so to do. This Section of the Specifications
requires that the following classes of work shall be listed in Paragraph E under the
conditions indicated herein. am
Classes of Work
am
Sheet Metal
Insulation
Automatic Temperature Controls Im
Testing and Balancing
■.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable am
parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a
part of this Section.
.m
B. Examine Drawings and other Specification Sections for requirements that affect work
of this Section.
.0
C. As used in this Section, "provide" means "furnish and install" and "HVAC" means
"Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning".
MW
D. Where an item is referred to in singular number in the Contract Documents provide as
many such items as are necessary to complete the work.
4W
E. Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which work must
be performed including preparatory work performed under other Sections or Contracts,
or by Owner. Report conditions that might adversely affect work in writing through .o
Contractor to Architect. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected
and conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall be construed as complete
acceptance of existing conditions and preparatory work. .,■
1.3 SUMMARY
OW
A. Work included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work
of this section, including, but not limited to the following:
1. New,hydronic boiler/burners
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-4
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 15600- HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(FILED SUB BID REQUIRED)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and all Division 1 sections, apply to the work of this Section. Work to be
done under this Section is shown on the contract drawings listed at the front of the
specifications. The listing of Contract drawings and Specifications shall not limit the
Sub-Contractors responsibility to determine the full extent of his work as required by
all Contract drawings and Specifications.
B. Time, manner and requirements for bidding filed sub-bids
1. Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be
filed in a sealed envelope with the Northampton Housing Authority at a time and
place as stipulated in the "NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS"
The following shall appear on the upper left hand of the envelope:
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
NAME OF PROJECT:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION: 15600-HVAC
2. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by
the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General
Laws, as amended. Sub-Bid forms may be obtained at the office of the Awarding
Authority or Architect, or may be obtained by written request.
3. Sub-bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied a by a BID
BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURERS or CASHIERS
CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the
Northampton Housing Authority in the amount of 5 percent of the bid. A sub-bid
accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
w C. Sub-sub-bid Requirements:
1. The Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the FORM for SUB-BID the name
no and bid price of each person, firm or corporation performing each class of work or
part thereof for which (the Section of the Specifications for that sub-trade)
requires such listing; provided that, in the absence of a contrary provision in the
ON Specifications, any Sub-Bidder may, without listing any bid price, list his own
4P HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-3
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.23 INDIRECT FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER 27
2.24 INSULATION 28
2.25 SHEET METAL WORK 29
2.26 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 30 �»
2.27 FANS 31
2.28 ACCESS PANELS 31
2.29 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS 31
2.30 TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS 31
2.31 IDENTIFICATION, COLOR CODING & FLOW DIRECTION 32
2.32 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 33
PART 3 - EXECUTION 41
3.1 PIPING 41
3.2 SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS 42
3.3 GAUGES 42
3.4 THERMOMETERS 42
3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 43
3.6 FANS 43
3.7 INSULATION 43
3.8 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 44
3.9 BOILERIBURNER SYSTEM 45
3.10 SHEET METAL WORK 48
3.11 SYSTEM BALANCING 49
HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-2
Mary McColgan Apartments August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 15600- HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL 3
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3
1.2 REFERENCES 4
1.3 SUMMARY 4
1.4 SUBMITTALS 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7
1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS 7
1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES 7
1.8 PERMITS AND FEES 8
1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8
1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS 9
1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME 10
1.12 WASTE MATERIAL 10
1.13 PROTECTION 10
1.14 COORDINATION OF TRADES 10
1.15 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 11
1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 12
1.18 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 12
1.19 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 13
1.20 GUARANTEE WARRANTY 14
1.21 SUBSTITUTIONS 14
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 15
2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES 15
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS 15
2.3 PIPING 15
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS 16
2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES 16
2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS 16
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16
2.8 HANGER RODS 17
2.9 THERMOMETERS 17
2.10 UNIONS 18
2.11 GASKETS 18
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES 18
2.13 STRAINERS 19
2.14 VALVES 19
2.15 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES 20
2.16 AIR TRANSFER GRILLES 20
2.17 FIRE DAMPER 21
2.18 VENTS 21
2.19 RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 21
2.20 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23
2.21 INLINE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 24
2.22 BOILERS 25
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600-1
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
presence of the Architect's authorized representative. This Subcontractor
must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the project as a
whole. Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the test until all
parts of the work have withstood them successfully. Screwed piping shall
be made tight without caulking. When the work is presented for
acceptance, all valve stem packing must be new and without leaks, all
gauges and thermostats must be in place and reading accurately. This
Subcontractor shall furnish all labor, material and services for testing,
including plugs, pumps and compressors, shall make and remove all
temporary piping connections required for the tests, and shall dispose of
test water and all wastes after tests. leave all work in good order, ready for
full use.
'- Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the soil, waste and vent,
piping systems shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The piping
shall then be filled with water up to the roof or minimum of ten foot (10')
head and must remain full without additional pumping, for a period of one
(1)hour without showing any leakage of water.
' Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the hot water and cold water
piping systems inside building shall be temporarily capped and made tight.
The piping shall then be filled with water, and shall be made tight under a
hydrostatic pressure of 125# per square inch gauge maintained for one (1)
hour without additional pumping.
3.3 STERILIZATION: Domestic water service line and distribution system
shall be sterilized with chlorine before acceptance of domestic operation.
The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of not
less than 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be introduced
to the water lines and distributing systems in a manner approved by the
Water Department. If possible to do so, the lines shall be thoroughly
flushed before introduction of the chlorinating material. After a contact
period of not less than eight (8) hours, the system shall be flushed with
ON clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 parts
per million. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and
closed several times during the contact period.
40
END OF SECTION 15400
PLUMBING 15400-21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 3 —EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: Insulate all new concealed water piping and fittings
before closing in. Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied.
Install complete hot and cold systems for the building serving all new
fixtures. All connections to water serviced fixtures shall be equipped with
shut-off valves Piping to be pitched to low points to permit positive .�
drainage.
Install shutoff valves on each piece of equipment on both hot and cold
water.
Install all 4" and larger horizontal soil and waste piping at a slope of 1/8"
per foot in direction of flow or as noted. 3" and smaller at '/4" per foot
slope.
Piping concealed in partitions must be properly aligned to obtain absolute
concealment. Piping not properly concealed must be removed and replaced
at this Contractor's Expense.
Cleanouts must be installed in the soil and waste piping:
1. at all upper terminals of all horizontal soil and waste piping;
2. at each change in direction of more than 45";
3. at bottom of each stack.
Install pipe hangers to support all horizontal above-ground piping. Install
riser clamps at each floor level. Anchor hangers and clamps securely to
building construction.
Pipes shall run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a '/2"
drain valve at each low point in piping so that all parts of the systems can
be drawn off.
3.2 BUILDING SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEANING: All piping shall be
flushed clean before tests are applied. No portion of the hot water, cold
water, waste, sanitary shall be covered, concealed, used or correction or
replacement until tests thereof have been satisfactorily completed in the
PLUMBING 15400-20
WO
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
All firesafing material must be noncombustible as defined by NFPA
Standard 220 when tested in accordance with ASTME136; melt point -
20007F; when in contact with metal, be non-corrosive meeting FS-HH-1-
558 B; "k" value of 0.25 or less per ASTM C 518; the material shall be
moisture-resistant, mildew, vermin-proof and non-deteriorating. The
firesafing insulation shall meet fire containment tests per ASTM E119.
4W
40
M
as
PLUMBING 15400-19
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.13 WASHING MACHINE HOOK-UP: Symmons Model W-400-X surface
mounted water control valve for automatic clothes washing machines with ..
integral service stops. T&S brass approved equal.
2.14 FLOOR DRAINS: Furnish and Install floor drains in all bathrooms equal
to Zurn, ZB-415-P-VP type`B" strainer.
Provide Zurn, Z550-P-Y, 9" diameter floor drain for Mech. room or equal
to. Provide trap primer connection to all floor drains installed.
2.15 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL: Firesafing and smoke seal is
required where pipes, ducts and conduit leave or enter any vertical •R
pipe/duct shaftway at all floors and through all walls above or below any
Class "A" acoustical tile ceiling, or any space without any type of finish
ceiling.
Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes penetrations through
rated walls or partitions and at positions separating smoke zones from each
other - if smoke zones or plenums are employed in the building. Each of
the principal trades - plumbing, sprinklers, HVAC and electrical - are to
provide their own pipe and duct sleeves and to do their own firesafing and
smoke seal work.
Firesafing and smoke seal of pipe penetrations through non-rated
secondary walls within a rated larger area need not require firesafing and
smoke seal until they penetrate the rated walls.
Firesafing and smoke seal materials are as follows:
1. "Poke-through" fire containment, USG "THERMAMBER", fire
test CEG 4-11-78; USG 6-2-76; CEG 8-7-85.
2. ProSet System C Firestop devices, for PVC Piping. UL No.
R10338.
3. USG "THERMAFIBER SMOKE SEAL COMPOUND" - UL No.
RI 1327-1,; UL No. RI 1327-R.
4. Dow Corning fire stop sealant and Dow Corning fire stop foam "A"
and "B" classified for 1, 2 and 3 hours.
PLUMBING 15400-18
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
J35-316 Stainless steel crumb cup strainer with
removable basket and rubber seat stopper,
J-ADA-35, Offset drain assembly, provide
removable chrome plated P-trap and chrome
plated angle supply stops by Wolverine
model#53345. Proprietary, or equal to.
40
EKA0321 Wolverine faucet set, Proprietary, or equal
to.
Provide Handi-Lav-Guard insulation kit on
waste and water piping as manufactured by
Truebro or approved equal.
Furnish and install garbage disposal equal to
In-Sink-Erator, Bager model#5 '/2 HP.
9. P9 Service Mop Sink(Mech. Room 004)
MSB-2424 Fiat 24"x 24"x 10" deep molded stone mop
service basin.
830-AA Chrome plated faucet with vacuum breaker,
integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail
hook and%"hose thread on spout.
832-AA 30" long flexible, heavy duty 5/8" rubber
hose and stainless steel mounting bracket.
889-CC Stainless steel mop hangers with 3 rubber
tools grips.
874 Cast iron strainer.
E-77-AA Vinyl bumper guards.
PLUMBING 15400-17
MR
Op
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 OW
124-0245 Eljer closed front seat with cover. Furnish
and install chrome plated angle supply and
stop by Wolverine model#53345. "
Proprietary, or equal to.
am
6. P6 Countertop Lavatory(Handicap)
051-3514 Eljer, countertop lavatory, vitreous china,
self rimming, faucet holes on 4" center, front
overflow.
.R
FCO1330 Wolverine lavatory faucet, 4" centers, offset
grid drain assembly, 6" lever handle.
Proprietary, or equal to.
Provide P-trap and extend loose key, angle supply
stops by Wolverine model#53345,Proprietary.
Provide Handi-Lav-Guard insulation kit on
waste and water piping as manufactured by
Truebro or approved equal.
7. P7 Shower Units(Handicap)
5-96-500-L-V-X Symmons Temptrol pressure balancing
mixing valve with combination integral
diverter and volume control, adjustable
screw to limit handle turn, integral service
stops, clear-flo shower head with
arm and flange to deliver 2.5 GPM.
Levertrol 4-458 diverter w/integral volume
control. Wall/Hand shower w/flexible metal
hose, wall connection and flange, provide
36" slide bar for hand shower mounting.
or equal to.
8. P8 Kitchen Sink(Handicap)
SL-ADA-2225-A-GR Just 22" X 25" X 6" deep 18 gauge type 304
stainless steel sink, sound deadened, self-
rimming, (4) faucet holes punched on 8"
centers. Drain outlet-Rear left or right.
PLUMBING 15400-16
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
diverter and volume control, adjustable
screw to limit handle turn, integral service
stops, tub spout, clear-flo shower head with
arm and flange to deliver 2.5 GPM.
Proprietary or equal to.
56429 Wolverine pop-up waste and overflow drain
fitting with drain in shoe, Furnish and install
1 1/2" swivel p-trap. Proprietary, or equal
to.
4. P4 Kitchen Sink
+* SL-2225-A-GR Just 22" X 25" X 7' deep 18 gauge type 304
stainless steel sink, sound deadened, self-
rimming, (4) faucet holes punched on 8"
centers.
J35-316 Stainless steel crumb cup strainer with
removable basket and rubber seat stopper,
type 316 S.S. tail piece
52430 Wolverine or equal to faucet set.
Proprietary
," Furnish and install removable chrome-plated
P-trap Wolverine model #52285 and
chrome-plated angle supply stops Wolverine
model#53345. Proprietary.
Furnish and install garbage disposal equal to
In-Sink-Erator, Bager model#5 '/z HP.
5. P5 Water Closet (Handicap Accessible)
28792/21728 Gerber or equal to vitreous China low-
consumption water closet with elongated
bowl, siphon vortex bowl, trip lever, close
coupled flushometer tank, speed connect
tank/bowl coupling system, flushes on 1.6
gallons. Color White. Proprietary.
PLUMBING 15400-15
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Proprietary fixtures and model numbers by Wolverine, Symmons and
Gerber are noted where to provide in bold lettering.
1. P1 Water Closet
28792/21752 Gerber or equal to, vitreous China low-
consumption water closet with elongated
bowl, siphon vortex bowl, trip lever, close ..
coupled flushometer tank, speed connect
tank/bowl coupling system, flushes on 1.6
gallons. Color White. Proprietary.
124-0245 Eljer closed front seat with cover. Furnish
and install chrome plated angle supply and
stop by Wolverine model#53345.
Proprietary or equal to.
2. P2 Countertop Lavatory
051-3514 Eljer, countertop lavatory, vitreous china,
self rimming, faucet holes on 4" center, front
overflow.
FCO1302 Wolverine lavatory faucet, 4" centers, lift
rod and pop-up drain assembly. Proprietary aw
or equal to.
Furnish and install removable chrome-plated •.�
P-trap. Chrome-plated angle supply stops by
Wolverine model#53345. Proprietary.
3. P3 Bathtubs
2391.202 Princeton recess bath, Americast with acid
2390.202 resistant porcelain finish, integral lumbar
support, beveled headrest, full slip-resistant
coverage, right or left hand outlet as aw
required, color White.
5-96-2-131-X Symmons Temptrol pressure balancing or
mixing valve with combination integral
an
PLUMBING 15400-14
mo
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Precision Plumbing Products or Josam, sizes as shown on plans or
approved equal.
2.10 ACCESS PANELS: Furnish access panels with dry wall flange for wall or
ceiling installation as manufactured by Karp, Milcor, or Zurn, size 14" x
14", or as indicated on plans. Units shall be prime-coated, hinged and lock.
Refer to Architectural drawings for exact locations.
2.11 GAS PIPING:
All low-pressure gas piping 11" W.C. and lower shall be Schedule 40 black steel
pipe with threaded joints and fittings.
All high-pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel with welded joints.
Provide flanged connections at gas valves, flanges shall be welded to piping.
All low-pressure gas piping 3" and larger shall have welded joints, sizes 2'/2" and
smaller shall have threaded joints.
All gas regulators and gas train regulators vent piping shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe and fittings.
'# Gas shut-off valves for sizes 2" and larger shall be lubricated plug valves with
threaded or flanged connections. Rated for 200 PSI W.O.G. with full port area,
through valve, as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company.
All gas shut-offs 1'/2" and smaller shall be bronze ball valves rated for gas service,
400 PSI W.O.G. with full port and lever handle.
Gas piping shall be color coded and provided with identification label.
Provide bronze gas cocks on piping 2" and smaller and steel valves on piping 21/2"
and larger.
This Contractor shall make final connections to boilers.
2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES: Furnish and install all fixtures shown on plans
or specified herein, providing chrome-plated piping for all exposed piping
and trimmings. Each fixture shall have separate key stops for hot and cold
water. The following list fixtures are based on Eljer and Just Company.
PLUMBING 15400-13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Piping insulation shall be flexible, closed-cell elastomeric tubular insulation
with an "R" value of 3.7 per V thickness at 75°F mean temperature and
flame spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Armstrong, Owens-
Corning or Halstead Industries.
Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness insulation.
Longitudinal seams shall be self-sealing or joined with an adhesive. Butt MW
joints shall be joined with an adhesive. Electrical tape will not be accepted.
2.7 VALVES AND SHUT-OFFS: All hot and cold water branch supplies shall
be controlled separately by full size bronze ball valves. Provide drainage
valves with hose ends at all low points, whether indicated on the drawings
or not.
Valves shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be the type
noted. Valves 3 inches and smaller shall have screwed end. Valves larger �..
than 3 inches shall have flanged ends. Gate, globe and ball valves shall be
installed with the stems upright and within 15 degrees of vertical whenever
possible.
Ball valves 2 inches and smaller shall be rated 150 SWP, 600 WOG
meeting WWV 35C Type II, Class A, Style 3. Valves shall be one piece WW
threaded body, solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome ball. Seats and
seals shall be teflon. Stem shall be of blowout-proof design with threaded
adjustable packing follower. Packing shall be retained under full working MR
pressure with handle or handle nut removed. Hammond 8501, Apollo
Series 70, or Nibco T-585.
Furnish and install anti-siphon vacuum breakers on washing machine
control valves, Woodford Model 34-HI or approved equal.
Furnish and install trap primer valves equal to Precision Plumbing
Products, model#PO-500.
2.8 EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANTS: Furnish and install Wood ford Freeze-
less Wall Faucet, model#67 series as required for exterior wall ,.
construction, provide with vacuum breaker.
2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS: Furnish and install on water closets .►
or where shown on plans, water hammer arrestors equal to Zurn #Z-1700,
PLUMBING 15400-12
4m
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAX. SPACING HANGERS
1/2" - 1 1/4" 3/8 inch 5 feet Fig. 269-Ring.
1 1/2" or larger 1/2 inch 10 feet Fig. 65-Cleves
Water piping installed inside chase, behind fixtures, copper piping shall be
supported with Fig. CT-122R copper-plated split tubing clamp, fastened
an directly to pipe and supported with 3/8" threaded rod. Pipe insulation shall
butt-up to clamps.
All new horizontal cast-iron soil, gas, and vent piping shall be supported
with carbon steel clevis Hanger Figure 260 as follows:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING
Up to 3 inch 1/2 inch 5 feet
4 to 5 inch 5/8 inch 5 feet
6 to 8 inch 3/4 inch 5 feet
Where 10 feet lengths of cast-iron pipe is installed, support spacing of 10
feet is acceptable.
W 2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS: Furnish and install pipe
identification markers to comply with OSHA Standards including direction
of flow arrows, as manufactured by Seton or approved equal.
Install identification markers on the following systems:
1. Cold Water
2. Domestic Hot Water
2.5 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS: This Contractor shall furnish and set
all sleeves required. Where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, etc.
all sleeves shall be steel pipe. Where uncovered pipes pass through finished
ceilings, partitions, walls and floors, heavy-chromium escutcheons shall be
provided.
2.6 PIPING INSULATION: All exposed or concealed cold and hot piping
shall be insulated with 1/2" thickness of insulation. This included all new
valves and fittings throughout building.
PLUMBING 15400-11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING: All below-floor piping shall be
service weight cast iron pipe and fittings, with lead and oakum or resilient
gasket joints.
All above-floor soil, and waste 2" and larger shall be service weight cast
iron, joints shall be made up with lead and oakum, or no-hub pipe with
stainless steel couplings.
Above-floor soil, vent and waste 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper
pipe and fittings or DWV pipe and fittings.
All above-floor vent piping 3" and larger shall be copper pipe and fittings
or no-hub pipe and fitting as described above.
All vents below floor slab shall be 2" minimum. .�
PVC piping if acceptable shall be subsitute and installed with in
accordiance of state and local plumbing codes and ordinance. �*
2.2 WATER PIPING (Interior of Building): All hot and cold water piping
shall be hard copper. Type "K" seamless drawn tubing of 99.9% copper
assembled with sweated fittings. All piping shall be supported in an
approved manner and shall be graded to drain back to drainoff cocks,joints
make up with 97/3 silver solder.
2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: All new horizontal copper waste and vent
piping shall be supported with copper-plated Grinnell Model CT-269
adjustable hangers, as follows:
PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAXIMUM SPACING
11/2" or larger 3/8 inch 10 feet
All new horizontal water piping mains and branch runouts shall be
supported with over-sized carbon steel hangers, the hanger shall be
installed on the outside of pipe insulation with 18 gauge protection saddle
between pipe insulation and hanger:
PLUMBING 15400-10
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Contractor, a back-charge will be in order from the General Contractor to
the Subcontractor for such cutting and patching.
1.23 GUARANTEE WARRANTY: The Plumbing Subcontractor shall and
hereby does warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished
under this section shall be free from defects of workmanship and materials
for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of this work. The
Plumbing Subcontractor further agrees that he will, at his own expense,
repair and replace all such defective work and all other work damaged
thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Guarantee
Warranty.
Aw
PLUMBING 15400-9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor will furnish to the Subcontractor a complete and separate set of
blue line prints of pertinent portions of the Contract Drawings for record. On
this set of record drawings on which he shall accurately show the actual
installation of all his work and indicating thereon any variations from the basic
Contract Drawings. All changes, including those issued by addendum, formal
changes, other instructions by the Architect and the Engineer and those due to
all other causes shall be recorded.
B. The marked-up and colored-in prints will be used as a guide for determining
the progress of the work installed. They shall be inspected monthly by the
appropriate Plumbing engineering consultant of the Architect and shall be
corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. ^
C. Before completion of the project, the record drawing prints shall be submitted
to the appropriate engineering consultant, through the Architect, for final
inspection and comments. The prints, along with comments and
recommendations, will be returned to the appropriate subcontractors who shall
then each, at their own expense, prepare a complete set of record "as-built"
tracings by obtaining, through arrangement with the Contractor, An AutoCAD
prepared drawing(s) on CD's a set of mylar transparency prints of the original
tracings, and revising same to incorporate the same information. Quality of
drafting shall be equal to that on originals.
1.20 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: This Contractor shall provide water for
construction use.
1.21 COOPERATION WITH OTHERS: This Contractor shall cooperate to the
fullest extent with all other trades so as best to expedite the entire project.
This Contractor shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as
to sizes, locations, means of support, etc. to all other trades requiring such
information.
1.22 CUTTING AND PATCHING: Cutting and patching in general shall be
the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Subcontractor is
expected to inform the General Contractor sufficiently in advance to allow
incorporation of inserts and the like and to otherwise prevent any
appreciable cutting and patching. Where such is caused by lack of
sufficient notice on the part of the Subcontractor to the General
PLUMBING 15400-8
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
The Plumbing Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the
operation of all Plumbing apparatus and systems.
1.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The Contractor will furnish and submit the instruction manuals in accordance with Section
01700 containing the following additional materials:
Manufacturer's name and model numbers of all components of the system listed on
the equipment schedule drawing, control and wiring diagrams on controllers.
Provide a list of the mechanical contractor and all major subcontractors who have
worked on the PLUMBING portions of the project.
Provide a list of the Manufacturers representative for all equipment listed on the
schedule drawings. The list shall include Company Name, Address, Telephone
Number and Contact Person.
Chart of the numbers, location and function of each valve. Additionally the
contractor shall provide a set of record drawings with the service, function and
oft location of each valve.
Step by step operating instruction including preparation for starting, summer
` operation, winter operation, shutdown and draining.
Maintenance instructions
Possible breakdowns and repairs
Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment listed on the
equipment schedule, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
Parts list of major equipment, including recommended items to be stocked as spare
parts
As-Built drawings for each trade drawn using a computer - aided drafting (CAD)
software package. Drawing files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing
' shall be provided.
PLUMBING 15400-7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 AM
11. Hose Bibbs
12. Backflow Preventers aw
13. Piping
14. Floor cleanouts
15. Garbage disposals o
16. Trap Primers
No fabrication, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken ®,
with respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturers'
detail drawings to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all
to the Architect, until he returns such to the submittor carrying either the
notation "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the
Architect or his Engineer. An "Approved as Corrected" notation means
that changes as indicated must be incorporated or the qualifying acceptance *w
will be considered void.
1.12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Electrical work, including furnishing or
and installation of starters, will be the responsibility of the Division 16000
contractor, unless specifically required otherwise.
Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance
with applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and local
ordinances.
1.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY: A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide .�
for the delivery of all his materials to the building site when required, so as
to carry out his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of
other trades. •"
1.14 TOOLS, SCAFFOLDING, ETC.: All necessary tools, machinery,
scaffolding, and transportation for completion of this contract shall be
provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
1.15 WASTE MATERIAL: All rubbish created by the Plumbing Subcontractor ow
shall be removed by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
1.16 PROTECTION OF WORK: All pipes left open during the progress of the
work shall be capped or plugged at all times.
All fixtures shall be protected by boarding over or by the application of a
standard protective paste covering which is non-injurious to the fixtures.
PLUMBING 15400-6
..
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.9 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Plumbing Subcontractor
shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to be done
and for conditions affecting the location and placement of his equipment
and materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the
specifications, and any work indicted, mentioned or implied in either is to
be considered as specified by both. Should the character of the work
herein contemplated or any matter pertaining thereto be not sufficiently
± explained in the specifications or the drawings, the Plumbing Subcontractor
may apply to the Architect/Engineer for further information and shall
conform to such when given as it may be consistent with the original intent.
! The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes
in location prior to installation at no expense to the Owner. All lines are
diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
1.10 OPERATING PROCEDURE: The Plumbing Subcontractor shall, at all
times, have a foreman on the project authorized to make decisions and
receive instructions. The foreman or superintendent shall not be removed
or replaced without the express approval of the Architect/Engineer after
construction work begins.
1.11 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and
supportive literature for all work in accordance with the General
Conditions. Approval by the Architect/Engineer must be obtained prior to
delivery of material to the site.
Within thirty (30) days of award of contract, the Plumbing Subcontractor
shall submit for the Architect/Engineer's approval, six copies of the
manufacturers' shop drawings, detail prints, and data sheets for the
following items:
40
1. Access Panels.
2. Fixtures and Trim.
3. Valves.
4. Wall Access Cleanouts.
5. Insulation.
6. Vacuum Breakers.
7. Shock Arrestors.
8. Washing machine Valves
9. Floor Drains
10. Exterior Wall Hydrants
PLUMBING 15400-5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,.
Any material or operation specified by reference to the published
specifications or standards of any of the following agencies shall be
complied with:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ,..
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Engineers
(ASHRAE)
3. Institute of Boiler Rating (IBR) �-
4. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)
5. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU)
6. Underwriters Laboratories(UL)
7. United States of America Standards Institute (USAS)
8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
1.6 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME: Specific reference in the
specification to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, type of
construction, etc., by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality.
1.7 MATERIALS AND CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY: All materials
used in the contract shall be new and first class in every respect, without
defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for
which they are intended.
This Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at
a regular working schedule in harmony with other tradesmen on the job.
He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to
the proper and expeditious laying out of his work. ..�
1.8 LAYOUT OF WORK: The arrangement of all piping indicated on the
drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of ••
this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual
arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc.
This Contractor shall layout all work and be responsible for the accuracy of
same. Conditions at the building shall be the determine factor for all
measurements. All overhead piping shall be laid out so as to obtain MW
maximum headroom.
as
PLUMBING 15400-4 am
.s
M
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
go DHCD Project No. 214034
11. Furnish and install washer valves where indicated on plans.
12. Furnish and install hose bibbs in Mech. Room 003.
13. Furnish and install exterior wall hydrants where indicated on plans.
14. Furnish and install in-line backflow preventer and make-up water
lines to boiler making all necessary and final connections.
15. Furnish and install condensate drains from all boilers, piped to floor
drains.
16. Furnish and install garbage disposals in all units.
17. Furnish and install trap primer valves with '/z" type "K" copper to
all floor drains installed.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: The following work in
conjunction with this section of the specifications shall be done under
sections of the specifications by the contractor so designated. This work
shall be done at no expense to the Plumbing Subcontractor.
1. All cutting, patching, blocking, furring-in and painting.
2. Access panels furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed
by General Contractor, unless otherwise noted, in sizes and
locations as shown on the plumbing drawings.
3. All electrical connections.
1.4 PERMITS AND FEES: The Plumbing Subcontractor shall obtain all
necessary permits and approval of the work by the local authorities. He
shall obtain all other permits, licenses or certificates of approval, arrange
for all inspections and pay all fees and charges in connection therewith.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4W
Comply with all codes and standards applying to the work of this contract.
The installation shall conform in all respects to the latest regulation of the
National Building Code, State and Local Plumbing Code and to any City,
Municipal or State regulations covering such work.
PLUMBING 15400-3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK: The scope of work without limiting the
generality thereof, includes the furnishing and installing of the following .�
items of work and related items incidental thereto, shown on Drawings,
and as herein specified:
The following schedule is part, but not necessarily all inclusive of the items
in this section of the contract.
1. Furnish and install a complete cold and hot water for domestic use
to all new fixtures in each building as indicated on plans.
2. Furnish and install a complete soil, waste and vent piping system in
each building to all new fixtures as indicated on plans.
3. Insulate all new domestic cold water and hot water piping installed.
4. Furnish and install all fixtures and trim as specified or called for on
plans.
5. Furnish 14" x 14" access panels for all locations where soil or waste
pipe clean-outs or water shutoff valves are concealed by new walls
or partitions. Access panels installed by General Contractor.
6 Work included in this section as shown on Plumbing Drawings and
including all Architectural Plans, Structural, Heating and Air
Conditioning Plans.
7. Furnish and install new water service and meter as indicated on
plans.
8. Insulate waste and water piping under handicap lavatories and
kitchen sinks.
9. Furnish and install new sanitary line from building as indicated on
plans.
10. Furnish and install floor drains in Mech. Room 00'), laundry, and all
bathrooms as indicated on plans.
AM
PLUMBING 15400-2
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 15400—PLUMBING
(FILED SUB-BID REQUIRED)
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Contract as amended and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Time, Manner and Requirements for Submitting Sub-Bids:
*� 1_ Sub-Bids for the work under this Section shall be for the complete
work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Northampton
Housing Authority, at a time and place stipulated in the "Notice to
Contractors."
2. The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the
envelope:
NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER:
SUB-BID FOR SECTION PLUMBING
3. Each sub-bid submitted for work under this section shall be on
furnished forms, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the
General Laws, as amended. Sub-bid forms may be obtained at the
10 office of the Architect.
4. Sub-bids filed shall be accompanied by a BID BOND or CASH or
CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER'S CHECK or
40 CASHIERS CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust
company payable to the Northampton Housing Authority in the
amount of five percent of the bid. A sub-bid accompanied by any
on other form of bid deposit than those specified will be rejected.
C. Sub-Sub-Bid Requirements: None
0
an
PLUMBING 15400-1
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August OS 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 g '
loss, operating temperatures, support spacing,joining methods, and thermal
40 expansion and contraction.
B. The CPVC sprinkler system shall be hydraulically calculated using a Hazen-
Williams C-Factor of 150, and designed in accordance with the Standard for
Installation of Sprinkler Systems,NFPA 13.
C. The maximum design temperature/pressure rating shall not exceed 175 psi at
150 F (315 psi at 73 F).
3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Installation practices such as pipe support spacing, bracing, allowance for
thermal expansion/contraction, solvent cementing and handling and storage
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the UL Listing
which includes installation limitation.
3.2 TESTS
A. NFPA No. 13-2002. Provide permanent test connection with gage and
valve on house side of main shutoff gate valve.
B. Test all alarm initiating devices.
C. Flush the system and test all work in the presence of the Architect and/or
Engineer and as required by NFPA. All piping shall be hydrostatically
tested. Exterior piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for a
period of two hours. Leakage shall not exceed that specified in NFPA 24.
Interior piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 175 psi for a period of 4
hours. At the completion of testing submit fully executed copies of
Contractors Material and Test Certificate for both above ground and
underground piping.
END OF SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-7
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
Couplings may be of the bolted rolled grooved type.
Grooves shall be rolled only.
3. Fittings:
a. Cast iron screwed: ANSI B 16.4.
b. C.1. flanged: ANSI B 16.1.
c. Malleable iron screwed: ANSI B 16.3.
d. Steel weld fitting: ANSI B16.5, ANSI B16.9, ANSI
B 16.11, ASNI B 16.2 5, and ASTM A234.
e. Grooved couplings and mechanical fitting; UL and FM
listed, malleable iron, 500 psi working pressure; ASTM
A47. Coupling gaskets shall be butyl rubber or EPDM
Compound.
f. Adjustable drop nipple: Black steel, 64mm to 127mm,
consisting of body, nipple, retaining ring, O-ring, and
rollers. UL and FM approved, 175 psi SWP.
m.
g. Hooking collar assembly: May be optionally used to
connect sprinkler or drop nipples to sprinkler pipe. go
Housing shall be malleable iron or ductile iron. UL or FM
approved, 175 psi SWP.
4W
h. Sections of branch lines, cross-mains, feed mains, or risers
may be welded subject to limitations outlined in NFPA-13-
2002. w
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Furnish and install Watts double check valve model# 007, 1 %Z" or approved
equal.. Mount 3'-0" off finished floor. Provide in accordance with NFPA
13R. Refer to Fire Protection plan for location and details.
PART 3 -EXECUTION MR
3.0 SYSTEM DESIGN
aft
A. System design shall be in accordance with standard industry practice for fire
sprinkler systems and the manufacturer's instructions. The design shall take MW
into consideration such factors as pressure and flow requirements, friction
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-6 "'
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
O
A. Sprinkler heads shall be as scheduled on the drawings. All sprinklers shall
be UL listed and shall not utilize O rings
B. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one cabinet. Cabinet shall have an
assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler
head wrench for each type head. Mount on wall along side riser valve.
C. Water flow switch equal to Potter VSR-F with retard.
wr
F. Tamper switches shall be Notifier or Potter Electric Signal Company, and
shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system.
1. For 2" and smaller, valves shall be Model PMS-O plug-type
switches.
2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. All socket type joints shall be made up employing solvent cements that meet
or exceed the requirements of ASTM F493. The standard practice for safe
handling of solvent cements, shall be in accordance with ASTM F402.
Solvent cement shall be listed by the NSF for with potable water, and
approved by the BlazeMaster CPVC manufacturers.
B. The piping systems shall be constructed from materials extruded/molded by
manufacturers using the Noveon B1astMaster CPVC compound.
C. Interior
1. Pipe:
a. Black steel, Schedule 40, ASTM A53, or A795; Schedule
10, ASTM A795.
2. Joints:
a. Schedule 40, black steel, pipe: Screwed joints, ANSI B2.1,
welded joints, AWS D10.9, mechanical grooved couplings,
joined by a UL or FM approved combination of bolted
couplings, gaskets, and grooves. Grooves may b rolled or
cut and be dimensionally compatible with the coupling.
b. Schedule 10, black steel pipe: Welded joints, AWS D10.9,
and is UL and FM approved mechanical couplings.
„ FIRE PROTECTION 15300-5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
ow
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Scheduling of work shall be coordinated with Architect, Engineer, General Am
Contractor and Owner.
1.9 VALVE TAGS,NAMEPLATES, CHARTS
A. For each gate, globe and automatic valve; 2-inch diameter brass tag,
stamped white numerals, secured with chain.
B. Numbers to correspond with Record Drawings and a framed, typed listing
shall be provided.
C. All equipment numbers,ratings to be attached permanently.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall guarantee all work from date of
acceptance, to be free of defects. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall make all
repairs, perform all service and replace all defective work and equipment
during the one-year guarantee at his own expense; there shall be no cost to
the Owner.
..
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The General Contractor will furnish, free of charge to Sub-contractor, a me
complete and separate set of corrected shop drawings of pertinent portions
of the Contract Drawings for record drawing purposes. Contractor shall
maintain current, at the site, this set of record drawings on which he shall am
accurately show the actual installation of all his work, and indicating thereon
any variations from the basic Contract Drawings. All changes, including
.R
those issued by addendum, formal changes, other instructions by the
Architect and the Engineer and those due to all other causes shall be
recorded. Include, but do not limit to, changes in sizes, grades, locations, am
and dimensions, and indicate with dimensions and grades all underground
pipe, conduit, cables, etc., showing locations of all valves, junctions,
connections, ends and other pertinent data. s
B. Before completion of project, a set of corrected shop drawings shall be
issued to Engineer for review and approval. •o
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
so
2.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM (WET)
ow
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-4 -m
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3. American Gas Association (AGA).
40
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
5. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU).
6. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
7. United States of America Standards Association(USAS).
8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH CODE
A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations
governing such work or as may be required by Local or State Ordinances or
State Building Code.
B. Where the provisions of Contract Documents conflict with any codes, riles
or regulations, the latter shall govern.
C. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
4W regulations, the contract provisions shall govern unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.
so 1.6 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approval
on of the work by the local authorities. He shall obtain all other permits,
licenses or certificates of approval, arrange all inspections and pay all fees
and charges in connection therewith.
on
1.7 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
' A. At the completion of the project, the Sprinkler Subcontractor shall submit
three (3) complete sets of manuals containing equipment data, maintenance
requirements and parts lists for each item of equipment. Manuals shall be in
o three-ring hard-cover binders.
B. Manuals shall be approved by Engineer prior to delivery to Owner.
"" ' FIRE PROTECTION 15300-3
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
am
from the building sprinkler service flow switches or existing alarm
check valves to the building fire alarm systems and to the Fire
Department call system and electric power to panels by Electrical
Subcontractor.
C. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed no
at the end of this section.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND REVIEWS 40
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specifications sections. am
1. Sprinkler heads. am
2. Tamper switches.
am
3. Water flow switch.
4. Spare sprinklers with cabinet and wrench. ,,
5. Valves
6. Backflow preventer
."
B. No fabrication, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken
with respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturer's detail
drawings to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all to the
Architect, until he returns such to the submit or carrying either the notation
"Approved" or "Approved as Noted" as indicated by the Architect or his
.4
Engineer.
C. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall assume the cost of and entire
responsibility for any changes in the work as shown on the Drawings which
may be occasioned by approval of materials other than as specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Any material or equipment component or operation specified by reference to
the published specifications of a manufacturer or any of the following shall
comply with the requirements of the current specifications or standard listed.
In case of a conflict between referenced specifications and the project
specifications, the project specifications shall govern:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-2
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 05, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
an
am SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary General Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
40
A. The scope of the work under this Section consists of furnishing and
installing of all labor, materials, scaffolding, rigging, equipment, services
Am and incidentals necessary to complete all Sprinkler Systems work and
without limiting the generality thereof, including the following:
g. 1. New wet sprinkler system for the building. Each system includes
water flow switches, electrical bell, inspectors tests, tamper switches,
and all necessary valves and fittings for a complete system in
w accordance with NFPA No. 13R, and The City of Northampton
Water Department requirements.
w* 2. This Subcontractor shall coordinate his work with the work of all
other trades.
so 3. Complete testing of new systems.
4. Obtaining all permits and paying all fees associated with this work.
5. Preparation of shop drawings and approval prior to fabrication of all
components of system, all in accordance with the approval and
recommendations of the NFPA 13R and local and state regulations
and ordinances and Owner's Insurance Rating Company's specific
40 requirements.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Painting of finished work as noted.
2. All chases, and openings.
3. Wiring of electrically supervised valves to trouble alanns in panels,
wiring from trouble alarm to Fire Department call system, wiring
FIRE PROTECTION 15300-1
AM
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 No
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
am
2.1 DRAPERY TRACKS
A. Manually Operated Track: so
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: ,,W
a. Kirsch
b. Silent Gliss USA Inc. ow
C. Springs Industries, Inc.
2. Construction: C Type aluminum, or steel for mounting at interval of not more than 24
inches o.c.
a. Lengths and Configurations: Sized to fit windows.
b. Support Capability: 45 lb mounted on track length indicated.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drapery, and fabricated from
metal compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two
fasteners to fasten each bracket to supporting construction.
MW
4. Operation: Baton
a. Draw: One way, stack or two way,center opening.
am
5. Carriers: Rollers with hooks.
no
PART 3 -EXECUTION
o
3.1 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION
A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at
height and location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings.
3.2 ADJUSTING �^
A. Test and adjust each track to produce unencumbered, smooth operation.
END OF SECTION 12497
.W
DRAPERY AND TRACKS 12497-2
2 of 2 a►
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
w DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 12497-DRAPERY AND TRACKS
PART 1 -GENERAL
as
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes drapery tracks.
,r 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
on 1. Tracks: Include maximum weights of draperies that can be supported.
B. Shop Drawings:
so
1. Tracks: Show installation and anchorage details and locations of controls.
on C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: As follows:
40 1. Tracks: 18 inches long, with carriers, controls, and accessories.
40 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide drapery tracks operated by pull cords
w complying with ANSI A100.1.
No
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before track.
40 B. Scheduling: Do not deliver or install tracks until after other finish work, including painting, is
complete and spaces are otherwise ready for occupancy.
DRAPERY AND TRACKS 12497 - 1
I of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 .,.,
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of �*
glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer,that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12494
ROLLER SHADES 12494-4
4 of 4 ..
+0
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass
1. Fabric Width: As required to meet window widths.
2. Pattern: Plain
3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
4. Bottom Hem: Straight
C. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and
wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the
weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from
support brackets;with manufacturer's standard method] for attaching shade material.
D. Direction of Roll: Regular,from back of roller.
E. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel.
F. Shade Operation: Manual; with spring roller lift operator.
40 1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard hand-grip engaged pull.
go 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the
roller,a bottom bar,and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1, Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
40 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch
from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each
shade is installed.
40 D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
roller,and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
+0 E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate;and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
40
F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation
40 including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.
ROLLER SHADES 12494-3
40 3 of 4
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,m
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer. "'
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method MW
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
C. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-
response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate *�
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. ..
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ROLLER SHADES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas, Inc.; Hunter Douglas Window Fashions Division
3. Levolor; Levolor-Kirsch Window Fashions; a Newell Rubbermaid Company.
4. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO.
MW
ROLLER SHADES 12494 -2
2 of 4 ••
4M
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
04 SECTION 12494-ROLLER SHADES
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Aw,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roller shades.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
** 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller
shade indicated.
2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches square, with specified treatments applied.
Mark face of material.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
+.r E. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes,and performance.
w
ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 1
1 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24
ON inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood
framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24
inches o.c.
as
E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into
underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with
IN glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose.
1. Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories.
so 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
F. Pest Control: Prior to kitchen cabinet installation, sprinkle 1 tablespoon of boric acid per 2
""" square feet on top of wall cabinets and apply a gel type roach control such as "Maxforce" by
Clorox to rear of base and wall cabinets.
40
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 12356
40
OR
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356- 7
,�, 7 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
6. Drawer Push-In Stops: In addition to silencers, provide stops mounted on cabinet side to
prevent the drawer from being slammed into the face of the cabinet. Stops shall have a
rubber bumper to reduce shock and noise. If not provided by manufacturer, Contractor ..
shall provide and site apply.
a. Provide floor type door stop,Ives#434 or equivalent.
L. Shelves: 5/8-inch-thick plywood.
M. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners.
Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends
and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops,bottoms,and backs into end panels.
N. Silencers: Provide minimum of two foam rubber bumpers for door.
O. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. aw
2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS .m
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with
backsplash), backsplash,and endsplash style: aw
1. Front: Rolled.
2. Cove: Cove molding. MR
3. Backsplash: Curved edge with scribe.
4. Endsplash: Square edge without scribe.
ow
B. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch thick.
1. For countertops at sinks and lavatories use exterior-grade plywood.
C. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims.
Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,
scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.
B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete
installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-6
6 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
40 C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded.
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.4 CABINETS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
1. Southeast Millwork Mfg.
2. Wellborne Cabinets.
3. Omega Cabinetry Ltd.
B. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet fronts. Edges shaped
for continuous finger grip at all sides.
C. Cabinet Style: Face Frame.
D. Door and Drawer Fronts: Flush door 3/4 inch thick, with 1/4-inch-thick,veneer-faced plywood
on doors.
E. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or doweled joints.
F. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.
G. Wall-Hung-Unit Back Panels: 1/2-inch-thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and
to top and bottom rails.
H. Base-Unit Back Panels: 1/2-inch-thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels and to top
and bottom rails.
I. Toe Boards: 3/4 inch PT solid lumber attached between end panels and extended from bottom
panel to floor.
J. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face
frame.
K. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from
interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners. Join front to subfront with a minimum of four mounting screws.
2. Subfronts,Backs,and Sides: 11/16-inch thick solid wood.
3. Bottoms: 1/4-inch thick plywood.
4. Silencers: Provide four foam rubber bumpers as silencers on each drawer.
5. Drawer Pull-Out Stops: Provide stops at drawers to prevent accidental pull-out.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356- 5
5 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
4. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate complying
with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from cabinet
manufacturer's full range.
C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects. Same
species as exposed surfaces. ,
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs of
same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces.
D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no
defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA Al 56.9, of type, size, style, .�.►
material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Pulls: Wire pulls. In Barrier Free units only.
C. Hinges: Semiconcealed(wraparound)butt hinges for overlay doors.
D. Drawer Guides: Heavy duty Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; with nylon-tired,
ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091. Minimum
capacity of 100 lb.
1. Knape&Vogt,#KV1305 or equal. (Proprietary Item)
E. Extra Stock: Furnish twelve (12) sets of drawer guides and twenty-four (24) hinges as
replacement parts to owner.
2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the .�
following:
a. Formica Corp.
b. Lamin-Art.
C. Nevamar Company, LLC.
d. Wilsonart International. "Crystal"
2. Grade: HGS and HGP.
3. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL.
4. Grade for Wall Application:VGS.
5. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from countertop manufacturer's
full range.
6. Finish: Increased abrasion resistant finish. 4W
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-4
4 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify
dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.
D. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements
ww after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of
casework.
B. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops, backsplashes, or endsplashes.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Certified Wood Materials: Provide cabinets made from wood and wood-based materials
that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited
certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
2. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
3. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
4. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
5. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.
6. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
7. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
B. Exposed Materials:
1. Exposed Wood Species: Red or white Oak.
a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed
surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character
markings.
b. Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects.
„ 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces
and Grade C backs of same species as faces.
w
a. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- thick, solid-wood edging of
same species as face veneer.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356 - 3
40 3 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 •
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches,for each species.
2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species.
3. Solid wood trim with transparent finish, 8 inches long, for each species.
4. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches.
5. Exposed hardware, for each type of item.
6. One full-size, 16 inches wide, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and
drawers but without countertop.
7. One full-size, 12 inches wide, finished wall cabinet complete with hardware, doors, and
adjustable shelves.
8. One full-size plastic-laminate countertop, with backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, in
configuration specified.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Cabinets. Obtain cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of cabinets by
referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' cabinets of
similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the
Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements."
C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:
I. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.
a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal .,
affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the
above standard.
2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet-
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for
trimming and fitting.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-2
2 of 7
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
OR DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 12356-RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
w
PART1 -GENERAL
40
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
s
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Kitchen cabinets.
2. Vanity cabinets.
3. Plastic-laminate countertops,backsplashes, endsplashes,and on walls at countertops.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances"for appliances.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"for sinks and plumbing fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
w A. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including
visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including
interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined
as "semiexposed."
C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including
sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly
against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility
cabinets are defined as "concealed."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
Iw
1. Cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
go
3. Cabinet hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and
attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and
backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356- 1
1 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
+A
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready
for operation.
END OF SECTION 11451
w
w
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 7
•o 7 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
b. Door Storage: Dairy compartment.
C. Interior light in compartment. awl
5. Freezer Features:
a. Ice storage bins. an
b. Circulator fan.
6. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified by ARAM HRF-1 at not more than
688kWh/year under average conditions for a refrigerated volume of 14.9 cu. ft..
7. Temperature Controls: Separate temperature controls for each compartment.
8. Front Panel: Manufacturer's standard.
9. Appliance Color: White.
2.4 FINISHES,GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Color-Coated Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with
manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, "
baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation .�
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation. .�
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are '
completely concealed.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -6
6 of 7 *
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3. Electric Wall Oven(s): One in barrier free units; standard features include the following:
40
a. Oven Capacity: 3.9 cu. ft..
b. Oven Performance: Baking with broiler.
C. Broiler Type: Broiler in top of oven.
d. Oven Door: Counter-balanced, removable, porcelain enamel with observation
window and full-width handle.
e. Power/Rating Requirement:
1) Oven: 208-240 V, 20A. Self-cleaning.
+�w
f. Finish: Porcelain-enamel steel.
1) Color: White
2) Width: 27 inches.
D. Exhaust Hood:
40
1. Manufacturer: Broan,41000 Series (PROPRIETARY ITEM)
go 2. Type: 30-inch, undercabinet,nonvented,recirculating range hood.
3. Exhaust Fan: Two-speed fan.
4. Fan Control: Hood fan switch, with separate hood-light control switch.
5. Finish: Baked enamel.
em
a. Color: White.
6. Standard features include the following:
a. Permanent, washable aluminum mesh filter(s).
b. Built-in fluorescent lighting.
2.3 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES
A. Refrigerator/Freezer:
1. Basis-of-Design Product:
a. General Electric,GTHI5BBR
b. General Electric, GSH22KGRWW: Barrier Free unit.
2. Type: Freestanding, with freezer on top, except side by side in barrier free units.
3. Storage Capacity:
a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 10.77 cu.ft.. (12.87 in B.F. units)
b. Freezer Volume: 3.86 cu. ft.. (7.04 in B.F. units
"'"
C. Shelf Area: 2 adjustable wire shelves, 17.2 sq. ft.. (18.1 in B.F. units)
4. Refrigerator Features:
on
a. Compartment Storage: Vegetable crisper.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 5
"' 5 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1) Coil Type: 2 - 2200 W, 1 - 1200 W, and 1 - 2200 W dual element <Insert
burner combination and ratings>.
b. Size: 30 inches.
C. Top Material: Porcelain-enamel steel.
1) Finish: Black.
d. Controls Location: Front. .»
e. Power/Rating Requirement: 208-240 V,40 A.
B. Range:
1. Manufacturer:
a. General Electric Company
b. Hotpoint
C. Maytag
d. Whirlpool Corporation
2. Basis-of-Design Product:
a. General Electric, JBP21 WH.
3. Freestanding Electric Range:
a. Size: 30 inch.
b. Electric Burner Elements: Four.
1) Coil Type: 2 -2200 W, 1 - 1200 W,and 1 - 2200 W dual element.
C. Oven(s): One, Self-cleaning
1) Oven Capacity: 5.0 cu. ft..
2) Oven Performance: Baking.
3) Broiler Type: Broiler in top of oven.
d. Finish: Porcelain-enamel cooktop.
1) Color: White
C. Wall Oven: Barrier Free Units
i. Manufacturer:
a. General Electric Company
b. Hotpoint
C. Maytag
d. Whirlpool Corporation
2. Basis-of-Design Product:
a. General Electric, JKP20WFWW.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -4
4 of 7 *"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
F. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
4= (estimated annual operating costs)and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance
Labeling Rule.
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling
program.
w 1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance
specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Electric Range: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner
elements.
2. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on defects in the
magnetron tube.
" 3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed
refrigeration system.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on the
product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
4' product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 COOKING APPLIANCES
A. Cooktop:
1. Manufacturer:
a. General Electric Company
b. Hotpoint
40 C. Maytag
d. Whirlpool Corporation
+0 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation or a
comparable product by one of the following:
go a. General Electric JP328BF
3. Electric Cooktop: Barrier Free Units
no a. Four electric burner elements.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -3
m 3 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
1. Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.
2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire
Project.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for .■
product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:
1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances
that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
3. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.
D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply
with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal '
Accessibility Standards."Commonwealth of Massachusetts Barrier Free Requirements.
1. Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches above the
floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches, horizontal side reach no more than
24 inches, and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Range or Cooktop: Provide knee clearance for forward approach of 27 inches high, 30
inches wide, and 11 inches horizontally; toe space clearance of 9 inches high and 17
inches horizontally; with insulated underside of cooktop to prevent burns, shocks, or
abrasions. Provide top surface 34 inches above the floor, with controls that do not
require reaching across burners.
3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide 50 percent of freezer space within 54 inches of the floor.
E. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following ARAM standards:
1. Dishwashers: ARAM DW-DW 1.
2. Electric Ranges: AHAM ER-1.
3. Clothes Dryers: AHAM HLD-1.
4. Household Refrigerators: AHAM HRF-1.
5. Household Freezers: ARAM HRF-1.
6. Trash Compactors: AHAM TC-1.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2
2 of 7 ..
ew
May McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
Rx
PART ] -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cooking equipment including:
w
a. Electric cooktops.
b. Electric ranges.
C. Electric wall ovens.
2. Ventilation range hoods,unvented.
3. Refrigerator/freezers.
B. Owner-Furnished Material: Washer and Dryer.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" for standard cabinets and countertops that
receive residential appliances.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing" for water distribution piping connections to residential
appliances.
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing" for drainage and vent piping connections to residential
appliances.
4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing"for kitchen sinks.
5. Division 16 Section "Electrical'for services and connections to residential appliances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Ow A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions
of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.
B. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1
go 1 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1. Bradley Corporation or equal(see schedule for model number).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and
with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Solid blocking behind grab bars, towel
bars and shower curtain rods is specified in Section 06100 Rough Carpentry.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
"�` 3 of 3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ...
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-
inch minimum nominal thickness.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
aw
D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
!.
E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2(moderate service). go
G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503,Mirror Glazing Quality,clear-glass mirrors,nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.2 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on the proprietary products
indicated.
1. Bradley Corp.or equal(see schedule for Bradley model numbers).
B. Medicine Cabinet:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley#175 or equal.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2
2 of 3 -■
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES (PROPRIETARY ITEM)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. (Proprietary)Private-use bathroom accessories.
2. Custodial accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
+* and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
0 A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
40
sm
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1
40 1 of 3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
State Aided Housing 167-2
Department of Housing and Community Development
Jane Wallis Gumble, Director
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Willard Mitt Romney, Governor
Mary McColgan Apartments
City of Northampton
Mary Clare Higgins,Mayor
N Northampton Housing Authority
Joseph DeFazio, Chair
Dr. John Andrulis
Lynne Blaisdell
Maureen Carney
Michael D. Murphy
XXXXXXXX
General Contractor
Juster Pope Frazier,LLP
Architect
2006
°
0
z,_0
END OF SECTION 10550
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 7 of 7 10550-7
11 NIMM
.R
May McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate
properly. .m
C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
ow
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal
specialty manufacturer. �.
E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. .�
3.5 PLAQUE INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install specialties to manufacturer's recommendations
2. Do not install before completion of work by other trades on adjacent surfaces.
B. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1. Clean surfaces at time of installation and before final acceptance by owner.
2. Repair all surfaces damaged during installation.
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550- 6
6 OF 7 ••
00
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
OR DHCD Project No. 214034
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Unless otherwise indicated, finish steel surfaces exposed to view with baked-enamel or powder-
coated finish.
B. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
+ C. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply
manufacturer's standard baked-polymer finish consisting of a thermosetting polyester or acrylic
urethane powder topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface
preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3,1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. For the record,prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where recessed units will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
*0 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions and roughing-in drawings.
1. Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements.
B. Vertical Apartment Mailboxes: Install vertical apartment mailboxes with center of outgoing
mail slot at 48 inches maximum above finished floor.
? 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Obtain written final approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection.
3.4 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary P rotective coverings and strippable films if an y, as postal specialties are
installed,unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550- 5 5OF7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Provide casting free of defects, with ground beveled borders, dark statuary finish and
manufacturer's standard pebble texture background. Borders and raised copy to be hand
tooled and buffed to manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Copy as shown on
page 10550-7.
C. VINYL SELF-ADHERING CAPITAL LETTERS
1. Capital Helvetica letters—A thru F- 3"High
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. .W
Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid,
and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal
edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.
B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather
to exclude water penetration.
C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where
fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing.
D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished
surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux,
and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment.
F. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
A
2.4 FINISHES,GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish postal specialties after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast. ,■
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550-4
4OF7
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
B. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Steel(CS),Type B.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating
designation; or electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet,ASTM A 591/A 591M,Class C coating.
• D. Steel Anchor Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or 55,hot-dip galvanized.
E. Stainless-Steel Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade BBM,
Type 316.
2.2 VERTICAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES
A. USPS-Approved, Vertical Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of 7 compartments enclosed
within wall box; with inside dimensions of each compartment not less than 16 inches high by 5
'/2 inches wide by 6 3/4 inches deep. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming
mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and tilting inner compartments forward as a
group. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door.
Comply with USPS STD-413.
1. Available Products:
a. Salsbury Industries; 3507 Series, or approved equal.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Mail Delivery: USPS.
' 4. Compartments: Provide 7.
5. Compartment Doors and Frames: Fabricated from striated, extruded aluminum. Equip
each compartment door with lock, slot in face of door to receive tenant identification,and
concealed, full-length, flush hinge on one side. Provide one compartment with outgoing
mail slot.
w a. Tenant Identification: Laminated,black plastic tabs, engraved with number.
b. Compartment Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder cam locks capable of at least
1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each
compartment differently.
6. Frames: Manufacturer's standard ganged and nested units.
7. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet.
8. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows:
a. Anodic Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. CAST BRONZE PLAQUE
1. Furnish and install a 24"H x 30"L x 1/4"T cast bronze plaque with concealed mounting
posts,at location indicated by Architect.
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550-3
'"' 3OF7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 .�
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of
each corresponding lock and key number.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed postal specialties with wall construction.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal specialties. ""
1.7 WARRANTY so
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: aw
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of hardware, except door locks.
C, Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal *m
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Furnish not less than 4 for every mailbox lock or fraction thereof, of each type of
compartment door lock installed.
2. Furnish 3 extra locks.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated,and as follows:
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550-2
2OF7 '""
w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
MR SECTION 10550-MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
PARTI -GENERAL
OR
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
go
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Vertical apartment mailboxes.
2. Plaque
3. Apartment identification letters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
4w
and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
40 D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-by-6-inch
square Samples.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of postal specialty required to comply with USPS
regulations, signed by product manufacturer.
1. Include written approval by Postmaster General.
F. Maintenance Data: For postal specialties and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS Nothampton postmaster approval for installed
postal specialties to be served by USPS, and confirmation of Northampton post office
installation of USPS lock.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10550- 1
""'"` 1 OF 7
4M
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
OR DHCD Project No. 214034
3.2 INSTALLATION
4M A. All wall panels shall be installed with as few seams as possible.
B. Apply adhesive to back of panel and position panel in place. Apply silicone waterproofing
me around all plumbing and in between the panel and wall sections.
C. Trim and edge exposed ends with plastic extrusions.
ift
D. All perimeter edges between new panels and existing walls must be permanently caulked.
3.3 CLEANUP
A. Remove all waste resulting from this work and leave each area clean upon completion.
END OF SECTION 09981
on
go
w
SOLID SURFACE WALL FINISH 09981 -3
3 of 3
sm
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 an
PART 2-PRODUCTS
dw
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be new, free of defects impairing their strength, durability, or apperarance, sm
and of best commercial quality for purposes noted.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a minimum of two color
selections of products by one of the following:
1. Avonite, Inc.
2. E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company—"Corian Surfaces®"
3. Formica Corp.
4. Swan Corporation, The—"Swanstone®"
C. Caulking shall be watertight, mildew resistant silicone or sealant equal to or better than Dow
Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702.
D. Adhesives used shall be fire, water,and mildew resistant in their cured state.
E. Plastic shall be homogenous solid sheets of filled plastic resin with the following characteristics.
1. Thickness as shown
2. Fire retardant per ASTM D-635 and U.L. listing under UL-94-V-O
3. Satin gloss finish resistant to chipping, cracking, acids, chemicals, stains or
discolorations.
4. Repairable against unnatural abuse.
F. Provide standard type trim.
1. Supply 2 surface mounted corner soap dishes for each tub surround or shower enclosure
fabricated from solid surfacing material for use with wall system, supplied by wall finish
manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Remove all foreign materials such as paint, soap,film, etc., from all existing tub surfaces.
B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
SOLID SURFACE WALL FINISH 09981 -2
2 of 3
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 09981 —SOLID SURFACE WALL FINISH
PARTI -GENERAL
w■
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
so
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid surface tub/shower surrounds and wainscot.
40
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for accessories which penetrate wall
finish.
2. Division 15 Section"Plumbing"for fittings which penetrate wall finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with referenced standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),
Underwriters Laboratories(U.L)and ISSFA-2
1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Wall surrounds shall be installed by the manufacturer and guaranteed for a period of three (3)
years from date of substantial completion.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to product data, submit the following:
1. Samples of plastic material, all accessories, caulking and fastening devices.
40 2. Shop drawings showing proposed methods of installation for actual field conditions.
3. Maintenance information and repair instructions.
SOLID SURFACE WALL FINISH 09981 - 1
4W 1of3
on
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Steel Substrates:
I. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1 E.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd(eggshell).
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 53J.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
w
C. Topcoat: Interior latex(semigloss).
D. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors.
on 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex(semigloss).
E. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.213.
ew a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (eggshell). Semigloss in
bathrooms and kitchen ceilings, mildew resistant in bathrooms. Low sheen on all
other ceilings.
F. Wood Doors: Alkyd varnish system:MPI INT 6.1C.
1. Seal Coat:Alkyd sanding sealer.
2. Two finish coats: Interior varnish semi-gloss
END OF SECTION 09912
'" INTERIOR PAINTING 7 of 7 09912
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
.
breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to,the following: ap
1. Mechanical Work:
ow
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Pipe hangers and supports.
C. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets .m
and outlets.
e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material. "`
f. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
No
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
C. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have afactory-primed finish for field
painting.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
.m
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by ow
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of no
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates,Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
INTERIOR PAINTING 6 of 7 09912
W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
Re DHCD Project No. 214034
3.2 PREPARATION
4' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated.
„w B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-
applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
F. Wood Substrates:
�w
I. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
G. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before fmal installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
INTERIOR PAINTING 5 of 7 09912
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
2.6 ALKYD PAINTS:
A. Interior Alkyd (Semi-Gloss)MPI #47(Gloss level 5) an
1. VOC Content:E Range of E2
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. ow
2.7 LATEX PAINTS «.
A. High-Performance Architectural Latex(Eggshell): MPI#139(Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. sm
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.
B. High-Performance Architectural Latex(Semi-gloss): MPI 4141 (Gloss Level 5). ...
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 6.
C. Interior Varnish(Semi-gloss):MPI#74,Gloss level 5,Alkyd type
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2
2.8 FLOOR COATINGS Not
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer(Water Based): MPI#99.
am
I. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions. .R
INTERIOR PAINTING 4 of 7 09912 ,�„
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Benjamin Moore& Co.
2. California Paints.
' 3. ICI Paints.
4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
5. Sherwin-Williams Company(The).
w
2.2 PAINT,GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
wr
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI#50.
L VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
C. Alkyd Sanding Sealer: MPI#102.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer(Water Based): MPI#107.
I. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI 4134.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI#39.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
INTERIOR PAINTING 3 of 7 09912
AM
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 .m
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat am
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. sm
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area. am
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
I. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. a`
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved .»
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual'for products and paint systems indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are ,.
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 ,
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS �.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
INTERIOR PAINTING 2 of 7 09912 ,,,,,
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
w
SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING
40
(FILED SUB-BID)
go
PART I - GENERAL
on
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
aw A. Exterior Painting is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form for
General Bid. The work under this Filed Sub-Bid Section is combined as one Filed Sub-Bid
with the work Sections 09911 Exterior Painting.
40
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority,
as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and
place for submissions of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered T-1, L-0 thru L-7, S-1
thru S-5, ALL thru A1.3, A2.1 thru A2.2, A3.1 thru A3.3, A4.1, A5.1 thru A5.2, FP-1,
"* P-1, P-2, M-1, ES-1, E-1, E-2.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
40 Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
40
1. Concrete.
2. Steel.
on 3. Galvanized metal.
4. Wood.
5. Gypsum board.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
40 Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors"for shop priming of flush wood doors.
4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates (work performed under one Filed Sub-Bid).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
+!� INTERIOR PAINTING I of 7 09912
SM
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005 MW
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and railing assemblies.
ow
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(semigloss).
C. Wood Panel Substrates: Including soffits.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.4G.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(semigloss).
END OF SECTION 09911
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
6 of 6 '""
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
W wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
F. Fiber Cement Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond
of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
' 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish,color,and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking,runs, sags,ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
so defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
I. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 53H.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex(semigloss).
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
5 of 6
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 3 -EXECUTION
am
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter .�
as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- .�
applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
E. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. ..
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime all edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
sm
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
4 of 6 am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Benjamin Moore& Co.
2. California Paints.
3. ICI Paints.
4. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc.
5. Sherwin-Williams Company(The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
system indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#134.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI#5.
" 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#I I (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
,,, 3 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: «�
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
I. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. ..
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. **
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
2 of 6 "'
�s
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
(FILED SUB-BID)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Exterior Painting is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Paragraph D, Item 2 of the Form for
General Bid. The work under this Filed Sub-Bid Section is combined as one Filed Sub-Bid
with the work under Section 09912 Interior Painting.
B. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the Form For Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority,
as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. The time and
place for submissions of Filed Sub-Bids are set forth in the Invitation to Bid.
ww
C. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered T-1,L-0 thru L-7, S-1
thru S-5, AL I thru A1.3, A2.1 thru A2.2, A3.1 thru A3.3, A 4.1, A5.1 thru A5.2, FP-1,
so M-1, ES-1 E-1,E-2.
ON
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Galvanized metal.
2. Wood and Plywood
3. Fiber Cement Siding: Exposed Edges and Trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on interior substrates(work performed under one Filed Sub-Bid).
2. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming hollow metal
doors and frames.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911
'"" 1 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned. „
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
F. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates .,
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. ,s
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. .m
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply Five(5) coats protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil,
visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood
panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects
over panels without moving panels.
4M
END OF SECTION 09651
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
6 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
w DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
40 contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound with Portland cement base to fill cracks, holes,
and depressions in substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ww 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
40 manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with alternate pattern of grain.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
ON including
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets,and similar openings.
w
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
' telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections.
ON 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
ON, permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
no RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
5 of 6
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 Am
2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or am
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
s
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated ow
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
C. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances,moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified •■
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing: 00
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of am
water/1000 sq. in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Submit report results to architect.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
4 of 6
4"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
am DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
as
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
�w
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE
+w.
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
2. Johnsonite;
3. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.;
4. Roppe Corporation;
B. Type(Material Requirement): TS(rubber,vulcanized thermoset)or TP(rubber,thermoplastic).
C. Group(Manufacturing Method): I(solid,homogeneous)or II(layered).
a.
D. Style: Cove(with top-set toe).
w E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F. Height: 4 inches.
G. Lengths: 4'-0"long pieces.
H. Outside Corners: Premolded.
I. Inside Corners: Job formed.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.5 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products;
2. Johnsonite;
3. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.;
4. Roppe Corporation;
B. Material: Rubber.
4"
40
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
3 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 a.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg or ow
more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation. ow
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
ow
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
MW
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 5%of the type,color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. As indicated by
manufacturer's designations.
2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Tile(VCT): ASTM F 1066.
1. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.;Excelon Imperial Texture or equal. (Proprietary item)
B. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile).
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
2of6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
No DHCD Project No. 214034
40, SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition tile(VCT).
2. Resilient wall base and accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
4
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
go B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor the
required.
40
1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less
than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.
o
D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure
behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651
4A 1 of 6
we
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.6 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Bathroom Floor Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar;
TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5.
1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar.
3. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
B. Barrier Free Shower Floor Tile Installation: Interior floor the installation on concrete; cement
mortar bed(thickset)with cleavage membrane; TCA F 111 and ANSI A 108.1 A
1. Tile Type: Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Mortar: Portland cement mortar with latex additive.
3. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
40
CERAMIC TILE 09310
'" 9 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 '"
3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, ow
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards.
1. For installations indicated below,follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
C. Solid Polymer Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of
setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning. +�
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed. '
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
8 of 9 '"'"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax,oil,
or silicone,that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with
flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of the installation standards.
1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that the has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If
not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges,and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars,or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
the sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
E. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
7 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 •u'
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout ..
manufacturers.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
1. Products:
a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer.
b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer.
C. C-Cure;Penetrating Sealer 978.
d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Grout and Tile Grout Sealer.
e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Penetrating Sealer.
f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout
004,Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile.
g. Southern Grouts&Mortars,Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.
h. Summitville Tiles,Inc.; SL-15,Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.
i. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone TA-257 Silicone Grout
Sealer.
2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout .�
manufacturers'written instructions.
B. Add materials, water,and additives in accurate proportions. �.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION ow
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile. ®`
1. Verify that substrates for setting the are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 ,
Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before 4W
installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with the joint locations; if
not coordinated,adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
6of9 •"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc.
2. Boiardi Products Corporation.
3. Bonsal, W. R.,Company.
4. Bostik.
5. C-Cure.
6. Custom Building Products.
7. DAP,Inc.
8. Jamo Inc.
9. LATICRETE International Inc.
10. MAPEI Corporation.
11. Southern Grouts&Mortars,Inc.
12. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
13. TEC Specialty Products Inc.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4,consisting of the following:
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-
4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI Al 18.4.
C. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified
below:
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene
sheeting,ASTM 4397,4.0 mils(0.1 mm)thick.
2. Latex additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water
emultion, serving as replacement for part of all of gaging water, of type specifically
recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed Portland cement
and aggregate mortar bed.
D. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7,color as indicated.
1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
■. 5 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.
2. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc.
3. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
4. United States Ceramic Tile Company.
B. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Factory-mounted flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Impervious natural clay or porcelain.
2. Surface: Smooth,without abrasive admixture.
3. Module Size:2 by 2 inches.
4. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch.
5. Face: Plain,with cushion edges.
C. Ceramic Mosaic Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated
with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows,
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
1. Base Cove: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch. .�
2. Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 2 inches.
3. Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit
height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
B. Solid Polymer Thresholds: Made from homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin
complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6,
without precoated finish.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Avonite,Inc.
b. DuPont Polymers.
C. Formica Corporation.
d. Nevamar;International Paper;Decorative Products Division.
e. Swan Corporation(The). +■►
£ Wilsonart International;Div. of Premark International, Inc.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
4of9 "�'
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
+0 DHCD Project No. 214034
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern,and size indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
*0 A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to those specified.
2.2 PRODUCTS,GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile,"for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions"Article.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials"Article.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1. A minimum of two colors of each tile product to be selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
3 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ^"
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
3. Solid Polymer thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer. ..a
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile from one source or producer.
1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and ..
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Solid Polymer thresholds.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." �*
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING „
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms,under cover,and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and .,.
contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
2 of 9 ""�
W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
W SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Solid polymer thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
3. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile
substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size(minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499)plus joint
width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and the pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in file substrates and fmished
file surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
±M accessories involving color selection.
CERAMIC TILE 09310
"" ' 1 of 9
An
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
4W DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas,and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
3.6 PROTECTION
�w A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape.
or 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
go
GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 7
"""' 7 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ...
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Where tile backing panels abut other types of gypsum board panels in same plane, shim *"
surfaces to provide a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. Use
stainless steel screws at bathrooms and laundry.
C. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. For corner beads,use mesh tape across back edges.
2. Nails are not allowed for applying trim accessories to gypsum board.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners,unless otherwise indicated.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
4. U-Bead: Not Permitted.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape. *
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-6
6 of 7 '""
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C_ Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
! supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings,coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes,and conduits.
*0 G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
40 abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
40 construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: Vertical surfaces and rated ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ceiling Type: Non fire rated ceiling surfaces.
3. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Type: In bathrooms and laundry.
4. Cementitious Backer Units: At areas indicated to receive solid surface wall finish, ANSI
A108.1.
40 B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5
5 of 7
N
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
D_ Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Units: Latex-fortified Portland cement mortar.
1. Prefill all joints and corner seams.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated.
1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system, fire rated where
required, composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. ...
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C
C. Drywall Furring System
d. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. A(CET)representative much check insulation installation prior to installing gypsum board. w
B. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance.
C. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4
4 of 7 ...
I"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
g. DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
40
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Cementitious Backer Units installed with gypsum board assemblies.
wR
1. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI Al 18.9, of thickness and width
indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Width:Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 32 inches.
2_ Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products:
a. Wonderboard Multi+Board; Custom Building Products.
b. DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board;Domtar Gypsum.
C. DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
ws►
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
go
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: Not Permitted.
f. Expansion(control)joint.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: 2"wide, alkali resistant, polymer-coated glass fiber mesh.
�w.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3
„ , 3 of 7
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
am
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. .■.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS,GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area ..
and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum.
C. National Gypsum Company. +•�
d. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C_ Ceiling and Soffit Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum
board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. In
bathrooms and laundry.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 2
2of7
M
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 Mary Project No. 214034
an SECTION 09250-GYPSUM BOARD
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports
gypsum board.
2. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in
+0 assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants installed in assemblies that
incorporate gypsum board.
„p 4. Division 9 Section"Interior Painting."
Wo
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
go B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
No indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 1
1 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Hardware Set#9 Shed
Door to have:
3 Butts BB5021-050-626 Bommer
1 Padlock Furnished By Owner
1 Thumb Latch CD1260-2C Stanley
Hardware Set#10 Laundry
Each door to have:
4% 3 Butts BB5001-450-626 Bommer
1 Lockset BM12-VL-IC-652 Arrow Lock
1 Core C717S permanent core 26D Arrow Lock
'" 1 Core C75 Red construction core Arrow Lock
1 Stop 575-652 Burns
2 Kickplate 8 x 34 32D Burns
me 1 Door Bottom 20ONA National Guard
1 set Weatherstrip'g 5050C National Guard
1 Threshold 8148/8140 National Guard
Hardware Set #11 Mechanical Rooms
Each door to have:
3 Butts BB5001-450-626 Bommer
1 Lockset AM12-HTHA-IC-652 Abrasive Knob Arrow Lock
1 Core C7FS permanent core 26D Arrow Lock
I Core C75 Red construction core Arrow Lock
1 Door Bottom 20ONA National Guard
1 set Weatherstrip'g 50500 National Guard
1 Threshold 8148/8140 National Guard
ets
Hardware Set#12
Corner guards at barrier free units—all outside corners of interior walls.
END OF SECTION 08710
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 13 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 AM
Hardware Set#4 Barrier Free Bedrooms
Each door to have:
3 Butts 5000-450-652 Bommer
1 Lockset M02-VR-652 Arrow Lock
2 Kickplate 12 x 34 Clear acrylic plastic Burns
1 Stop 575-652 Burns
3 Silencers 500
Hardware Set#5 Baths Ok
Each door to have:
3 Butts 5001-450-652 Bommer
1 Lockset M02-VR-652 Arrow Lock
1 Stop 575-652 Burns
3 Silencers 500 Burns
Hardware Set #6 Barrier Free Baths
Each door to have:
3 Butts 5001-450-652 Bommer
1 Lockset M02-VR-652 Arrow Lock
2 Kickplate 12 x 34 clear acrylic plastic Burns
1 Stop 575-652 Burns
3 Silencers 500 Burns
Hardware Set#7 Closets
Each door to have:
3 Butts 5000—450-652 Bommer
1 Latchset MO1-VR-652 Arrow Lock
3 Silencers 500 Burns
2 Kickplate @ drs. 12 x 34 clear acrylic plastic Burns
102, 103, 202, 203
Hardware Set#8 Bi-fold Closet doors
Each door to have-
1 Bi-fold set BFC 125N-00-48 or—60 Stanley MW
1 pr. Aligners BF50-72 Stanley
2 Knobs BF50-62 Stanley
am
as
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 12 of 13
No
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
4M DHCD Project No. 214034
3.4 SCHEDULES
go
A. The following schedule is a general listing of the hardware requirements and is
not intended for use as a final hardware schedule. Any items of hardware
*■! required by established standards or practices, or to meet state and local codes,
shall be furnished weather or not specifically called out in the following groups.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Hardware Set#1 Apartment Entrances
Each door to have:
3 Butts BB5001450-626 Bommer
1 Lockset BM 1-VL-IC-652 Arrow Lock
1 Core C7FS permanent core 26D Arrow Lock
w 1 Core C75 Red construction core Arrow Lock
1 Stop 575 -652 Burns
1 set Weatherstrip'g 5050C National Guard
1 Threshold 8148/8140 National Guard
1 Door Bottom 200NA National Guard
1 Kickplate @ drs. 8 x 34 32D Burns
301, 401, 501, 601
Hardware Set 92 Barrier Free Apartment Entrances
Each door to have:
3 Butts BB5001-450-626 Bommer
1 Lockset BM11-VL-IC-652 Arrow Lock
1 Core C7FS permanent core 26D Arrow Lock
1 Core C75 Red construction core Arrow Lock
1 Stop 575 —652 Burns
2 Kickplate 8 x 34 32D Burns
1 set Weatherstrip'g 5050C National Guard
1 Threshold 8148/8140 National Guard
1 Door Bottom 200NA National Guard
Hardware Set#3 Bedrooms
Each door to have:
3 Butts 5000-450-652 Bommer
1 Lockset M02-VR-652 Arrow Lock
1 Stop 575-652 Burns
3 Silencers 500
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 11 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
to be painted or finished in another way, the hardware shall be removed and
stored prior to the painting or finishing. Items shall then be reinstalled only
when the finishes have been completed on the surface to which the hardware is
to be applied.
D. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in a bed of sealant
to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do
not plug drain holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.
E. After installation, representative templates, instruction sheets and installation
details shall be placed in a file folder to be turned over to the Owner when the
building is accepted. Included shall be at least five(5) each of any special
adjusting and/or installation tools furnished with the hardware by the
manufacturers.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING •
A. Adjust and check operating item of hardware to ensure correct operation and
function. Units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended for the
application made shall be replaced.
B. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware is installed more than one month prior
to building acceptance or occupancy of space or area, the installer shall return
to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final
check and adjustment of all hardware items. Hardware shall be cleaned as
necessary to restore correct operation, function and finish. Door control
devices shall be adjusted to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Whenever hardware is located in areas where it may be subject to damage
during construction by handling, cleaning, etc., (painting, cleaning of bricks) it
shall be protected and or removed from its location until the hazardous
condition is terminated.
Vai6h Hardware 08710
Page 10 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.13 BI-FOLD DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide bi-fold door hardware for four(4) panel doors,rated for panels
weighing up to 75 lbs. and consisting of complete sets including overhead rails,
hangers, supports, bumpers, and floor guides. Include aligners to align leading
door edges and wood knobs.
B. Accepted and Approved as follows:
[STH] Stanley Commercial Hardware
[HAG] Hager Companies
[LEI] Johnson, L.E. Products, Inc.
2.14 CORNER GUARDS
A. Provide surface mounted plastic corner guards in barrier free units at all
outside corners. Corner guard assemblies to consist of extruded rigid plastic
cover, min. 0.078 thick, 2 inch long leg x 48 inches high formed for 90 degree
corners;min. 0.060 thick one piece aluminum retainer clips;molded plastic top
and bottom caps; and all mounting hardware.
B. Accepted and Approved as follows:
[BUR] Burns SSM-25
[IPC] IPC Door& Wall Protection Systems IPS 160
[PAW] Pawling Corporation CG-20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at height indicated in"Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware"for(Standard Steel Doors and Frames), (Custom Steel
Doors and Frames), (Wood Doors and Frames)by Door and Hardware
Institute(DHI), except if otherwise specifically indicated or to comply with
requirements for the handicapped, or if otherwise directed by the Architect.
B. All hardware shall be installed by tradesman skilled in the application of
commercial grade hardware.
w
C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the instructions and
recommendations. Securely fasten all parts to be attached. Fit faces of
mortised parts snug and flush. Make sure all operating parts move freely and
smoothly without binding, sticking or excessive clearance. Wherever cutting
and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later
.A
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 9of13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING SEALS & DOOR BOTTOMS
A. Seals shall be manufactured from silicone rubber with a self adhesive strip.
Seals shall be bulb design with a 1/4" compression and designed to be installed
on metal or wood door frames.
B. Door bottoms shall be threshold contact type consisting of an aluminum
housing with a solid neoprene seal strip insert.
C. Acceptable and Approved as follows:
[NG] National Guard ..
[PEM] Pemko
[REE] Reese
4W
2.9 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds shall be flat saddle type, handicap accessible to meet ANSI 117.1 no
1980, and shall be manufactured from aluminum.
B. Acceptable and Approved as follows: ow
[NG] National Guard
[PEM] Pemko
[REE] Reese
2.10 KICKPLATES
A. Kick plates shall be stainless steel or clear acrylic plastic as indicated on
hardware schedule, 2 inches less than door width by height specified in
hardware schedule, fastened with manufacturer's standard machine or self- am
tapping screws.
B. Acceptable and Approved as follows: "'
[BUR] Burns
[IVE] H.B. Ives
[ROC] Rockwood
2.12 SILENCERS
A. Silencers for metal door frames to be neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter
'/2", fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
MW
B. Acceptable and Approved as follows:
[BUR] Burns
[IVE] H. B. Ives
[ROC] Rockwood
4W
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 8 of 13
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.6 STANDARD DUTY CYLINDRICAL LEVER LOCKSET-Proprietary Item
A. All locksets shall be M Series Cylindrical Lever Locksets as manufactured by
Arrow Architectural Hardware, Hicksville,New York or equal.
B. Locksets shall meet requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.2 series 4000, Grade
2, Federal Specification FFH-106C, Type 160. All trim shall comply with
ANSI Al 17.1 for barrier free accessibility.
C. Locksets shall be thru-bolted within the 2 1/8"door preparation with
independent anti-rotation mounting plates and contain no exposed screws.
Chassis mounting screws may be accessed only with the operating key in the
cylinder to remove the lever and rose.
D. Locksets shall be non-handed, and have independent spring cartridges under
each rose allowing levers to operate independently and prevent lever sag.
E. Lever trim shall consist of cast levers with wrought brass or bronze rose
scalps. Levers shall be a minimum of 4 3/4"in length.
F. Disassembly of lockset for cylinder removal shall not be required. Cylinder
shall be changed by removing the lever.
+! G. Acceptable and Approved as follows:
[ARR] Arrow M Series VR Design
2.7 STOPS
A. Stops shall be supplied for all doors not equipped with a holding device.
B. Wall stops shall have a concave gray bumper and trim to match lock finish.
F. Accepted and Approved as follows:
[GJ] Glynn Johnson
[IVE] Ives
[ROC] Rockwood
[BUR] Burns
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 7 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
H. All masterkeys shall be identified with a registry number, and shall not be
stamped with MASTER or letter M.
I. Furnish: 6 Masterkeys per section
2 Control keys MW
6 Keys per core
2 sets (Front&Rear Entries) Extra Permanent Cores
J. All keying shall be thoroughly checked with the Owner before the finish
hardware schedules are submitted for approval.
K Provide key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self locking
key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers,
permanent markers and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by the
systems manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required
for the project.
2.5 MORTISE LOCKS-Proprietary Item
A. All locks shall be AM or BM Series Mortise Locksets(per Hardware
Schedule) as manufactured by Arrow Architectural Hardware, Hicksville,New
York or equal.
B. All functions shall be available in one case size. Cases shall be manufactured
from heavy gauge steel, minimum thickness shall be .093 thick. Cases shall be
zinc dichromate plated for corrosion resistance. Armored fronts shall have an
adjustable bevel, manufactured from brass, bronze or stainless steel. Latchbolt
shall have 3/4"throw, deadbolt shall have a 1"throw with hardened steel
inserts.
C. All exterior door locksets, regardless of trim, shall meet requirements of
ANSIBHMA A156.13, series 1000, Grade 1.
D. Lock trim, whether knob, lever, sectional or escutcheon, shall be through
bolted through the lock case to assure proper alignment and performance.
E. Acceptable and Approved as follows:
[ARR] Arrow BM Series Design: VL Lever
[ARR] Arrow AM Series Design: HTHA Knob
Fmish Hardware 08710
Page 6of13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Size of hinges shall be as follows:
Door Thickness Hinge Height Hinge Width
1-3/8 to 32" 3-1/2 3-1/2
1-3/4 to 36" 4-1/2 4 or 4-1/2
F. Where projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening,
the proper hinge width shall be provided to allow the door to clear the trim.
G. Acceptable and Approved as follows:
[BOM] Bommer
[HAG] Hagar
[STH] Stanley
2.4 KEYING
A. All cylinders shall be "FLEXCORE"as manufactured by Arrow Architectural
Hardware, Hicksville,New York or equal. Both interchangeable cores and
keyblanks shall be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution
by United States patents. The Owner will be responsible for ordering cores
and keys.
B. This masterkey system shall be 7-pin, "FLEXCORE" and keyed into an
existing Northampton Housing factory registered Grand Masterkey System.
C. The system shall be designed for both high and low key control requirements
within the same system,providing dual level security.
D. All permanent cores shall be furnished with concealed key control(CKC). The
keys and side of cores shall be stamped for identification. Keys will not be
stamped with key bitting.
E. All permanent cores shall be with visual key control(VKC). The keys and
cores shall be stamped for identification. Keys will not be stamped with key
bitting.
F. The Owner will provide construction cores and keys during construction
period. Construction control and operating keys shall not be part of the
40 owner's permanent keying system.
G. The master, control and permanent keys and permanent cores shall be sent to
the owner as directed via registered mail.
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 5 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The finish hardware shall carry a limited warranty against defects in
workmanship and operation for a period of one year or as listed below from
date of acceptance. No liability is to be assumed where damage or faulty
operation is due to abuse, improper installation or failure to exercise normal
maintenance.
M Series Cylindrical Lever Locksets, AM Series Mortise Knob Locksets,
and BM Series Mortise Lever Locksets shall have a three [3] year limited
warranty.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish and other distinctive qualities
of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the hardware schedule at the
end of this section.
2.2 FINISH OF HARDWARE �►
A. Finish items shall be listed in the hardware schedule and shall conform to
ANSI A156.18 unless otherwise specified. **
2.3 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Template Hinges: Except for hinges to be installed entirely(both
leaves) into wood doors and frames,provide only template hinges which
conform to ANSI whenever applicable.
B. Use ball bearing hinges on heavy doors, on doors where high frequency service w"
is expected, and on doors equipped with door closers.
C. All hinges to be used on exterior doors and on bathroom doors shall be brass.
D. Hinge pins, except as otherwise indicated, shall be as follows:
1. Steel hinges: Steel pins
2. Non-ferrous hinges: Stainless steel pins
3. Exterior doors: Non-removable pins(NRP)
4. Interior doors: Non rising pins
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 4of13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
for file and distribution purposes. Hardware will not be ordered by the
Hardware Supplier until an approved schedule has been received with keying
requirements.
B. When submitting schedules for approval, include six manufacturers cut sheets
on each hardware item proposed. Index the cut sheets with the use of numbers
or letters or a combination of both, with the hardware schedule. The index
numbers/letters are to be in the right hand column on the same line as the
respective manufacturer's numbers. All manufacturer's numbers shall be
indexed even when appearing more than once. Include a separate keying
schedule which is the result of a key meeting attended by the Architect, Owner,
and Hardware Supplier.
C. Templates-The Hardware Supplier shall provide necessary templates and/or
physical hardware to all trades requiring them in order to cut, reinforce, or
otherwise prepare their material or product to receive the hardware item. If
physical hardware is required by any manufacturer, the Hardware Supplier shall
ship to them such hardware via prepaid freight in sufficient time to prevent any
delay in execution of their work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. All items of hardware to be delivered to the job site shall be completely
packaged with all necessary screws, bolts, miscellaneous parts, instructions,
and where necessary, installation templates for manufacturer's suggested
installation. They are to be clearly labeled so as to conveniently
identify them and their intended location in the building.
B. A representative of the General Contractor shall receive the hardware when
delivered at the job site.
C. Finish hardware shall be delivered to the General Contractor by the hardware
supplier. Direct factory shipments to the job site are not acceptable, unless
coordinated with a freight company to check material when it is received at the
site.
D. The hardware shall be jointly inventoried by representatives of the General
Contractor and the Hardware Supplier.
"' E. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly with proper material,
and without additional cost to the General Contractor.
F. All hardware shall be handled in a manner to minimize marring, scratching, or
damage.
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 3 of 13
w.
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Deviation from, or modification of items will be permitted only for special
instances caused by reason of construction characteristics and for the purpose
of providing proper operational function. The contractor shall be responsible
for checking any necessary deviations in order that hardware shall fit and
function properly.
D. Supplier- A recognized Builders Hardware Supplier who has been furnishing
hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than five [5] years,
and who is, or has in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant
[AHC] in good standing as certified by the Door and Hardware Institute or
equivalent.
This consultant shall have experience in the preparation of architectural
hardware specifications, estimation, detailing, ordering, servicing of
architectural hardware in all branches and will be available at reasonable times
during the course of the project for hardware consultation to the Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Finish hardware in this section shall meet the following standards as established
by the American National Standards Institute, Inc. [ANSI] which is sponsored
by the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. [BHMA]. Product ..
tests are to be administered by ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc., Underwriters
Laboratories, or other official testing laboratories which have been designated
by BHMA for the testing of ANSI standards. The standards latest revision will
be in effect.
B. Materials&Finishes
Butts&Hinges ANSI A156.1 Grade 1
Mortise Locks&Latches ANSI Al 56.13 Grade 1 Operational "
Locks&Latchsets ANSI A156.2 Grade 2
Architectural Door Trim ANSI Al 56.6
Folding Door Hardware Grade 1
Auxiliary Hardware Grade 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. After the award of a formal contract, six [6] complete typewritten copies of the
proposed Finish Hardware Schedule shall be submitted to the architect for
approval. This schedule shall be prepared using the "sequence and Format for
the Hardware Schedule" as approved and recommended by the Door and
Hardware Institute [DHI]. After approval of the schedule, the Hardware
Supplier shall provide six [6] copies of the approved schedule to the Architect
am
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 2 of 13
OR
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to
this Section.
B. The following sections of the specifications should be examined in order to
identify materials or equipment that may be obtained through this section.
Section 08111 — Standard Steel Doors&Frames
Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Finish hardware is that used in building construction, particularly on or in
connection with doors, frames, cabinets and other moveable members. It
also has a finished appearance as well as functional purpose and may be
considered as a part of the decorative treatment of a room or building.
B. The following hardware is listed elsewhere in these specifications and shall
not be a requirement of this division:
1. Cabinet hardware
2. Window hardware and operators
3. Shelf hardware
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware has been specified herein by manufacturer's name, brand and catalog
numbers to be consistent with the quality standard of the Northampton
Housing Authority. All locksets, latchsets, and cores specified as Arrow Lock
are a proprietary specification voted by the Northampton Housing Authority.
B. To insure a uniform basis of acceptable materials, it is the intention that only
manufacturer's items specified as "Acceptable and Approved"be furnished
for use on this project.
Finish Hardware 08710
Page 1 of 13
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
40 written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 08561
w
04
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 -9
' " 9 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
G. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator
frames.
H. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-
resistant steel reinforcement complying with requirements for reinforcing members, or do both.
2.8 VINYL FINISHES .�
A. Integral Finish and Color: Uniform, solid, homogeneous white interior and exterior.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers,
and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated,weathertight window installation.
I. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at
joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3
inches of opening.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows,hardware, accessories,and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets,as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt,and other substances.
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 - 8
8 of 9 •
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.6 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to
fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each
operable exterior sash or ventilator.Provide V2 screen.
1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for
!?+ Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows,"Residential R-20 class.
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with
SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed
fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.
1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum
sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused
to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather
deterioration, in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
1. Welded Frame and Sash/Ventilator Corners: Miter-cut and fusion welded.
a.
B. Fabricate vinyl windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable
sash.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, compatible with window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for
erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding
design loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.
E. Provide manufacturers standard 3 inch to 3 %2 inch vinyl casting.
F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze vinyl
windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with
requirements in Division 8 Section"Glazing"and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 -7 7 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
F. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.
1. Maximum Rate: 0.1 cfm/sq, ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft..
G. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a
water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS,Water Resistance Test.
1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. or
more than 15 lbVsq.ft..
H. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested
according to ASTM F 588.
I. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units.
B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second
surface or sputtered on second or third surface.
C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight
seal.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel,
carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with
vinyl; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock vinyl windows, and sized
to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional
contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum, die-
cast zinc with special coating finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. .�
I. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed, spring-loaded, block-and-tackle type, of size and
capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position.
C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash
in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. Provide security latches for partial
night opening.
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 -6
6 of 9 ..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials
warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members,
cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed
fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or
hardware being fastened,as appropriate.
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel
or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel
complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or
iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and for complete concealment
when vinyl window is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying
with AAMA/WDMA 101/l.5.2/NAFS.
G. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene,
or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.
2.3 WINDOW
A. Window Type: Double hung.
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide vinyl windows of performance indicated
that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance
requirements are indicated. Provide windows with"energy star rating."
1. Performance Class and Grade: R35.
C. Condensation-Resistance Factor(CRF): Provide vinyl windows tested for thermal performance
according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 52.
w
1. U-Factor: 0.31 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F or less.
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide vinyl windows with a whole-window SHGC
maximum of 0.30, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 26 STC
when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by
ASTM E 413.
�w
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 - 5
0M 5 of 9
E
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 s,
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or a°
replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: no
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of vinyl,other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. .�
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. National Vinyl Products Inc.,"Northwind III."
2. Paradigm Windows,Crafter Series.
3. Harvey Industries,Vicon Classic Series.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Extrusions: Rigid (unplasticized) hollow PVC extrusions, formulated and extruded for
exterior applications,complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS and the following:
1. PVC Resins: 100 percent virgin resin.
2. PVC Formulation: High impact, low heat buildup, lead free, nonchalking, and color and
UV stabilized.
3. Extrusion Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch.
4. Multichamber Extrusions: Profile designed with multichambers between interior and
exterior faces of the extrusions.
B. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. ,
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 -4
4of9
me
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
OR
H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and
finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vinyl windows, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or
exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion
in lists and by labels,test reports,and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
vinyl windows'aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including
on preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/1.S.2/NAFS, 'North American
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass
Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components,
accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Provide AAMA-certified vinyl windows with an attached label.
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating vinyl windows
without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 - 3
3 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 +•
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings. am
a. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph.
b. Importance Factor: 1.
C. Exposure Category: A.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating
instructions for each type of vinyl window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Glazing details.
7. Window cleaning provisions.
8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing
fabrication and assembly of vinyl windows, and used to determine structural test
pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For vinyl windows and components required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below. *!
1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch-long, full-size sections of window frame.
2. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner including
full-size sections of window frame,weather stripping, and glazing.
3. Operable Window: Full-size unit.
4. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish.
5. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections.
E. Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer,manufacturer,and testing agency.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last
four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of vinyl window.
Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 -2
2 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 08561 - VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes operable vinyl-framed windows.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. R: Residential.
B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural
test pressure and water test pressure.
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the
design pressure.
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to
comply with requirements for performance class.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,
and that are of test size indicated below:
1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance.
2. Size indicated on Drawings.
B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding the effects of the
following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS,Uniform Load Structural Test:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind
speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,
VINYL WINDOWS 08561 - 1
'"'" 1 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ...
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." �.
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions,referenced quality standard, and as indicated. ■"
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. '
D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211
4OF4 ..�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
B. Doors for Natural Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Faces for Interior Doors: Birch Veneer.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-l.
ww
a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
B. Interior Wood-Faced Doors:
1. Core: Particleboard.
2. Construction: Five or seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Natural Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one
coat of clear wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
ww 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211
3 OF 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. ""
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
4W
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
.o
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped(bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- ®'
inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion: •
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ..
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division. +.►
C. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
d. VT Industries Inc.
e. Weyerhaeuser Company.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211
20174 .�.
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
ow
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
40
1.2 SUMMARY
"' A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid core doors for natural finish.
2. Shop priming flush wood doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for steel frames and steel doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
■■ openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
,w 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches,with door faces and edgings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211
4* 1 OF 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
b. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2- Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, ,
twist,and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
Shim as necessary.
a
1. Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
D. Aluminum Combination Storm/Screen Doors: Fit combination strorm/screen door assemblies in
hollow metal frames per manufacturer's installation recommendations.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
B. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 8 of 8 08111
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No, 214034
PART 3 -EXECUTION
oft
3.1 EXAMINATION
so A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard
steel doors and frames.
,.
1. For the record,prepare written report,endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
on to performance of work.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
44
3.2 PREPARATION
as A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard
steel door frames for squareness, alignment,twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
40
1, Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
jamb perpendicular to frame head.
4!9 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall,
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
40 A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes,thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard
steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply
with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors of size and profile indicated.
Comply with SDI 105.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
w
a. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 7 of 8 08111
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.and as follows: *�
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height.
4. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to
keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include
cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware
Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware, including combination storm/screen door assembly.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated
on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. *"
1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating
suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and
abraded areas,and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 03 mils.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint
system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 6 of 8 08111
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
0 DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud,welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
„ inch thick.
2. Compression Type for Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as
follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners.
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.5 COMBINATION ALUMINUM STORM/SCREEN DOORS
A. Type:Combination,AAMA 1102.7,CSD.
1. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy.
2. Style: Self-storing, midview.
go 3. Hardware: All necessary screws for installation in metal door frame, latchset with interior
lock and lever operation both sides, closer, stop,hinges,and weatherstripping.
4. Aluminum Finish:Baked enamel or powder coated.
so 5. Insect Screening:Aluminum with charcoal color finish.
6. Glazing:Tempered insulating glass
B. Manufacturers of combination storm/screen doors: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to,the following:
I. Harvey Industries
2. Kaufman Window and Door
3. Pella
4. York Aluminum
!" 2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
.� as frames.
1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 5 of 8 08111
.r
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
2.3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI A250.8.
1. Design: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene/honeycomb core that produces
doors complying with ANSI A250.8.
a. Thermal-Rated(Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value(R-value)of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when
tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturers standard.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from galvannealed steel sheet. 18 gauge thickness and
ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face
sheets to comply with the following minimum sizes:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge,
secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers,and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply
with exterior frame requirements.
1. Fabricate knocked-down frames with mitered or coped corners,for field assembly.
2. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch thick steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Exterior Frames: 0.053-inch thick sheet steel,thermal break, galvanized.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to
comply with the following minimum sizes:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge,
secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 4 of 8 08111
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
+ ► 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers of Insulated Steel Doors, pre-glazed: subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to,the following.
1. Ceco Door Products;an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
2. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
3. Republic Builders Products Company.
4. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
B. Manufacturers of steel frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1_ Ceco Door Products;an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
2. Pioneer Industries,Inc.
3_ Republic Builders Products Company.
4. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
w� A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating designation.
C. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Glazing: Two layers of sealed insulated and tempered glass with a low E coating.
■
„� STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 3 of 8 08111
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
dimensions, locations of door hardware, and preparations for power, signal, and electrified and
pneumatic control systems.
No
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not an
less than 3 by 5 inches.
No
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
frames.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads
up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented r
plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-
inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate ..
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating standard steel
frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual
opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2 of 8 08111
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulated hollow-metal exterior doors.
2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames.
3. Aluminum combination screen/storm doors.
w
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Sections for door hardware for standard steel doors.
2. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting standard steel doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
compliance, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of standard steel doors
W and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:
1. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details.
2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles.
3. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
4. Details of each different wall opening condition.
5. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections.
6. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawings of each opening, including door and frame, drawn to scale
and coordinating door hardware. Show elevations of each door design type, showing
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES I of 8 08111
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
w DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral curing silicone sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: White.
�w
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors and windows.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION 07920
s
40
an
�w
JOINT SEALANTS 9 of 9 07920- 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
7. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical
joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion
with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal •*
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. ..
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant. ..
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic, isolation and contraction „
joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs,and at joint between concrete slab and foundation wall.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable urethane sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of
exterior walls.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.
.a►
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors,
and counters.
JOINT SEALANTS 8 of 9 07920- 8
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications,and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
�w
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
®„ widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear sealant backings.
'® 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
*"► beads of configuration indicated;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
5. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a
bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking
tape.
' 6. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
40 JOINT SEALANTS 7 of 9 07920- 7
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints. so
PART 3 -EXECUTION
40
3.1 EXAMINATION
so
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to .m
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water,surface dirt,and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical ""
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after
cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed an
air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete and cement board. .,
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm am
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
C. Vinyl Siding.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates,where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS 6 of 9 07920- 6
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834,Type P, Grade NF.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley;Chem-Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation;AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Sonneborn,Division of ChernRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
w
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable,nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints-and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
2. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance:
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B_ Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
40 JOINT SEALANTS 5 of 9 07920- 5
.m
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Single-Component Neutral-and Basic-Curing,Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
C. Tremco; Spectrem I (Basic).
Z_ Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS (nonsag).
3_ Class: 50.
4_ Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated,O.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per .�
ASTM C 1248.
D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
b. Tremco;Tremsil 600 White.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS(nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: ceramic tile.
E. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex- 1CSL.
b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 1. **
C. Tremco; Vulkem Nova 300 SSL.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and P(pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T(traffic)and NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates .�
indicated, O.
JOINT SEALANTS 4 of 9 07920-4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
maw
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
*" 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools,or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
40
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
„ 2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g(L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
40 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
go liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class,and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS 3 of 9 07920 - 3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous "
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer. ,.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for «.
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements �*
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
JOINT SEALANTS 2 of 9 07920 -2
+�w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
s
SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. `
b. Joints between different materials.
C. Perimeter joints between materials, siding, and frames of doors, windows, and
louvers.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
3_ Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters.
f Other joints as indicated.
'? 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
JOINT SEALANTS 1 of 9 07920 - 1
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Install siding in continuous lengths without scams.
C. Install fiber cement vertical siding panels with edges over framing or blocking. Leave
maximum 1/8" gap between panels. Caulk joints as recommended by siding manufacturer.
Space fasteners according to siding manufacturer's recommendations. Keep nails minimum
w 3/8"back from panel edges and 2" in from all corners unless otherwise recommended by panel
manufacturer.
so D. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating with rubber gaskets or elastomeric sealant. Use rubber
washers where fasteners made from dissimilar metal penetrate siding. Isolate dissimilar metals
behind siding by covering with polyethylene film.
an E. Metal Corner Trim: Fabricate from aluminum, brake formed to shape shown. Form in 8 foot
lengths and install with minimum joints. Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, and installation of
material.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace
with new materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07460
we
Wo
4"
..w
SIDING 07460 - 5
5 of 5
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 go
1. Texture: Smooth.
C. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated: 40
1. Shutters with louvered faces.
2. Moldings and trim.
no
D. Colors for Decorative Accessories: Match adjacent siding.
E. Metal Corner Trim: .063 inch aluminum, finished with manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer, .�
thermocured system containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight
(Kynar 500 or equal),color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
F. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual"at window and door heads and where indicated.
G. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" for Use NT(nontraffic)and for Uses G,A, and,as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O joint substrates.
H. Fasteners:
1. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a .A
minimum of 1 inch into substrate.
2. For fastening fiber-cement siding,use stainless-steel fasteners.
3. For fastening vinyl, use stainless-steel fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to
view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION .�
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in
elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to
shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. '
B. Install vinyl siding and accessories according to ASTM D 4756.
SIDING 07460-4
4 of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Hardie Plank; or a comparable product by one of the
following:
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cemplank,Inc.
b. CertainTeed Corp.
C. James Hardie Inc.
d. Texture: Wood grain.
3. Vertical Pattern: 48-inch-wide sheets with wood-grain texture and grooves 8 inches o.c.
4. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer and finish coat.
B. Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored,vinyl siding complying with ASTM D 3679.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Certainteed Monogram Solid: or a comparable product by one
of the following:
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Alcoa Building Products, Inc.
b. Alside, Inc.
C. CertainTeed Corp.
d. Crane Plastics Holding Company
e. Owens Corning.
w, 3. Horizontal Pattern: 8-inch exposure in plain, double 4-inch board style.
4. Texture: Smooth.
5. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch.
6. Minimum Profile Depth(Butt Thickness): 1/2 inch.
7. Nailing Hem: Double thickness.
8. Colors for Vinyl Siding: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, and other items as recommended by siding
manufacturer for building configuration.
1. Provide accessories made from same material as adjacent siding, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding, unless otherwise
e. indicated.
B. Vinyl Accessories: Where vinyl accessories are indicated, provide integrally colored vinyl
accessories complying with ASTM D 3679 except for wind-load resistance.
SIDING 07460- 3
3 of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide vinyl siding products that are listed in VSI's list of
certified products.
ow
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ow
A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated,weathertight place.
Im
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if
existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
or
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.8 WARRANTY "
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming,fading, or otherwise
deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
1. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 4 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
2. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each siding and soffit is based on the product
named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 SIDING
do
A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos
fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade 11; is classified as noncombustible when
SIDING 07460-2
2 of 5
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 07460- SIDING
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiber-cement and Vinyl siding.
2. Vinyl decorative accessories.
3. Metal corner trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for building wrap.
2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for wood railings and soffits and for
W exterior trim.
3. Division 7 Section "Fiberglass Asphalt Shingles" for gutters, and other roof sheet metal
work.
go 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
I. For vinyl siding, include VSI's official certification logo printed on Product Data.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For siding, soffit, and decorative accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type,color,texture,and pattern required.
1. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of siding and soffit, signed by product manufacturer.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Siding: Obtain each type, color,texture, and pattern of siding, including
related accessories,through one source from a single manufacturer.
SIDING 07460 - 1
I of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement
spots.
2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles
with asphalt roofing cement spots.
E. Closed Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches beyond
center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail
in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to
a straight line 2 inches short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back
shingle strips
1_ Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center.
2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3 inch wide bed of asphalt roofing
cement.
F. Ridge Vents and Flash Vents: Install continuous ridge vents and/or flash vents over asphalt
shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient
length to penetrate sheathing.
G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle
exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds.
Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
END OF SECTION 07311
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
8OF8
R
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
go DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt
Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt
shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.
C. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.
D. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof
sheathing.
E. Eave and Rake Covers: Fabricate of aluminum, brake formed to shape shown. Form in 8 ft.
lengths and install with minimum joints.
F. Gutters: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with all necessary elbows,
hangers, and brackets. Provide gasketed expansion joints in gutters over 30 feet long. Apply
sealant at gutter joints. Use pop rivets and sealant for end caps and downspouts. Slope gutters
to downspouts.
G. Downspouts: Join downspout sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to
40 hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls or posts. Locate fasteners at top and bottom
and at approximately 60" in between. Connect downspouts to downspout boots and
underground drainage system_
H. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to
asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in
ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in
NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs
removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.
' 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fascia at eaves and rakes.
2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform
exposure.
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of five roofing nails located according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
7OF8
.K
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 oft
PART 3 -EXECUTION
.0
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with go
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and op
blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through so
asphalt shingles.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck
perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over
underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding
courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails.
1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment.
Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction
to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet
underlayment.
B. Ice and Water Shield Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet
underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated on
Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not
less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover
underlayment within seven days.
1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. "
3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side.
4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side.
5. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against sidewall not
less than 8 inches.
6. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.
7. Ridges: Extend 8 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. ,
3.3 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual".
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
6 OF 8 �,,,
OR
May McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
W
D. Exhaust Fan Roof Caps: 24 gauge steel, electrically bonded epoxy finish, built-in backdraft
damper and birdscreen, sized for 4"dia. duct connection.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Broan
b. Nu-tone
C. Greenheck
d. Fantech
2.6 METAL FLASHING,TRIM,GUTTERS,DOWNSPOUTS,EAVE AND RAKE COVERINGS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item.
W B. Metal Flashing and Trim: .032 inch aluminum, mill finish.
1. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4 over
the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface.
2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and
1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.
C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121,at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve
sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at
least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.
D. Gutters: .032 inch aluminum, finished with manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer,
thermocured system containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight
(Kynar 500 or equal), color to be selected by Architectf from manufacturer's standard range.
w Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long sections. Furnish gutter spacers
and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA
but not less than twice the gutter thickness.
1. Available manufacturers for gutters and downspouts:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Castle Metal Products
C. W. P. Hickman Company
d. Perimeter Systems,a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co.
E. Downspouts: .032 inch aluminum, finish to match gutters. Fabricate rectangular downspouts
complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts,
and anchors.
F. Eave and Rake Covering: .063 inch aluminum, finished with manufacturer's standard
fluoropolymer,thermocured system containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin
by weight(Kynar 500 or equal), color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
range.
w
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
5OF8
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ..
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type II 30#, asphalt-saturated organic felts,
nonperforated.
B. Ice and Water Shield Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970,
minimum of 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to
SBS-modified asphalt adhesive,with release paper backing; cold applied.
1. Products:
a. IKO;Armourgard or equal(Proprietary product)
2.4 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other
UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external
deflector baffles;for use under ridge shingles.
1. Available Products:
a. Air Vent Inc.,a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent I1.
b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.;V-Series.
C. Mid-America Building Products; RidgeMaster Plus.
d. Ridglass Manufacturing Company,Inc.; Coolvent.
B. Flash Vent: Manufacturer's standard aluminum vent for use at juncture of roof and vertical
wall, with dry glass fiber weather filter and external deflector baffle.
1. Available Products:
a. Air Vent Inc.;Flash Filter Vent.
b. Mid-America Building Products;RidgeMaster Plus.
C. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; V-600TE.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type Il, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel
wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a
minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid
wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as
flashing.
C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low
profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
4 OF 8 '""
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate
40 temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
40
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Materials failures include manufacturing defects and failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after
a reasonable time.
1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with
first 5 years nonprorated.
2. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by
wind speeds up to 70 mph for 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type, in unbroken bundles.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection: .
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction,
glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced,and self-sealing.
1. Product:
a. IKO; Cambridge 30 or equal(Proprietary product).
2. Butt Edge: Straight cut.
3. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
sm
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
am 3OF8
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Qualification Data: For Installer, including certificate signed by asphalt shingle manufacturer
stating that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed to install roofing system indicated.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt
shingles.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For asphalt shingles.
G. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals. `
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that is approved, authorized, or licensed by asphalt
shingle roofing system manufacturer to install roofing system indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vents, felt underlayment, and self-
adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with
the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof
slopes indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt
shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other
raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls.
1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent .•
damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.
B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when
roofing work is not in progress.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
2OF8
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
in DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 07311 - FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES (PROPRIETARY ITEM)
PARTI -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiber Glass Asphalt shingles.
2. Felt underlayment.
3. Ice and Water Shield Self-adhering sheet underlayment.
4. Ridge vents, flash vents, fan roof caps.
5. Metal flashing,trim,gutters and downspouts, eave and rake coverings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for roof deck wood structural panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual"for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, ridge and hip cap shingles,ridge
vent,and exposed valley lining indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color
selected.
I. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle strip.
2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full-size ridge and hip cap asphalt shingle.
3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- long Sample.
4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square.
FIBER GLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311
1 OF 8
44
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
+o DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
go Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
3.8 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation Type Under slab and perimeter wall: Type IV extruded-polystyrene board insulation.
B. Insulation Type Perimeter wall and ceiling: Self-supported, spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
END OF SECTION 07210
on
40
44
go
W
No
0.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5
OW 5of5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.r
C. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping. ,m
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
00
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Apply self-supported, spray-applied cellulosic insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make it flush with face
of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
I. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation
Manufacturers Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing .,
Cellulose Insulation."
C. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, either by pouring or by machine blowing, to
comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated,
lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to '
approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5
lb/cu. ft.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs.
Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4
4 of 5
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION
A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance,
processing,and handling characteristics.
a.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
�w B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to
fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic
spaces and vented eaves.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3
�, 3 of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 -R
am
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
MW
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. am
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
S
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project „W
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
as
PART 2-PRODUCTS
4W
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
so
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products .�
specified.
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION am
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively: .a
1. Manufacturers:
a. DiversiFoam Products. as
b. Dow Chemical Company.
C. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products Division.
2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied
with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated
for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 2
2of5 '"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
W SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
�a
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Perimeter wall insulation.
3. Concealed building insulation.
4. Self-supported, spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
•� 5. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation."
40
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
40 B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
C. The CET project representative must inspect the insulation installation when completed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
w B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
40 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
C. The CET Project representative must inspect the insulation installation when completed.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1
1 of 5
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
w DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below
40 face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c. Use 2 fasteners at each framing
member or fastener location for cleats 4 inches nominal in width and wider.
W C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36
inches o.c. Fasten to framing members or blocking.
D. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions,
spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. and within 6 inches of end of shelves. Fasten to framing
members or blocking.
E. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and
reinstalled. Install shelves,fully seated on cleats,brackets, and supports.
1. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members or blocking.
Install rods in rod flanges.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.8 PROTECTION
+� + A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the
construction period.
W B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
I. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
`�" discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
40
END OF SECTION 06202
u
40
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202 - 5
5 of 5
MW
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior fmish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
MW
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
am
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
.W
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as *.
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush,and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
sm
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum oft
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of
joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform
thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
4W
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand exposed
ends smooth.
Am
MW
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202-4
4 of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Exposed and Closet Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch thick. Do not use
particleboard that contains urea formaldehyde.
1. Melamine-faced particleboard with applied PVC front edge.
B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch boards.
C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA Al 56.16,B04051;prime-painted formed steel.
D. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA A156.16,B04041; prime-painted formed steel.
E. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9,B04102; zinc-plated steel.
F. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112;zinc-plated steel.
G. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BI-EvIA A156.9,B04071; zinc-plated steel.
H. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9,B04081 or B04091;zinc-plated steel.
I. Clothes Rods: 1-5/16-inch- diameter, chrome-plated steel telescoping tubes with end brackets
for mounting on shelf cleats or on shelf brackets with rod support.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
w
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
*�* concealed where possible.
1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished
work:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202 - 3
, , 3 of 5
ww
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 a,
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be AM
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
R.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until .w
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period. .�
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. "F
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's
Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
no
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, om
finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying
with LMA SAT-1.
1. Color: White. ""°
2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM am
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish(Painted):
.m
1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine,D Select;NeLMA or NLGA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Allowed.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced(smooth). ®`
am
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202 -2
2 of 5 sm
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 06202-INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
af,
1.2 SUMMARY
'" A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
go 2. Shelving and clothes rods.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 9 Section"Interior Painting"for priming of interior finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4n 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish,
with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202 - 1
ww 1 of 5
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No.214034
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold ..
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. am
END OF SECTION 06201
#Am
am
Aft
.f1
no
no
,.m
4W
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -6
6 of 6 am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary.
1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
�w 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting
joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide
uniform thickness across joints,where necessary for alignment.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face
fastening is unavoidable.
3.5 RAILING INSTALLATION
A. Newel Posts: Set steel post minimum 8-inches into concrete. Secure plywood, trim, and cap to
newel posts with galvanized screws, and countersunk-head wood screws and glue.
B. Railings: Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts, wood columns, and to trim at walls with
countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue.
3.6 COLUMN INSTALLATION
A. Lay out column locations on soffits and beams and plumb down to locate column locations at
supports.
B. Scribe and trim tops of columns to fit to soffits and beams.
C. Seal ends of columns with two coats of wood sealer or primer.
D. Secure columns in place at top and bottom.
3.7 PERMANENT PROJECT SIGN INSTALLATION
A. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for permanent project sign.
�w
B. Fabricate sign as detailed on drawings.
C. Install permanent project sign in location designated by Owner.
�r
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -5
5 of 6
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
aw
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with
ends exposed in finished work.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.w.
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION ^
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Cut lumber to required lengths and prime newly cut ends. Comply with requirements in
Division 9 Section"Exterior Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately ,
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
.A
I. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior .r
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish
carpentry.
so
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -4
4 of 6 No
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
2. International Paper Company.
so 3. Stimson Lumber Company, Inc.
4. Swanson Group;Plywood Division.
B. Plywood Type: Exterior,Grade B-B, MDO Plywood.
2.4 RAILINGS
A. Railings: Western red cedar, Grade A, maximum moisture content 19%, surfaced smooth.
B. Balusters: 1-1/2-inch- square, western red cedar, grade A, maximum moisture content 19%,
surfaced smooth.
w C. Newel Posts: 2-inch x 2-inch x 5/16-inch galvanized steel post wrapped in 2/4-inch pressure
treated plywood and trimmed with 1 x cedar trim,as detailed on drawings.
w
2.5 WOOD COLUMNS
A. Fabricate columns from clear stock, solid with a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.
1. Wood Species: Western red cedar
2. Grade: Select Structural
3. Size and Finish: 5-1/2-inch square, fmished smooth.
2.6 PERMANENT PROJECT SIGN
A. Plywood Type: Exterior, Grade B-B,MDO plywood, overlay on both faces.
B. Posts: 4 x 4 solid pressure-preservative-treated Douglas fir or pressure-preservative-treated
southern pine.
C. Lumber Trim for Paint Finish: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA,
maximum moisture content 19%, surfaced smooth.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners.
B. Continuous Soffit Vents: Vinyl hat channel shape with perforations, 2 inches wide, and in
am lengths not less than 96 inches.
1. Net Free Area: 4 sq. in./linear ft.
2. Finish: white.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -3
3 of 6
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 om
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. ..E
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. .�
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's
Board of Review.
A.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp .•.
and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. ..
2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
4W
A. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish:
1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A;NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. ..
3. Finger Jointing: Allowed if made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced(smooth).
2.3 PLYWOOD SOFFITS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering �.
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
4W
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -2
2 of 6 009
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
40 SECTION 06201 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
an
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
04 2. Plywood soffits.
3. Exterior railings.
4. Exterior wood columns.
5. Permanent project sign.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for furring,blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 7 Section"Siding"for fiber-cement, and vinyl siding.
,w 3. Division 9 Section"Exterior Painting" for priming, backpriming, and painting of exterior
finish carpentry.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
00
1.4 SUBMITTALS
w A. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of exposed surface
40 finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
B. Compliance Certificates:
on 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 1
40 1 of 6
w.
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 MR
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded ,w
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
ON
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION so
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
.w
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, No
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. .a
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. 0M
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to so
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install bracing to comply with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
J. Do not cut or remove truss members. ..,
K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in field.
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION ,.
A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-
registered label.
B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. '
END OF SECTION 06176 �••
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176- 6
6of6
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
go Class Fe/Zn 5.
40
2.4 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products,Inc.
3. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.
4. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
�. and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
*" ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
D. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall
studs below,2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both
sides of truss,top plates, and one side of stud below.
E. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing
walls, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to
allow for truss deflection.
+� 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent
zinc dust by weight.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
so B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
MR C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in
TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
am
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176- 5
5 of 6
an
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Aw
3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of any am
species, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without
exceeding allowable design values according to AF&PA's 'National Design Specifications for
Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." .�
C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous
lumber in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry."
2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
2. Cherokee Metal Products,Inc.;Masengill Machinery Company
3. MiTek Industries, Inc.;a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc.
4. Truswal Systems Corporation. ..�
B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS
Type B); G60 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. ..
1. Use for interior locations.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: AS ME B18.6.1. .A
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 -4
4of6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that
complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an
•' independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single
manufacturer.
wr D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1. TPI 1, 'National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."
2. TPI DSB, 'Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing& Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's
'National Design Specifications for Wood Construction"and its "Supplement."
.w
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and
Recommendations for Handling,Installing& Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
1. Store trusses flat,off of ground,and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending.
2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard
and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying
progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176 - 3
3 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. 1/360 where ceiling is
supported by the bottom chord.
b. Girder Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/400 of span for total load. 1/600 of span
for live load.
so
1.5 SUBMITTALS
4W
A. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss so
required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss MW
members due to design loads.
4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
5. Show splice details and bearing details.
6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their .•
preparation.
B. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss
fabricating firm.
C. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer, professional engineer, fabricator, and
Installer.
D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in ...
effect for Project:
1. Metal-plate connectors.
2. Metal truss accessories.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI
and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI I for manufacture of connector plates.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-2
2 of 6
no
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
no DHCD Project No. 214034
qW SECTION 06176-METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood roof trusses,and girder trusses.
""► 2. Wood truss bracing.
3. Metal truss accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for roof sheathing.
40 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-
"'" connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to
Project site.
no B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
ffs
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
0 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
go
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Aw A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1
unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
ON 1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
4"
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176- 1
1 of 6
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 MW
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
END OF SECTION 06160
.■
.a
.w
mo
an
SHEATHING 06160-4
4 of 4
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.6 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized;and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 160 g through 1 sq. in of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96,Desiccant Method(Procedure A).
2. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than nine months.
3. Air Infiltration: .00 1 CFM/Fe @ 1.57 lb/sq, ft.
B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
PART 3-EXECUTION
*� 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
a% 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
40 D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
+�w 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
SHEATHING 06160-3
3 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
4W
C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
am
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. ow
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
ow
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
..
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, including lower two feet of wall
sheathing, and plywood in contact with concrete.
am
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. am
1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
2. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
no
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
..
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch thickness.
2. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified MW
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with 4„
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2. For pressure treated wall sheathing (lower two feet of walls), provide fasteners of Type
304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
SHEATHING 06160-2
2 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 06160- SHEATHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Building wrap.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing
according to referenced standards.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Building wrap.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS,GENERAL
A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
SHEATHING 06160- 1
OR 1 of 4
we
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in
width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in
width,and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if
not indicated, according to Table R502.5(l) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's
International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings.
3.4 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
40 A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements
specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to
rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first
joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- size
or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling
joists.
B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double
rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any,and support with metal
hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge
member or use metal ridge hangers.
I. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same
thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full
bearing against valley rafters.
2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as
regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip
40 rafter.
C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if
any.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
ON Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
as END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 9
9 of 9
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
ow
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. ..a
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICUs International Building Code.
K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. ••
L. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. ,
1. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with
wood filler.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-
bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c.,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16
inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than 4- .W
inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for
ow
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 8
8 of 9
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
40 A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
40
2.11 PEST CONTROL—WALLS
no A. Prior to wallboard application, sprinkle 1 tablespoon of boric acid in the bottom of each expose
stud space.
40
PART 3 -EXECUTION
40
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring,nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
'"" specialty items,and trim.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces,and other concealed cavities as indicated and
40 as follows:
1. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
40 inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness.
40 H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 7
40
7 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.m
2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the •m
following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. aw
2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
4. KC Metals Products, Inc. am
5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.
6. USP Structural Connectors.
im
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis am
and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior and exterior locations.
D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing
flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
I. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
E. Bridging: Rigid, V-section,nailless type,0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.
F. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch
above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and
adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.
G. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof dw
trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or
truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates,and side of stud below.
..
H. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor
bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed
seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. ,.
1. Bolt Diameter: 5/8 inch.
2. Width: 2-1/2 inches.
3. Body Thickness: 0.108 inch.
4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.108 inch.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 6
6 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
40 A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels; DOC PSI, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch
nominal thickness.
2.7 FLUSH ACCESS DOORS
A. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces as shown on drawings.
2. Fire Resistance Rating: Not less than ''h hour.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F. at the end of 30 minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with 1 inch wide, surface mounted trim
for installation in gypsum drywall.
6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by knurled knob with interior release.
B. Available manufacturers:
1. J.L. Industries,Inc.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company
4. Milcor Inc.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 5
40 5 of 9
aw
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 im
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain aw
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering .�
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 3100 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth
members. Aw
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi.
.m
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other am
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking. KM
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 ""
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the Aw
following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common(Sterling)grade;NeLMA,NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, "
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and milers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
4 of 9 �,,
w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2[, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX)].
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following:
1. Wood cants, hailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, and flashing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species.
C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions:
Construction or No. 2 grade of any species:
44 D. Ceiling Joists(Non-Load-Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade of any species:
E. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade of any
species.
F. Exposed Exterior Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and
freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish
40 appearance, including decay,honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits,torn grain, and wane.
4M 1. Species and Grade: Hem-fir(north), Select Structural grade;NLGA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3
No 3 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
MW
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer. ""
B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, a
"Principles and Criteria":
1. Dimension lumber framing. ."
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING a'
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. ..
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
2 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking,and nailers.
4. Wood furring.
5. Plywood backing panels.
6. Flush access doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Sheathing."
2. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses."
3. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
go 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1
1 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.3 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from
inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and *■
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective w
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. .w
END OF SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6
6of6
MR
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil,
flux, and other foreign matter,and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:
1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone IB): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
F. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be
embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Stripe paint corners,crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location,alignment,and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
ws Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match
finish of railings.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 5
5 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain ,
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate. ++�+
F. Cut,reinforce, drill,and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,and similar items.
MW
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with nonwelded connections, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 'w
I. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
am
J. Brackets,Flanges,Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work,unless otherwise indicated.
K. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. .�
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work,unless indicated to remain as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components. `
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -4
4 of 6 ,,�
ups
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight(Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations.
B. Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48K Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.3 FASTENERS
' A. General: Provide the following:
1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
2. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
�w 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Benjamin Moore&Co.;Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.
b. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
C. Sherwin-Williams Company(The);Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
4M d. Tnemec Company, Inc.;Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -3
go 3 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field
measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
dw
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to g,
Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. ow
PART 2-PRODUCTS ■*
2.1 METALS,GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
no
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 -2
2of6
me
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 05521 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe railings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry, Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for
anchoring railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 25 lbf/ft.applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F,ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1
1 of 6
Im
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu.yd. but less than 50 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional
50 cu.yd. or fraction thereof.
3.10 REPAIRS
A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.
END OF SECTION 03301
#w
as
40
w.
40
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 7 of 7 03301 - 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling,
to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry the is to be installed by either
thickset or thin-set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior OP
concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen
trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
am
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot MW
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
MW
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing method must be compatible with application of adhesives for resilient tile and
ceramic floor tile.
am
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
MW
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6 of 7 03301 -6
MW
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
ON DHCD Project No. 214034
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
40
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2
inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish. Retain
rubbed finish in first paragraph below with smooth-formed finish above.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed
finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-rubbed finish.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
wrr
3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or
On darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater
appears on surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated,to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry the set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
40 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5 of 7 03301 - 5
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ow
PART 3 -EXECUTION
am
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design,construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position
with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
.e.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.
s
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,
at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete •
surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when .�
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces,
such as column pedestals, foundation walls,and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete *�
surface,unless otherwise indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4 of 7 03301 -4
a�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
a
A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397,not less than 8 mils thick.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36 or ASTM A307 — 1-1/2" dia. galvanized bolts x 16" long, 18" long
where indicated on drawings.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
go D. Water: Potable.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI301, as
follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: Footings and walls: 3000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio:0.58, or 0.46 air entraining.
3. Concrete Slabs: Minimum Compressive Strength:4000 psi, 28 day compressive strength;
maximum water-cementitious materials ratio 0.58 or 0.46 air entrained.
C. Synthetic Fiber: For slabs, uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended
rate but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu.yd.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C,
and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3 of 7 03301 -3
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories."
3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports."
4. "Concrete Mixtures." .�
5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."
D. Comply with ACI117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
am
PART 2-PRODUCTS
.m
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. ,W
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615K Grade 60,deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type 1/11 •
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size
for footing and 3/4"maximum for walls and slabs.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.
D. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete "ft
pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116,Type 111, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.
aft
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. SW
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2 of 7 03301 -2
.m
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 03301 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
go
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
■w
1.2 SUMMARY
► A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design,placement procedures,and finishes, for noncritical applications of concrete and
for projects using small quantities of concrete.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 3 Section"Site Concrete" for concrete pavement and walks.
3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for underslab and perimeter wall insulation.
4. Division 15 Section "Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning" For radiant floor heating
system.
• 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: In addition to the following,comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
a.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
D. Foundation Anchorage: Anchor bolt layout conforming to 780 CMR 2305.16
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following
sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. "General Requirements."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE I of 7 03301 - 1
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Patching
1. Minor Defective Areas
a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular tot the
surface. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it
to prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar.
b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and
a solution of one part"Konset", or equal approved by the Landscape Architect,
to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately.
C. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a
consistency as dr l as is possible within the requirements of handling and
placing; thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place.
d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces;
aM leave undisturbed -for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then
perform final finishing.
w e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven
days; provide and install all required protective coverings.
2. Major Defective Areas
** If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not
satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Architect may
require the concrete to to removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the
provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.09 COMPENSATION
Measurement — All work relating to paving and surfacing as described in this Section and on the
Contract Drawings shall be measured complete-in-place. In addition to the paving and surfacing
items, related work including excavation, grading, gravel base course and compaction shall be paid
+** for in this Section.
END OF SECTION
Site Concrete 03300
9 of9
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 sm
C. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the sun,
sheilded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods to sm
retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a
particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to
occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of the
concrete, and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are to be
placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a fashion
that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed.
D. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all
methods shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. No curing compounds
of any kind shall be permitted, unless approved by the Landscape Architect.
3.07 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Placement
1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of
slump,flash set or cold joints.
2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F.
3. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations.
B. Protection
1. Provide and use all required raincovers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to
protect the concrete.
2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available
personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering
the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering. ..
3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper
to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against
sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain.
4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring
prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the
Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall
protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own
employees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows
a strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days.
3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK
so
A. Inspection
1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch AM
all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is
thoroughly dry.
2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Landscape Architect. '"
Site Concrete 03300
8of9
sm
an
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
on DHCD Project No. 214034
3.05 LEVELING AND FINISHING
A. General
1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bulfloat as
necessary.
2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or
lower below them.
3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the
aw Drawings.
B. Finishing
1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in
appearance, and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'.
4W 2. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep.
3. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing
operations shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface
and the concrete has started to stiffen.
4. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float.
Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled.
C. Exterior Finishes
Where"broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is
indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a
medium stiff broom after troweling is complete.
3.06 CURING
General
A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor
shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or
sun in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. An approved curing method
providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for
a minimum period of three day:;.
B. In cold weather (below 50 deg F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built
enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above
50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement
Our of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will
be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum
temperature within the enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five day period and 65 deg. F for a
three day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available
water content of the concrete.
.Site Concrete 03300
7of9
4M
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
no
3. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling and flowing.
4. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never
exceeding the maximum specified slump. *W
B. Rate of Placement
am
1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily
between bare bars.
2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the "'
panel or section is complete.
3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is AM
particulary important during hot or dry weather.
4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints.
5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet
in length.
am
C. Compaction
1. Throroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it
around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms.
2. During placement, throughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by
mechanical vibration.
D. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be placed at 24 foot intervals maximum or as shown on plans. MW
E. Isolation Joints
Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around street light footings, or as directed 4W
by the Landscape Architect. They shall be a preformed foam material with joint sealant
identical to the approved expansion joints.
F. Acceptablity 0M
Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreigh
materials.
40
3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Location
Make and locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength of the structure.
B. Approval
Obtain the Landscape Architect's approval of location of all control joints and construction
joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement.
Site Concrete 03300
6of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
wur
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
All other materials not specifically des,,ribed but required for a complete and proper installation of
cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the
Landscape Architect.
PART 3.00—EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Ins ion
1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place.
3. Thoroughly wet the forms,(except in freezing weather)or oil them; remove all standing
water.
4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment.
B. Forms
+� 1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of
sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the
thickness of the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Landscape Architect.
2. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been previously
used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to the
established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished walk
which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for surface
drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2%cross-slope typical.
3. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete.
C. Notification
Notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours before placing the concrete.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
r A. Method
1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent
separation and loss of materials.
2. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of
such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the
delivery end without loss or separation of materials.
Site Concrete 03300
5of9
WK
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.w
E. Water
All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter. an
2.02 CONCRETE MIXES
Cement concrete shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates,
water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified
according to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used
shall be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work.
MR
CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES
Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum
Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate %Air ,m
Concrete Strength* Designation Size
A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 ""
B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5
C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5
D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0 ow
DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0
E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0
F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0
as
*As evaluated under ASTM C94-74.
All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual .m
mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Landscape Architect for
approval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
am
2.03 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS
Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed cell
polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for the
installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufacturer's "`
standard instructions.
2.04 JOINT SEALANT aw
At all construction and expansion joints,joint sealant shall be gray in color as:
A. 790 Building Sealant"by Dow Corning;
.m
B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.;
C. "Perna-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal. go
2.05 SEALANT RETAINER
Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polythelen foam cord by the following manufacturers: OW
A. Progress Unlimited Inc., New York City, NY;
B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI; ow
C. Products Research Corp., Glouster City, NJ, or approved equal.
MW
Site Concrete 03300
4of9
ow
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Cement
All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type 1, and shall be the
product of one manufacturer. he temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not
exceed 150 deg. F. Color shall match existing concrete.
D. Aggregates
W
1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein.
2. When used as a fine aIggLegate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed
essentially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear
,ear and frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains,
organic matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect
bonding of the cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be
relatively spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the
sand shall show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table.
Size of Percent by Weigh Passing
Sieve Minimum Maximum
3/8" 100 --
#4 95 100
#16 55 80
#50 10 25
#100 2 8
#200 0 2
3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened
gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable
particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from delterious amounts of organic
matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated
stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement.
Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that
breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse
aggregate.
When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement
concrete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for
each designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and
maximum in each case To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or
project, the range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon
determination of the character and source of the materials that the Contractor
proposes to furnish.
Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3
Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8"
Sieve Size } Min. Max. } Min. Max. } Min. Max.
------------------------____ -----_--------------------
1 1/2 inch } 90 100 } -- -- -- --
3/4 inch } 35 60 } 90 100 } -- --
1/2 inch } — — } — -- } 90 100
3/8 inch } 10 25 } 20 50 30 70
No. 4 } 0 5 } 0 10 } 0 15
No. 8 } — -- ( 0 5 0 5
Site Concrete 03300
3of9
AM
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ow
B. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip
1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete,
together with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour.
2. Make a record available to the Landscape Architect for his inspection upon request.
3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips
to the Landscape Architect.
C. Sample Test Slab
A sample test slab of the concrete walks shall be poured to determine color match with ..
existing concrete walks.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
.W
A. Protection
Use all means necessary to protect cast-in-place concrete materials before, during and after
installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Contractor to
make every effort to conduct concrete pours in early morning hours to allow sufficient time
for hardening. Scratches and graffiti will not be approved or accepted.
B. Replacements .�
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
.m
PART 2.00-PRODUCTS
am
2.01 CONCRETE
A. General
All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Landscape Architect, shall be
transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D.
Concrete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the
Landscape Architect. �..
B. Quality
1. All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and
shall be proportioned within the following limits:
EXTERIOR SLABS
LOCATION OF CONCRETE &SITE WORK
Min. psi @ 28 days 4000
Max. size of aggregate 314 inch
Max. slump in inches 4
2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water-cement
ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air.
Site Concrete 03300
2of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 03300
SITE CONCRETE
PART 1.00-GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General
Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included
Cast-in-place concrete required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but
is not necessarily limited to:
40 1. Exterior flatwork;
2. Concrete footings for site furnishings,fences, etc_
Related Work Described Elsewhere
1. Excavating, Filling &Grading.................................................Section 02200
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Workmen
1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this
portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types
of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section.
2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and
experienced journeymen concrete finishers.
B. Codes and Standards
1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all
pertinent recommendations of"Structural Concrete for Builders"% publication ACI 301-
66 of the American Concrete Institute.
2. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications,
the more stringent provisions shall govern.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job site,
submit to the Landscape Architect the name and address of transit-mix concrete supplier.
4"
Site Concrete 03300
1 of 9
00
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
W DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering, weeding, mowing/raking, repair of all
erosion, and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be
watered daily to maintain adequate surface soil moisture for proper seed germination.
Continue daily watering for not less than 30 days. Thereafter apply 1/2"of water twice per
week until acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason
shall be reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots, evenly
distributed and not exceeding 8"square of any lawn area,will be allowed at the discretion of
the Architect.
w� At the time of the first cutting,there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-112" high, and
mower blades shall be set between 2-1/2"and 3"high. Catch shall be representative of
seed specified.
3.08 ACCEPTANCE
The Architect shall inspect all vw)rk for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor.
The request shall be received a':least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of
inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the
judgement of the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Acceptance
of the work.
w
3.09 ACCEPTANCE IN PART
The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to
do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts.
Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this
Contract.
3.10 CLEANUP
A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at
all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings.
B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the
satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean.
40 3.11 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for the Final
go Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least
10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection.
am Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of
the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final
Acceptance of the project.
40 END OF SECTION
to
Seeding and Sodding 02850
"' 7of7
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Promptly after seeding, wet the seed bed thoroughly, keeping all areas moist throughout the
germination period.
D. Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall
be spread evenly and uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre or(2) 50 lbs. bales
per 1,000 sq. ft. of area. Lumps and thick mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch •�
anchor stakes, strings and matting shall be removed before final acceptance of lawns.
E. Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating.
These measures shall include furnishing warnings signs, barriers, and other needed
measures of protection.
3.06 SODDING ..
A. Moisture Content
Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content(excessively dry or wet)
may adversely affect its survival.
B. Time Limitations
1. Sod shall be harvested, delivered and transplanted within a period of 36 hours unless
a suitable preservation method is approved prior to delivery.
2. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected and approved by the
Architect prior to its installation.
C. Transplanting
1. Moistening the Soil: During periods of higher than optimal temperature for species
being specified and after all uneveness in the soil surface has been corrected, the soil
shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying sod.
2. Starter Strip: The first row of sod shall be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows
placed parallel to and tightly against each other. Lateral joints shall be staggered to
promote more uniform growth and strength. Care shall be exercised to ensure that
sod is not stretched or overlapped and that all joints are butted tight in order to
prevent voids which would cause air drying of the roots.
3. Sloping Surfaces: On 1:3 or greater slopes, sod shall be laid with staggered joints
and secured by tamping, pegging or other approved methods. *o
4. Watering and Rolling: Water sod immediately after transplanting to prevent excessive
drying during progress of work.. As sodding is completed in any one section, the ,w
entire area shall be rolled. It shall then be thoroughly watered to a depth sufficient
that the underside of the new sod pad and soil immediately below the sod are
thoroughly wet. The Owner shall be responsible for having adequate water available.
go
3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until o.
Acceptance or for a minimum of 60 days, whichever is longer.
sm
Seeding and Sodding 02850
6of7 •W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Immediately prior to being covered with topsoil,the top 3" of the subgrade shall be raked or
otherwise loosened and shall be free of stones, rock, and other foreign material 2" or greater
in dimensions.
3.03 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION
A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or worked in a frozen or muddy condition.
B. Topsoil shall be placed and spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than
6" in"loam and seed" lawn areas and 15" in plant bed areas so that after natural settlement
and light rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines, grades, and elevations
indicated.
D. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas, it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying
or harrowing, and stones over one inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It
shall be free of smaller stones in excessive quantities, as determined by the Architect.
E. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds
�w per foot of width. During the rolling,all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be
filled with additional topsoil, and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a
smooth and even finish to the required grade.
3.04 SEED/SOD BED PREPARATION
A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified, spread limestone at
a rate specified by the testing agency.
B. Apply the recommended fertilizer at the rate recommended by the testing agency.
Thoroughly and evenly incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3" by discing
or other approved method. In areas inaccessible to power equipment, use hand tools.
Adjacent to trees and shrubs, use hand tools to avoid disturbances of the roots.
C. The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil, as recommended by a soil testing
agency, prior to use as planting soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the
Contractor, as recommended, at no expense to the Owner.
w D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil, the seed bed shall be fine graded to
remove all ridges and depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one
inch or more in diameter.
0
3.05 SEEDING
ON A. Immediately before seeding, the ground shall be restored, as necessary, to a loose friable
condition by discing or other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface
shall be cleared of all debris and of all stones 1"or more in diameter.
40 B. Seed all areas to be seeded with specified grass seed, sowing evenly with an approved
mechanical seeder at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Spread seed when soil is
moist. Cultipacker, or approved similar equipment, may be used to cover the seed and to
firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker, the seeded ground
shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water ballast roller. Extreme care
shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall occur in the finished
40 grades and that the seed is not raked from one spot to another.
Seeding and Sodding 02850
on 5of7
MW
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.04 GRASS SEED
A. General -All grass seed shall be:
1. Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned, Grade A recent crop seed, treated with
appropriate fungicide at time of mixing, and delivered to the site in sealed containers with
dealer's guaranteed analysis.
B. Seed Mix Proportions by Weight
% by Weight Seed % Purii %Germination
10% Baron Bluegrass 90% 75%
10% Flyking Bluegrass 85% 75% ..
40% Illahee Red Fescue* 98% 90%
5% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90%
35% Manhattan 11 Per Rye" 98% 90%
*denotes seed mixture containing active endophytes
Weed seed content shall not exceed 0.25°/x. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be
rejected.
2.05 SOD
A. Sod shall be first quality sod equal to the blend in 2.04 B.
Part 3.00-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades, ..
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the
referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
Im
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
go
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true, I
smooth slope, parallel and 6"below finished grade, for all seed bed areas. Remove all
existing lawns and grasses, including roots.
B. There must be sufficient grade staked, as determined by the Architect, to insure correct line ow
and grade of subgrade and of finished grade.
Seeding and Sodding 02850
4 of 7 ..*
Mary McCoigan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Part 2.00-PRODUCTS
2.01 TOPSOIL
A. General
Topsoil, except that existing on the site, will not be made available by the Owner. The
Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any additional topsoil needed and hauling it to
the site. It shall be obtained from naturally well-drained areas. It shall not be excessively
acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil
shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be cleaned and free from clay lumps, stones,
stumps, roots, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects
which might be a hindrance to planting operations. Furnish all topsoil required to complete
the work. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
,w
B. Testing
The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to
be hauled in and shall submit samples to a Sal Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis,
and physical analysis. The Contractor shall indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be
planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the Architect two copies of
analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies. The Contractor is responsible for
adding soil amendments recommended by the testing agency.
w.
2.02 FERTILIZER
40 A. General
All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with
the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.
B. Commercial Fertilizer
Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous
elements shall be derived from organic sources; phosphate shall be derived from
superphosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric acid or bonemeal containing 25-30
percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen; and potash shall be derived from muriate
of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. 12-4-8 50%organic may be substituted.
Fertilizer shall be mixed, as specified, and delivered to the site in standard, unopened
containers showing weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer.
2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Peat
Peat shall be moist. It shall be finely shredded, consist of 90 percent organic moss peat, be
brown in color, and suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed
one(1) inch in diameter. Peat shall be measured in air dry condition, containing not more
than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not exceed 10 percent.
B. Limestone
Ground dolomitic limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not
less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50
percent will pass a 100 mesh sieve, and 90 percent will pass a 20 mesh sieve.
Seeding and Sodding 02850
' 3of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
.W
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List .m
Within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the
job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all seeding and sodding materials and am
other items proposed to be installed.
1. Include complete data on source, size, and quality.
am
2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section.
3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items .e
described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been
approved in advance by the Architect.
B. Certificates ""
1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments.
4W
2. Prior to installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect.
1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING
ow
A. Delivery and Storage
1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible a'
at time of Architect's inspection.
2. Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name AM
and all materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these
Specifications.
3. Use all means necessary to protect seeding materials before, during, and after wo
installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 SEEDING OR SODDING SEASON
A. Seeding/Sodding
Seeding/sodding shall be done between August 30th to October 15 and/or April 1st to July
1 St.
B. Variance
If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a
written request shall be submitted to the Architect stating the special conditions for the
proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of
the Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding, the Contractor shall be responsible for a
full growth of grass.
Seeding and Sodding 02850
2of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02850
SEEDING & SODDING
Part 1.00-GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
.. A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard
established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document
not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in
*� accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work of this section is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes seeding and/or
sodding.
1.05 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
A. Excavating, Filling, and Grading..........................................................Section 02200
B. Planting ...................Section 02800
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion
of the Work, be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best
methods for their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section.
B. Standards
1. All planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws
requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.
2. Quality shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for number
one grade seed or sod, as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen.
Seeding and Sodding 02850
,, 1 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3.09 CLEANUP
A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at
all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings.
B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the
satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean.
3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final
acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10
calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection.
Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of
the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final
acceptance of the Project.
END OF SECTION
w.
40
4►
Planting 02800
11 of 11
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified
size, character, and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full aw
conformance to the contract documents, including correct species.
Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of ow
the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work.
B. Acceptance in Part
am
The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to
do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts.
Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this am
Contract.
3.07 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS
A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance.
B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year from the
date of Acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition.
C. When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial
acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods
terminate at one time.
D. The Contractor shall replace, without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather
conditions permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a
vigorous thriving condition, as determined by the Architect during and at the end of the
guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall
bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent
specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in
this Specification.
E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year
from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is
not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may
elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item.
F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the .W
guarantee period to determine what changes, if any, should be made to the Owner's
maintenance program. Submit in writing to the Architect any recommended changes.
3.08 CARE OF EXISTING TREES o`
Upon completion of the work under this Section, all existing trees shall be pruned and any
injuries repaired. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to wa
remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots as a
result of construction operations. Roots greater than 2"shall be hand-cut to provide dean,
concise, cutting and removal. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the 4W
natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made at teh branch collar, leaving no
stubs. On all cuts over 3/4"diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium
shall be traced back to living tissue and removed; wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so dW
as not to retain water.
Planting 02800
10 of 11 ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Pruning
1. Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to
preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning to be done under supervision of
the Project Architect.
2. Pruning and trimming shall include the following:
a) Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches, unless
otherwise directed by the Architect Contractor shall not cut main leader of
tree.
b) Use only clean sharp tools.
3.04 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shalt continue until
acceptance of the project by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days, whichever is longer.
B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, tightening
and repairing guys, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the
planting saucer, and furnishing and applying such sprays or other items as are necessary to
keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition.
C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of
all kinds for the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or
injured, they shall be treated or replaced as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to
the Owner.
D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not
equipped with an irrigation system.
3.05 INSPECTION
ew In addition to normal progress inspection, schedule and conduct the following formal inspections,
giving the Architect at least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for inspection:
A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting.
B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings.
C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Architect so
that the final inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after completion of planting.
D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period, provided that all previous
deficiencies have been corrected.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE
A. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor.
The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of
inspection.
Planting 02800
9 of 11
4M
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 wk
3.03 PLANTING OPERATIONS
am
A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated
1. Immediately before digging, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf „R
with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or
foliage.
2. Dig, ball and burlap("B&B") plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diameter not
less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient
depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be
accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted
immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, „
or other acceptable materials and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain
unplanted for longer than three days after delivery.
4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or
break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only.
B. Planting Trees and Shrubs
1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted
immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss,
or other acceptable material and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain
unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. Plants shall not be bound with
wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be
lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only.
2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from
which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared
topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots.
3. Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been
set. Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball.. If wrapping is plastic, remove top
2/3.
4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled
approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering,
install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering.
5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings.
6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings.
.R
7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4" layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after
planting.
8. Immediately after planting, water all plants thoroughly.
Planting 02800
8of11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the
referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
+�. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
3.02 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS
A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain
approval of the Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total
,w planting must be staked before inspection will be made.
B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings.
C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever
encountered during planting operations.
+* D. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil condition which the Contractor considers detrimental
to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Architect for
correcting condition.
Notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions which the Contractor consi ers
detrimental growth of plant material.
"" E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession.
Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect.
F. If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the
excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be considered by the Architect. Where
location cannot be changed, as determined by the Architect, submit cost required to remove
40 the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6" below the required pit depth. Proceed with
work after approval of the Architect.
40
4"
Planting 02800
40 7of11
dW
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 JW
C. Plants identified as"selection specimen"shall be approved and tagged at their place of
growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. "m
2.10 PLANT LABELS Ow
Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather-
resistant ink or embossed process lettering.
am
2.11 GUYING, STAKING, AND WRAPPING MATERIALS
A. Ground anchors shall be castings, stamped steel, or deadmen of wood or other material
approved by the Architect. Width across top span and length, exclusive of pin from top to
arrowed tip, shall conform to the following list. Assemblies for anchors shall also conform to
the following list: am
Tree Caliper 2-5 inches
Anchor Size 4 inches
Type Wire am
Capacity 500 lbs.
Assembly 36" length; .120 diameter
im
B. Guying cable shall be five strand, 3/16"diameter steel cable. Turnbuckles shall be
galvanized or dip-painted, having a 3"minimum lengthwise opening fitted with screw eyes.
Eyebolts shall be galvanized, having a 1"opening fitted with screw length of 1>". Hose shall
be suitable lengths of two-ply, reinforced, black rubber hose, 3/4"in diameter. Stakes for
supporting trees shall be 2-1/2 inches square of round, by 8 feet sound wood, treated for one
half their length with creosote or equal.
C. Flags to be fastened to guys shall be of sound wood about 1/2 inch by 3 inches by 12 inches
with a 3/8 inch hole centered 1-1/2 inches from each end, or 1-1/2 inches by 12 inches
sheetmetal with comers clipped and punched both ends, painted white.
D. Hose to encase guy wires or wires used for fastening trees to stakes shall be new or used
2-ply reinforced rubber garden hose.
E. Wrapping material for tree trunks shall be standard burlap, heavy crepe paper, or other
suitable material, in strips 6 to 10 inches wide.
Ow
2.12 ANTI-DESICCANT
Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surfaces, „W
permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the
manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions("Wiltpruf'manufactured
by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls, New York, or approved
equal). aw
..
4W
Planting 02800
6 of 11 .m
w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6"above natural ground line for trees up to
4" in caliper and 12"above the natural ground line for trees over 4" in caliper. Height and
spread dimensions specified refer to the mein body of the plant and not from branch tip to
tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. If a range of size
10 is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the
plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are
minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet
,,,m measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be
rejected.
F. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached
securely to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant materials delivered with care that
those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth.
G. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the
Architect. If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not
obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar
variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price.
H. Type of Protection to Roots
1. Balled and Burlapped Plants
Plants designated"B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall
be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass
the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall
be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire
mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the
process of planting, the ball may be secured to a platform.
2. Protection After Delivery
The balls of"B&B"plants and container grown plants which cannot be planted
immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch, or other protection
from drying winds and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted.
2.08 INSPECTIONS
Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be
required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Architect prior to acceptance of
the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not
preclude rejection of plants at the work site.
2.09 SELECTION AND TAGGING
A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at their place of growth
and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not
impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's
representative shall be present at all inspections.
B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to
the Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the
place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Architect may refuse inspection
at this time if, in his judgement, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection.
Planting 02800
5 of11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2.04 PEAT MOSS
Brown; acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH; low in content of wood material and free of mineral
matter harmful to plant life; water absorbing capacity, 1100 to 2000 percent; moisture
content 30 percent natural, shredded or granulated.
2.05 WATER
Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure
an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all
necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of
lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified.
2.06 PLANTING SOIL .,
A. The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free
from subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one(1)inch diameter and other extraneous
materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used
for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition.
B. Planting soil mix shall consist of seven parts loam and one part peat moss by volume. It
shall have pH value between pH 5.0 to pH 6.0.
Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an
approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in "b
otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Architect.
2.07 PLANT MATERIALS '
A. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in
accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the
locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last
two years. All plants B+B or container grown. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold
storage will be accepted.
B. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of specimen quality; exceptionally
heavy; and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be
unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall .�
be sound; healthy;vigorous; well-branched and densely foliated when in leaf; free of
disease; insects; eggs or larvae; and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that
would prevent thriving growth.
C. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless specified,will
be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sunscalds,
disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over 3/4" in diameter, not completely ...
calloused, will be rejected.
D. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger
than specified may be used if approved by the Architect. Use of such plants shall not
increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the root ball shall be increased in
proportion to the size of the plant.
Planting 02800
4 of 11 '"'"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Immediately remove from the site all plants which are not true to name and all
materials which do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these
Specifications.
3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation
and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Planting Season
1. Planting shall be done within the following dates:
Deciduous material: March 1 -May 15
October 25-December 1
4W
Evergreen Material: March 1 -June 1
August 15-October 15
w
Seeding, Sodding: April 1 -June 1
August 15-September 30
" ' 2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a
written request shall be submitted to the Project Architect stating the special
conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if
warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the
Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 FERTILIZER
A. General
Plant fertilizer packets shall be installed as per the drawings.
2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT
All soil amendment shall be peat; a domestic product consisting of partially decomposed
vegetable matter of natural occurrence. It shall be brown, clean, low in content of mineral
and woody material, mildly acid and granulated or shredded, and fortified with organic
nitrogen or an equal commercial soil amendment approved in advance by the Architect.
2.03 BARK MULCH
Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size, free of chunks and pieces of
wood thicker than 1/4"and approved by the Architect. The mulch must be partially
decomposed and dark brown in color.
Planting 02800
3of11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 NP
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
00
A. Qualifications of Workmen
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion „,o
of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best
methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Section.
B. Standards '"
1. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and
State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.
2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for
number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Association of
Nurserymen.
3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the
name and size of the plants, in accordance with the standards of practice of the
American Association of Nurserymen. In all cases, botanical names shall take
precedence over common names.
4. All Plants to be grown from stock hardy in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 2 through 5.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect *•
a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed:
1. Include a complete data on source, size, and quality.
2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section.
3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items
described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been
approved in advance by the Architect.
B. Certificates
1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments.
2. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect.
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING ..
A. Delivery and Storage
1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible
at time of Architect's inspection.
Planting 02800
2 of 11
4"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
4m SECTION 02800
PLANTING
40 PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
40 Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General
Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in
this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard
established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either
Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be
provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. (See Article 1 of the General
and Supplementary General Conditions.)
1.04 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.05 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard
established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.
1.06 SECTION INCLUDES
Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes planting
of trees and/or shrubs throughout the Work including furnishing all materials, equipment, and
labor necessary for root protection, and tree guards where applicable.
1.07 RELATED WORK
A. Excavating, Filling &Grading..............................................................Section 02200
B. Seeding and Sodding.................................................................Section 02850
4.
Planting 02800
40 1 of 11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Closed Circuit TV Testing
1. In addition to the leakage testing specified above, the entire gravity sewer system
piping shall be tested using closed circuit TV testing equipment. Testing shall be
done by a specialty pipeline testing agency experienced in closed circuit TV testing
of utility pipelines and acceptable to the local BOARD OF HEALTH. Equipment
used shall be specifically designed for inspection and testing of utility pipelines.
2. Testing shall include visual observation of interior of pipeline including all joints and
connections. Pipeline shall be certified by testing agency to be constructed in
accordance with the Contract Documents including requirements for slope,joining,
and absence of debris and foreign matter.
3. Duplicate copies of test reports shall be submitted to the Architect.
F. Manhole and Tank Testing
1. Leakage testing of sewer manholes and tank(s)shall be included in the testing of
the gravity sewer system. Leakage for each manhole shall not exceed 1 gal./vertical
ft. of manhole per 24 hours. Leakage for each concrete tank shall not exceed 1 inch
drop in 24 hours.
G. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction, submit a
written statement to the Architect that work has been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
H. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing, a report fully describing test
procedures and listing test results shall be submitted to the Architect and to governmental
agencies that have jurisdiction. The report shall be signed by the Contractors'
superintendent.
I. Pipe deflection testing for PVC piping.
1. Six months following completion of the backfill over the PVC pipe installation, the
pipeline shall be tested for deflection using a"go/no go"deflection mandrel. The
"go/no-go"gage shall be passed through all sections of the pipeline.
2. Pipe deflections shall be measured and converted to percent deflection. Deflections
shall be recorded, with a copy of results submitted to the Architect. Test results
shall be mailed or delivered to the Architect not later than the day following the day
on which test was made.
3. Sections of pipe with deflection greater than 7.5%shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
7of7
Im
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
be filled with water to a level 2 ft. above the crown of the pipe in the upper manhole. am
Before any measurements are made, a period of about 2 hours shall be permitted to
allow for absorption and escape of trapped air. Fallowing this, a test period of at
least 4 hours shall begin. At the end of the test period, loss of water shall be
measured and leakage computed therefrom. """'
3. Air testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedures described in ASTM
C 828, except as otherwise noted. For low-pressure air tests use equipment so
specifically designed and manufactured to test sewer pipelines with low-pressure air.
The equipment shall be provided with an air regulatory valve or air safety valve so
set that the internal air pressure in the pipeline cannot exceed 8 psig. as
a. The leakage test using low-pressure air shall be made on each manhole-to-
manhole of pipeline after placement of the backfill.
up
b. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the
diameter of the pipe to be tested. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test
pressures without requiring external bracing or blocking. am
C. All air used for testing shall pass through a single control panel.
d. Low-pressure air shall be introduced into the sealed line until the internal air "R
pressure reaches a value 4 psig greater than the maximum pressure exerted
by groundwater that may be above the invert of the pipe at the time of the
test. However, the internal air pressure in the sealed line shall not be allowed ■w
to exceed 8 psig. When the maximum pressure exerted by the groundwater
is greater than 4 psig, conduct infiltration test.
e. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize in the
section under test. After the stabilization period,the low-pressure air supply
hose shall be quickly disconnected from the control panel. The time required
in minutes for the pressure in the section under test to decrease from 3.5 to "®
2.5 psig (greater than the maximum pressure exerted by groundwater that
may be above the invert of the pipe) shall not be less than shown in the
following table:
Pipe diameter in inches Minute s
8 4.0
10 5.0
12 5.5
f. Where the sewer section to be tested contains more than one size of pipe, the .w
minimum allowable time shall be based on the largest diameter pipe in the
section, and shall be the time shown on the table reduced by 0.5 minutes.
.A
4. Rate of infiltration and exfiltration shall not exceed 20 gal./in. of pipe diameter per
mile of pipe per 24 hours. Each section of pipe tested shall meet the above
criterion.
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
6of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Connections to existing facilities
1. The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed sanitary sewer
into existing sanitary sewer facilities, where and as shown on the Drawings.
2. Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering
+ existing piping or structure.
3. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.02 TESTING
A. The entire sewer system, including piping and manholes shall be tested for leakage. Piping
shall also be tested by the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be
tested using closed circuit TV. All testing shall conform to the requirements of the local
Board of Health.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure
sewer line shall have thrust blocks installed(under another section of the
specifications) and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test
pressure is applied to the line.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean, and sediment, scale, dirt, and debris removed
before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provisions shall be made for carrying off flushing water without causing
erosion or other damage.
4. Manholes and piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made
inaccessible.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority of having
jurisdiction.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Architect and the local plumbing inspector,
and received by them not less than five days before the date of test.
D. Gravity flow system test
1. When the groundwater is more than 1 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upper
end of the section to be tested, an infiltration test shall be made. The upper end of
the section to be tested shall be plugged on V-notch weir of appropriate size shall be
fitted into the lower end. There shall be no leakage around the weir plate.
Commercially manufactured weirs, made and calibrated for the purpose, may be
employed.
2. When groundwater is less than 1 ft. above the crown of the pipe at the upper end of
the section to be tested, an exfiltration test shall be made. The sewer shall be
u plugged at the inlet pipes of both the upper and lower manholes. The line shall then
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
5of7
Mary McCoigan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 -
2.04 Embedment Materials
PVC pipe embedment materials shall conform to Class I or Class 11 embedment materials
as defined in ASTM D 2321.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall install all sanitary sewer structures and pipe in the locations as shown on the ..
Drawings and/or as approved by the Owner's Field Representative and in accordance with the
local BOARD OF HEALTH Standards.
A. Piping - PVC
1. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects.
2. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
3. PVC pipe installation shall conform to ASTM D2321.
4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe
installation. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the
trench.
5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free
from foreign matter during installation.
6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length
and bring inverts of the required grade.
7. Piping shall be properly graded, free from pockets.
8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently support on saddles, blocking or stones. �..
9. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close
ends of pipeline at end of each day's work.
10. Cleaning
a. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work +■*
progresses.
b. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. In large, accessible piping, use brushes and brooms for clearing.
d. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work
stops.
e. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris.
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
4of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the Drawings and
specified herein.
+�w
A. Identification
1. Provide underground-type plastic line markers, manufacturer's standard permanent,
bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service.
2. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick
3. Provide green tape with black printing reading"CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED
BELOW".
4. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems, install continuous
underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 in. to 8 in.
below finished grade.
2.02 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe
" 1. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to
ASTM D 3034, SDR35 minimum wall thickness.
2. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6".
3. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring, factory
assembled.
4. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be
imprinted with an"assemble stripe", to which the bell end of the mated pipe will
extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes.
5. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212.
6. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper
location in the coupling grooves.
7. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type, compatible with the pipe.
2.03 Mortar
Mortar shall conform to Specifications Section M4.02.15.
Grout shall be a nonshrink cement-based type, such as Master Builders Company
"Embeco", or U.S. Grout Corporation"Five Star Grout".
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
3of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. American Society for Testing and Materials:
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C433
Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D3231
Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034
Joints for Drain and Sewer and Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomedc Seals
D3212
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, (MHD)
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
4. Local Municipal Requirements
a. The Contractor shall notify the local BOARD OF HEALTH prior to installation.
All work and materials shall be subject to the approval of the local BOARD OF
HEALTH.
B. Permits
The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
C. Inspection
1. All sanitary sewer System installation shall be inspected and approved by the
local Board of Health. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all
arrangements with the BOARD OF HEALTH and paying all fees associated
with the Sanitary Sewerage System installation.
2. The Contractor shall have the new gravity pipe system televised and supply
certified videotape to the local BOARD OF HEALTH. Arrangements shall be
made with the City prior to performing the TV inspection, so the BOARD OF .■
HEALTH personnel can witness the taping process.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
sanitary sewage system materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for sanitary sewage systems, and maintenance
data.
C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings at Project Closeout.
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
2of7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
+! ► DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02730
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
40 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
on Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
40 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in
"" accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials
and equipment necessary and required to install exterior sanitary sewer system beginning
at a point 10 feet outside of building foundation wall, in accordance with the Contract
Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of sanitary sewers consisting of manholes, grease trap, drop
connections, pipe and all necessary and required accessory items and operations.
2. Pay costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing
services. File applications, details, and drawings required by the local authority
having jurisdiction.
3. Connection of building sanitary sewer service lines to the site sanitary sewer
system.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating, Filling and Grading...................................................Section 02200
Cast-in-Place Concrete...............................................................Section 03300
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
Sanitary Sewage System 02730
1 of 7
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Installation shall be timed to permit placing curb during daylight hours, unless artificial light
satisfactory to the Engineer is provided.
on C. The pieces of granite shall be set on wooden blocks and leveled over an adequate length to
verify true vertical alignment. The concrete shall then be poured and hand troweled to fill
all voids below and in front of the curb as detailed..
40 D. Granite curb shall be tapered to meet existing grade in areas adjacent to handicapped
access ramps and at the connection to the gravel access road on the eastern side of the
site as indicated in the drawings.
so
E. Where new granite curbing joins existing or new bituminous curbing, the bituminous curbing
shall be replaced for a distance of 2 feet and shall be tapered to conform to the granite end
OR
shape.
F. Portions of granite which become broken, cracked or chipped shall only be allowed for use
if approved by the Engineer after a thorough visual inspection.
on
G. Joints between pieces of curbing shall be filled with an approved mortar mix in
conformance with M4.02.15.
w
3.08 REMEDIAL MEASURES
Upon direction of the Engineer, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas
"w which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial measures at no
additional cost to the Owner.
40 3.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be
consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work
and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and connected to the work of
other trades.
0 END OF SECTION
40
4W
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
9 of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 •
density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside lines of finished
pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be
employed in the work.
10. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the
course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new
pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. Any longitudinal
or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to placement of
adjacent mix, shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement.
New material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling.
Compaction of pavement, base, and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no
yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic.
11. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement(if greater than or equal seven
days since binder placed), parking lot overlay areas, manholes, concrete collars and
similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating
of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at
rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 gal./100 s.y. after evaporation of
vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic �.
paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack
coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted
over.
12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such
quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allowing at least 1
ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and
compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing
earth or other approved material along edge.
13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in.
when tested with a 10 ft. straight edge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to
centerline of paved area. At joints with existing pavement, and at other locations
where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement elevation tolerance shall
not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed
+ 0.05 ft. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface
shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing with new material
conforming to this section.
3.06 TRAFFIC STRIPING
A. Traffic paint materials, equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be observed
as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MHD Specifications for traffic
striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured
for a minimum of 14 days.
B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings.
C. Striping width shall be as detailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
3.07 GRANITE CURB
.W
A. Granite curb work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less
than 35 degrees F.
.m
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
8of9
.A
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished, handled and laid in accordance with
40 Section 460 and Section 701 of the State Specifications, except as herein modified.
1. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied individually,
in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings.
2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light
coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by
the Engineer.
3. Adjacent concrete work, curb, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during
entire operation. Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal
their original condition.
4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Public
Works Specifications, Section 460, Class I, Bituminous Concrete Pavement, Type-I.
5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall
ws be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. Deliveries shall be timed to
permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light,
w satisfactory to the Engineer, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or
otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be
permitted.
6. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pavement
surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown
rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without
undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be completed while the mix temperature
exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally, starting at edge of
newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap
on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel.
Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in
surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed.
Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted.
Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while
mixture is hot and in compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault
shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or removal
or mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks
are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving
is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold.
8. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers.
Hand tampers shall weight at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or
equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal compaction will be
acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively.
9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in
any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
7of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
specified for the formation of embankments, for sub-base, shoulders etc., and as specified
herein.
B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles, or with power graders of
approved types, or by hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers
no more than six(6") inches thick, compacted measure. Compaction requirements shall be
to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2
in, shall be excluded from course. The method of compaction proposed by the Contractor
shall be approved by the Engineer and the approved method and procedure, once
established and providing the required results, shall be used throughout the entire
operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. Trucks shall not be
used for compaction purposes. s,
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if
continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base
thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. w`
D. Width of Base
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures
only after they have been set to required grade and level.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin
on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue
until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long
straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement
lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or
dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and
otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding
with next operation.
am
3.05 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING
A. Preparation
..
Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and
when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only
when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix am
delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no circumstances shall mix
temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325
degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load. MW
B. Placement
Am
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
6of9
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of
10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to
rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Engineer.
B. Paving Equipment
All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable
�w of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified, with laser
grading sensors for tolerance accuracy.
3.03 GRADING
40
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation
under Section 02200, EXCAVATION, before work of this section is performed. Final fine
40 grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm,
uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines,
shall be done under this Section.
40 B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be removed
and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to
required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material
+s conforming to this Section.
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of
material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90%of
maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compaction shall
extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge.
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final
compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in
completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as
directed by the Engineer as specified in Section 02200, EXCAVATION. Completed
subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.
Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as
required, and recompacted before placing pavement.
on F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and
material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall
be disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved by the
10 Engineer before installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by
inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE
aM
A. The gravel shall be furnished, hauled, deposited and spread in layers as specified in
applicable provisions of Section 40, and 405 of the State Specifications and compacted as
00
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
go
5of9
.m
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. The Owner has supplied 50 linear feet of straight granite curbing to the site for use at this ..,,
project.
2.06 CONCRETE FOR CURB SETTING
All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer, shall be transit-mixed in
accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete shall be Massachusetts DPW standard specifications
class D.
2.07 TRAFFIC PAINT
Pavement striping and reflective glass beads shall conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07
of the MDPW Specifications.
2.08 TRAFFIC SIGNS
Traffic and street signs shall be in compliance with the minimum requirements of the City of ..
Northampton. Said signs shall include(2) handicapped parking signs. Handicap parking signs
and pavement markings shall be as per ADA and Mass Barrier Access Board latest codes and
standards.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection ..
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the
referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies g,
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies 'm,
have been fully resolved.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Compacting Equipment
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
4of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as hereinbefore defined
and indicated on the drawings, shall consist of gravel borrow composed of hard durable stone,
and coarse sand, free of loam, clay or silt, uniformly graded and containing no stone having any
dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When spread and rolled on the
prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State
Specifications, Section M1, sub-section M1.03.0, Type"b", and attention is directed to the
selected gravel size limitation. Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an
approved testing laboratory shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. No stone greater
than 4" in any dimension.
2.02 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE
Dense graded crushed stone material shall consist of crusher-runu coarse aggregates of crushed
stone or gravel and fine aggregates of natural sand or stone screenings informly pre-mixed and
placed on the gravel base and conforming to Section 402, Subsection M2.01.7, of the State
Specification.
+ ► 2.03 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I, Type 1-1, conforming
to the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.11.00 of MHD Specifications.
1. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in.
sieve, and bitumen content= 5 1/2%+ 1/2% by weight.
2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in.
sieve, and bitumen content= 6 1/2%+ 1/2% by weight.
Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be
submitted to and approved by the Engineer at least two weeks before work is scheduled to
begin.
B. Bituminous tack coat shall be applied as required. Bituminous material for tack coat on the
existing surface, where required or specified, shall be emulsified asphalt, grade RS-1
conforming to Subsection M3.03.0 of MDPW Specifications.
2.04 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB
A. Bituminous concrete shall be Class I, conforming to applicable requirements of MDPW
Specifications M3.11.03 Table"A" for"Dense Mix"
B. Curb shall be Type 2, MHD Standard as detailed on the plans.
w 2.05 GRANITE CURB
A. New granite curbs, shall conform to the requirements of Type VB granite curb, Section M9
9.04.1 of the MHD Standard Specifications.
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
3of9
«.
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete
paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following:
1. MHD specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base
course and Section 500 for"curb and edging".
2. MHD specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint.
B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work
which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be
repaired before acceptance. All trenches for utility installation shall be completed and
backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches unless approved by
the Engineer.
C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project.
Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those employed in
existing work, except as otherwise noted.
D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.
E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed during the
course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in
conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 10 days
prior to the pavement construction.
am
1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
am
Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before, during
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
am
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the am
approval of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the
work of this Section.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the
public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GRAVEL BASE COURSE
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
2of9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02600
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 -GENERAL
ww 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in
this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard
established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Engineer's
interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document
not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,
in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation.
1.04 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and
includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Roadway pavement
2. Granite curbing
3. Bituminous concrete curbing
4. Patching
5. Line painting and striping
6. Traffic and street signs
1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO):
B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD or MDPW):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with City of Northampton Department of
Public Works.
1.06 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Excavating, Filling&Grading ..........................Section 02200
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Bituminous Concrete Paving 02600
1 of 9
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a
shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell.
3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a dose joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring
the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with
compacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a
substantially unyielding bed.
4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the .�
various kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before
laying them.
5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones.
6. Where a concrete cradle is used, the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so
constructed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being
placed.
7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved.
8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of
backfill. .�
3.05 PIPING
Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets, Portland cement mortar, nonshrink grout, or
asphalt mastic compound.
A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants, cements, *"
adhesives, and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket
manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly
drawn up and the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the
pipe immediately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and
defects repaired before joint is completed.
3.06 CERTIFICATES
A. Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and «.
installed under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the
requirements of these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
Storm Drainage 02300
6of6 ""
+0
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
W DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all
' pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and
the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully resolved.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with
®.0 the original design.
3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
1. Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to
the requirements for trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General
.w
1. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state
DPW Standards.
2. Pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual.
B. Approvals
No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect Each pipe shall be subject to
inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid,and defective pipe will be rejected.
Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper
facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches.
C. Controls
The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards,
laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control
checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be
set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be
established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment
tolerances shall be 1 in 1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for
' alignment, and approval shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work
commences.
D. Procedure
1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is
40 not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid
to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the
Contracting Officer.
Storm Drainage 02300
5of6
am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
2.03 POLYETHYLENE PIPE(HDPE)
Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE)shall be manufactured in accordance with the most recent "`
AASHTO M294 Type S or SP specification. The pipe shall be constructed of high-density
polyethylene. The pipe shall be seamless with corrugations on the exterior and shall have a
smooth interior waterway. Corrugated plastic pipe shall not be used for flared ends or in other go
applications where pipe will be exposed to vandalism and ultraviolet radiation.
2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND PERFORATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE 4W
A. PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785
Standard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe, Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in
accordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-cemented Joints an
with PVC Pipe and Fittings.
am
B. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pipe
1. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) nonpressure pipe for gravity systems shall conform to ow
ASTM D 3034, SDR35 minimum wall thickness.
2. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6".
.W
3. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring, factory
assembled.
am
4. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be
imprinted with an"assemble stripe", to which the bell end of the mated pipe will
extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes.
No
5. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212.
6. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper ..
location in the coupling grooves.
7. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type, compatible with the pipe. am
2.05 DRAINAGE FILTER FABRIC
A. Drainage filter fabric shall be a non-woven fabric consisting only of long chain polymeric filaments no
or yarn such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polymide, or polyvinylidene-chloride
formed into a stable network such that the filaments of yarns retain their relative position to each
other. The fabric shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts Highway Department s„
Standard Specifications, Section M9.50.0, Table II—Type II Fabric.
PART 3.00-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
Storm Drainage 02300
4of6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall
be supplied to the Architect, as per the requirements for record drawing submittal in
Section 01710.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to
protect storm drain system materials before,during and after installation and to protect
installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Delivery and Storage
Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time
of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by
the Architect.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS
A. Architectual Coatings
All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission
Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday,
September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: °a coating
recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to
portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Construct drainage structures in accordance with the City of Northampton Department of
Public Works standards.
2.02 CASTINGS
A. Catalog listings on the plans indicated are from the Neenah Foundry Company catalogs.
Substitutions by McKinley or LaBaron may be submitted for the approval of the Project
Engineer, provided they are equivalent to those indicated and conform to State
Specifications. The yard drains shall be 10"cast iron (H-20 rated). Provide cast iron
downspout boots sized for 4"x 3"downspouts. All castings shall be furnished with black
rust inhibitor paint and installed as per manufacturer's specifications.
Storm Drainage 02300
3 of 6
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
B. Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): aw
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
2. American Concrete Institute(ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete-318 sm
3. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual
4. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615
Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C139
Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C140
Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings C425
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C443 .,.
Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478
Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated C700
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
C789
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb. (4.54
kg) Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm) Drop D1157
5. Commonwealth of MassachusettsHighway Department (MHD): Standard .A
Specifications for Road, Bridges and Incidental Construction
C. Codes
The work shall be completed in accordance with standards and approval of the City of
Northampton and the Massachusetts Department of Public Works.
D. Permits
The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
E. Inspection
All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner. The
Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local
municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation.
s
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to
the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete
catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as
to method of installation. ..
2. Do not permit any storm drainage or sewerage component to be brought onto the
job until it has been approved by the Architect.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading
plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation.
Storm Drainage 02300
2of6
ON
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02300
STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
w
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and
includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Storm drainage pipe and field subdrains
2. Storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines
3. Required fittings and bends
4. Downspout boots
5. Testing
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Erosion&Sediment Control .................................................Section 02150
Excavating, Filling &Grading................................................Section 02200
Bituminous Concrete Pavement...........................................Section 02600
Sanitary Sewer System..................................................Section 02730
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section.
Storm Drainage 02300
!! 1 of 6
ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LOG OF BORING GR-6 Page 1 OF I
PROJECT Grove Street Housing Project LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. J0349 13 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR IFOREVAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED
Seaboard Env roomrnial Drilling JcfT and Bob 12/232003 12232003
DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.
B-53/Bomb 27' DATUM Approximately 169
TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 6 UNDIST.
CASING TIME FIRST COMPL. HR.
CASING HAMM. I WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 12'
SAMPLER BORING 4W
SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Southeast cormcr of proposed south units
HAMMER 140 30" ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewicz
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS
FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
BL/6 IN.
TOPSOIL
XP 1/122 824 S-1 Top 4":TOPSOIL Fine to medium
(0'-2) Bottom 4":Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND,little silt,damp SAND
we
5
516/7/9 2024 S-2 Medium dense,brown and orange,fine SAND,little medium sand,little sill,trace clay,moist(slightly varvcd)
(5'-7)
10
214/4/6 6124 S-3 Loose,gray,fine to medium SAND,little silt,trace clay,wet
X�- AM
(10'-12)
t�IR
15 15'
213/4.!5 1024 S-4 Loose,gray,froe to medium SAND,some to little clay,lime silt,trace organics,wet Varved SILT,
(15-17) SAND and CLAY
20
I
313!51 24124 S-5 Still,gray,SILT,some tint sand,some clay,wet(varved)
(20'-22) ,
25 25'
CLAY
122!3 24'24 S-6 Medium,brown-gray,CLAY,tract silt,wet
(2g-p7 �R
I End of cxploranon at 27'
Rcmaris.
1. 6"snow cover at time of drilling,no Goss
MAR
Appendix A
14 of 14
O'RE11 L Y; TALB0T& ®fC UAI ASSOCIATES, II jTC:
4 ' ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LOG OF BORING GR-5 Page 1 OF 1
- PROJECT Grove Streret Housing Project LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. J0349 13 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED
Seaboard Environmental Drilling Pefrand Bob 1212312003 122312003
40 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.(ft.)
B-53 17' DATUM Approximately 171
TYPE BIT Conical with Plug SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 4 UNDIST.
CASING 4 1/4'ID Hollow St cm Auger TIME FIRST COMPL. I HR
CASING HAMM. WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) IT
SAMPLER 2"OD Split Spoon Rod A(1 5/8"O.D.) BORING Near center of west wall of
SAMPLER WEIGHT DROP LOCATION proposed south units
HAMMER Safety 140 30"(wire line) ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewicz
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS
FT, RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
BL76 IN.
10"TOPSOIL TOPSOIL
1/22/2 1024 S-1 Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND and SILT,little organics,moist Fine to medium
40 (0'•2') SAND
5
5/9/9/12 12/24 S-2 Medium dense,brown and orange,fine SAND,little medium sand,little to trace silt,dry
10
314/5!7 10/24 S-3 Medium dense,brown with orange,fine to medium SAND,little silt,wet at bottom
(10'-12')
15 15'
Fine to medium
3/315/5 12124 S4 Loose,gray,fine to medium SAND wtih fine sand,some silt,little clay layers SAND with
(15'-17) (0.5-thick),wet silt layers
End of exploration at 17'
20
25
Remarks
I. 6"snow cover,no Bost
Appendix A
13 of 14
am
/ jp y r ']' (� R r /� � j�
Cyr IPClI�Jd 117 ( 1 CY Cl t?1 k�il F)is 7E ��TiL � f}'r .
ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS am
LOG OF BORING GR-4 Page I OF I MW
PROJECT Grove Streret Housing Project LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. )0349 13 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FIlVISHED
Seaboard Environmental Drilling pefrand Bob 12/23/2003 12/23/2003
DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.(ft.) �b
B-53 17' DATUM Approximately 171
TYPE BIT Conical with Plug SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 4 UNDIST.
CASING 4 1/4"ID Hollow Stem Auger TIME FIRST COMPL. HR,
CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 12'
SAMPLER 2"O.D.Split Spoon Rod A(1 5/8"0,D,) BORING New center of cast wall of
SAMPLER WEIGHT DROP LOCATION proposed south units
HAMMER Safety 140 30"(wire line) ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewic
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PEN£TR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS
Fr. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
BL/6 IN.
TOPSOIL
1/2/2/2 12/24 S-1 Top 5 TOPSOIL Fine to medium
(0'-2) Bottom 7": Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND,little silt,moist SAND AIM
4W
5
416/6!7 20/24 S-2 Medium dense,orange and brown,fine and medium SAND with fine sand and silt layers NP
(5'-7) (0.5"thick),dry
CIF
10
314!3/4 14/24 S-3 Loose,brown with some orange,fine to medium SAND,little silt,trace clay,wet at bottom OIIR
(10-12)
12'
Varved SILT,
CLAY and SAND f
IS
I/l,2/2 16,124 S-4 Soft,
gray,SILT,some to little clay,little tint sand(varved),wet
(15'-17')
End of exploration at lT
f—
20
AW
am
25 ow
I<cniarls-
1 G"}�»�v CO�Cr,nl fr051
Appendix A
12 of 14
' ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
40 LOG OF BORING GR-3 Page I OF 1
PROJECT Grove Streret Housing Project LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 30349 13 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREW N DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED
Seaboard Environmental trilling Pffand Bob 1212312003 12/23/2003
DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.(fl.)
B-53 17' DATUM Approximately 173
TYPE BIT Conical with Plug SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 4 UNDIST.
CASING 4 1/4"ID Hollow Stem Auger TQ.dE FHtST COMPL. HR.
CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 13•
SAMPLER 2"0.D.Split Spoon Rod A(1 5/8"O.D.) BORING Nearnorthwest comer of
SAMPLER WEIGHT DROP LOCATION proposed south units
HAMMER Safety 140 30"(wire line) ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewic
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. R.EC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS
Fr. RESIST. IN. NO.
DESCRIPTION
BL6 IN.
TOPSOIL
212/3/2 16/24 S-1 Top 8":TOPSOIL Fine to medium
a<! (0'-2) Bottom 8":Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND,some silt,moist(I"layer of ash and coal at 14 SAND
PRO
S
4/6/9/10 16124 S-2 Medium dense,brown with orange,fine SAND,little silt,trace clay(varved),dry
(5'-7�
10
3/6/8/7 12/24 S-3 Medium dense,brown with orange,fine to medium SAND,little silt,moist
IS 15,
v
Fine to medium
2/2/3!3 20.24 S-4 Loose,gray,fine to medium SAND with some to little silt,little clay,wet SAND with
(15'-17`) some silt
End of exploration at 17
20
I
i
r
I
25
Remarks.
I L"snow rover,no Lnsl
Appendix A
11 of 14
ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINTEERII`TG CONSULTANTS
LOG OF BORING GR-2 Page I OF 1
PROJECT Grovc Sireret Housing Project LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 10349 13 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED
Seaboard Environmental Drilling P,ffarid Boll 1223/2003 12232003
DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.(ft.) nt!
B-53 17' DATUM Approximately 175
TYPE BIT Conical with Plug SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No,Sample 4 UNDIST.
CASING 4 1/4"ID Hollow Stem Auger TIME FIRST COMPL. HR.
CASING HAMM, WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 13'
SAMPLER 2"O.D.Split Spoon Rod A(15/8"O.D.) BORING
SAMPLER WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Southeast comerol proposed north units
HAMMER Safety 140 30"(wire line) ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Micloewic
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS I�Ip
FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
BL/6 IN.
8"TOPSOIL TOPSOIL
22/312 824 S-1 Loose,brown,fine to medium SAND,some silt,moist Fine to medium
(0'2� SAND �Ils
5
X�- 315/!19 1224 S-2 Medium dense,light brown,medium SAND,little fine sand,trace silt,dry �p
10
7/8/12/12 10/24 S-3 Medium dense,orange,fine to medium SAND,trace silt,moist '
(10'-12)
JIM
15 15' •
Fine medium
2/4/7/9 20/24 S-4 Medium dense,gray with orange,fine to medium SAND with fine sand and silt layers SANN D with
1 (I5'-17) (0,25-0.5"thick),wet silt layers
End of exploration at 17'
I� 20 �
F
I
i--
}:cm3t l:s
1 L"snov:cove;,no Cost
Appendix A
10 of 14
LOG OF BORING GR-1 Sheet 2 or 2
Project No. J0349
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS
FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
BL/61N.
CLAY
30
1/2,13/3 24124 S-7 Medium,gray,CLAY,some silt,little fine sand,wet(varved in I'layers)
(30'-32)
35
2/2/3/2 24/24 S-8 Medium,gray,CLAY,little to trace silt,wet(highly plastic)
` (35'-37)
40
11212/2 24124 S-7 Medium,gray,CLAY,little silt,little fine sand,wet(varved)
(40'-42')
End of exploration 31 42'
45
50
55
Appendix A
9 of 14
t�
ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
LOG OF BORING GRA Page I OF 2 `
PROJECT Grove Street Housing Project LOCATION Nonhampton,MA PROJECT NO. 10349 )3 01
DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN IDATESTARTED DATE FBTISHED
Seaboard Env'vonmrntxl Drilling Jeff and Bob 12/232003 12/23/2003
DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV.
B-53Bomb 42' DATUM Approximately 176
TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 9 UNDIST.
CASING TIME FIRST COMPL. HR,
CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 13•
SAMPLER BORING
SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Northwest comer of proposed north units
HAMMER 140 30" ENGINEI GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewicz
SAMPLES
SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS slt�
Fr. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION
B V6 IN.
TOPSOIL
4/4/5/6 1824 S-) Top 6":TOPSOIL Fine to medium
(0'-2) Bottom 12": Loose,brown,fine to coarse SAND,some silt,trace clay,net gravel,moat SAND
Allf
5
4/5/7/10 18/24 S-2 Medium dense,brown,fine SAND,little silt,damp
11!!
10 10' •
Fine to medium
417/9/8 1624 S-3 Medium dense,brown with orange mottling,fine to medium SAND u ith gray fine sand SAND with
(10'-12) and silt layers(0.5"thick),moist(sligh(ly varved) silt layers
P 15
5/615/6 14,124 S-4 Medium dense,brown with orange,fine to medium SAND with gra),fine said and silt,little clay layers
(15'-17) (0.5"thick),wet(varved)
E- -�
1!1/1/1 2224 S-5 Top 6":Loose,gray,fine to medium SAND and SILT,little clay 71•
—j (20'-2:) Bottom 16": Solt,gray,CLAY,some to little silt,little fine sand wet Varved SILT,
r—
f_ SAND and CLAY
I Ir-
25
16.'24 S-6 Loose,gray,fine SAND and S!LT with sot!,gray,clay layers(1"thick),wet(yarved)
(25'-27')
■w
Rcnllar6
1 6"of snow cover at time of drilling,no frost
Appendix A
8 of 14
Cadd FILE No.F/0ACAD/µ61/J0319-13-01 G--Sl--t Houaln
I
to I$4>c>
e r0 i
m \
� I
� I
Q)
go
on
O 1
1
f 5
#1! �/% \
\ I
1
t !
in
� L � 1
° o GROVE STREET HOUSING
X {a m
a NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
DESIGNED BY: MJT DRAWN BY: CDA
o SCALE IN FEET CHECKED BY: DATE: JAN. 16, 2003
N o &M AI SITE PLAN 15' '30'0 60'
Appendix A
7 of 14
LIMITATIONS
1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein.
The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in
the report and not on scientific tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the .•
time and budgetary constraints imposed by the client. The work described in this report
was carried out in accordance with the Statement of Terms and Conditions attached to our
proposal.
2. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based in part upon the data
obtained from widely spaced subsurface explorations. The nature and extent of variations
between these explorations may not become evident until construction. If variations then
appear evident,it maybe necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report.
3. The generalized soil profile described in the text is intended to convey trends in subsurface
conditions. The boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been
developed by interpretations of widely spaced explorations and samples; actual soil
transitions are probably more erratic.For specific information,refer to the boring logs.
4. In the event that any changes in the nature, design or location of the proposed structures ,
are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be
considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or
verified in writing by OReilly, Talbot &Okun Associates Inc. It is recommended that we
be retained to provide a general review of final plans and specifications.
5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client. Reliance upon the report
and its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners.
Appendix A
6 of 14
Geotechnical Recommendations
Grove Street Housing Project
O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun f-4413=33=3w- ?Northampton,Massachusetts
[ A S S O C I A T E S ] 1
Table 1
Grain Size Distribution Requirements
awl
Size::.:-1:...— Sand and Gravel Granular Fill
Percent.Finer by.Weight
... ........
4 inch 100 100
1/2 inch 50-85 ---
No.4 40-75 ---
No. 10 --- 30-90
' No.40 10-35 10-70
No. 100 --- ---
a� No.200 0-8 0-15
go Fill placed beneath footings and floorslabs should be densified to at least 95% of the Modified
Proctor dry density as defined in.ASTM D1557, Method C. Fill should be placed in lifts of no
more than 12-inches and compacted with at least four passes with a vibrating drum roller
(minimum of 6,000 pound weight). To facilitate compaction, the moisture content should be
maintained at or near the optimum moisture content.
Subsurface investigations indicated that the granular soils, present in the upper 15 feet, may be
on locally loose. Therefore, we recommend that the subgrade footings and the building floorslab
be thoroughly densified. The entire subgrade should be densified with at least six passes with a
heavy vibrating drum roller (minimum 6,000 pound weight). All footing subgrades should be
densified using a vibrating plated compactor,just prior to rebar and concrete placement.
If you have any questions,please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned.
Sincerely yours,
O'Reilly,Talbot&Okun Associates,Inc.
V
1shleiy L. -7ickiev%licz Michael /Talbot, P. E.
► Pro�et Engineer Principa
Attachments: Site Locus,Site Plan,Map of Fine Grained Soils, Limitations,Boring Logs
F:\J0300\3.19 Jester Pope Fraiser\13 Grove Sc.Housing Project\01 Geotech\Geotech.lRp
!IAA
Appendix A
5 of 14
Geotechnical Recommendations
T Grove Street Housing Project
O'Reilly, Talbot & Olcun Northampton,ton Massachusetts
�— —+ p � -�
( A S S 0 C 1 A T E S J
Belt
The medium dense sand present would be considered Class S2 soils under Table 1612.4.1.
Therefore, an "S" factor of 1.2 should be used to compute lateral forces.
The liquefaction potential of these soils was considered. Based upon density, silt content and
depth to groundwater, the medium dense sand would not be considered susceptible to
liquefaction. .�
Concrete Slabs
We recommend that concrete floor slabs bear on at least 8 inches of compacted sand and
gravel, to provide uniform support and a capillary moisture break The subgrade should also be
free of organic soils, debris or large boulders. The sand and gravel fill beneath the building
footprint should meet the grain size distribution characteristics for sand and gravel outline in
Table 1.
The subgrade within the footprint of the proposed building should be stripped of topsoil and
densified to treat any loose areas that are present. Fill supporting slabs should be placed in
accordance with the recommendations for gradation and compaction provided below.
Earthwork Recommendations
We anticipate that earthwork for this project will include excavations for footings, and for .�
building the floorslab and placement of fill beneath the floorslab.
Any fill, that may have been placed during construction of the existing structures or any other
deleterious materials, vegetation and organic soils, should be removed from beneath the
building and replaced with Sand and Gravel Fill. The native soils beneath the unsuitable soil
layers should be densified to provide a uniform firm bearing surface for placement of the
overlying fill. Fill, debris, topsoil or organic soils stripped from the excavation should not be
reused as fill beneath structures. To avoid point loads, any cobbles or boulders larger than 4
inch diameter encountered at the subgrade for footings and slabs-on-grade should be removed
and replaced with compacted sand and gravel fill. Compaction should achieve at least H% of
the Modified Proctor dry density as defined in ASTM D1»7,Method C.
Three fill types are recommended, Sand and Gravel for use within 12 inches beneath footings
and floorslabs and Granular Fill for use at depths greater than 12 inches beneath floor slabs and
footings, and as miscellaneous fill. Grain size distribution requirements are presented in Table
1. Based upon the planned construction and the description of materials observed in the
borings, it does not appear that there are sufficient quantities of suitable materials present
on-Site to meet requirements for Sand and Gravel or Granular Fill. Therefore, these materials
-wzll likely need to be imported.
am
Appendix A
4 of 14
Geotechnical Recommendations
Grove Street Housing Project
40 O'Reilly, Talbot & Olcun —4 Northampton,Massachusetts
[ A S S 0 C 1 A T E S ] I -
r
We recommend that exterior footings be embedded a minimum of 48 inches below the lowest
adjacent grade for frost protection. Interior footings should bear at least two feet below the
lowest adjacent slab elevation. Conventional spread footings shall be at least 18 inches wide for
continuous footings and at least 24 inches wide for isolated footings. All other applicable
requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code should be followed.
no
If winter construction occurs, footings should not be placed on frozen soils. Footing
excavations should be free of loose or disturbed materials. Any boulders or cobbles larger than
40 4 inches diameter should be removed from within one foot of the bottom of the footings and
replaced with sand and gravel fill. Given the variable density of the near surface soils, the
footings subgrades should be densified with at least three passes with a vibrating plate
on compactor. If loose materials are present in the excavations,they shall be recompacted to form
a firm,dense, bearing surface.
Building Settlement
4W
Building settlement will occur due to compression of the varved clay under the weight of fill
placed to form the building pad, the weight of the building, and due to live loads, which occur
*0 following the construction. Since the proposed building is light and no heavy live loads are
expected, we anticipate that most of the settlement will be attributable to the weight of the fill
placed to form the building pad. Since the thickness of fill will vary from approximately 6 feet
,,, along the southern edge of the building to less than one foot along the northern edge,we would
anticipate that a significant amount of differential settlement will occur. We anticipate that the
maximum settlement along the western edge will be on the order of 2.25 inches. The maximum
4 settlement at the eastern edge should be on the order of 1 inch. Therefore, the maximum
differential settlement between the two edges would be approximately 125 inches.
The expected differential settlement could crack floors and walls. To mitigate potential
on
concerns due to differential settlement, we recommend that the contractor sequence
construction to allow settlements attributable to the weight of fill to occur prior to the
construction of the building. This would require placement of the fill to form the building pad,
monitoring the amount and rate of settlement, and once the rate of settlement is low(indicating
that the building can tolerate future settlements), constructing the building slabs and walls that
are sensitive to settlement. We recommend that settlement measurements be made by survey,
to monitor the rate of settlement and to ensure that most has occurred prior to building
construction. We anticipate that the significant portion of settlement will occur relatively
quickly after loading, since the varved clay is over consolidated, the clay layer is relatively thin,
and because the silt and fine sand lenses in the clay promote drainage and speed the settlement
of the clay layer. V,e would expect most of the settlement to occur within one month of fill
placement.
Earthouake Considerations
Earthquake loadings must be considered under requirements in Section 1612 and 1805 of the
Si1-1h Edition (Februan, 1997) Massachusetts Building Code. Section 1612.4.2 covers lateral
forces imposed on structures from earthquake shaking and Section 1805.3 relates to the
liquefaction potential of the underling soils.
Appendix A
3 of 14
Geotechnical Recommendations
Grove Street Housing Project
O'Reilly, Talbot & O k u n f— – Northampton,Massachusetts
[ A S S 0 C I A T E S ] 1
w
Soil samples -were collected using a 2-inch diameter split spoon sampler driven 24-inches with a
140 pound hammer falling 30 inches (Standard Penetration Test or SPT). Samples were
collected at the ground surface, at a depth of five feet and at five foot intervals thereafter. The
number of blows required to drive the sampler each 6 inches was recorded. The standard
penetration resistance is the number of blows required to drive the sampler the middle 12
inches. Soil properties,such as relative density, are related to the SPT blow count.
SOIL CONDITIONS
Subsurface conditions generally consisted of between 4 to 10 inches of topsoil,underlain by 10
to 15 feet of medium dense, fine to medium sand with little silt. This sand layer was in turn
underlain by fine to medium sand with silt layers. This layer also contained some to little clay, ,
with the clay content generally increasing with depth. In boring GR 1, a medium stiff clay layer
was encountered at 30 feet.
The silt and clay found at the Site consist of post-glacial lake deposits that were deposited
within ancestral Lake Hitchcock (which filled much of the Connecticut River Valley from the
retreat of the last continental glacier until approximately 15,000 years ago). These fine-grained
soils are characterized by alternating layers (or varves) of silt, sand and clay. Published geologic
maps' indicated that, in the Site vicinity, the silty clay deposit is between 0 and 50 feet thick A
copy of this map, showing the Site vicinity, is attached as Figure 3. As can be seen on the
published map, the Site lies near the western shore of the former Lake Hitchcock Regardless, ••►
given the presence of greater than 15 feet of sand above the top of the clay layer, it is unlikely
that the claywould impact building performance. Boring logs are attached.
Groundwater was observed between 12 and 13 feet below ground surface. This depth
corresponds to approximate groundwater elevations of 163 to 158 feet. Therefore, it appears
unlikely that groundwater will be encountered during construction or ill impact the proposed
structure.
GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES
The significant geotechnical issues for the proposed construction addressed in this report are
foundation bearing capacity and settlement, and the placement of fill beneath building pads.
DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
The folloRing recommenda tions are provided for the assumed construction described above. w„
Foundations
The proposed building can be founded on normal spread footing foundations bearing on the ..
medium dense sand deposits encountered in upper 15 feet. These granular deposits are suitable
for support of normal spread footings, provided they are densified prior to placement of the
footing concrete. We recommend that a ma-timum allowable bearing pressure of 3,500 pounds 1W
per square foot be used for the design of footings.
"Map ShoRing Distrbution and P ckness of Principal Fine Grained Deposits, Cq;uiecticut Valley Urban Area,
Central New England",Langer,USGS, 1979.
Appendix A dw
2 of 14
EnvironmentalSafetyHealthGeotechnicaI
O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun F ®—; 293 Bridge Street
[ A S S O C I A T E S ] I
}. Suite 500
Springfield, MA 01103
Tel 413 788 6222
J0349-13-01
Fax 413 788 8830
January 19,2004
Email office @oto-env.com
Mr.Jack Frazier
Juster Pope Frazier
9 Ashfield Street
Shelburne Falls,Massachusetts 01370
Re: Geotechnical Engineering Recommendations
Proposed Grove Street Housing Project
Northampton,Massachusetts
Dear Mr.Frazier:
This report provides our geotechnical recommendations for the proposed six unit Grove Street
Housing Project to be located at the corner of Grove and Laurel Streets in Northampton,
Massachusetts. The Site consists of a 1.1 acre parcel of land, which is presently occupied by a
1,000 square foot house (footprint) and a 300 square foot garage. A Site Locus is provided as
Figure 1. A Site Plan is provided as Figure 2. Our geotechnical study is based upon six soil
borings. Our services consisted of the full-time observation of the borings and test pits, review
of the logs and soil samples, engineering analyses, and preparation of this report. This report is
40 subject to the attached limitations.
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
Project plans call for the construction of a single story, slab-on-grade, residential building. This
structure will have a footprint of approximately 4,500 square feet. Paved parking for the project
will be located west of the building. The proposed building will be wood-framed and will
founded on traditional spread footing foundations.
The proposed floorslab elevation for the four northern most apartments is 176 feet. The
floorslab elevation for the two southernmost units are 174 feet. Topography slopes downward
to the northeast of the existing house and slopes gradually- downward behind the house,
towards the south. The existing topography in the proposed location of the housing project
ranges from 176 feet at the northern edge of the building to 168 feet along the southern edge of
the building. The finished floor slab will be approximately level with the existing ground
surface, therefore we expect that up to six feet of fill will be necessary in the southern portion
of the Site. The existing Site buildings are to be demolished.
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS
OR Subsurface investigations consisted of six sod borings (GR-1 through GR-6). The borings were
performed by Seaboard Drilling on December 23, 2003. Boring GR-1 was advanced to a depth
of 42 feet below ground surface and boring GR-6 was advanced to 32 feet below ground
"'"' surface. Borings GR 2 through GR-5 were advanced to 22 feet below ground surface. Boring
locations are shown on Figure 2.
Appendix A
1 of 14
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
construction vehicles carrying sediment. Provide temporary swales and interceptor
ditches to control surface runoff water where necessary.
B. If dust control is required off-site due to work under this Contract, in addition to watering,
sweeping and other methods, the Contractor shall apply calcium chloride in the required
amounts to properly control dust. These amounts shall be approved by the City Engineer
prior to application.
3.09 RESTORATION OF SITE ITEMS
A. Wherever streets, lawns or other items within the Contract Limit Lines have been
excavated in fulfilling the work required under the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish
and install all material at no cost to the Owner to bring finish surface level with the
existing adjacent conditions. All work shall be installed to match the existing conditions.
3.10 REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A. Remove temporary drainage swales, check dams, siltation sumps, hay bales, siltation
40 fencing and other temporary drainage, erosion and siltation control measures when
permanent drainage control measures have been installed and grass is established in
drainage areas leading to siltation sumps. Contractor shall excavate and remove all
40 sediments from siltation sumps prior to backfilling the sumps. Remove erosion control
measures when approved by the Architect.
40
END OF SECTION 02200
40
4W
40
q►
g■
40
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
21 of 21
40
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 ,m
3.05 ROUGH GRADING ,.
A. Rough grading shall include the shaping, trimming, rolling and finishing the surface of the
sub-base, shoulders, and earth slopes, and the preparation of the sub-base for loam,
seeding and paved surfaces. The grading of shoulders and sloped areas may be done
by machine methods. Up to two inches in 100 inches tolerance will be permitted on
slopes and one inch in 100 inches on lawn areas provided the slopes are uniform in
appearance and without abrupt changes. All ruts shall be eliminated. Grading of
subgrades for paved areas shall be finished at the required depth below and parallel to
the proposed surface within 3/8 inch in 100 inches tolerance.
B. If, during the progress of rough grading work, water pipe, sewer conduit, drain, or other ..
construction is damaged due to operations under this Contract, the Contractor shall
repair all such damage at no additional cost to the Owner and restore damaged areas to
their original condition.
C. Do all other cutting, filling and rough grading to the lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings. Grade evenly to within the dimensions required for finished grades shown on
the Drawings. No stone larger than three inches in largest dimension shall be placed in .�
upper 12 inches of fill.
D. Grades shall be brought below finished grades in accordance with the various depths
specified herein below.
1. Under slabs-on-grade, as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
2. Under paved areas, bottom of base course as shown on Drawings.
3. Under seeded areas, six inches.
E. No rubbish of any description shall be allowed to enter fill material. Such material shall
be removed from the site.
F. Complete the grading operations after the building has been finished, the utilities
installed, site improvements constructed, and all materials, rubbish and debris removed
from the site. Leave subgrade for lawns clean at required grades. There must be
sufficient grade staking to within correct lines and grades.
3.06 DEFICIENCY OF FILL MATERIAL
A. Provide required additional fill material from offsite sources to complete the work if a
sufficient quantity of suitable material is not available from the required excavation on the ,w
project site.
3.07 SURPLUS FILL MATERIAL
A. Surplus fill which is not required to fulfill the requirements of the Contract shall be
removed from the site and legally disposed of.
.d
3.08 DUST AND EROSION CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures and provide equipment and/or
materials to minimize dust from rising and blowing across the site and also to control
surface water throughout the operation so that it does not run onto paved ways without
being filtered. In addition, the Contractor shall control ail dust created by construction
operations and movement of construction vehicles, both on the site and on paved ways.
Provide additional crushed stone where necessary to provide traps or pads for
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
20 of 21 ""`
ON
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
on DHCD Project No. 214034
4* b. Outside building areas
-within paved areas 95%
-within lawn areas 90%
and playing fields
*Percent of maximum dry density of the material at optimum moisture content as
determined by methods or tests for ASTM designation D 1557.
G. Methods: The compaction alternatives given below are stated to provide minimum
compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his obligation to
achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort is necessary.
H. All fill to be placed "in-the-dry" with the exception specified hereinafter. If, in the opinion
of the Architect or the Geotechnical Representative, the Contractor has followed a logical
sequence of construction procedures, has employed the proper and necessary
equipment, and has otherwise conducted himself in a workmanlike manner, but still
cannot effectively dewater the excavation, the Architect or the Geotechnical
Representative may permit the Contractor to place a first lift of Gravel or Crushed Stone
* fill "in-the-wet". Fill placed in-the-wet must meet the gradation and placement
requirements specified hereinbelow. The quantity of fill placed in4he-wet must be no
greater than deemed necessary by the Architect and must be limited to the lowermost lift.
I. Moisture Control:
1 . Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill materials shall be limited to
+■ Optimum Moisture (-3% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly
distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to
obtain the specified compaction.
2. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the
specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, discing,
windrowing, or other method approved by the Geotechnical Representative.
a. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before
compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil
material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall
maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for
this purpose.
3 . Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture
before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and
replaced and shall be scarified by use of plows, discs, or other approved
methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements.
4. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which
display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and
compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below,
to secure stability.
5 . In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed
subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Representative
become inundated or excessively moistened shall have excess water removed
and soil dried as specified above.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
19 of 21
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 �*
5. Do not commence backfilling operations of utility trenches until all piping, conduits,
etc. have been installed, tested and approved and the locations of all pipe and
appurtenances have been recorded. Backfill carefully by hand around pipe to
depth of one foot above top of pipe using material specified herein, and tamping
firmly in layers not exceeding six inch layers, compacting by hand rammers or AM
mechanical tampers. When a manufacturer of utility line materials suggests
backfill materials and methods other than those specified herein, such
requirements shall govern providing the finished work equals or exceeds the result am
obtained by the materials and methods specified herein. Water mains shall be
hand backfilled to a minimum cover of 18 inches before mechanical equipment can
be used to backfill trench.
4W
6. Sand Bedding will be required below all pipe unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings or specified herein. Crushed Stone is required under utility structures
where shown on the Drawings. Gravel Bedding, Sand Bedding or Crushed Stone am
shall be placed to the full width of the trench and under utility structure foundations
as indicated on the Drawings. After a pipe is bedded, the trench shall be filled to
the centerline of the pipe with Structural FiH or Sand Bedding except at the joint.
After the joint is inspected, that portions hall be filled in with Sand Bedding. *w
Material under and around the pipe shall be carefully and thoroughly tamped.
7. From the centerline of the pipe to a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe the so
backfill shall be Structural Fill or Sand Fill placed by hand and hand tamped.
Above this point, backfill shall be placed in layers six inches deep and each layer
shall be compacted with mechanical tampers to not less than 95% of maximum
density at optimum moisture of the material. This backfill shall be carried up to the ow
bottom of materials specified to be placed for surfacing requirements.
8. Utilities shall not be laid directly on ledge, boulders or other hard material. This
material shall be removed as specified herein within trench limits, and within Am
vertical planes one foot outside of structure walls. Backfill will be with the specified
fill placed in eight inch lifts and thoroughly compacted. If hand guided compaction
equipment is used, fill shall be placed in six inch lifts. All rock excavation shall be •m
considered unsuitable for backfill around utilities. Ordinary fill may be used as
backfill in areas as specified herein.
9. Coordinate all utility and trench backfilling with the trades involved, r"
F. Compaction Requirements: 4W
1 . The following table lists minimum compactive efforts and lift weights which are
required for all fill materials. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before
compaction of the next lift is started. The compaction equipment shall make an ""
equal number of transverse and longitudinal coverages of each lift. Allow the
Geotechnicai Representative sufficient time to make necessary observations and
tests. The degree of compaction for fill placed in various areas shall be as 4W
follows:
Relative Compaction
4W
a. Within buildings and structures
-under footings 95%
-under slab 95% no
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
18 of 21 4m,
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
r DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Structural Fill: All fills within the building area and within the footing zone of influence
shall be made with Structural Fill as defined herein. No excavated on-site material will be
acceptable as Structural Fill unless specifically approved by testing as specified herein.
D. Removal of Unsuitable Materials and Replacement with Structural Fill
The contractor shall be familiar with the Geotechnical report and the work performed
under the previous site clearing contract.
The contractor shall included in the base bid the removal of all disturbed or unsuitable
materials to competent subgrade and replacement with Structural Fill, and this work shall
be done at no additional cost to the Owner. Also included in the base bid is any
excavation and associated fill outside of the zone of influence that is required for the
excavation of unsuitable materials and replacement with Structural Fill within the zone of
influence.
If the contractor encounters unanticipated unsuitable bearing materials, the Contractor
shall notify the Architect. The Contractor shall carry excavation deeper and replace the
excavated material with compacted fill or concrete as directed by the Geotechnical
Representative. Only a change in the work authorized in advance by the Architect in
writing shall constitute an adjustment in the Contract Price. The quantity of unsuitable
sw material shall be measured in-place, prior to excavation. The cost per cubic yard shall
include all cost associated with the excavation and backfiil of the excavation, including
but not limited to overhead and profit of the general contractor, trucking cost, disposal
cost, backfilling cost, and any temporary shoring or dewatering operations. Calculations
showing quantities of Unsuitable Material and Structural Fill approved for use under this
paragraph shall be prepared by a licensed land surveyor hired by the contractor and
submitted to the Owner's designated representative for review and approval.
E. Backfilling of Trenches, Structures and Foundations:
1 . Areas to be backfilled shall be free of construction debris, refuse, compressible or
decayable materials and standing water. Do not place fill when temperature is
below 30 degrees F and when fill materials or layers below it are frozen unless
specifically approved by the Geotechnical Representative.
2. Requirement of description, placement, compaction and spreading of fill materials
as specified herein shall be applicable to backfilling operations.
a 3. Structural Fill shall be used as Backfill around manholes and other structures.
Excavated material may be used if approved by the Architect or Geotechnical
Representative.
4. Backfilling of foundations, structures and retaining walls shall not commence until
construction finish grade has been approved, forms removed, and the excavation
cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall not be placed against walls until they are
braced or have cured sufficiently to develop the strength necessary to withstand,
without damage, the pressure that will result from backfilling and compacting
operations. If fill is required on both sides of a wall, it shall be brought up
simultaneously and evenly on both sides. Avoid damage to the walls and to damp-
proofing and waterproofing and other work in place. Allow seven days from the
date of application of waterproofing before backfilling. Stones larger than four
inches maximum dimension shall not be permitted in the upper six inches of fill or
�w horizontally within 12 inches of walls.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
17 of 21
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 .ft
,s
e. Free-Draining Granular Fill shall be placed as follows:
1) As backfill immediately adjacent to retaining or basement walls.
so
f. Topsoil shall be stockpiled as shown on the Drawings and utilized on the
site as specified.
.w
g. Subsoil shall be used only under lawn areas, athletic fields, and as fill
and surface treatment for hydroseeding. This material shall not be
placed closer to areas being otherwise prepared than a 1: 1 angle of
repose x depth of fill for the particular area. For instance, if a fill is four '®
feet deep, subsoil may not be placed closer than four feet to the area
being otherwise prepared.
.®
1) Unsuitable Earth Materials shall be removed from the site.
2. The fill material shall be placed in uniform horizontal layers and compacted as
specified herein. ..
a. Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughly mixed during
the spreading to obtain uniformity of material in each layer. So far as MW
practicable, each layer of material shall extend the entire length and
width of the area being filled plus two additional feet horizontally along
each side for every one foot of fill required.
ww
3. All fill material shall be placed and compacted in-the-dry. The Contractor shall
dewater excavated areas as required to perform the work, and in such a manner
as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils. In am
freezing weather, a layer of fill shall not be left in an uncompacted state at the
close of a day's operation. Prior to terminating operations for the day, the final
layer of fill, after compaction, shall be roiled with a smooth-wheeled roller to
eliminate ridges of soil left by tractors, trucks and compaction equipment. •m
4. The Contractor shall not place a layer of compacted fill on soil that was permitted
to freeze prior to compaction or on snow or ice. Removal of these unsatisfactory
materials will be required as directed by the Owner. �"
5. When the moisture content of the fill material is below optimal moisture
necessary for compaction as specified herein, water shall be added until the mo
moisture content is as specified.
6. When the moisture content of the fill material is above the optimal moisture
necessary for compaction as specified herein, the fill material shall be aerated by ""
blending, mixing, or other satisfactory methods until the moisture content is as
specified.
Am
7. After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be
thoroughly compacted to the specified density. Compaction shall be continuous
over the entire area and the equipment shall make sufficient passes to ensure
that the desired density is obtained. A minimum of four coverages with "m
acceptable compaction equipment described hereinafter is a requirement. These
coverages are to be provided as systematic compactive effort; incidental
coverages due to construction vehicle traffic through the area will not be
included.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
16 of 21 '"�
�w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
recompaction prior to the placement of the new lift. No additional compensation
shall be paid for work required to achieve proper compaction.
9. The Geotechnical Representative's presence does not include supervision or
direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees, or agents. Neither
the presence of the Geotechnical Representative nor any observations and
testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in
his work.
10. In no case will frozen material be allowed for use in fill, backfill, or rough grading
material.
11. Stones or rock fragments larger than four inches in their greatest dimension shall
not be permitted within the top six inches of subgrade of any fills or
embankments.
B. Placing, Spreading and Compacting Fill Material:
40 1 . Fill materials are to be placed as designated herein and as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
w a. Crushed Stone shall be placed as follows and compacted as specified
herein:
1) Under and around utility structures and around foundation drains
40 and underdrains, (use 112"stone).
2) Behind retaining walls, and under rip rap.
3) For construction of check dams and siltation sumps. (use Y2', 1 -
112"or 5"stone as detailed and specified).
4) Where otherwise shown on Drawings or as directed by the
Architect.
b. Structural Fill shall be placed as follows and compacted in lifts to a
40 minimum of 95% maximum dry density per the Modified Proctor Test
(ASTM D 1557) as specified herein: (Refer to table specified herein for
compaction methods and lift requirements.)
as 1) Within building pad areas.
2) Wherever a structural fill is called for or shown on the Drawings.
00 C. Ordinary Fill shall be placed as follows and compacted as specified
herein:
1) In general fill areas such as lawn or in parking islands except
OR where Structural Fill is shown.
2) Wherever Ordinary Fill is called for and as specified
hereinbefore.
so 3) Wherever Structural Fill, Crushed Stone, Granular Fill, Floor Slab
Base Course Soil, or Topsoil is not required herein or on the
Drawings.
OR d. Floor Slab Base Course Soil shall be placed as follows and compacted
as specified herein:
1) As a base course under slab-on-grade or bituminous concrete
pavements as shown on the drawings.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
15 of 21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
F. Soils which exhibit weaving or instability during the proofrolling operations as determined
by the Geotechnical Representative shall be removed and replaced with compacted
Structural Fill or lean concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 FILLING AND GRADING ,.
A. Samples and Testing:
1 . All new fill materials, all disturbed on-site preload materials, and their placement
shall be subject to quality control testing. All testing shall be paid for by the
Owner except that the Contractor will bear cost of testing materials which fail to
conform to Specifications. Test results and laboratory recommendations will be
available to Contractor. All sieve analyses for conformance of on-site and off-site
fill materials to be used in the work shall be done by means of a mechanical wet
sieve analysis and in accordance with ASTM D-422.
2. The Owner will retain a Geotechnical Representative to provide personnel,
qualified by training and experience, to be at the site to observe preparation for
the placement of compacted fills, to observe excavation and dewatering required
for the work, and to observe earthwork operations and report on the conformity of
operations with these Specifications. All service and approvals given by the
Geotechnical Representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for performing the work in accordance with these Specifications. The Contractor
agrees to accept as final the results of field and laboratory tests performed by the
above representatives. As stated hereinbefore, the Owner reserves the right to
modify or waive Geotechnical Representative's services.
3. Excavated material taken directly from on-site cuts that will meet these
Specifications may be used as Ordinary Fill or Structural Fill provided the
Contractor obtains written approval from the Architect. No such fill material shall
be put in place until approved for use by the Architect in writing.
4. Field density tests will be made by the Geotechnical Representative in
accordance with the Method of Test for ASTM Designation D1556 or D2922, to
determine the adequacy of compaction; the location and frequency of such field
tests shall be at the Geotechnical Representative's discretion. •
5. The Contractor shall notify the Architect or the Geotechnical Representative
when an area is ready for compaction testing. This notification shall be 48 hours
in advance of placing or final compaction so that the Geotechnical
Representative has adequate time to take compaction tests.
6. The Architect or his designated representative shall have the right to observe the
installation of all controlled compacted fills.
7. Testing of materials as delivered may be made from time to time. Materials in
question may not be used, pending test results. Tests of compacted materials
will be made regularly. Remove rejected materials and replace with new,
whether in stockpiles or in place.
8. Cooperate with the Geotechnical Representative in obtaining field samples of in-
place materials after compaction. Furnish incidental field labor in connection with
these tests. The Contractor will be informed by the Geotechnical Representative
of areas of unsatisfactory density which may require improvement by removal
and replacement, or by scarifying, aerating, sprinkling (as needed), and
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
14 of 21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
D. Trench excavation shall include the removal of all materials encountered. During
excavation, materials determined to be suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly
manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to
prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or unsuitable for backfill
shall be removed and legally disposed of from the site. The banks of trenches shall be
cut as near vertical as practicable to the extent allowed by OSHA.
E. It is called to the attention of the Contractor that there are utilities and other underground
' pipes along the course of the work. Information shown on the Drawings as to their
location is from best available sources but no guarantee is inherent or to be assumed that
such information is accurate or complete. The Contractor shall exercise special care
during his operations to avoid injury to underground utilities and structures. When
necessary, the Contractor shall cooperate with, and consult with the appropriate
representatives in order to avoid damage to the structures. The Contractor shall, at his
own expense, preserve and protect from injury all property either public or private along
and adjacent to the line of work, and be responsible for and repair any and all damage
and injury thereto, arising out of or in consequence of any act or omission of the
Contractor. All existing pipes shall be supported in place or otherwise protected from
injury, or shall be restored to at least as good condition as that in which they were found
immediately prior to start of work.
F. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, suitable bridges over trenches where
" required for accommodation and safety of the traveling public and as necessary to satisfy
the required permits and codes.
G. Trenches shall be excavated to the necessary width and depth for proper laying of pipe
or other utility and shall have vertical sides or slopes as required by codes. Minimum
width of trenches shall provide clearance between the sides of the trench and the outside
face of the utility. Maximum trench sizes are as shown on the Drawings or as specified
herein. The depth of the trench shall be six inches below the bottom of the pipe barrel or
respective utility. If the existing soil is found not suitable, the Architect or Geotechnical
Representative may approve removal and replacement of material. Costs for removal
and replacement materials will be based on Article 8 of the General Conditions.
H. Coordinate all utility and trench backfilling with the trades involved.
3.03 PROOF-ROLLING
A. Contractor shall be required to proofroll foundation and pavement subgrades prior to
foundation construction or the placement and compaction of fill materials.
B. Proofrolling of foundation subgrades shall include at least ten passes of a small vibratory
plate compactor for trench excavations or six passes of a heavy vibratory roller for open
.� areas.
C. Proofrolling of pavement subgrades shall include four passes of a heavy vibratory roller.
D. If groundwater is located within one foot of foundation or pavement subgrade, proofrolling
may be eliminated. However, the Contractor shall demonstrate care during excavation
so as to minimize subgrade disturbance.
E. Proofrolling shall be visually observed by the Geotechnical Representative. Foundation
construction or replacement of fill materials shall not commence until the Geotechnical
Representative has witnessed subgrade conditions and proofrolling operations.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
13 of 21
lip
...
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 *w
F. Unsuitable Soil Conditions: am
1. Where unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the specified subgrade
depths, the Contractor shall notify the Architect. The Contractor shall carry
excavation deeper and replace the excavated material with compacted fill or `"
concrete as directed by the Geotechnical Representative.
2. For all areas within the zone of influence of the foundations, the removal of such M,
material and its replacement as directed is to be included in the base bid, and
only a change in the work authorized in advance by the Architect in writing shall
constitute an adjustment in the Contract Price. Soil subgrades that are unstable
due to inadequate construction dewatering or excessive subgrade disturbance
are not deemed unsuitable soils and removal and replacement of those soils
shall not be considered for change in the work.
3, Fill soil that is not within +\-3%optimum moisture for compaction of the particular
material in place as determined by the Architect or the Geotechnical
Representative and is disturbed by the Contractor during construction operations
so that proper compaction cannot be reached shall not be construed as
unsuitable bearing materials. This material shall be removed and replaced with
lean concrete or structural fill as directed by the Architect or Geotechnical
Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. The Contractor shall follow a construction procedure which permits visual
identification of firm natural ground.
G. Excessive Excavation: If any part of the general or trench excavation is carried, through
error, beyond the depth and the dimensions indicated on the Drawings or called for in the
Specifications, the Contractor at his own expense, shall furnish and install compacted
Structural Fill, concrete, or take other remedial measures as directed by the Architect to
bring fill material up to the required level.
3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavate as necessary for all footings, structures, pipes, storm and sanitary drainage,
electrical, gas, water, related structures and appurtenances, and for any other trenching
necessary to complete the work. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate trench for
each utility.
B. Definitions: ..
1. "Trench excavation" shall be defined as an excavation in which the bottom width
does not exceed seven feet and the width does not exceed twice the depth or
where footings are excavated by backhoe. Refer to Drawings for any special
trenching conditions for utilities, structures, etc.
2. The words "invert" or"invert elevation" as used herein mean the elevation at the ..
inside bottom of pipe or channel.
3 . The words"bottom of the pipe"as used herein mean the elevation at the base of
the pipe at its outer surface.
C. In general, machine excavation of trenches will be permitted with the exception of
preparation of pipe beds which will be hand work. Excavate by hand or machine
methods at least six inches below the bottom of all utilities.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
12 of 21 ""`
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
J. Free-Draining Granular Fill: Well-graded, hard, durable, natural sand and gravel, free
from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish, or organic matter. Material shall conform to the
following gradation requirements:
U.S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT
4-' 100
JIM #4 60-90
#200 0-8
K. A 50 pound sample of each imported material proposed for use, and of any on-site
40 material when so requested by the Architect, shall be submitted for approval. The
samples shall be delivered to the office of the Architect or to the Geotechnical
Representative, as directed. Samples required in connection with compaction tests will
be taken and transported by the laboratory.
L. DRIP STRIP STONE
Stone for drip strip surfacing shall be washed natural river stone, rounded and smooth,
with no rust or oxide imperfections. Stone shall be 1/2"- 1 1/2" size, and color to be
shades of tan and brown. A 20 lb. Sample of stone shall be submitted to the Project
Architect for approval.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate all materials encountered to allow construction of the proposed building and
structures, utilities and site work as shown on the Drawings and as hereinafter specified.
B. Excavate to levels shown for footings and structures, as required to provide working
clearance and to allow adequate inspection and to subgrades outside of buildings and
structures as specified herein and as shown on Drawings. The contractor shall
completely remove all existing foundation elements from previous dwelling if encountered
below the new building and the new building's exterior footing's zone of influence.
40
C. In planted areas, remove ledge, boulders and other obstructions to a depth of at least two
feet below finished grade.
OR D. Remove from the site and legally dispose of all debris and other excavated material not
needed for, or suitable for, fill except as otherwise specified herein. Remove all materials
subject to rot or attack by termites.
Or
E. In general, the Contractor will be permitted to use machine excavation to the bottom of fill
under concrete slabs on grade. The final three inches under footings and foundations
.w shall be excavated using a straightblade bucket. If the final three inches cannot be
satisfactorily excavated using a straightblade bucket without disturbing subgrades and
preload structural material, the Contractor shall use alternative methods, including hand
excavations. Alternative methods shall be subject to approval by the Architect or
■. Geotechnical Representative.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
11 of 21
wal
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
dimension. It shall not contain granite block, concrete, masonry rubble, roots,
stumps or other similar materials. d`
2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified
densities. a
3. Topsoil and the zone directly below the topsoil indicated on the borings as
"subsoil" shall not be considered Ordinary Fill nor shall topsoil or subsoil
stockpiled on the site. Where subsoil is encountered, it shall be stripped ow
separately from the topsoil and the granular material directly beneath the subsoil.
This excavated material shall only be utilized in lawn areas, playfield areas or
other non-structural areas, and shall be placed in these areas at distances away am
from adjacent site improvements as specified herein or as directed by the
Architect.
4. It shall have a minimum dry density of not less than 100 pounds per cubic foot. am
5. Material from excavations on the site may be used as Ordinary Fill if it meets the
above requirements. ow
H. Material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least one of the
following properties:
«.
1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lbs., as
determined by ASTM D1557.
ow
2. Material containing greater than 2% organic matter by weight, topsoil, organic
silt, peat, construction debris, roots and stumps.
3 . Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 55 when tested in accordance with go
ASTM D 4318.
4. Material designated unsuitable in the field by the Geotechnical Representative. Aw
5. Soil which is allowed to become frozen, saturated, or unstable because of the
contractor's failure to employ appropriate dewatering, excavation methods, or
weather protection is not deemed unsuitable soil but rather represents a a*
condition in which the subgrade was not adequately protected.
I. Floor Slab Base Course: Shall consist of well-graded natural sand and gravel, free from
organic, other weak or compressible materials, or frozen materials, conforming to the
following gradation:
U.S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT ■,,,
4" 100
#4 40-70
#40 25-45
#200 0-10
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
10 of 21 •»
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
40 B. Fill materials shall be well-graded within specified gradation limits. Gradation of backfill
materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D-422.
C. The Contractor may elect to mobilize a crushing plant to the site in order to manufacture
"" structural fill, subject to the criteria specified herein. The resulting material shall be
referred to herein as"recycled structural fill".
E. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone processed from a stone quarry, washed, graded, free of
organic materials. Gradation is as follows:
1 . '/Z'Crushed Stone
U. S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT
" 100
7/2" 85-100
1. 15-45
#4 0-15
#8 0-5
2. $/"Crushed Stone
U. S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT
1" 100
90-100
1/2'1 10-50
tv 0-20
#4 0-5
w�
3. 1 YT Crushed Stone
U. S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT
2" 100
1%" 95-100
ill 35-70
W. 0-25
Use 1-1/2" Crushed Stone unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
F. Structural Fill: Well-graded, hard, durable, natural sand and gravel, free from ice and
snow, roots, sod, rubbish, and other deleterious or organic matter. Material shall conform
to the following gradation requirements:
U.S. SIEVE NO. % PASSING BY WEIGHT
Sand &Gravel Granular Fill
4" 100
'/2" 50-85
#4 40-75
#10 30-90
,f„ #40 10-35 10-70
#100
#200 0-8 0-15
G. Ordinary Fill: Well-graded, natural, inorganic soil approved by the Architect and meeting
the following requirements:
1 . It shall have less than 3% organic matter, free from weak or compressible
materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than eight inches in
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
9of21
OW
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 dot
operations so that proper compaction cannot be reached shall be construed as unstable
bearing materials. This material shall be removed and replaced with crushed stone or ~"`
structural fill as directed by the Architect or Geotechnical Representative at no additional
cost to the Owner.
4W
1.19 PROTECTION OF BEARING SUBGRADES
A. The Contractor shall be required to maintain stable, dewatered, and frost free subgrades
for foundations, pavement areas, utility trenches, and other areas as directed by the ow
Architect or Geotechnical Representative.
B. The Contractor shall take precautions to reduce subgrade disturbance. Such precautions ..�
may include diverting storm water runoff away from construction areas, reducing traffic in
sensitive areas, thermal protection during cold weather periods, and maintaining an
effective dewatering operation.
..o
1.20 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AND
DRAINAGE AND EROSION CONTROL.
A. The following procedures shall be extended through Earthwork operations as follows:
1. Repair any broken or damaged sections of haybales or siltation fencing installed
during site preparation and install any additional sections necessary for proper
erosion control.
2. Throughout earthwork operations, in addition to hay bales, the Contractor shall
take other necessary precautions, including installation of temporary drainage
swales, siltation sumps, check dams, silt fencing and temporary pipe to direct
and control drainage from disturbed areas on the site so that erosion and siltation
is minimal. In addition, no erosion or discharge of silt or larger particles shall
occur in wetland areas to remain undisturbed or onto adjacent properties.
3. Damaged or loose hay bales and siltation fence shall be replaced as necessary
to maintain their function of controlled erosion and siltation. Damaged or broken
down check dams and filtration dams shall be replaced immediately.
4. Throughout construction, remove any accumulation of silt or soil build-up behind
hay bales, silt fences, check dams and filtration dams as it occurs. Remove
accumulations of silt and soil build-up from the siltation sumps and silt traps
when it is approximately 18 inches deep.
5. Remove temporary drainage swales, check dams, haybales and other temporary
drainage, erosion and siltation control measures when permanent drainage
control measures have been installed, and grass is established in drainage .►
areas. Do not remove the above items without approval of the Architect. If, in
the Architect's opinion, these measures are still necessary, they shall stay in
place.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill material shall be obtained from required on-site cut to the extent suitable material is
available and off-site to the extent suitable material is not available from on-site cuts.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
8of21 "�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
me DHCD Project No. 214034
1.16 DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor shall control the grading in areas under construction on the site so that
the surface of the ground will properly slope to prevent accumulation of water in
40 excavated areas and adjacent properties.
B. Should surface, rain or ground water be encountered during the operations, the
W Contractor shall furnish and operate pumps or other equipment, and provide all
necessary piping to keep all excavations clear of water at all times and shall be
responsible for any damage to work or adjacent properties for such water. All piping
exposed above surface for this use, shall be properly covered to allow foot traffic and
vehicles to pass without obstruction.
C. Presence of ground water in soil will not constitute a condition for which an increase in
the contract price may be made. Under no circumstances place concrete fill, soil fill, lay
piping or install appurtenances in excavation containing free water. Keep utility trenches
free of water until pipe joint material has hardened and backfilled to prevent flotation.
D. For further information refer to paragraph on SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AND RELATED TO DRAINAGE AND
EROSION CONTROL as specified herein.
1.17 FROST PROTECTION
A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected,
®" unless work can be completed to subgrade or piping can be installed and backfilled the
same day. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete or piping is delayed.
40 B. The Contractor shall keep the operations under this Contract clear and free of
accumulation of snow within the limits of Contract Lines as required to carry out the work.
C. No work shall be installed on frozen ground.
1.187 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED AND FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION
�. A. The Contractor shall take the necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade and
underlaying natural soils/compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods
of excavation and filling operations shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance of
the subgrade and underlaying natural soils/compacted fill, including restricting the use of
certain types of construction equipment and their movement over sensitive or unstable
materials. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect or Geotechnical
Representative to modify his operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and
protect bearing soils.
B. All excavated or filled areas disturbed during construction, all loose or saturated soil, and
other areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be
u removed and replaced with compacted structural fill or crushed stone. Fill that cannot be
compacted within 48 hours because of excess moisture shall be removed and replaced
with compacted structural fill or crushed stone. Costs of removal of disturbed material
and replacement with Structural Fill or crushed stone shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Material that is not within +\- 3% optimum moisture for compaction as determined by the
Modified Proctor Test of the particular material in place as determined by the Architect or
the Geotechnical Representative and is disturbed by the Contractor during construction
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
7of21
4M
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 "'
slopes between points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points 00
and existing established grades.
C. The word"subgrade"as used herein, means the required surface of subsoil, borrow fill or
compacted fill. This surface is immediately beneath the site improvements, fill as 00
dimensioned on the Drawings, or other proposed surface material.
1.14 DISPOSITION OF EXISTING UTILITIES 4W
A. Existing utilities were required to be removed under the previous site contract. In the
event inactive or abandoned utilities are encountered during construction operations, they
shall be removed if within the building area or grouted, plugged or capped. The location ow
of such utilities shall be noted on the record drawings and reported in writing to the
Architect.
00
B. The Contractor shall notify "Dig Safe" and local utility companies prior to the start of
construction. The "Dig Safe' number shall be submitted by the Contractor in writing to
the Architect prior to construction.
00
1.15 SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING
A. Provide shoring, sheeting, and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to assure complete so
safety against collapse of earth at sides of excavations.
B. If, at any place, sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, additional supports
shall be placed at the expense of the Contractor. Care shall be taken to prevent voids aw
outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and
rammed.
am
C. All sheeting and bracing not ordered left in place shall be carefully removed in such a
manner as not to endanger the construction of other structures, utilities or property
whether public or private. All voids left after withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately
refilled with sand and rammed with tools especially adapted to that purpose or otherwise •^
compacted as directed to achieve the required density.
D. The portion of wood sheeting driven below mid-diameter of any pipe, shall not be aw
withdrawn and under no circumstances shall any wood sheeting be cut off at a level
lower than one foot above the top of pipe.
E. Shoring or sheeting shall not constitute a condition for which an increase may be made in .•»
the contract price with the exception that if the Architect directs in writing that certain
shoring or sheeting shall be left in place, the contract price will be adjusted in accordance
with General Conditions.
F. Excavation support systems shall be designed to support the earth pressures, hydrostatic
pressures, surcharge loads and other forces from existing site conditions, stored material
and construction equipment.
G. Shoring and bracing of trenches and other excavations shall, at a minimum, be in
accordance with the latest requirements of the Department of Labor and Industries
Bulletin No. 12, Section 10, and all subsequent amendments.
H. Shoring and sheeting shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts hired by and paid for by the Contractor.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
6of21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
C. Compaction Control
Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the in-
place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100.
w D. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by
ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb.
Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78: (Method C).
E. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of
Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D1556-82 or ASTM
Standard Method of Test for Density of Sal in Place by Nuclear Methods, Designation
D2922-81.
1.12 PERMITS, CODES AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
wu
A. All work shall conform to the Drawings and Specifications and shall comply with applicable
codes and regulations.
B. Comply with the rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the City, appropriate agencies of
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
Coordinate all work done within city and State rights of way with the appropriate agencies.
Provide all required traffic control and safety measures, including uniformed police officers
per city and State requirements. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided without additional cost to
the Owner.
C. Comply with the provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction of the
Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. and the requirements of the Occupational
40 Safety and Health Administration(OSHA), United States Department of Labor.
D. The Contractor shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for the complete
work specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
40
E. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct any city street or sidewalk. The Contractor shall
so conduct his operations as to interfere as little as possible with the use ordinarily made of
40 roads, driveways, sidewalks or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected
hereby. The Contractor shall comply with the time limits established by the terms for
trucking onto and off of the site.
on F. Any apparent conflict between the Drawings and Specifications and the applicable codes
and regulations shall be referred to the Architect in writing, for resolution before the work is
started.
40 1.13 LAYOUTS AND GRADES
A. All line and grade work not presently established at the site shall be laid out by a survey
aAw team under the supervision of a Registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer
employed by the Contractor in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. The
Contractor shall establish permanent bench marks and replace as directed any which are
destroyed or disturbed.
B . The words "finished grades" as used herein shall mean final grade elevations indicated
on the Drawings. Spot elevations shall govern over proposed contours. Where not
4 otherwise indicated, project site areas outside of the building shall be given uniform
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
5of21
..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as am
required for his own information after approval by the Owner.
1.10 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL SITE CONSIDERATIONS ow
A. Soil borings have been made by qualified Contractors prior to this Contract. The final
results of these subsurface explorations and recommendations for work were prepared a,
by O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc., consulting geotechnical engineers, and are
hereby attached to this specification section as Appendix A, for information only. For
purposes of this specification, this information will be referred to as the report. Where
procedures within the report vary from procedures as specified herein, this specification aw
shall override.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor under this Contract to do the excavation, filling, ON
grading and rough grading to bring the existing grades to subgrade and parallel to
finished grades as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings for this Work. The
Contractor shall visit the site prior to submitting a bid to become familiar with the extent of
the work to be done under this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for .m
determining the quantities of earth materials necessary to complete the work under this
Section. All earth materials shall be included in the Contractor's base bid.
no
C. Site Information - data on indicated subsurface conditions are not representations or
warrants of continuity of such conditions between subsurface explorations. It is expressly
understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions
drawn there from by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the .R
Contractor. Neither the Owner nor the Geotechnical Representative assumes
responsibility for accuracy of the data other than at the particular locations and at the time
the explorations were made. so
1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
no
A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on-site
observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. The
services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to, the following:
..
1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab
areas.
2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades.
3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills.
4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required.
5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas.
6 Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at ,
a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these
tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so
that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated
deficiencies. •■
7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather.
B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work
by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, "'
nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from
defects discovered in his work.
dw
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
4 of 21 ow
f"
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
,a DHCD Project No. 214034
1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. as
determined by ASTM D 1557.
2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction
debris, roots and stumps.
3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50.
4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant.
E. Topsoil -The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation
as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter.
F. Subsoil -loose silt and fine sand layer located directly below the topsoil.
G. Rock and Boulder Excavation — shall be defined as removal of sound and solid mass,
layer, or ledge, or ledge of mineral matter as follows.
1. Rock excavation shall mean the removal of bedrock (ledge)which, in the opinion
of the Architect, requires for its removal, drilling and blasting, wedging, sledging
or barring and boulders which, in the opinion of the Architect, require blasting for
removal. Rock excavation shall be made to the widths and depths directed by
the Architect in the field.
2. Boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock fragments exceeding 3 cubic
„w yards in volume which can be removed without resorting to blasting.
1.08 INFORMATION
A. It is hereby understood that the Contractor has carefully examined the site and all
conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed
because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.
B. Plans, surveys, measurements and dimensions, under which the work is to be performed
are believed to be correct to the best of the Architect's knowledge, but the Contractor
shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period, as no allowance will be
made for any errors or inaccuracies that may be found herein.
C. Information on the Drawings, Reference Drawings, and in the Specifications relating to
subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from
the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the
information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this
information is not guaranteed.
1.09 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and
drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their correction, and note all
conditions which may influence the work of this Section.
B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all
conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed
because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
3of21
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
support. The excavation support plan should be prepared, signed, and stamped by a
Professional Engineer Registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02150 Erosion and Sediment Control
B. Section 02600 Bituminous Concrete Paving
C. Section 02730 Sanitary Sewage System
D. Section 02800 Planting
E. Section 03300 Site Concrete
1.05 SAMPLES AND TESTING
A. A 50 lb. sample of each off-site material proposed for use, and of any on-site material
when so requested by the Architect or Geotechnical Representative, shall be submitted
for approval.
1 . Samples shall be delivered to office of the Geotechnical Representative, as
directed.
2. Samples required in connection with compaction tests will be taken and
transported by the Geotechnical Representative.
B. Product Data: Submit location of pits for all borrow material.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. The work of this Section shall be coordinated with that of other trades affecting, or
affected by, this work, as necessary to assure the steady progress of all work of the
Contract. �*
B. Prior to the start of earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the
Architect and Geotechnical Representative for the purpose of establishing Contractor's .�
schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements.
C. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect
prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing.
1.07 DEFINITIONS
A. Subgrade — surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation to lines and
grades indicated.
B. Embankment-shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed
subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation
and cross-section.
C. Utility Trench Backfill - is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the
cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with
applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company
requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed.
D. Unsuitable Material - material which is classified as"unsuitable" shall be material having
at least one of the following properties:
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
2 of 21 �-
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02200
EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of
Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this trade.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work of this Section consists of earthwork and related items, as indicated on the
drawings, and/or as specified herein. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Excavation, filling, grading and compaction.
a. Preparing subgrade for slabs on grade, walks, pavement, lawn, and
planting.
b. Excavation and backfill of utilities.
• 2. Supplying of fill materials.
3. Erosion and siltation control.
4. Sheeting, shoring and bracing.
5. Sedimentation and erosion control.
6. Screening of on site stockpiled loam.
7. Restoration of disturbed preload bearing material and replacement with suitable
structural fill.
w
B. Special Conditions For Site Preparation and Earthwork Operation: The Contractor shall
take note of any ordinances put forth by the City which may limit construction hours; and
shall adhere to these ordinances.
C. Definition: The term Geotechnical Representative as used in this specification shall mean
a competent technician, qualified by experience and training, working under the
supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer.
D. Previous site clearing, demolition of existing dwelling and garage, and preloading area of
new construction has been performed under a separate contract. The preload material is
to remain for floor slab bearing platform. All areas of bearing platform disturbed during
construction must be re-compacted as specified in paragraph 3.04 of this section.
E. Loam has been stockpiled on site for re-use. Screen stockpiled loam for removal of
subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one(1) inch diameter and other extraneous materials.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following prior to start of work:
1. Excavation and Excavation Support Plan: The Contractor shall submit for review at least 14
calendar days prior to the start of the work a detailed plan for the excavation and excavation
Excavating, Filling and Grading 02200
1 of 21
®.
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 - August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 •.
direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work and order the Contractor to
make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner.
7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all cross culverts and sweep off
roadways as approved by the Architect before Contract closeout.
8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month or more
frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced.
Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition.
9. Hay bales shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as required to
maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original condition. Underside
of bales shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times, as required to
prevent water from washing beneath bales.
10. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner that will not
cause sediment nuisance elsewhere.
E. Removal of Erosion Control Devices
1. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved
or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, areas disturbed 4M
by these devices shall be re-graded and seeded.
2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of 4W
completed slope or entire Project, whichever is later.
END OF SECTION 4m
no
4M
am
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150
6of6 '"'
40
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
OR DHCD Project No. 214034
3.02 SILT FENCE
A. Silt fencing shall be placed around existing drainage channels and at the no-cut and no fill
lines before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be installed prior to all up
gradient earthwork.
B. Silt fence shall be installed around the stockpiled topsoil and other aggregate material.
3.03 HAY BALE DAM
Bales shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be
embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by
stakes or re-bars driven through the bales. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward
the previously laid bale to force the bales together.
3.04 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES
A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices
during storm events, after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to
weekends, and prior to any forecasted storm events.
B. Wetland areas, watercourses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction activities shall
be monitored twice each month for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse
environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon discovery.
C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during
construction period.
1. Cleaning: Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be
removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. Sediment basin
shall be cleaned when the sediment accumulates to one foot of depth.
2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices immediately,
and, in no case, more than four hours after observing such deficiencies, and as
directed by the Architect.
3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion
control measures as may be necessary during the course of construction, and as
directed by the Architect.
4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor
! ► necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within
four hours of any impending emergency situation.
5. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Architect to make repairs
or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of construction.
6. If, in the opinion of the Architect,the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion
control devices, and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory, the Architect will
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150
ew 5of6
dw
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 am
2.05 TEMPORARY SEED COVER am
A. Seed mixture for temporary cover by hydro-seeding application shall conform to the
following:
Quantity per 1000
sa. ft coverage Material
so
27-1/2 lb. Wood fiber mulch
4 lb. Seed
1/2 lb. Annual Ryegrass ,w
22 lb. 10-6-4 Fertilizer
69 gal. Water
1. Wood fiber mulch shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M6.04.4, "Wood no
Fiber Mulch".
2. Seed shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section 6.03.01, "Erosion Seed". .»
PART 3-EXECUTION
so
3.01 TEMPORARY SEED COVER
A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 4.0 lb./1000 sq. ft. aw
B. Following seeding, area shall be tightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 to 1/4 inch of
soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. .,6
C. Following rolling, entire shall be watered until equivalent of a 2-inch depth of water shall
have been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate that will not dislodge seed. Water
shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent drying of surface, until No
grass attains an average height of 1 1/2 inches.
D. At the Contractor's option, seed may be spread by the hydro-seeding methods, utilizing .w
power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and
applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the conventional seeding
method, with mulch applied at the rate of 2700 lb. dry weight of mulch per acre. MW
A mulching machine, acceptable to the Architect, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly
wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other
provisions specified above for conventional seeding shall apply to hydro seeding. 00
1. If the results of hydro-seeding application are unsatisfactory, the mixture and/or
application rate and methods shall be modified to achieve the required results. ow
2. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a
uniform stand of grass, for any reason whatsoever, shall be re-seeded and such
areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a as
satisfactory growth of grass.
ow
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150 ,m
4of6
ON
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion
protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions.
3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, fill slopes shall be limited to
a grade of 2:1 (horizontal:vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1.
1.08 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who,
when authorized, will mobilize the necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, and
otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impending emergency situation.
*� B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Contractor
may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24-
hour"duty roster"for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Architect.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SILT FENCE
A. Silt fence shall be"Envirofence" pre-assembled silt fence structure, manufactured by
40 Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal.
1. Each package shall include oak post, industrial polypropylene netting, Mirafi 100
sediment control fabric, metal coupler and instructions.
2. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.; fabric width minimum
of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft. -6 in.; and post spacing maximum of 8 ft.
at
3. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation, and beveled at top to resist splitting.
go 2.02 HAY BALES
Hay bales for construction of hay bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall be new, firm
wire or nylon-bound livestock feed-grade.
40
2.03 CRUSHED STONE
ww Crushed stone for hay bale check dam,catch basin filter dam and sediment pond riser pipe filters
shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M2.01.3
2.04 FILTER FABRIC
Filter fabric for catch basin filter dam shall be Mirafi 140N drainage fabric, manufactured by Mirafi,
Inc., Charlotte, NC, or approved equal.
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150
3 of 6
Am
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 WK
1.06 SUBMITTALS "w
A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and
siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approval. am
Submittals shall include:
1. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. dw
2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implementing
programs in each major area of work.
..
B. The following samples shall be submitted:
Sam a Size a,
Silt fence fabric 12 x 12 in.
C. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. am
1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES
ow
A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction
phases:
1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner 'w
which will minimize soil erosion.
2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. *t
3. Extent of area that is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure
shall be kept within practical limits. „o
4. Temporary seeding, mulching, or other suitable stabilization measures shall be used
to protect exposed critical areas during prolonged construction or other land
disturbances.
5. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from
modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or
disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements.
6. Sediment shall be retained on-site.
7. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the construction
sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work.
B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes
shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion exposure period is
expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when
erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months.
1. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and
covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions.
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150
2 of 6 ..�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 02150
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this
Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established
for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not
clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct a complete
erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and sediment control
provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the minimum requirements for
an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion sediment
control materials and methods as required to effect the erosion and siltation control
principles specified herein.
B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include, but not be limited to, installation
and maintenance of silt fences, hay bale check dams, and installation schedules of erosion
control structures.
C. Related work specified elsewhere
Excavation and Backfill.....................................................................Section 02200
1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MDPW or MHD)
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
Erosion and Sediment Control 02150
"" 1 of 6
.m
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. At Substantial Completion the Contractor shall submit the complete set of marked up As Built
drawings to the Architect. The Contractor shall check all marked up As Builts prepared by
subcontractors and certify in writing on the title sheet of the drawings that they are complete and ..
correct, prior to submission to the Architect.
The Architect shall review the marked up As Built drawings and verify by letter to the Owner that
the Work is complete. The Architect shall incorporate all changes onto to original drawings.
G. The Contractor may make a written request for copies of the completed Record Drawings. The
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner directly for the cost of printing of any requested Record
Drawings.
H. Submission of accurate marked up As Built drawings and their approval by the Architect shall be a
condition precedent to final payment.
END OF SECTION 01720
MW
DHCD$100K-$10M SURVEYS+RECORD DRAWINGS 01720
c149 08/2004 2 of 2 ..
no
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
40 DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01720
on SURVEYS AND RECORD DRAWINGS
40
1. SURVEYS
40 A. At the completion of foundations,the Contractor shall furnish to the owner a survey,signed by a
Land Surveyor or Engineer registered in Massachusetts, certifying that the location of the
building(s) and the principal lines, levels, and dimensions of the buildings are accurately
established in accordance with the drawings.
1. This drawing shall be the same size as the other drawings in the Contract Documents.
2. One copy of this drawing shall be a wash of Mylar.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings shall consist of all the Contract Drawings.
B. From the sets of drawings fumished by the Owner,the Contractor shall reserve one set for
record purposes. From this set,the Contractor shall detach and furnish, at no charge to the
Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors the drawings of their portion of the Work for the same
purpose.
C. The Contractor and the above Subcontractors shall keep their marked up As Built set on the site
at all times and note on it in colored ink or pencil, neatly and accurately, at the end of each
working day,the exact location of their work as actually installed. This shall include the location
and dimensions of underground and concealed Work,and any architectural, mechanical, or
electrical variations from the Contract Drawings. All changes, including those issued by
Addendum, Change Order, or instructions by the Architect shall be recorded. Marked up As
Built drawings shall be prepared for the entire project and include all Work, including but not
limited to:
1. The location of all underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface
improvements, both horizontally and vertically at ten (10)foot intervals and at all changes of
direction.
2. The location of all internal utilities and appetencies,concealed by finish materials, including but
ww not limited to valves, coils,dampers,vents, cleanouts,strainers, pipes,junction boxes,turning
vanes,variable and constant volume boxes,duds,traps, and maintenance devices.
a. The location of these, items shall be shown by offsets to structure and drawing grid lines.
b. The tolerance for the actual location of these items on the marked up As Built Drawings
shall be plus or minus two (2)inches.
c. Each item shall be referenced by showing a tag number, areas served, and function on the
marked up As Built drawing
D. The Architect may periodically inspect the marked up As Built drawings at the site. The proper
and current maintenance of the information required on these drawings shall be a condition
precedent to approval of the monthly applications for payment.
DHCD$100K-$10M SURVEYS+RECORD DRAWINGS 01720
c149 08/2004 1 of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
2. Submission to the Architect of a certificate of compliance to this requirement, signed by the
Contractor and the Owner's Representative, shall be a condition precedent to final payment.
6. FINAL COMPLETION
A. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1. The Contractor's attention is directed to Article 9.7 of the General Conditions and the Construction
Handbook. .�
B. FULL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
1. Upon completion of all work, and after receipt of all appropriate marked up As Built Drawings,
Operating Manuals,Warranties, Guarantees, and Spare Parts required by the Contract
Documents, the Architect shall prepare the Certificate of Final Completion.
2. This certificate shall be processed in accordance with the procedures described in the Construction
Handbook.
3. The Contractor's signature on this Certificate shall be notarized. ""
4. The Contractor shall provide a final Application for Payment to complement the close-out process.
ow
C. PARTIAL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
1. If within 65 days after Substantial Completion, any of the items on the Architects punch list are
not complete or if the Contractor has not provided the appropriate marked up As Built Drawings, ow
Operating Manuals,Warranties, Guarantees, or Spare Parts the Architect shall assign a monetary
value for each incomplete item as well as any other items as provided by M.G.L. c.30§39K, and
the Architect shall prepare a Certificate for Partial Release of Retainage go
2. If the Architect is required to prepare a Certificate for Partial Release of Retainage the Contractor
shall complete all remaining Work in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.7 of the General
Conditions.
3. The Contractor's signature on this Certificate shall be notarized.
4. The Contractor may make a request for additional releases of retainage when portions of the No
Work listed on the Architect's punch list have been satisfactorily completed. Each request shall
be accompanied by a new application for payment and a new signed and notarized Certificate for
Partial Release of Retainage. ow
5. The Architect's inspections, required to complete the additional payment applications described in
subparagraph C4 above, are subject to provisions of subparagraph 9.7.5 of the General
Conditions. no
6. Upon completion of all remaining items, the Final Release of Retainage shall be processed in
accordance with paragraph B above. •►
END OF SECTION 01700
DHCD$100K-$10M Project Close Out 01700
c149 08/2004 2 of 2 *�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section supplements the General Conditions.
B. Consult the individual sections of the specifications for specific items required under those sections.
2. OCCUPANCY PERMIT
The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of all Subcontractors and obtain the Occupancy Permit from the
local Building Department. The Contractor shall pay any Building Department fee associated with the
Occupancy Permit.
3. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Consult the individual sections of the specifications for the specific requirements for those sections and
for further details and descriptions of the requirements
B. Prior to final payment and completion the Contractor shall provide all Operating Manuals and
Maintenance Instructions as required by the Contract Documents.
C. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
1. Subcontractors, installers, and suppliers shall furnish to the Contractor two sets of operating and
maintenance instructions of all mechanical, electrical, and manually operated equipment furnished
and installed by them. Mechanical and electrical subcontractors shall furnish instructions as
specified in their respective sections.
2. The Contractor shall collect all of the above instructions, bind them into two complete sets, and
submit them to the Architect who will deliver them to the Owner. Organize operating and
maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual
heavy-duty, 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl covered binders with pocket folders for folded sheet information.
Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of
information:
Name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and supplier.
"800" phone numbers, if available for service lines of manufacturers.
Model number of each product used.
Emergency instructions.
Spare parts list.
Copies of warranties.
Wiring diagrams.
Recommended"turn around"cycles.
Inspection procedures.
Shop drawings and product data.
Fixture lamping schedule.
3. Submission of operating and maintenance instructions shall be a condition precedent to final
payment.
D. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
1. Where specified in the individual sections of the specifications,the Contractor and Subcontractor
- shall instruct the Owner's personnel at the site, in the use and maintenance of equipment installed
under the Contract.
DHCD$100K-$10M Project Close Out 01700
c149 08/2004 1 of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
H. Remove grease, mastic, adhesive, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials
from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing
trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective
specifications.
I. Clean and polish all new and existing glass and plastic glazing(if any)throughout the building(s),
on both sides. Clean plastic glazing in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. This
cleaning shall be completed by qualified window cleaners at the expense of the Contractor just
prior to acceptance of the Work.
J. Wash and polish all mirrors.
K. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to the specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
L. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
M. Do the final cleaning of resilient floors and wood floors as specified under the respective sections
of the Specifications.
N. Leave all architectural metals, hardware, and fixtures in undamaged, polished conditions.
O. Leave pipe and duct spaces, plenums,furred spaces and the like clean of debris and decayable
materials.
P. In cleaning items with manufacturer's finish or items previously finished by a Subcontractor,care
shall be taken not to damage such manufacturer's or Subcontractor's finish. In cleaning glass and
finish surfaces, care shall be taken not to use detergents or other cleaning agents which may stain
adjoining finish surfaces. Any damage to finishes caused by cleaning operations shall be repaired
at the Contractor's expense.
Q. Broom clean exposed concrete surfaces and paved surfaces. Rake clean other surfaces of ,
grounds.
R. Ventilating systems-Replace filters and clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated
during construction.
S. Owner's responsibility for cleaning commences at Final Completion.
END OF SECTION 01520
DHCD$100K-$10M Cleaning Up 01520
c149 08/2004 2 of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
+ u DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01520
CLEANING UP
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section supplements Article 4.17 of the General Conditions.
B. Consult the individual sections of the specifications for cleaning of Work installed under those
sections.
2. CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the site.
2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary
drains.
3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.
C. Do not allow materials and rubbish to drop free or be thrown from upper floors, but remove by use
of a material hoist or rubbish chutes.
D. Maintain the Site free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish.
E. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and rubbish. Dumpster locations to be
approved by the Owner.
1014 F. At the end of each day, remove and legally dispose waste materials and rubbish from site.
G. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue vacuum
cleaning on an as-needed basis until Substantial Completion.
H. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
I. Disposal of materials shall be in compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances, codes, and by-
laws.
3. FINAL CLEANING
A. Prior to submitting a request to the Architect to certify Substantial Completion of the Work,the
Contractor shall inspect all interior and exterior spaces and verify that all waste materials, rubbish,
tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials have been removed, and that all sight-exposed
surfaces are clean. Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy.
B. Unless otherwise specified under other sections of the Specifications,the Contractor shall perform
4011 final cleaning operations as herein specified prior to final inspection.
C. Cleaning shall include all surfaces, interior and exterior,which the Contractor has had access to,
whether new or existing.
D. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
E. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.
F. Use cleaning materials which will not create a hazard to health or property and which will not
damage surfaces.
G. All broken or defective glass caused by the Contractor's Work shall be replaced at the expense of
the Contractor.
DHCD$100K-$10M Cleaning Up 01520
c149 08/2004 1 of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
3. NOISE AND DUST CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall take special measures to protect the residents, neighbors, and
general public from noise, dust, and other disturbances by:
(I.) Keeping common pedestrian and vehicular circulation areas clean and unobstructed;
(2.)Insulating work area from occupied portions as far as possible; and
(3.)Sealing dust and fumes from contaminating occupied spaces.
4. FIRE PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to insure against fire during construction.
The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that the area within contract limits is kept
orderly and clean and that combustible rubbish and construction debris is promptly
removed from the site.
B. Installation of equipment suitable for fire protection shall be done as soon as possible after
commencement of the Work. The Contractor's attention is directed to the requirements of
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Labor and Workforce Development
Regulation 454 CMR.
5. WIND PROTECTION
Should high wind warnings be issued by the U.S. Weather Bureau, the Contractor shall take
every precaution to minimize danger to persons, to the Work, and to the adjacent property. ""qe
6. WEATHER PROTECTION �.
The Contractor shall provide Weather Protection as required by Specification Section 01500
Temporary Facilities and any other specific requirements of the Contract Documents. ,.►
END OF SECTION 01510
DHCD$100K-$10M Protection 01510
c149 08/2004 2 of 2 ..
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01510
PROTECTION
1. TEMPORARY PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall:
(1.)Protect excavations, trenches, buildings, and materials at all times from rain water,
ground water, backing-up, or leakage of sewers,drains, or other piping, or from water
damage of any origin. Provide all pumps, piping, coverings, and other materials and
equipment as required by job conditions to accomplish this requirement.
(2.)In addition to the weather protection during the months of November to March specified
elsewhere, provide temporary watertight enclosures for openings in exterior walls and
in roof decks when and as required to protect the Work from damage by inclement
weather. Temporary enclosures shall be provided with adequate means of ventilation
to prevent accumulation of moisture in the buildings.
(3.)Provide temporary wood doors for exterior entrances and elsewhere as required.
Permanent door enclosures shall not be used as temporary enclosures.
(4.)Protect sills,jambs, and heads of openings through which materials are handled.
(5.)Protect decks and slabs to receive work by other trades from any soiling which will
prevent proper adhesion of subsequent Work. Decks and slabs shall be left clean and
free of blemishes at the time other trades begin the application of their work.
4W
(6.) Protect concrete slabs to remain exposed and finished floors against mechanical
damage, plaster droppings, oil,grease, paint, or other material which will stain the floor
finish. Install and maintain adequate strips of building paper or other protection on
finished floors in rooms where other trades will do future Work.
(7.)Protect all surfaces to receive work by other trades from any soiling which will prevent
proper execution of subsequent work
B. Roof surfaces and waterproofed surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall they be
used for storage of materials. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the
Work, adequate protection must be provided.
C. After the installation of the Work by any Subcontractor is completed, the Contractor shall be
responsible for its protection and for repairing, replacing, or cleaning any such Work which
has been damaged by other trades or by any other cause, so that all Work is in first class
„ condition at the time of Substantial Completion.
2. SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all security precautions necessary to
protect the Contractor's and Owner's interests.
B. Where excavation is involved, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing continuous
watchmen service as necessary, to insure adequate protection of the general public.
DHCD$100K-$10M Protection 01510
c149 08/2004 1 of 2
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 4ft
14. PROJECT SIGN
A. The Contractor shall provide, and install where directed by the Architect, one project sign.
B. The sign shall be plywood, MDO Exterior APA, 4 ft. by 8 ft., supported on two 4 in. by 4 in.
posts, with adequate bracing. Paint all surfaces with sign paint and provide lettering of size ,.
and type as directed by the Architect. The sign shall read as follows (including the name
and address of the Contractor):
MARY McCOLGAN APARTMENTS 167-2
DHCD PROJECT NO. 214034
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT
and the
Northampton Housing Authority
ARCHITECT GENERAL CONTRACTOR
Juster Pope Frazier LLP
9 Ashfield Street
Shelburne Falls, MA 01370
Contractor's Address
END OF SECTION 01500
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
c149 08/2004 6 of 6 �.
a�
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
13. TEMPORARY HEAT
as A. The Contractor may, with the approval of the Owner, elect to utilize the permanent heating system
for temporary heat. This may be allowed after the building is enclosed and after the heating system
has been tested and is ready to operate and providing the Contractor complies with all provisions
ft stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents and the following:
(I.)The Contractor shall pay the costs of all fuel and electricity required for temporary
heating until Substantial Completion.
(2.)The Contractor shall furnish and pay the costs of any materials and equipment which
are not part of the permanent heating system and which may be required to operate the
permanent heating system on a temporary basis.
(3.)The heating Subcontractor shall be in charge of and provide all labor required for the
attendance, operation and final restoration of the permanent heating system if used for
temporary heating purposes during working hours. The Contractor shall check the
heating system a minimum of twice daily, when no work is being performed at the site.
(4.)The Contractor shall reimburse the heating Subcontractor to operate any portion of the
permanent heating system used for temporary heating until Substantial Completion.
(5.)The Contractor shall reimburse the heating Subcontractor for the final cleaning and for
any repairs or replacements necessary to restore the permanent heating system to new
condition at the time of Substantial Completion.
(6.)No parts of the air handling system shall be used until temporary filters have been
installed satisfactory to the Architect. Such filters shall be kept clean and in efficient
working condition, and at the time of Substantial Completion shall be replaced by the
permanent filters.
(7.)It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to have all portions of the permanent heating
system that are used for heating during construction thoroughly cleaned and restored to
first class condition, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
* (8.)The Owner's warranty for the permanent heating system shall begin on the date of
Substantial Completion.
C. Installation of weather protection and heating devices shall comply with all safety regulations
including provisions for adequate ventilation and fire protection devices.
D. The Contractor shall provide thermometers at places designated by the Architect in order to
determine if specified temperatures are being maintained.
E. Unit heaters, if used, shall be of the smokeless type and be installed and operated in such a way
that finished work will not be damaged. "Salamanders"shall not be used.
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
c149 0$/2004 5 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain lamps in operating condition. The
Contractor, and each Subcontractor, shall furnish their own extension cords and additional
lamps as may be required for their work. Temporary work of a special nature, not otherwise
specked hereunder, shall be provided, maintained, and paid for the trade requiring same.
F. All lamps installed in permanent lighting fixtures and used as temporary lights during the
construction period shall be removed and replaced shortly before Substantial Completion
by the set of lamps required to be provided under the Electrical section of the
specifications.
G. All temporary work shall be provided in conformity with the National Electric Code, State
laws, and requirements of the power company. Particular attention is called to
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Labor and Workforce Development
Regulations.
H. The Electrical Subcontractor shall dismantle and completely remove from the project site,
temporary electrical facilities only when the permanent electrical system is operational and accepted
by the Architect.
12.WEATHER PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and heat to permit work to be carried on during
the months of November through March in compliance with MGL c.149§44G(d). These
specifications are not to be construed as requiring enclosures or heat for operations that are not
economically feasible in the opinion of the Owner. Without limitation this includes such items as
excavation, pile driving, steel erection, erection of certain exterior wall panels, roofing,and similar
operations.
B. 'Weather Protection"means the temporary protection of that Work adversely affected by moisture,
wind, and cold by covering, enclosing, and/or heating. This protection shall provide adequate
working areas during the months of November through March as determined by the Owner and
consistent with the construction schedule to permit the continuous progress of all Work necessary to ••
maintain an orderly and efficient sequence of construction operations. The Contractor shall furnish
and install'Weather Protection"material and be responsible for all costs, including heating required
to maintain a minimum of 40 degrees F. at the working surface including during nighttime hours so
that work can commence promptly the following work day. This provision does not supersede any
specific requirements for methods of construction, curing of materials, or the applicable conditions
set forth in the Contract Documents with added regard to performance obligations of the Contractor.
C. Within 30 calendar days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit in writing,to the
Architect for approval,three(3)copies of the proposed methods for"Weather Protection".
D. The Contractor shall assume the entire responsibility for weather protection during construction(until
Substantial Completion), and shall be liable for any damage to any Work caused by failure to supply
proper weather protection and proper ventilation.
E. Work damaged by frost shall be removed and replaced by and at the Contractor's expense and as
directed by the Architect.
F. It is to be specifically understood that the Contractor shall do no work under any conditions deemed *
unsuitable by the Contractor to the execution of the Work. This provision shall not constitute any
waiver, release, or lessening of the Contractor's obligation to bring the Work to Substantial
Completion within the period of time set forth in the Contract Documents.
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
c149 08/2004 4 of 6 •"
to
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
ON DHCD Project No. 214034
B. The Contractor shall pay the cost of water consumed by trades until Substantial
Completion.
C. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of cool drinking water with individual
drinking cups for personnel on the job.
D. When the permanent water distribution system has been installed, it may be used as a
source of water for construction purposes, provided that the Contractor(1) assumes full
responsibility for the entire water distribution system; and (2) pays for operation,
maintenance and restoration of the system.
Aw 11. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall, at its own expense, make arrangements for and provide all
temporary light and power, except as otherwise specified.
(1.)The temporary electrical service shall include but not be limited to labor, materials, and
equipment necessary to supply temporary power of adequate capacity for the project
operations and testing.
(2.)Transformers and meters, when required by the power company, will be furnished and
installed by the power company and the Electrical Subcontractor shall pay costs
therefore.
(3.)No connection shall be made to the Owner's power supply.
B. The Contractor shall pay for the cost of electrical energy consumed by all trades until Substantial
Completion. This includes any utility fees associated with the connection and disconnection of the
temporary service.
C. Temporary lighting and power shall be not less than the following:
(1.)Lighting -200 watts per 100 square feet of floor area, plus 60 watts for each stair
landing.
(2.)Receptacles-At least one 20 ampere duplex for each 1,000 square feet of floor space,
and such others as will accommodate extension cords not greater than 50 feet in length
to reach all Work.
(3.)Fused switches for special construction equipment
e (a.) On each floor of the building, at least one 30 ampere, 2 pole fused switch for special
connection.
(b.)Cables and connection from switches to the special equipment shall be provided,
maintained, and paid for by the trade requiring same.
(4.)Feeders -On each floor of each building, a feeder or feeders of sufficient capacity for
the requirements of each entire floor.
D. Temporary electrical Work shall be performed under the direct supervision of at least one
master electrician, who will be present on the project at all times when such work is being
performed.
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
3 of 6
c149 08/2004
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
(1.)assumes full responsibility for the used portions of the sanitary system, and
(2.)pays all costs for operation, maintenance, cleaning, and restoring to original condition
of used portions.
5. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary fencing or barricades
around the construction as may be necessary to assure the safety of all persons authorized or
unauthorized. Such protective measures shall be located and constructed as required by local,
state, and federal ordinances, laws, codes, or regulations.
6. TEMPORARY STRUCTURES AND MATERIAL HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall provide such storage sheds,temporary buildings, or trailers as required for the
performance of the Contract. Subcontractors shall provide their own temporary buildings and AM
trailers.
B. Materials shall be handled,stored, installed,cleaned,and protected in accordance with the best 4W
practice in the industry and, except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,in
accordance with manufacturer's specifications and directions.
7. TEMPORARY STAGING,STAIRS,CHUTES
A. Except as otherwise specified,the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain in safe condition, and
remove all scaffolds,staging, and planking over 8 ft. in height, as required for the use of all trades for
proper execution of the Work.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain in safe condition, and remove all temporary ramps,
stairs, ladders, and similar items as required for the use of all trades for the proper execution of the
Work.
C. Permanent stairs shall be erected as soon as possible,for which the Contractor shall provide ,
temporary protective treads, risers, handrails, and shaft protection.
D. The Contractor shall furnish,install, maintain,and remove covered chutes from openings in the
exterior walls of upper floors. Such shall be in convenient locations and permit disposal of rubbish
directly into trucks or disposal units.
E. Debris shall not be allowed to fall freely from upper levels of the building. Materials shall not be 4W
dropped from open windows.
8. HOISTING FACILITIES
A. Except as otherwise specified,the Contractor shall provide, operate, and remove material hoists,
cranes, and other hoisting as required for the performance of the Work by all trades. All such
hoisting service shall be without cost to the Subcontractors.
9. TEMPORARY WATER
A. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the local water department for obtaining
temporary water connections and shall pay costs thereby incurred. This includes the
furnishing, installing, and removing of equipment and piping to provide water for the
execution of the Work.
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
c149 08/2004 2 of 6
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5,2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining all temporary facilities until
Substantial Completion. Removal of such prior to Substantial Completion must be with the
concurrence of the Architect. The Contractor bears full responsibility for reproviding any facility
removed prior to Substantial Completion
B. Removal of all temporary facilities shall be a condition precedent to Substantial Completion unless
directed otherwise by the Architect or specifically noted in the specifications.
C. The Contractor must comply with all safety laws and regulations of the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts,the United States Government, and local government agencies applicable to Work
under this contract. The Contractor's attention is directed to the Commonwealth of Massachusetts,
Department of Labor and Workforce Development Regulations.
2. FIELD OFFICES
A. The Contractor shall provide a suitable office at the site for use by Contractor personnel.
B. In addition,the Contractor shall provide an area of not less than 1090 S.F. to be used for on-site job
meetings.
C. The office shall be set in a location approved by the Architect, and shall be maintained by the
Contractor in a clean and orderly condition.
D. After enclosed and heated building space becomes available, the Contractor may move the office
(including telephones) into the building. Space so used shall be subject to approval of the Architect
3. TEMPORARY TELEPHONES
A. The Contractor shall provide a separate service for the use of the Contractor's authorized personnel
and Subcontractors.
B. The Contractor shall provide a separate telephone service for the fax machine specified in
Paragraph 2B.
C. The Contractor shall pay for the installation and removal of the foregoing temporary telephones and
for all calls and charges in connection therewith.
4. TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. The Contractor shall provide and service an adequate number of toilet booths with chemical type
toilets.
B. The toilets shall be erected in a location approved by the Architect and shall be maintained by the
Contractor in a clean and orderly condition in compliance with all local and state health
requirements.
C. When the permanent sanitary system is in operating condition, the Contractor may use portions of
the system as approved by the Architect, provided that the Contractor,
DHCD$100K-$10M Temporary Facilities 01500
c149 08/2004 1 of 6
ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005 ~"
DHCD Project No. 214034
ow
C. Samples of items of interior finishes shall be submitted all at once to permit a coordinated
selection of colors and finishes.
D. Samples that can be conveniently mailed shall be sent directly to the Architect, accompanied
by a transmittal notice. All transmittals shall be stamped with the Contractor's approval stamp
of the material submitted. **
E. All other samples shall be delivered at the field office of the Project Representative with
sample identification tag attached and properly filled in. Transmittal notice of samples so
delivered with the Contractor's stamp of approval shall be mailed to the Architect.
F. If a sample is rejected by the Architect, a new sample shall be resubmitted in the specked
manner. This procedure shall be repeated until the Architect approves the sample .®
G. Samples will not be returned unless return is requested at the time of submission. The right
is reserved to require submission of samples whether or not particular mention is made in the
specifications, at no additional cost to the Owner. AW
END OF SECTION 01300
aw
W
..
so
9W
.W
..
DHCD$100K-$10M Submittal s 01300
049 0812004 4 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
B. Product Data shall be accompanied by a transmittal notice. The Contractor's stamp of approval
shall appear on the printed information itself, in a location which will not impair legibility.
C. Product Data returned by the Architect as "Disapproved shall be resubmitted in 7 copies until
the Architects approval is obtained.
D. When the Product Data are acceptable, the Architect will stamp them "Approved"or"Approved
as Corrected", retain 3 copies, and return 4 copies to the Contractor. The Contractor shall
provide and distribute additional copies as may be required to complete the Work.
D. The Contractor shall maintain one full set of approved, original, Product Data at the site.
5.
SUBMISSION OF SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings shall be complete, giving all information necessary or requested in the
individual section of the specifications. They shall also show adjoining Work and details of
connection thereto.
B. Shop Drawings shall be for whole systems. Partial submissions will not be accepted.
C. The Architect reserves the right to review and approve shop drawings only after approval of
related product data and samples.
D. Shop drawings shall be properly identified and contain the name of the project, name of the
firm submitting the shop drawings, shop drawing number, date of shop drawings and
revisions, Contractor's stamp of approval, and sufficient spaces near the title block for the
Architect's stamp.
E. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect one legible, reproducible transparency and six
black line prints of each shop drawing. Transparency and prints shall be mailed or delivered
in roll form. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a transmittal notice.
F. When the Architect returns a transparency with the stamp"Revise and Resubmit" or
"Disapproved", the Contractor shall correct the original drawing or prepare a new drawing and
resubmit a transparency and two prints thereof to the Architect for approval. This procedure
shall be repeated until the Architect's approval is obtained.
G. When the Architect returns a transparency with the stamp "Approved"or"Approved as
Corrected",the Contractor shall provide and distribute the prints for all Contractor and
Subcontractors use, and in addition submit, within 10 calendar days after approval, 4 prints to
the Architect.
H. The Contractor shall maintain one full set of approved shop drawings at the site.
6. SUBMISSION OF SAMPLES
A. Unless otherwise specified in the individual section, the Contractor shall submit two
specimens of each sample.
B. Samples shall be of adequate size to permit proper evaluation of materials. Where variations
in color or in other characteristics are to be expected, samples shall show the maximum
range of variation. Materials exceeding the variation of approved samples will not be
approved on the Work.
DHCD$100K-$10M Submittal s 01300
c149 0812004 3 of 4
om
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
E. Processing -All costs for printing, preparing, packaging, submitting, resubmitting, and
mailing, or delivering submittals required by this contract shall be included in the Contract
Sum. ..
3. OR EQUALS
A. Definition -Whenever a specification section names one or more brands for a given item,
and the Contractor wishes to submit, for consideration, another brand, the submission shall
be considered an "or-equal"or a "material substitution". For the purposes of this Contract, ••�
the terms"or-equal'and "material substitution"shall be considered synonymous.
B. In no case may an item be furnished on the Work other than the item named or described,
unless the Architect, with the Administrator's written concurrence, shall consider the item
equal to the Item
C. so named or described, as provided by M.G.L. c.30§ 39M.
C. The equality of items offered as "equal'to items named or described shall be proved to the
satisfaction of the Architect at the expense of the Contractor submitting the substitution.
D. The Architect and/or the Department may require that full size samples of both the specified
and proposed products be submitted for review and evaluation. The Contractor shall bear full
cost for providing, delivering, and disposal of all such samples.
E. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the performance of any item submitted as
an "Or-Equal'and assume the costs of any changes in any Work that may be caused by
such substitution.
F. Or Equal Approval Process-On the transmittal, or on a separate sheet attached to the
submission, the Contractor shall direct attention to any deviations, including minor limitations
and variations, from the Contract Documents.
(1.)The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for consideration of any or-equal substitution
a written point-by-point comparison containing the name and full particulars of the
proposed product and the product named or described in the Contract Documents.
(2.)Such submittal shall in no event be made later than 120 calendar days prior to the
incorporation of the item into the Work. In any case in which the time period specified in
the Contract Documents from the Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion is less
than 120 days,this requirement can be waived by the Architect.
(3.)Upon receipt of a written request for approval of an or-equal substitution, the Architect
shall investigate whether the proposed item shall be considered equal to the item named
or described in the Contract Documents. Upon conclusion of the investigation, the
Architect shall promptly advise the Contractor that the item is, or is not, considered
acceptable as on Or-Equal substitution. Such written notice must have the concurrence
of the Administrator.
4. SUBMISSION OF PRODUCT DATA
A. The Contractor shall submit 7 copies of Product Data to the Architect. All such data shall be
specific and identification of material or equipment submitted shall be clearly marked in ink.
Data of general nature will not be accepted.
DHCD$100K-$10M Submittal s 01300
c149 0812004 2 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01300
" SUBMITTALS - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section supplements Subparagraphs 4.6.3 and 5.3.5 and Paragraphs 4.7,4.8, and 4.15
of the General Conditions.
B. Consult the individual sections of the specifications for the specific submittals required under
those sections and for further details and descriptions of the requirements.
2. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS
A. Timeliness-The Contractor shall transmit each submittal to the Architect sufficiently in
advance of performing related Work or other applicable activities so that the installation is not
delayed by processing times, including disapproval and resubmttttal (if required), coordination
with other submittals,testing, purchasing,fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced
activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to
transmit submittals to the Architect in advance of the Work.
B. Sequence-The Contractor shall transmit each submittal in a sequence which will not result
„ in the Architect's approval having to be later modified or rescinded by reason of subsequent
submittals which should have been processed earlier or concurrently for coordination.
C. Contractor's Review and Approval -Only submittals received from and bearing the stamp
+ter of approval of the Contractor will be considered for review by the Architect. Submittals shall
be accompanied by a transmittal notice stating name of Project, date of submittal, 'To",
"From"(Contractor, Subcontractor, Installer, Manufacturer, Supplier), Specification Section, or
Drawing No.to which the submittal refers, purpose (first submittal, resubmittal), description,
remarks, distribution record, and signature of transmitter.
D. Architects Action -The Architect will review the Contractor's submittals and return them
with one of the following actions recorded thereon by appropriate markings:
(1.)Final Unrestricted Release: Where marked "Approved"the Work covered by the
submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
(2.)Final-But-Restricted Release: When marked "Approved as Noted" the Work may
proceed provided it complies with the Architect's notations or corrections on the submittal
and complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance of the Work
will depend on these compliances.
(3.)Returned for Resubmittal: When marked "Revise and Resubmit"or"Disapproved"the
Work covered by the submittal (such as purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity)
should not proceed. The submittal should be revised or a new submittal resubmitted
without delay, in accordance with the Architect's notations stating the reasons for
returning the submittal.
DHCD$100K-$10M Submittal s 01300
c149 0812004 1 of 4
MW
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Massachusetts Department of
Housing and Community Development
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENTS TO
MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (GC FORM)
Date:
TO: Department of Housing&Community Development
From: Name of Contractor
Candace Tempesta, MBE/WBE Coordinator
100 Cambridge St Ste 300
Boston , MA 02202 Address ..
Phone (617) 573-1507
Fax: (617) 573-1515
City,State,Zip
RE: Contract for Housing Authority Project No
Original Contract Amount Recording Period Ending
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
The undersigned certifies that they have met the Minority Business Enterprise(MBE)and Women Owned Business Enterprises
(WBE)requirements for the above named contract which states in part that the General Contractor.
1. Shall submit this form quarterly or at anytime requested by DHCD,completing the information below;
2. Have subcontracted with the following M/WBEs in the dollar amounts enumerated in the Participation Schedule and
Letters of Intent in effect at the time of contract execution.; and
3. Have made the following payments to each of the W/MBEs for work performed on this project.
MBE/WBE Work Performed Subcontract Total Payments Payments this
Amount to Date Quarter
In WITNESS WHEREOF,the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument under the pain and penalty of perjury.
This Day of 200 +
Name of General Contractor
Signed and Sealed
On this day of 200_,before me,the undersigned Notary Public,personally appeared am
duly designated by the board of directors and proved to me,through satisfactory evidence of
identification,which was 'that s/he is the person whose name is signed on the foregoing documents,and
acknowledged to me that s/he signed it voluntarily for its stated purpose and that it was her/his free act and deed.
am
Notary Public
My Commission Expires: am
DHCD$100K410M MBE WBE Requirements 01110
c149 08/2004 4 of 4
am
L
o
Ea
0
C
vJ
O c0
cq
Q o0
o co
o -0-0g
c
.. co
c
o �
Eca ns o
Q ° a� r-
012
^% o
o U �
c co o co
U 1== o
o
40 o �" V❑ Q co
c° a�
N cc
N ~ C co
:
O d n—
w H
>+ O a H A
Z >'5 o
w tn-
cu a
V W m =3
Q z
-?5 H�
O o o s,o� ° 2
H > O CL O Y S o c j rn
in OZ w O o�� A
0 Z o
c �
o � °
t V
m
c
.S m �, m
O L 0
O 00 ° C%] " U W
ACC ° ^d° W
a> co
N
U O
a� ¢ 0
� O (D
E _ O
LL
CL N L L E
W
Q ° o
p Z N r
tLf Cam?
p = 0 O Y p
0
p .O p m co
L ^ Q
W 00 CO
0 C3
Cc
� Q 0 Z' S _ u
❑ � D v
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Massachusetts Department of
Housing and Community Development
QUARTERLY PROJECTED WORK FORCE
Name of Contractor
Address:
Telephone: Fax
Trades to be Utilized ..
Estimated Total Hours to Complete Work
Total Contract Dollar Value: Name of Project
Quarter: ❑ Jan 1 -Mar 31 ❑ Apr 1 -Jun 30 ❑ Jul 1 -Sep 30 ❑ Oct 1 -Dec 31, 200
Week Ending Projected Total Hours Projected Total of All Trades Used this Week
of all Personnel Minority Hours
Note : A revised table must be submitted if any changes on projections occur. ■w
Prepared by:
Title: 4w
Date; Mw
DHCD$100K-$10M EEO and MBE/WBE Reporting Procedures 01110
c149 08/2004 2 of 4 4w
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01110
" EEO and MBE/WBE PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section supplements Articles 14 and 15 of the General Conditions.
B. Consult the individual sections of the specifications for the specific requirements of this Contract.
2. MBEJWBE REPORTING PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall provide, an executed Contractor's Affidavit of Payment to Minority Business
Enterprises on a copy of the form found at the end of this Section.
ie (1.)The Department or Owner may request copies of canceled checks to confirm compliance.
(2.)This affidavit shall be submitted by the Contractor as payments are made to MBE/WBEs for Work
completed on this project.
(3.)Affidavits shall be sent to:
MBE/WBE Coordinator
„ Department of Housing and Community Development
100 Cambridge Street—3`" Floor
Boston, MA 02114
Attn: Legal Department
(4.) Failure to submit by these reports shall result in sanctions per Article 15 of the General
Conditions.
3. EEO WORK FORCE REPORTING PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall provide the following information to the Owner on copies of the forms found at
the end of this Section.
(1.) Quarterly Projected Work Force Reports: The Contractor shall prepare projected work force
tables on a quarterly basis. These reports shall be broken done into projections by week of
workers required in each trade.
(a.) Updated copies shall be furnished to the Owner's EEO Officer one week in advance of the
commencement of work and for each quarter thereafter.
(b.) Quarters shall begin on January 1,April 1, July 1, and October 1.
(c.) No work shall begin until projected work force tables are received by the Owner's EEO
Officer.
(2.)Weekly Manpower Reports: The Contractor shall prepare a report after each week of activity,
reflecting the actual working hours of all personnel identified as minority or non-minority.
(a.) This report shall be received by the Owner no later than the Friday following the week
reported.
(b.) Failure to provide information shall result in sanctions as provided in Article 14 of the
General Conditions
DHCD$100K-$10M EEO and MBE/WBE Reporting Procedures 01110
c149 08/2004 1 of 4
(7+ O
o
+ T cn
wQ � 33 �
0
0? a
�!1 b
a.
c 7 [
.a O
O Q d
U .� O
y f1 U
T y �
bD
#Ir Cn =3 c`nd c N
o �
o `^ o
W m o U
cz
o
� E o
0
u. F
`n W Q �
a. n E
40 0
a ❑ El o p
a� p
w 3 3 w
0
40 U
s.y
� O
U
cn
ON
c 'LJ
O �
N C�
U �
w o
chi) U
U
� o
O U
3
ai a W [z 0 z
Z = Q x ❑ °
#0
3
WEEKLY PAYROLL RECORDS REPORT
& STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE .�
In accordance with Massachusetts General Law c. 149, §2713, a true and accurate record
must be kept of all persons employed on the public works project for which the enclosed rates
have been provided. A Payroll Form has been printed on the reverse of this page and includes all
the information required to be kept by law. Every contractor or subcontractor is required to keep
these records and preserve them for a period of three years from the date of completion of the
contract.
In addition, every contractor and subcontractor is required to submit, on a weekly basis, a
copy of their weekly payroll records to the awarding authority. For every week in which an
apprentice is employed, a photocopy of the apprentice's identification card must be attached to
the payroll report. Once collected, the awarding authority is also required to preserve those
reports for three years.
am
In addition, each such contractor, subcontractor, or public body shall furnish to the
awarding authority directly, within fifteen days after completion of its portion of the work, a
statement, executed by the contractor, subcontractor or public body who supervises the payment
of wages, in the following form:
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
200
(Name of signatory party) (Title)
do hereby state that I pay or supervise the payment of the persons employed by
on the
(Contractor,subcontractor or public body) (Building or project) ws
and that all mechanics and apprentices, teamsters, chauffeurs and laborers employed on
said project have been paid in accordance with wages determined under the provisions of
sections twenty-six and twenty-seven of chapter one hundred and forty nine of the
General Laws.
Signature
Title
4W
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, 399 WASHINGTON STREET, 5TH FLOOR,BOSTON,MA. 02108
19W
Labor Regulations 10 of 11 01100
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
r DEPARTMENTS OF LABOR AND WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
d
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
PREVAILING WAGE PROGRAM
www.mass.gov/dos/pw
40 MITT ROMNEY JOHN S. ZIEMBA
Governor Director,DOL
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J. PREZIOSO
Lieutenant Governor Commissioner
The Massachusetts Prevailing Wage Law
M.G.L. c. 149, §§26-27
NOTICE TO AWARDING AUTHORITIES
➢ The enclosed wage schedule applies only to the specific project listed at the top of the schedule, and
these rates will remain in effect for the duration of the project.
➢ You should request an updated wage schedule from the Division of Occupational Safety if you have not
opened bids or selected a contractor within 90 days of the date of issuance of the enclosed wage
schedule.
➢ The wage schedule shall be incorporated in any advertisement or call for bids for the project for which
it has been issued.
➢ Once a contractor has been selected by the awarding authority, the wage schedule shall be made a part of the contract for that project.
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
➢ The enclosed wage schedule must be posted in a conspicuous place at the work site during the life of
�w
the project.
➢ The wages listed on the enclosed wage schedule must be paid to employees on public works projects
regardless of whether they are employed by the prime contractor, a filed sub-bidder, or any sub-
contractor.
➢ The enclosed wage schedule applies to all phases of the project, including the final clean-up.
Contractors whose only role is to perform final clean-up must pay their employees according to this
wage schedule.
➢ All apprentices must be registered with the Massachusetts Division of Apprenticeship Training (DAT)
in order to be paid at the lower apprentice rates. All apprentices must keep his/her apprentice
identification card on his/her person during all work hours. If a worker is not registered with DAT,
they must be paid the "total rate" listed on the wage schedule regardless of experience or skill level.
For further information, please call (617) 626-5409, or write to DAT, 19 Staniford Street, Floor 1, P.O.
Mu Box 146759, Boston, MA 02114.
Labor Regulations 9 of 11 01100
399 Washington Street • 5`h Floor • Boston,Massachusetts 02108 • Tel: 617-727-1492 • Fpv- 617.777_077#�
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
Division of Occupational Safety
Minimum wage rates for apprentices employed on public works projects are listed below as a percentage of
the pre-determined hourly wage rate established by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 through 27D,as ammended ...
All apprentices must be registered with the Division of Apprentice Training in accordance with M.G.L.Chapter
23,Sections 11 E-11 L
a
City/Town: NORTHAMPTON All steps are 6 months(1000 Hours)unless otherwise specified**
ROOFER(REROOFING) 1:1 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
Steps are 600 hrs. am
SHEET METAL WORKER 1:3 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
SIGN ERECTOR 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 ""'
Steps are 4 mos.
SPRINKLER FITTER 1:1 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
aw
TELECOMMUNICATION 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
TECHNICIAN
4W
MW
aw
so
Am
sm
* Ratios are expressed in allowable number of apprentices to journeymen or fraction thereof.
** Multiple ratios are listed in comment field.
***The job site ratio of 2 apprentices for every 3 journeymen is allowed as follows: 1 journeyman may
supervise not more than 1 apprentice;2 to 3 journeymen may supervise not more than 2 apprentices;4 to 6
journeymen may supervise not more than 4 apprentices;7 to 9 journeymen may supervise not more than 6
apprentices; 10 to 12 journeymen may supervise not more than 8 apprentices; 13 to 15 journeymen may
supervise not more than 10 apprentices;etc. Not more than 50%of the apprentices on a job site may have
standing as a 1 st year apprentice. All other apprentices must have 2nd,3rd,4th,or 5th year standing.
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Aw
Labor Regulations 8 of 11 01100
00
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
40 Division c f Occupational Safety
Minimum wage rates for apprentices employed on public works projects are listed below as a percentage of
the pre-determined hourly wage rate established by the Commissioner under the provisions of the
40 Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 through 27D, as ammended
All apprentices must be registered with the Division of Apprentice Training in accordance with M.G.L.Chapter
23,Sections 11 E-11 L
40
City/Town: NORTHAMPTON All steps are 6 months(1000 Hours)unless otherwise specified**
Classification Ratio* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ASBESTOS INSULATOR(Pipes& 1:4 50 60 70 80
Tanks) Steps are 1 year
40 BOILERMAKER 1:5 65 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
BRICK/PLASTER/CEMENT MASON 1:5 50 60 70 80 90 95
40
CARPENTER `* 50 55 60 70 80 85 90 95
**1: 1-5,2:6-8,3:9-11 Steps are 6 mos(600 hrs.)
40 ELECTRICIAN 2:3*** 50 55 60 65 70 75
Steps 1-2 are 1000 hrs; Steps 3-6 are 1500 hrs.
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR 1:1 50 55 65 70 80
Steps 1-2 are 6 mos.;Steps 3-5 are 1 year
40
FLOORCOVERER 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
Steps are 950 hrs.
go GLAZIER 1:1 50 56.3 62.5 68.8 75 81.3 88 94
HOIST/PORT. ENG. 1:5 60 70 80 90
Steps 1-2 are 1000 hrs.;Steps 3-4 are 2000 hrs.
MR
IRONWORKER 50 60 65 75 85 95
Structural 1:6;Ornamental 1:4
as LABORER 1:5 60 70 80 90
MILLWRIGHT 1:5 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
so PAINTER 1:1 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 90
Steps are 750 hrs.
PILE DRIVER 1:3 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
10
PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER 1:5 45 50 60 70 80
Steps are 2000 hrs.
w
ROOFER 1:3 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
Steps are 600 hrs.
* Ratios are expressed in allowable number of apprentices to journeymen or fraction thereof.
** Multiple ratios are listed in comment field.
40
**'The job site ratio of 2 apprentices for every 3 journeymen is allowed as follows: 1 journeyman may
supervise not more than 1 apprentice;2 to 3 journeymen may supervise not more than 2 apprentices;4 to 6
journeymen may supervise not more than 4 apprentices;7 to 9 journeymen may supervise not more than 6
go apprentices; 10 to 12 journeymen may supervise not more than 8 apprentices; 13 to 15 journeymen may
supervise not more than 10 apprentices;etc. Not more than 50%of the apprentices on a job site may have
standing as a 1 st year apprentice. All other apprentices must have 2nd,3rd,4th,or 5th year standing.
wo Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521
Labor Regulations 7 of 11 01100
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
K DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
a ��ice' `� rP. ����/�r J�✓.'f} �F
r ;ti,3 Prevailing Wage Rates ..
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the JOHN S.ZIEMBA
Govenor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H Director
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt.Govenor Commissimer
Awarding Authority: NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
Contract Number: City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: MARY MCCOLGAN APARTMENTS CONSTRUCTION WORK
Job Location: 122 GROVE STREET
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
TEST BORING DRILLER 6/1/2005 $38.250 12/1/2005 $39.350 6/1/2006 $40.500 12/1/2006 $41.600
6/1/2007 $42.750 12/1/2007 $43.850 5/31/2008 $44.350
TEST BORING DRILLER HELPER 6/1/2005 $36.970 12/1/2005 $38.070 6/1/2006 $39.220 12/1/2006 $40.320
6/1/2007 $41.470 12/1/2007 $42.570 5/31/2008 $43.070 w
TEST BORING LABORER 6/1/2005 $37.350 12/1/2005 $38.450 6/1/2006 $39.600 12/1/2006 $40.700
6/1/2007 $41.850 12/1/2007 $42.950 5/31/2008 $43.450
TRACTORS 6/1/2005 $36.080 12/1/2005 $37.080
TRAILERS FOR EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT 8/1/2005 $37.500 12/1/2005 $38.200 6/1/2006 $38.700 8/1/2006 $39.100 s
12/1/2006 $39.800 6/1/2007 $40.300 8/1/2007 $40.800 12/1/2007 $41.500
6/1/2008 $42.000 8/1/2008 $42.500 12/1/2008 $43.200
TUNNEL WORK(COMP.AIR HAZ.WASTE) 6/1/2005 $50.480 12/1/2005 $51.730 6/1/2006 $53.130 12/1/2006 $54.380
6/1/2007 $55.780 12/1/2007 $57.530
TUNNEL WORK(COMPRESSED AIR) 6/1/2005 $48.480 12/1/2005 $49.730 6/1/2006 $51.130 12/1/2006 $52.380
6/1/2007 $53.780 12/1/2007 $55.530
TUNNEL WORK(FREE AIR HAZ.WASTE) 6/1/2005 $42.550 12/1/2005 $43.800 6/1/2006 $45.290 12/1/2006 $46.450
6/1/2007 $47.850 12/1/2007 $49.600
TUNNEL WORK(FREE AIR) 6/1/2005 $40.550 12/1/2005 $41.800 6/1/2006 $43.200 12/1/2006 $44.450
6/1/2007 $45.850 12/1/2007 $47.600
VAC-HAUL 8/1/2005 $36.920 12/1/2005 $37.620 6/1/2006 $38.120 8/1/2006 $38.520
12/1/2006 $39.220 6/1/2007 $39.720 8/1/2007 $40.220 12/1/2007 $40.920
6/1/2008 $41.420 8/1/2008 $41.920 12/1/2008 $42.620 wa
WAGON DRILL OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
WAGON DRILL OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
WATER METER INSTALLER 8/1/2005 $44.460 2/1/2006 $45.710 r
If 30%or more of surfaces to be painted are new construction,NEW paint rate shall be used.
"The Residential Wood Frame Carpenter classification applies only to the construction of new,wood frame residences that do not exceed four am
stories including the basement.
Am
w
aw
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27 *R
Failure of the employer to pay "prevailing wage rates,"which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices, 100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465. sm
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Page: 5
Labor Regulations 6 of 11 01100
�'... THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR K
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
i
Prevailing Wage Rates ? '
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the JOHN S.ZIEMBA
Govenor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H Director
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt.Govenor Commissimer
Awarding Authority: NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
Contract Number: City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: MARY MCCOLGAN APARTMENTS CONSTRUCTION WORK
Job Location: 122 GROVE STREET
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
PANEL&PICKUP TRUCKS DRIVER 8/1/2005 $36.460 12/1/2005 $37.160 6/1/2006 $37.660 8/1/2006 $38.060
12/1/2006 $38.760 6/1/2007 $39.260 8/1/2007 $39.760 12/1/2007 $40.460
6/1/2008 $40.960 8/1/2008 $41.460 12/1/2008 $42.160
40 PIER AND DOCK CONSTRUCTOR(UNDERPINNING 10/3/2005 $46.110 4/3/2006 $46.740 10/2/2006 $49.290 4/2/2007 $49.910
AND DECK)
PILE DRIVER 10/3/2005 $46.110 4/3/2006 $46.740 10/2/2006 $49.290 4/2/2007 $49.910
PIPELAYER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
40 PIPELAYER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
PLUMBER&PIPEFITTER 8/1/2005 $44.460 2/1/2006 $45.710
40 PNEUMATIC CONTROLS(TEMP.) 8/1/2005 $44.460 2/1/2006 $45.710
PNEUMATIC DRILLnOOL OPERATOR(HEAVY& 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
HIGHWAY) 6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
POWDERMAN&BLASTER 6/6/2005 $30.900 12/5/2005 $31.900 6/5/2006 $32.900 12/4/2006 $34.140
POWDERMAN&BLASTER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $31.480 12/1/2005 $32.160 6/1/2006 $33.310 12/1/2006 $33.990
6/1/2007 $35.140 12/1/2007 $35.820 5/31/2008 $36.320
POWER SHOVEL/TREE SHREADER 6/1/2005 $37.030 12/1/2005 $38.030
PUMP OPERATOR(CONCRETE) 6/1/2005 $37.030 12/1/2005 $38.030
PUMP OPERATOR(DEWATERING,OTHER) 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
READY-MIX CONCRETE DRIVER 5/1/2005 $27.260 5/1/2006 $27.730 5/1/2007 $28.380 5/1/2008 $28.880
RESIDENTIAL WOCD FRAME CARPENTER** 4/1/2005 $30.920
RIDE-ON MOTORIZED BUGGY OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
ROLLER OPERATOR 6/1/2005 $36.080 12/1/2005 $37.080
ROOFER(Inc.Roofer Waterproofng&Roofer Damproofg) 9/1/2005 $36.420
SELF-POWERED ROLLERS AND COMPACTORS 6/1/2005 $36.080 12/1/2005 $37.080
(TAMPERS)
SELF-PROPELLED POWER BROOM 6/1/2005 $33.860 12/1/2005 $34.860
40 SHEETMETAL WORKER 7/1/2005 $40.680
SIGN ERECTOR 6/1/2005 $29.070
SLATE/TILE/PRECASTCONCRETE ROOFER 9/1/2005 $37.200
SPECIALIZED EARTHMOVING EQUIP<35 TONS 8/1/2005 $36.920 12/1/2005 $37.620 6/1/2006 $38.120 8/1/2006 $38.520
12/1/2006 $39.220 6/1/2007 $39.720 8/1/2007 $40.750 12/1/2007 $40.920
6/1/2008 $41.420 8/1/2008 $41.920 12/1/2008 $42.620
SPECIALIZED EARTH MOVING EQUIP>35 TONS 8/1/2005 $37.210 12/1/2005 $37.910 6/1/2006 $38.410 8/1/2006 $38.810
12/1/2006 $39.510 6/1/2007 $40.010 8/1/2007 $40.510 12/1/2007 $41.210
6/1/2008 $41.710 8/1/2008 $42.210 12/1/2008 $42.910
SPRINKLER FITTER 5/1/2005 $45.200
TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIAN 6/1/2005 $29.370 1/1/2006 $29.880
TERRAZZO FINISHERS 9/5/2005 $36.930 3/6/2006 $38.430 9/4/2006 $39.930 3/5/2007 $41.330
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay "prevailing wage rates," which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices, 100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Page: 4
Labor Requlations 5 of 11 01100
Oar
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS '$+
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR -
d� C'
DIVISIN F OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
O O
Prevailing Wage Rates , f`
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the JOHN S.ZIEMBA
Govenor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H Director
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt.Govenor
Commissimer
Olt
Awarding Authority: NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
Contract Number: City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: MARY MCCOLGAN APARTMENTS CONSTRUCTION WORK O■.
Job Location: 122 GROVE STREET
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
HVAC(ELECTRICAL CONTROLS) 8/1/2005 $40.500 1/1/2006 $41.300 7/1/2006 $42.150 1/1/2007 $43.000 MW
7/1/2007 $43.850 1/1/2008 $44.700
HVAC(PIPE) 8/1/2005 $44.460 2/1/2006 $45.710
HVAC(TESTING AND BALANCING-AIR) 7/1/2005 $40.680 OW
HVAC(TESTING AND BALANCING-WATER) 8/1/2005 $44.460 2/1/2006 $45.710
HYDRAULIC DRILLS(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $31.230 12/1/2005 $31.910 6/1/2006 $33.060 12/1/2006 $33.740
6/1/2007 $34.890 12/1/2007 $35.570 5/31/2008 $36.070
INSULATOR(PIPES&TANKS) 9/1/2005 $43.280 s
IRONWORKER/WELDER 7/6/2004 $40.790
JACKHAMMER&PAVING BREAKER OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
LABORER 6/6/2005 $29.900 12/5/2005 $30.900 6/5/2006 $31.900 12/4/2006 $33.140 4'
LABORER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.480 12/1/2005 $31.160 6/1/2006 $32.310 12/1/2006 $32.990
6/1/2007 $34.140 12/1/2007 $34.820 5/31/2008 $35.320
LABORER:CARPENTER TENDER 6/6/2005 $29.900 12/5/2005 $30.900 6/5/2006 $31.900 12/4/2006 $33.140 ow
LABORER:CEMENT FINISHER TENDER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
LABORER:HAZARDOUS WASTE/ASBESTOS REMOVER 6/6/2005 $29.900 12/5/2005 $30.900 6/5/2006 $31.900 12/4/2006 $33.140
LABORER:MASON TENDER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
LABORER:MASON TENDER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240 aw
6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
LABORER:MULTI-TRADE TENDER 6/6/2005 $29.900 12/5/2005 $30.900 6/5/2006 $31.900 12/4/2006 $33.140
LABORER:TREE REMOVER 6/6/2005 $29.900 12/5/2005 $30.900 6/5/2006 $31.900 12/4/2006 $33.140 ow
LASER BEAM OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
LASER BEAM OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
MARBLE&TILE FINISFERS 9/5/2005 $36.930 3/6/2006 $38.430 9/4/2006 $39.930 3/5/2007 $41.330 r
MARBLE MASONS,TILELAYERS&TERRAZZO MECH 9/5/2005 $43.850 3/6/2006 $45.350 9/4/2006 $46.850 3/5/2007 $48.250
MECH.SWEEPER OPERATOR(NON-CONSTRUCTION) 7/1/2005 $25.070 711/2006 $25.570
MECHANIC/WELDER/BOOM TRUCK 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570 am
MILLWRIGHT 10/1/2005 $46.550 4/1/2006 $47.550
MORTAR MIXER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
OILER 6/1/2005 $34.220 12/1/2005 $35.220 no
OTHER POWER DRIVEN EQUIPMENT-CLASS VI 6/1/2005 $31.280 12/1/2005 $31280
PAINTER(BRIDGES/TANKS) 7/1/2005 $53.130 1/1/2006 $54.560
PAINTER(SPRAY OR SANDBLAST,NEW)* 7/1/2005 $35.300 1/1/2006 $36.230
PAINTER(SPRAY OR SANDBLAST,REPAINT) 7/1/2005 $32.620 1/1/2006 $33.550 aw
PAINTER(TRAFFIC MARKINGS) 6/1/2005 $30.480 12/1/2005 $31.160 6/1/2006 $32.310 12/1/2006 $32.990
6/1/2007 $34.140 12/1/2007 $34.820 5/31/2008 $35.320
PAINTER/TAPER(BRUSH,NEW)* 7/1/2005 $34.300 1/1/2006 $35.230 aw
PAINTER/TAPER(BRUSH,REPAINT) 7/1/2005 $31.620 1/1/2006 $32.550
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27 aw
Failure of the employer to pay "prevailing wage rates," which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L. ch. 149,sec. 27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices, 100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465. am
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Page: 3
Labor Regulations 4 of 11 01100
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS ;
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR --
DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY ,
Prevailing Wage Rates' i4
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the JOHN S.ZIEMBA
Govenor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H Director
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt.Govenor Commissimer
Awarding Authority: NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
Contract Number: City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: MARY MCCOLGAN APARTMENTS CONSTRUCTION WORK
Job Location: 122 GROVE STREET
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates
DEMO:ADZEMAN 6/1/2005 $37.450 12/1/2005 $38.550 6/1/2006 $39.700 12/1/2006 $40.800
6/1/2007 $41.950 12/1/2007 $43.050 5/31/2008 $43.550
DEMO:BACKHOE/LOADER/HAMMER OPERATOR 6/1/2005 $38.450 12/1/2005 $39.550 6/1/2006 $40.950 12/1/2006 $42.050
40 6/1/2007 $43.200 12/1/2007 $44.300 5/31/2008 $44.800
DEMO:BURNERS 6/1/2005 $38.200 12/1/2005 $39.300 6/1/2006 $40.700 12/1/2006 $41.800
6/1/2007 $42.950 12/1/2007 $44.050 5/31/2008 $44.550
DEMO:CONCRETE CUTTER/SAWYER 6/1/2005 $38.450 12/1/2005 $39.550 6/1/2006 $40.950 12/1/2006 $42.050
lw
6/1/2007 $43.200 12/1/2007 $44.300 5/31/2008 $44.800
DEMO:JACKHAMMER OPERATOR 6/1/2005 $38.200 12/1/2005 $39.300 6/1/2006 $40.700 12/1/2006 $41.800
6/1/2007 $42.950 12/1/2007 $44.050 5/31/2008 $44.550
40 DEMO:WRECKING LABORER 6/1/2005 $37.450 12/1/2005 $38.550 6/1/2006 $39.700 12/1/2006 $40.800
6/1/2007 $41.950 12/1/2007 $43.050 5/31/2008 $43.550
DIVER 9/1/2005 $60.390 8/1/2006 $66.130 8/1/2007 $71.730
IN DIVER TENDER 9/1/2005 $48.470 8/1/2006 $52.570 8/1/2007 $56.570
DIVER TENDER(EFFLUENT) 9/1/2005 $63.370 8/1/2006 $69.520 8/1/2007 $75.520
DIVER/SLURRY(EFFLUENT) 9/1/2005 $81.250 8/1/2006 $89.860 8/1/2007 $98260
ELECTRICIAN 8/1/2005 $40.500 1/1/2006 $41.300 7/1/2006 $42.150 1/1/2007 $43.000
alt 7/1/2007 $43.850 1/1/2008 $44.700
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR 1/1/2005 $47.970 1/1/2006 $50.940 1/1/2007 $53.910
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR HELPER 1/1/2005 $38.080 1/1/2006 $41.050 1/1/2007 $44.020
FENCE&GUARD RAIL ERECTOR(HEAVY& 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
- HIGHWAY) 6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
FIELD ENG-PARTY CHIEF(BLDG,SITE,HVY CONST) 6/1/1999 $30.230
to FIELD ENG-CHIEFOF SURVEY(BLDG,SITE,HVY 6/1/1999 $31.230
CONST)
FIELD ENG-INST./RODPERSON(BLDG,SITE,HVY 6/1/1999 $27.740
CONST)
40 FIRE ALARM INSTALLER 8/1/2005 $40.500 1/1/2006 $41.300 7/1/2006 $42.150 1/1/2007 $43.000
7/1/2007 $43.850 1/1/2008 $44.700
FIRE ALARM REPAIR/MAINTENANCE 6/1/2005 $29.370 1/1/2006 $29.880
FIREMAN 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
0" FLAGGER&SIGNALER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $26.430 12/1/2005 $27.110 6/1/2006 $28.260 12/1/2006 $28.940
6/112007 $30.090 12/1/2007 $30.770 5/31/2008 $31.270
FLOORCOVERER 4/1/2005 $46.900
40 FORK LIFT 6/1/2005 $36.770 12/1/2005 $37.770
GENERATORS/LIGHTING PLANTS 6/1/2005 $33.860 12/1/2005 $34.860
GLAZIER(GLASS PLANUAIR BARRIERANTERIOR 6/1/2005 $39.530 6/1/2006 $41.180 6/1/2007 $42.830 6/1/2008 $44.680
SYSTEMS)
GRADER/TRENCHINGMACHINE/DERRICK 6/1/2005 $37.030 12/1/2005 $38.030
HVAC(DUCTWORK) 7/1/2005 $40.680 1/1/2006 $41.580 7/1/2006 $42.430 1/1/2007 $43.330
7/1/2007 $44.180 1/1/2008 $45.080
4" This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27
Failure of the employer to pay"prevailing wage rates," which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
t�1 Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices, 100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465.
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Page: 2
Labor Regulations 3 of 11 01100
THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS �;�
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR -
`'�� DIVISION OF OCCUPATIONAL S�_FETY
Prevailing Wage Rates `
MITT ROMNEY As determined by the Commissioner under the provisions of the JOHN S.ZIEMBA
Govenor Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 149,Sections 26 to 27H Director
KERRY HEALEY ROBERT J.PREZIOSO
Lt.Govenor Commissioner
Awarding Authority: NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY 4 �'j!
I
Contract Number: City/Town: NORTHAMPTON
Description Of Work: MARY MCCOLGAN APARTMENTS CONSTRUCTION WOR OCT � 8 2005�j- J ••
Job Location: 122 GROVE STREET
NORTHAImp*roJ q Hious Kz
Classification Effective Dates and Total Rates I ALJT JQaa
(2 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 8/1/2005 $36.630 12/1/2005 $37.330 6/1/2006 $37.830 8/1/2006 $38.230
12/1/2006 $38.930 6/1/2007 $39.430 8/1/2007 $39.930 12/1/2007 $40.630
6/1/2008 $41.130 8/1/2008 $41.630 12/1/2008 $42.330
(3 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 8/1/2005 $36.700 12/1/2005 $37.400 6/1/2006 $37.900 8/1/2006 $38.300 4.
12/1/2006 $39.000 6/1/2007 $39.500 8/1/2007 $40.000 12/1/2007 $40.700
6/1/2008 $41.200 8/1/2008 $41.700 12/1/2008 $42.400
(4&5 AXLE)DRIVER-EQUIPMENT 8/1/2005 $36.820 12/1/2005 $37.520 6/1/2006 $38.020 8/1/2006 $38.420
.e
12/1/2006 $39.120 6/1/2007 $39.620 8/1/2007 $40.120 12/1/2007 $40.820
6/1/2008 $41.320 8/1/2008 $41.820 12/1/2008 $42.520
AIR TRACK OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.650 12/5/2005 $31.650 6/5/2006 $32.650 12/4/2006 $33.890
AIR TRACK OPERATOR(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $31.230 12/1/2005 $31.910 6/1/2006 $33.060 12/1/2006 $33.740 so
6/1/2007 $34.890 12/1/2007 $35.570 5/31/2008 $36.070
ASBESTOS WORKER(PIPES&TANKS) 6/1/2004 $29.250
ASPHALT RAKER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390 ow
ASPHALT RAKER(HEAVY&HIGHWAY) 6/1/2005 $30.730 12/1/2005 $31.410 6/1/2006 $32.560 12/1/2006 $33.240
6/1/2007 $34.390 12/1/2007 $35.070 5/31/2008 $35.570
AUTOMATIC GRADER-EXCAVATOR(RECLAIMER) 6/1/2005 $37.030 12/1/2005 $38.030
BARCO-TYPE JUMPING TAMPER 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390 am
BATCH/CEMENT PLANT-ON SITE 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
BLOCK PAVER,RAMMER/CURB SETTER 6/6/2005 $30.650 12/5/2005 $31.650 6/5/2006 $32.650 12/4/2006 $33.890
BLOCK PAVER,RAMMER/CURB SETTER(HEAVY& 6/1/2005 $31.230 12/1/2005 $31.910 6/1/2006 $33.060 12/1/2006 $33.740 w
HIGHWAY) 6/1/2007 $34.890 12/1/2007 $35.570 5/31/2008 $36.070
BOILERMAKER 10/1/2005 $48.170
BR1CK/STONE/ARTIFICIAL MASONRY(INCL. 9/5/2005 $43.850 3/6/2006 $45.350 9/4/2006 $46.850 3/5/2007 $48.250
MASONRY WATERPROOFING) .w
BULLDOZER/SCRAPER 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
CAISSON&UNDERPINNINIG BOTTOM MAN 6/1/200015 $38.300 12/1/2005 $39.400 6;1/2006 $40.550 12/1/2006 $41.650
6/1/2007 $41800 12/1/2007 $43.900 5/31/2008 $44.400 ON
CAISSON&UNDERPINNING LABORER 6/1/2005 $37.350 12/1/2005 $38.450 6/1/2006 $39.600 12/1/2006 $40.700
6/1/2007 $41.850 12/1/2007 $42.950 5/31/2008 $43.450
CAISSON&UNDERPINNING TOP MAN 6/1/2005 $37.350 12/1/2005 $38.450 6/1/2006 $39.600 12/1/2006 $40.700
6/1/2007 $41.850 12/1/2007 $42.950 5/31/2008 $43.450 ow
CARBIDE CORE DRILL OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
CARPENTER 10/4/2004 $36.550
CEMENT MASONRY/PLASTERING 9/5/2005 $43.850 3/6/2006 $45.350 9/4/2006 $46.850 3/5/2007 $48.250 4W
CHAIN SAW OPERATOR 6/6/2005 $30.150 12/5/2005 $31.150 6/5/2006 $32.150 12/4/2006 $33.390
COMPRESSOR OPERATOR 6/1/2005 $36.570 12/1/2005 $37.570
CRANEBACKHOE/FRONT-END LOADER OPERATOR 6/1/2005 $37.030 12/1/2005 $38.030 A„
DELEADER(BRIDGE) 7/1/2005 $53.130 1/1/2006 $54.560
This wage schedule must be posted at the work site in accordance with M.G.L. ch. 149,sec.27 mok
Failure of the employer to pay "prevailing wage rates," which are the minimum wage rates listed above,on public works
projects is a violation of M.G.L.ch. 149,sec.27B. Employees not receiving such rates should report the violation to the
Office of Fair Labor and Business Practices, 100 Cambridge Street,Boston,MA 02108; Tel: (617)727-3465. ow
Issue Date: 10/13/2005 Rate Sheet: NORTHAMPTON Job ID: 99521 Page: 1
Labor Regulations 2 of 11 01100
ate►
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01100
LABOR REGULATIONS
1. MINIMUM MINORITY PERCENTAGES
A. The following minimum minority percentages are applicable as per Article 14 of the General
Conditions.
Location Not Less than
Boston Impact Area
Jamaica Plain (part), Mattapan, South Cove,
Chinatown, Bay Village, Roxbury, Dorchester,
+ ' South End):--------------------------------------------------- 30%
Boston: Other Areas: ------------------------------------------------- 10%
Cambridge: ------------------------------------------------------------------ 12%
New Bedford: ---------------------------------------------------------------- 18%
Springfield: ------------------------------------------------------------------ 10%
All other cities and towns:---------------------------------------------------5%
B. These percentages shall apply to the Contractor and to all Subcontractors, regardless of tier,
for all on-site Work.
2. WAGE RATES
A. The rate per hour to be paid to mechanics, apprentices, teamsters, chauffeurs, and laborers
employed on the Work shall not be less than the rate of wages in the attached "Minimum
40 Wage Rates" as determined by the Director of the Department of Labor and Work Force
Development. This schedule shall continue to be the minimum rate of wages for said
employees during the life of this Contract. Any questions relative to the applicability of any
wage rate shall be directed to the Department of Labor and Workforce Development.
B. Keep posted on the site a legible copy of said schedule. Provide the Owner, on a weekly
basis, and keep an on-site file of the wage rates and classifications of labor employed on this
Work in order that they may be available for inspection by the Owner, Department, Architect, or
any other agency having jurisdiction. .
C. Apprentices employed pursuant to this determination of wage rates must be registered and
approved by the State Apprenticeship Council wherever rates for journeymen or apprentices
are not listed.
D. Pay reserve police officers employed on the Work the prevailing rate of wages paid to regular
police officers as required by MGL c149 § 34B, as amended. Such police officers shall be
covered by Worker's Compensation Insurance and Employers Liability Insurance provided by
the Contractor.
E. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall provide certified payroll affidavits verifying
compliance with MGL c.149 §§26 - 27H.
F. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall provide a Statement of Compliance within 15 days
40 of the completion of its portion of the work. This statement shall be submitted to the Owner on
the form found elsewhere in this section.
DHCD$100K-$10M Labor Regulations 01100
c149 08/2004 1 of 11
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01040
EXISTING CONDITIONS
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The Conditions of the Contract and other Sections of Division I, General Requirements apply
to this section.
2. EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Before submitting a bid, the Contractor shall make a thorough examination of the conditions
at the site, checking the requirements of the Plans and Specifications with the existing
conditions.
B. No claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of the
Contractor's failure to estimate properly the quantities, locations, and measurements of all
items required to complete the work which could be discerned from visiting the site.
C. The Contractor shall report any discrepancies to the Architect and request an interpretation.
3. SUBSURFACE DATA
A. Subsurface soil investigations have been made and the results are included as Appendix A.
The included Geotechnical Recommendations prepared by O'Reilly, Talbot&Okun
Associates dated January 19, 2004 were prepared prior to placement of the preload material
and are provided as general site background information only. The subsurface investigations
were preformed to determine soil type and foundation bearing strength for the Owner's use in
design and are not a part of the Contract Documents.
4. PREVIOUS EXISTING BUILDING AND SITE CONDITIONS
A. The existing single family home, garage and other site improvements were removed
previously under a site clearing, preloading and demolition contract.
B. The site has been cleared of vegetation.
END OF SECTION 01040
DHCD$100K$10M Existing Conditions 01040
c149 08/2004 1 of 1
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034 Im
R.
B. Coordination by Contractor
(1.)The following items shall be provided by others under a separate agreement with the Owner
for which the Contractor has coordinating responsibility.
a. Coordination of water service to site with City of Northampton Department of Public
Works.
b. Coordination of sanitary sewer connection with Northampton DPW and Board of Health
requirements.
c. Coordination of electrical service with Massachusetts Electric Co. requirements.
d. Coordination of gas service to building with Bay State Gas Co. and Northampton DPW.
Bay State Gas will run gas line and make connections from the street to the building in
trench excavated by the general contractor.
4. ITEMS FURNISHED BY OWNER
A. The following items will be furnished and delivered f.o.b. to the Project Site by others at no
expense to the Contractor. .w
(1.) Coin operated Washer and Dryer.
(2.) The Owner has supplied 50 linear feet of straight granite curbing to the site for use on this am
project. Coordinate use of curbing with site drawings and specifications.
(3) The Owner will supply construction cores and keys during the construction period and will be .w
responsible for ordering interchangeable cores and keys.
B. The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the cost of unloading, uncrating, and no
permanently installing the above listed items; also removal and proper disposal off the Project
Site of all crating and packing materials.
am
5. PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A. Unless specifically authorized by the Owner, in writing,the work must be conducted between the "W
hours of 7:30 A.M. an 5:00 P.M. on Monday through Friday. If requested by the Contractor, in
writing,the Owner may allow more flexible hours.
4W
B. No work is to be done on Saturdays, Sundays, or holidays observed by the Owner, other than for
emergencies.
C. The following holidays are observed by the Owner: 'w
Afternoon of the weekday before New Year's Day, New Year's Day, Martin Luther King Day,
Presidents' Day, Patriots' Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus
Day, Veterans'Day,Thanksgiving,the day after Thanksgiving, afternoon of the weekday 4W
before Christmas, and Christmas. Additionally, no work is to be done on any "emergency
day"as declared by the Owner or the appropriate local, state, or federal government entity.
ow
om
END OF SECTION 01010
DHCD$100K-$10M Summary of Work 01010
c149 08/2004 2 of 2 ow
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
1. GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work under the Contract consists of, but is not limited to:
(1.)Construction of one new wood framed building containing six 6 One-Bedroom Units:
Consisting of Two (2)fully accessible units complying with Mass AAB Guidelines and four
(4) adaptable units per HUD's Fair Housing Guidelines; a common accessible laundry, four
common mechanical rooms, and one outdoor storage shed, on 1.115 acres, including a
paved driveway and parking areas,trash enclosure, sidewalks, and site utilities, site
improvements, and landscaping within the Project Site.
(2)This project is approved for ENERGY STAR HOMES Program, administered by the Center
for Ecological Technology CET,26 Market Street, Northampton, MA. The CET Project
Coordinator will make two mandatory site visits to certify the apartments. The first inspection
when the insulation is completed and the second when the project is ready for final
+A inspection.
(3.)All Work either shown on the Drawings or included in the specifications unless specifically
indicated as not to be done.
B. In addition,the Work under the Contract includes:
(1)Work outside the Project Site as called for in the Contract Documents, including excavation
for gas and other utility connections, and as required for the performance of the Work.
(2.)The restoration of any items damaged or destroyed by encroaching upon areas outside the
Project Site.
(3.) Providing and restoring, where appropriate, all temporary facilities.
2. TIME OF COMPLETION
A. In accordance with Article 9 of the General Conditions,the Work shall start as stated in the Notice to
Proceed and shall be completed within three-hundred(300)consecutive calendar days
3. WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT
A. Coordination by Owner
(1.)As provided in Article 7 of the General Conditions, the following items shall be provided by
others under a separate agreement with the Owner for which the Owner has coordinating
responsibility.
,e1 (a.) Coin operated Washer and Dryer in laundry room.
40
DHCD$100K-$10M Summary of Work 01010
c149 0812004 1 of 2
Certificate of Recording Officer and Extract from the Minutes of a Regular meeting "'
of the Northampton Housing Authority held on July 11,2005.
I,Jon Hite,the duly elected Secretary of the Board of Commissioners of the Northampton an
Housing Authority do hereby certify that:
THE following extract from the Minutes of the Meeting of the Members of the Authority is a
true and correct extract from the original Minutes of said Meeting on file and of record insofar as
said original Minutes relate to the matters set forth in said extract;that
THE Members present voting at said Meeting were residents of the City of Northampton on
the date of the Meeting;and that
THE Notice of said Meeting was filed with the City Clerk in accordance
with the requirements of MGL Chapter 39,§23B,as amended.
EXTRACT
The Members of the Northampton Housing Authority met in Regular session at Walter Salvo
House in the City of Northampton on Monday,July 11,2005 at 7:30 P.M.The meeting was called to
order by the Chairperson and upon roll call those present an absent were as follows:
Present:Commissioners:DeFazio,Blaisdell,Carney;Murphy
Absent: Commissioner Andrulis
A quorum was present and so declared.
Extracts from the Minutes, page 4
The Director stated that additions have been made to the Proprietary Specifications for the
construction of the Mary McColgan Apartments and it is therefore necessary to amend the
original moption made May 9,2005,which approved certain Proprietary Specifications for this
project
Upon motion of Commissioner Blaisdell,seconded by Commissioner Carney,it was
MOVED:To amend the motion made May 9,2005,approving certain Proprietary Secifictions
for the construction of the Mary McColgan Apartments(689-3)by adding the following items
determined by the Board of Commissioners to be in the public interest for inclusion in the
Proprietary Specifications.
MARY McCOLGAN PROPRIETARY SPECS
Section 15400 Garbage Disposal Insinkerator Badger 5
Section 15600 Exhaust fan/light combination Panasonic Whisperlite 4W
FV-07VQL
FV-08VQL
FV-11VQL .
Section 11451 Range Hood Broan Model 41000
Residential (Kitchen)
Appliances
VOTING AYE: Commissioners Carney,Murphy;Blaisdell
VOTING NAY:None ,..
Whereupon,the Chairperson declared said motion carried.
I,Jon Hite,declare that the above Certificate and Extract are True and Correct.
Date: Signed: .�.
Jon Hite,Secretary,
seat
Notice to Bidders 01000
4 of 4
Mary McColban Apartments 167-2 June 1 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Robe Hook Bradley #9118
Accessories
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Toothbrush holder Bradley #SA26
Accessories
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Soap Dish Bradley 4SA22
Accessories
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Grab Bar Bradley #812-2
Accessories
Section 12372 Kitchen Casework Drawer Suspensions Kna Vogt KY1305
Section 15400 Plumbing Kitchen Sink Faucet Wolverine #52430
ical units
Section 15400 Plumbing Kitchen Sink Faucet(BF Wolverine #EKA0321
units
w Section 15400 Plumbing Kitchen Sink Trap Wolverine #52285
(typical units
Section 15400 Plumbing Kitchen Sink Stops(all) Wolverine #53345
Section 15400 Plumbing Basement Shut-off ball Wolverine
Valve all
Section 15400 Plumbing Toilet(typical units) Gerber #28792 tank
w/liner#21752
bowl
no Section 15400 Plumbing Toilet(BF units) Gerber #28792 tank
w/liner#21728
bowl
40 Section 15400 Plumbing Toilet Angle Stop(aln Wolverine #53345
Section 15400 Plumbing Lavatory Faucet(typical Wolverine #FC01302
units
Section 15400 Plumbing Lavatory Faucet(BF Wolverine #FC01330
units
Section 15400 Plumbing Lavatory Stops all Wolverine #53345
1 Section 15400 Plumbing Tub/Shower Valve Symmons. Tem trol S-96-2
Section 15400 Plumbing Tub Waste(all) Wolverine #56429
Section 15400 Plumbing Freezeless Wall Hydrants Woodford #67
Section 15600 Heating Air Separator S irotherm
Section 15600 Heating Centrifical Pumps Taco
Section 16000 Electrical Smoke Detector(typical Gentex #9000/9003
units
Section 16000 Electrical Smoke Detector(BF Gentex 47139CS
units
Section 16000 Electrical Carbon Monoxide Alarm BRK Electronics 4C05120B
NOTE: "BF" means
barrier-free units
5/9/05
VOTING AYE: Commissioners Carney; Blaisdell; Murphy
VOTING NAY: None
Whereupon, the Chairperson declared said motion carried.
I certify that the above Certificate and Extract are True and Correct.
Date: Sign ZSecretazy May 10,2005
n Hite,
seal
J
Notice to Bidders 01000
3 of 4
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 June 1, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
ow
that there is a legitimate reason"in the public interest" to do so. Mr. Hite, explained that
? the following list of items each had a specific reason why it should be a proprietary item -W
in the bid specifications of the upcoming Mary McColgan Apartments. He explained the
reason for each item to be so listed. Most revolved around the efforts by the NHA to
consolidate and thus reduce its parts inventory by utilizing, whenever possible, high- "'
quality materials and thus reduce its parts inventory by utilizing, for example, whenever
possible, high-quality, interchangeable plumbing, flooring, electrical and door supplies
which can be used at all developments. In this way, the NHA does not have a need for a 4W
variety of different brands of the same type of replacement part and thus can reduce its
parts inventory, save money, and reduce repair time.
Mr. Hite explained that, for example, the NHA spent $ 5000 several years ago to
purchase a registered keyway system so that all of our lock cores could be
interchangeable. Similarly, we have reduced the number of spare bathroom faucets (at
$130 each) on hand in inventory by utilizing a specific brand whenever possible. Some
of the items on the list, such as the roofing, are merely listed to ensure a color and style
consistent with other developments, while the smoke detectors and vinyl tile should be .�
chosen now to ensure that the new parts, installed in the renovation, match existing parts
remaining in the apartments. dw
Upon motion of Commissioner Carney seconded by Commissioner Blaisdell, it was
Aw
MOVED: That the Board of Commissioners, having determined that there are sound
reasons in the public interest to do so, to wit, reduction of necessary spare parts inventory
by the Authority, familiarity with repair by junior level maintenance persons, and no
consolidation of security devices so as to allow for use of a previously purchased
Registered system, does hereby authorize the adoption of proprietary materials
specifications for the Mary McColgan Apartments, as follows: Aw
SEE TABLE BELOW
Section 07311 Roofing Asphalt Shin-les IKO Cambridge 30
Section 07311 Roofmo Underlawnent IKO Armour and
Section 08710 Door Hardware Mortise Locks(all units) Arrow BM Series
exterior doors
Section 08710 Door Hardware Locksets(all units) Arrow M Series
interior
Section 08710 Door Hardware Latchsets(all units) Arrow M Series
interior
Section 08710 Door Hardware Mortise Locks Arrow AM Series
(Mechanical Rooms)
Section 09660 Resilient Flooring VCT Armstrong Standard Escelon
Irn rial
Section 10800 Toilet&Bath Toilet tissue Dispenser Bradley #5084 Owl
Accessories
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Shower curtain rod Bradley #9531 (1.25"dia)
Accessories
Section 10800,Toilet&Bath Towel bar Bradley #908 s:
Accessories
Notice to Bidders 01000 ,,,,R
2 of 4
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 June 1, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
40
SECTION 01 000 -NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS
{On May 9, 2005, the Board of Commissioners of the Northampton Housing
Authority, acting in the public interest, did vote to adopt Proprietary Specifications
for the Mary McColgan Apartments, as allowed by
Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30-B.
What follows is an extract of the minutes of the above dated Board meeting followed by a
table of the final Proprietary Specifications adopted by the Board for inclusion in the
40 Project Manual for the Mary McColgan Apartments. Therefore, the table listed below
provides a summary of all Proprietary Specifications for materials and products to be
used in this renovation.}
Certificate of Recording Officer and Extract from the Minutes of a Regular Meeting
of the Northampton Housing Authority held on May 9, 2005.
I, Jon Hite, the duly elected Secretary of the Board of Commissioners of the Northampton
Housing Authority do hereby certify that:
THE following extract from the Minutes of the Meeting of the Members of the Authority
40 is a true and correct extract from the original Minutes of said Meeting on file and of
record insofar as said original Minutes relate to the matters set forth in said extract; that
THE Members present voting at said Meeting were residents of the City of Northampton
on the date of the Meeting; and that
w THE Notice of said Meeting was filed with the City Clerk in accordance with the
requirements of MGL Chapter 39, Section 23B, as amended.
EXTRACT
The Members of the Northampton Housing Authority met in Regular Session at the
"Joseph H. McDonald House in the City of Northampton on Monday, May 9, 2005
at 7:30 P.M. The Meeting was called to order by the Chairperson and upon roll call,
those present and absent were as follows:
40
PRESENT: Commissioners DeFazio; Blaisdell; Carney; Murphy
ABSENT: Commissioner Andrulis
Extracts from the Minutes, page 3
The Director explained that under Massachusetts Law, a bidding agency is only allowed
to specify materials to be used on public construction projects if the agency determines
Notice to Bidders 01000
1 of 4
40
4"
ARTICLE 19
TERMINATION
19.1 TERMINATION FOR CAUSE
19.1.1 The Owner may terminate this contract for cause if it determines that any of the following circumstances have
occurred:
.1 The Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or has made a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors;
.2 A receiver has been appointed of the Contractor's property;
.3 All or a part of the Work has been abandoned;
.4 The Contractor has sublet or assigned all or any portion of the Work,the Contract,or claims thereunder,without
the prior written consent of the Owner,except as provided in the Contract;
.5 The Architect has determined that the rate of progress required on the project is not being met,or
.6 The Contractor has substantially violated any provisions of this Contract.
19.1.2 In the event of such termination,the Owner may hold the Contractor and its sureties liable in damages as for a
breach of contract,or the Owner may notify the Contractor to discontinue all work,or any part thereof,and the
Contractor shall discontinue all work,or any part thereof,as the Owner may designate.
19.1.3 The Owner may complete the work,or any part thereof,and charge the expense of completing the Work or part
thereof,to the Contractor.
4M 19.1.4 The Owner may take possession of and use any materials,machinery,implements and tools found upon the site
of said Work. The Owner shall not be liable for any depreciation,loss or damage to said materials,machinery,
implements or tools during said use and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for their removal from the Project site
tw after the Owner has no further use for them.
19.1.5 The Owner may,at its option,require the surety or sureties to complete the Contract.
19.2 TERMINATION LIABILITIES
40 1921 All expenses charged under Paragraph 19.1 shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of any moneys then due or
to become due the Contractor under this Contract;and in such accounting the Owner shall not be held to obtain the lowest
figures,by competitive bid or otherwise,for the completion of the Work or any part thereof.
40 19.2.2 All sums actually paid by the Owner to complete the Work shall be charged to the Contractor. In case the
expenses charged are less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been
completed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the difference. In case such expenses shall
exceed the said sum,the Contractor shall pay the amount of the excess to the Owner.
19.2.3 Expenses incurred under subparagraph 19.1 shall also include,but not be limited to,costs for Architectural extra
services and Project Representative services required,in the opinion of the Owner,to successfully inspect and administer
the construction contract through final completion,as described in Paragraph 9.7.
19.3 TERMINATION-NO FAULT
19.3.1 In the event that this Contract is terminated by the Owner, and termination is not based on a reason listed in
Paragraph 19.1,the Contractor shall be compensated for its costs incurred on the Project,including reasonable costs of
de-mobilization,calculated on a percent completion basis as provided in Article 10,covering the period of time between
the last periodic payment and the date of termination.
19.3.2 Payment by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 193.1 shall be considered to fully compensate the Contractor
for all claims and expenses and those of any consultants,Subcontractors,and suppliers,directly or indirectly attributable
to the termination,including any claims for lost profits.
19.4 ADMINISTRATOR'S APPROVAL
Termination of the Contract requires the prior approval of the Administrator.
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 29 of 29
ARTICLE 17
INDEMNIFICATION
The Contractor shall take all responsibility for the Work and take all precautions for preventing injuries to persons and
property in or about the Work;shall bear all losses resulting from or on account of the amount or character of the Work.
The Contractor shall pay or cause payment to be made for all labor performed or furnished and for all materials used or
employed in carrying out this Contract. The Contractor shall assume the defense of,and indemnify and save harmless, a.
the Architect,the Owner,the Department and their officers and agents from all claims relating to:labor performed or
furnished and materials used or employed for the Work;inventions,patents and patent rights used in and in doing the
Work unless such patent infringement is due to a product or process specified by the Owner;injuries to any person or
corporation received or sustained by or from the Contractor and any employees,and Subcontractors and employees,in �.
doing the work,or in consequence of any improper materials,implements or labor used or employed therein;and any act,
omission,or neglect of the Contractor and any employees.
dW
ARTICLE 18
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
am
18.1 CONTRACTOR BONDS
18.1.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with performance and payment(labor and materials)bonds in the form
provided by the Department,executed by a surety licensed by the Commonwealth's Division of Insurance. Each such 4W
bond shall be in the amount of the Contract Sum.
18.1.2 If at any time prior to final payment to the Contractor,the Surety:
.1 is adjudged bankrupt or has made a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; 40
.2 has liquidated all assets and has made a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors;
.3 is placed in receivership;
.4 otherwise petitions a state or federal court for protection from its creditors;or
.5 allows its license to do business in Massachusetts to lapse or be revoked; +w
the Contractor shall,within 21 days of any such action listed above,provide the Owner with new performance and
payment bonds as described in Paragraph 18.1.1. Such bonds shall be provided solely at the Contractor's expense.
18.2 SUBCONTRACTOR BONDS aw
182.1 The Contractor may list in its bid that any or all filed Subcontractors provide the Contractor with payment and
performance bonds for the full amount of the Subcontract. The costs for said bonds shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
Aw
18.2.2 In the event the Contractor lists in its bid that filed Subcontractors provide bonds,and subsequently waives the
requirement,the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certification that they understand if the filed subcontractor
defaults or is terminated,the Contractor accepts full responsibility and costs related to said default or termination with a
credit change order in an amount equal to the bond premium it would have paid had it required the filed Subcontractor-to do
provide such bonds.
ww
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 28 of 29
40
16.3 VEHICLE LIABILITY
Provide the following minimum coverage with respect to the operations of any employee,including coverage for owned,
non-owned,and hired vehicles:
Bodily Injury and $1,000,000. each person
Property Damage $1,000,000. each accident
Combined Single Limit of$1,000,000
40 16.4 WORKER'S COMPENSATION
Provide the following coverage in accordance with M.G.L.c.149§34A and c.152 as amended:
Worker's Compensation
Coverage A Provide Statutory Minimum
go Employer's Liability $500,000.each accident
Coverage B $500,000.disease per employee
$500,000.disease policy
+0 16.5 PROPERTY COVERAGE
16.5.1 Provide Special Perils coverage against loss or damage by fire and against loss or damage covered by the
special perils insurance endorsement on all work included in this contract in an amount equal to at least 80%of Contract
40 Amount.
16.5.2 When work will be completed on existing buildings owned by the Owner,the Contractor shall provide an
installation floater,in the full amount of the Contract,for the requirements set forth in Subparagraph 16.5.
16.5.3 This policy and/or installation floater shall indicate if Stored Materials coverage is provided as required by
Paragraph 10.4.
16.6.1 The policy or policies shall specifically state that they are for the benefit of and payable to the Owner,the
go Department,the Contractor,and all persons furnishing labor or labor and materials for the Contract Work,as their
interests may appear
16.6.2 The Special Perils coverage shall include any costs for work performed by the Architect or any consultant as the
+0 result of a loss experienced during the life of this contract.
16.7 OWNER AS ADDITIONAL INSURED
The Owner and Department shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor's Commercial Liability Policies.
w 16.8 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE,POLICIES
16.8.1 Certificates of insurance,acceptable to the Owner,shall be submitted to the Owner simultaneously with the
execution of the Contract. Certificates shall indicate that the contractual liability coverage,and Owner's and Contractor's
w Protective Liability coverage is in force,as well as the deletions of the XCU exclusions.
16.8.2 The Contractor shall file the original and one certified copy of all policies with the Owner and one with the
Department within sixty days after Contract award. If the Owner is damaged by the Contractor's failure to maintain such
insurance and to so notify the Owner,then the Contractor shall be responsible for all reasonable costs attributable thereto.
16.9 CANCELLATION
Cancellation of any insurance required by this contract,whether by the insurer or the insured,shall not be valid unless
written notice thereof is given by the party proposing cancellation to the other party and Owner at least thirty days prior
so to the effective date thereof,which shall be expressed in said notice
4"
40
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 27 of 29
MW
15.5.3 To the extent that the Contractor has not complied with the terms of these conditions,the Owner may withhold
from any Certificate for Payment moneys equivalent to the product of the percentage of completion times the SCE dollar
amount,minus the amount already paid to SCEs for Work performed under the contract,minus any amounts withheld for
previous non-compliance.
..A
15.6 RECOURSE
15.6.1 The Owner and the Department have the option not to impose sanctions if the Contractor demonstrates,to the
satisfaction of the Department,that the Contractor has taken every possible measure to comply with Article 15. This w�
may constitute a reason for waiving this Article in whole or in part.
15.6.2 To demonstrate every possible measure,the Contractor shall furnish:
.1 the name of each firm solicited for quotations on each Subcontract,the price quoted by each,and whether or not
the firm solicited was a minority or woman-owned business;
.2 the reason for not subcontracting with a minority or woman-owned business enterprise when applicable;
.3 evidence showing efforts by the Contractor to supplement its own and SOMWBA lists of minority and woman-
owned business sources by contacting the Small Business Administration,trade organizations,the General .�
Services Administration(U.S.Government),minority contractors'organizations,community organizations and
other likely sources of names of additional minority or woman-owned business firms capable of performing the
Work;and
.4 evidence showing other efforts to comply with this Article 15. a„
15.7 WAIVERS
The Department reserves the right,in its sole discretion,to wawe all,or a portion of the requirements of this Article 15.
15.8 SEVERABILITY 4W
The provisions of this article are severable,and if any of these provisions shall be held unconstitutional by any court of
competent jurisdiction,the decision of such court shall not affect or impair any of the remaining provisions of the
Contract. sm
ARTICLE 16
INSURANCE am
16.1 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
16.1.1 The Contractor shall takeout and maintain insurance coverage as listed in subparagraphs 16.2-16.8 with ,m
respect to the operations as well as the completed operations of this Contract. This insurance shall be provided at the
Contractor's expense and shall be in full force and effect for the full term of the Contract.
16.1.2 All policies shall be issued by companies authorized to write that type of insurance under the laws of this
Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
16.2 CONTRACTOR'S COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
16.2.1 Provide the following minimum coverage with respect to the operations performed by any employee, ..
Subcontractor,or supplier:
Bodily Injury& $1,000,000. each occurrence
Property Damage $1,000,000. general aggregate ow
Products&Completed Operations $1,000,000. aggregate
Personal&Advertising Injury $1,000,000. each occurrence
16.2.2 This policy shall include coverage relating to explosion,collapse,and underground property damage.
rw
16.2.3 This policy shall include contractual liability coverage.
16.2.4 The Contractor shall provide a separate Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability policy in the name of the
Owner at the same limits listed above.
ow
16.2.5 The completed operations coverage shall be maintained for a period of two(2)years after Substantial
Completion as defined in subparagraph 9.6.1.
ow
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS so
c.149 8/2004 26 of 29
00
15.3.4 The amount of participation of SCEs listed in The Participation Schedule must total at least the percentage set
forth in the Advertisement. The amounts indicated in the Letter of Intent shall not be less than the amount shown on the
Participation Schedule. The SCEs for whom Letters of Intent are submitted must be identical to the ones listed on the
40 Participation Schedule. No substitutions shall be made without the written approval of the Department.
15.3.5 Prior to the Validation of the Contract,the Contractor shall furnish the Owner and the Department with
executed copies of all subcontracts with all of the SCEs listed on the Participation Schedule.
15.3.6 Subcontractors are encouraged,but not required to subcontract portions of their work to SCEs. Participation
forms,available with the bidding documents shall be used to list those SCEs with whom they wish to sub-subcontract
and the dollar amount of those proposed sub-subcontracts.
No 15.3.7 The Contractor may include SCEs utilized by non-certified subcontractors to satisfy the requirements of this
article.
15.3.8 SCEs listed on the Participation Schedule must be SOMWBA certified MBEs and WBEs at the time of the
opening of bids.
15.3.9 MBE/WBE Certification from any other agencyhnumcipahty shall not be considered applicable for this Contract
15.3.9.1 The Department reserves the right to allow a SCE to perform work other than those categories listed on the
SCE's SOMWBA certification.
15.3.10 If a filed sub-bidder listed as a SCE is rejected for failure to obtain a performance and payment bond from a
surety qualified to do business in the Commonwealth when requested by the general bidder to do so at the time of bid,
40 said failure shall not entitle the general bidder to avoid the requirements of this Article 15.
15.3.11 The Contractor shall not change the SCEs listed in the Participation Schedule or make any other such SCE
substitutions after the Contract has been executed or during construction without the written approval of the Owner and
the Department.
we
15.3.12 The Contractor shall not terminate any subcontract for,nor perform with its own organization,work designated
to an SCE on the Participation Schedule without the written approval of the Owner and the Department. Such approval
shall be withheld until the Contractor demonstrates that the Amount of Participation is still met for any substituted SCE,
provided however,that compliance with this paragraph shall not supersede the terms of M.G.L.c.149§44F. Notice of
all M/WBE status changes(before Final Completion)must be sent to the Department of Housing and Community
Development-Legal Offrce/MBE/WBE,One Congress Street, 10th Floor, Boston,Massachusetts 02114.
15.4 COMPLIANCE
15.4.1 The Contractor must provide information as is necessary,in the judgment of the Owner or the Department,to
ascertain compliance with the terms of this Article 15.
15.4.2 The Contractor shall provide,an executed Contractor's Affidavit of Payment to Minority Business Enterprises
as found in Section 01110 of these Specifications.
15.4.3 If the Contractor desires to comply with this Article 15,but for reasons beyond its control cannot do so in
accordance with the Participation Schedule,the Contractor must submit to the Owner and the Department the reason for
its inability to comply and proposed revisions to the Participation Schedule stating how conditions of this Article 15 are to
be met.
15.5 SANCTIONS
15.5.1 If at anytime during the life of this Contract,the Contractor is found to be out of compliance with Article 15,
sanctions may be imposed within fifteen(15)working days after notification to the Contractor of said violation. If within
those fifteen(15)days the Contractor remedies the non-compliance to the satisfaction of the Department,or provides
IN compelling documentation as outlined in Article 15.6.2,said sanctions may be postponed or waived. If the Contractor
requires more than fifteen(15)days to remedy non-compliance,it shall make a written request to the Department for a
time extension. This request shall be made within the original fifteen(15)day period.
+0 15.5.2 If the Contractor fails to comply with the terms of these conditions,the Owner may impose the following sanctions:
.1 require the Contractor to provide equivalent substitute participation with SCEs acceptable to the Owner and
Department and at no additional cost to the Owner.,or
.2 suspend any payment for the Work that should have been but was not performed by an SCE pursuant to the
Ms Participation Schedule.
4"
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 25 of 29
ARTICLE 15 ..
MINORITY OR WOMAN OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES'
AFFIRMATIVE MARKET PROGRAM
15.1 DEFINITIONS:
For purposes of this Article 15,the following definitions shall apply:
15.1.1 "Minority"means a person who is a citizen or permanent resident of the United States and who is either: �.
Black,Western Hemisphere Hispanic,Native American Indians,Eskimo and Aleut,Asian,or Cape Verdeans as defined
by Executive Order 390 the Affirmative Market Program.
15.1.2 "SOMWBA"means the State Office of Minority and Women Business Assistance,
15.1.3 "Minority Business Enterprise"(MBE)means a business organization which is owned and controlled fifty-one
percent(51%)or more by one or more minority group members and certified as such by SOMWBA.
.r
15.1.4 "Women Business Enterprise"(WBE)means a business organization which is owned and controlled fifty-one
percent(51%)or more by one or more women and certified as such by SOMWBA.
15.1.5 "SOMWBA Certified Enterprise"(SCE)means a MBE or WBE as defined in 15.13 and 15.1.4.
w
15.1.6 "MBE/WBE Manufacturer"means a person or firm certified by SOMWBA and engaged in the process of
making,fabricating,constructing,forming or assembling a product(s)from raw,unfinished,semi-finished,or finished
materials through a direct contract with a contractor,subcontractor,or supplier.
15.1.7 "MBE/WBE Subcontractor"means a person or firm certified as such by SOMWBA and contractually engaged
by the contractor to perform a portion(a)of the contracted Work,including labor,materials and supplies,or(b)labor,
materials and supplies,or any combination thereof.
15.1.8 "MBE/WBE Supplier"means a person or fum certified as such by SOMWBA and engaged in selling of
materials and supplies to contractors,subcontractors,and/or manufacturers for the purpose of constructing,repairing,
remodeling,adding to or subtracting from,or improving any building,structure or property through a direct contract with
a contractor or subcontractor. Said MBE/WBE must sustain substantial financial risk in the process of
performing/supplying the work for this contract. The Department may request information to determine where the
MBE/WBE obtains supplies and materials.
15.1.9 "Amount of Participation"means the percentage stated on the advertisement of the final contract amount which
is to be contracted to SCEs for work to be performed on this contract in accordance with this Article 15.
15.2 JOINT VENTURES
15.2.1 A Joint Venture shall mean a business arrangement between SOMWBA-certified M/WBEs and a non-
SOMWBA certified General Contractor,in which the MBE or WBE has at least atwenty-five percent(25%)interest in
the Contract,and in which the other has at least the required minimum percentage of participation in the Contract. It is
expected that the M/WBE having the minimum 25%interest will participate in the management and decision making
aspects of the project proportionate to its percentage of ownership and interest in the Contract.
15.2.2 An M/WBE Joint Venture shall mean a business arrangement wherein a SOMWBA certified MBE or WBE
serves as a General Contractor and engages the services of another SOMWBA certified MBE or WBE(whichever is
required)in an amount not less than twenty-five percent(25%)of the Contract amount,and in which the management
and decision making aspects of the project are shared to the degree of participation and ownership in the Contract. '
15.3 CONDITIONS
The provisions of this Article 15 shall apply to all contracts with an advertised estimate of$50,000 or greater.
15.3.1 Once the Contractor agrees to comply with these provisions,and within 5 working days after receipt of bids,unless an
extension of time or waiver for compliance is granted in accordance with Article 3 of the Instructions to Bidders,the apparent
low bidder must submit a completed Participation Schedule and Letters of Intent covering each SCE used to satisfy the
requirements of this Article 15. These letters shall include the contract items the SCE is proposing to perform and the prices
that the SCE proposes to charge for the work.
15.3.2 SCEs listed on the Participation Schedule may be any combination of MBE/WBE Subcontractors,MBE/WBE
Manufactures,or MBE/WBE Suppliers as defined in Paragraph 15.1. .�
15.3.3 Letters of Intent are not required from filed sub-bidders who are SCEs.
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 24 of 29 ""
14.6 COMPLIANCE-REPORTS AND INFORMATION
The Contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Owner or the Department and will permit access to
its facilities and to any books,records,accounts and other sources of information which may be determined by the Owner
or the Department to affect the employment of personnel. Where information required is in the exclusive possession of
another who fails or refuses to furnish this information,the Contractor shall so certify to the Owner or the Department as
appropriate and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain the information.
14.7 COMPLIANCE-INVESTIGATIONS
14.7.1 Whenever the Owner's EEO Officer,the MCAD,or the Department believes the Contractor may not be
operating in compliance with the terms of these requirements,the Department shall conduct an investigation,and may
confer with the parties,to verify such allegations. The Department shall not initiate an investigation without prior notice
to the Contractor.
14.7.2 If the Department finds the Contractor in non-compliance,it shall make a preliminary report,and notify the
Contractor in writing of the steps necessary to bring such Contractor into compliance. A copy of this report shall be sent
to the Department's Affirmative Action Officer.
14.8 COMPLIANCE-DEPARTMENT-AFFIRMATIVE ACTION INVESTIGATION
14.8.1 If the Contractor fails or refuses to fully perform the steps necessary to achieve compliance,the Department shall make a
as report of non-compliance to the Department's Affirmative Action Officer,who will then conduct an investigation
14.8.2 Should the Department's Affirmative Action Officer find the Contractor in non-compliance a final report
recommending the imposition of one or more of the sanctions listed below shall be issued.
aw 14.8.3 Within fifteen(1 5)days of said report the
Department shall,after due notice and giving the Contractor an
opportunity to respond,move to impose one or more of the following sanctions to attain compliance.
14.8.4 If the Department's Affirmative Action Office believes the Contractor has taken or is taking every possible
measure to achieve compliance,a report shall show the Contractor is in compliance.
14.9 SANCTIONS
14.9.1 For each week drat the Contractor fails or refuses to comply,the Department may recover from the Contractor,11100 of
l%of the original Contract Sum or$1000 whichever sum is greater,in the nature of liquidated damages.
14.9.2 If a Subcontractor is in iron-compliance,the Department may recover from the Contractor, 1110 of 1%of the
Subcontract Sum,or$400 whichever sum is greater,in the nature of liquidated damages,to be assessed by the Contractor
as a back charge against the Subcontractor for each week that Subcontractor fails or refuses to comply.
14.9.3 The Owner may suspend part or all of any payment due under the contract until such time as the Contractor or
any Subcontractor is able to demonstrate compliance with the terms of the Contract;
14.9.4 The Owner may terminate,or cancel part or all of the Contract,in accordance with the provisions of Article 19,
unless the Contractor or any Subcontractor is able to demonstrate,within a specified time,compliance with the terms of
the Contract.
AIM 14.9.5 The Contractor may request the Department and Owner to suspend the sanctions conditionally. Whereupon the
Department shall investigate corrective measures taken by the Contractor and shall either lift or re-impose the sanctions.
14.10 SEVERABILITY
The provisions of this article are severable,and if any of these provisions shall be held unconstitutional by any court of competent
jurisdiction,the decision of such count shall not affect or impair any of the remaining provisions of the Contract.
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 23 of 29
ARTICLE 14
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS
14.1 DEFINITIONS
For purposes of this Article 14,the following additional definitions shall apply:
14.1.1 "Minority"means Asian-Americans,Blacks,Western Hemisphere Hispanic Americans,North American
Indians,Eskimos and Aleuts,and Cape Verdeans.
14.1.2 "Commission"or"MCAD"means the Massachusetts Commission Against Discrimination.
14.1.3 "E.E.O.Officer"or Equal Employment Opportunity Officer means those persons designated by the Contractor,
the Owner,or any other agency or party having jurisdiction under this contract,that serve in a capacity to implement this
Article.
14.2 CONDITIONS M
14.2.1 The provisions of this Article 14 shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors.
14.2.2 The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race,color,
religious creed,national origin,age,handicap,or sex. The aforesaid provision shall include,but not be limited to,the following:
employment upgrading,demotion or transfer;recruitment advertising;recruitment layoff,termination;rates of pay or other-
forms of compensation;conditions or privileges of employment;and selection for apprenticeship.
14.2.3 The Contractor shall post notices provided by the Commission,in conspicuous places,setting forth the
provisions of the Fair Employment Practices Law of the Commonwealth.
14.2.4 The Contractor shall undertake in good faith affirmative action measures designed to eliminate any
discriminatory barriers in the terms and conditions of employment on the grounds of race,color,religious creed,national .�
origin,age,handicap,or sex,and to eliminate and remedy any effects of such discrimination in the past. Such
affirmative action shall entail positive and aggressive measures to ensure equal opportunity in the areas of hiring,
upgrading,demotion or transfer,recruitment,layoff or termination,rate of compensation,and in-service or
apprenticeship training programs. This affirmative action shall include all action required to guarantee equal ..
employment opportunity for all persons,regardless of race,color,religious creed,national origin,age or sex.
14.2.5 The Contractor shall not discriminate on grounds of race,color,religious creed,national origin,age,or sex in employment
practices,in the selection or retention of Subcontractors,or in the procurement of materials and rentals of equipment. ..�
14.2.6 The Commission and a designee of the Owner shall have access to the construction site and all applicable
records of the Contractor and Subcontractors.
14.2.7 The Contractor's EEO Certificate must be signed by the low general and all filed sub-bidders as a condition of ..R
Contract validation by the Department.
14.3 MINORITY GOAL
14.3.1 The provisions of paragraphs 14.3-14.9 strap only apply to contacts withan advertised estimated value of$100,000 or more. .�
14.3.2 The Contractor shall maintain a percent ratio of minority employee man-hours in each job category not less than
the percentages found in Section 01100 of the Specifications. Such job categories shall include but not be limited to those
"Classes of Work"enumerated in M.G.L.c.149§44F and for trades covered by Item 1 of the Contractor's bid..
14.4 REFERRALS
14.4.1 In the hiring of minority journeymen,apprentices,trainees and advanced trainees,the Contractor shall rely on
referrals from a multi-employer affirmative action program approved by the Department or the Commission;and
traditional referral methods utilized by the construction industry,where such referrals are needed to meet minority hiring
requirements. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of such requests for referrals.
14.4.3 Records of employment referral orders,prepared by the Contractor,shall be made available to the Owner and to
the Department upon request.
14.5 WORK FORCE TABLES
14.5.1 The Contractor shall provide the weekly and quarterly information to the Owner on copies of forms that can be
found in the Section 01110 of these Specifications. '
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS MW
c.149 8/2004 22 of 29
aw
on
13.1.7 "Management," when used herein, means the chief executive officers, partners, principals or other person or
top persons primarily responsible for the financial and operational policies and practices of the Contractor.
13.1.8 Accounting terms,unless otherwise defined herein shall mean,in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles and auditing standards.
13.2 RECORD KEEPING
13.2.1 The Contractor shall make,and keep for at least six years after final payment,books,records,and accounts
which in reasonable detail accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the Contractor.
13.2.2 Until the expiration of six years after final payment,the Inspector General,the Owner,and the Department shall
have the right to examine any books,documents,papers or records of the Contractor and Subcontractors that directly
pertain to,and involve transactions relating to the Contractor and Subcontractors.
13.2.3 The Contractor shall describe any change in the method of maintaining records or recording transactions which
materially affects any statements filed with the Owner including the date of the change and reasons therefor,and shall
accompany said description with a letter from the Contractor's independent certified public accountant approving or
otherwise commenting on the changes.
13.2.4 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall file a statement of management on internal
accounting controls as set forth in Paragraph 13.3 below.
13.2.5 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall file an audited financial statement for the most recent
completed fiscal year as set forth in Paragraph 13.4 below and will continue to file such statement annually during the
term of the Contract.
-40 13.3 STATEMENT OF MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
13.3.1 Prior to execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall file with the Owner a statement of management as to
whether the system of internal accounting controls of the Contractor and its subsidiaries reasonably assures that:
.1 transactions are executed in accordance with management's general and specific authorization;
W .2 transactions are recorded as necessary to:
a. to permit preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles,and
b. to maintain accountability for assets;
410 .3 access to assets is permitted only in accordance with management's general or specific authorization;and
.4 the recorded accountability for assets is compared with the existing assets at reasonable intervals and
appropriate action was taken with respect to any difference.
13.3.2 Prior to execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall also file with the Owner a statement prepared and signed
by an independent certified public accountant,stating that the accountant has examined the statement of management on
internal accounting controls,and expressing an opinion as to:
1 Miether the representations of management in response to subparagraph 13.3.1 above are consistent with the
ON results of management's evaluation of the system of internal accounting controls;and
.2 whether such representations of management are reasonable with respect to transactions and assets in amounts
which would be material when measured in relation to the applicant's financial statement.
13.4 ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENT
Every Contractor awarded a contract shall annually file with the Owner during the term of the Contract a financial statement
prepared by an independent certified public accountant on the basis of an audit by such accountant. The final statement filed
shall include the date of final payment. All statements shall be accompanied by an accountant's report.
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 21 of 29
12.4 PREVAILING WAGE RATES
4W
The Director of the Department of Labor and Workforce Development has established the Schedule found m Division One of the
Specifications,listing the prevailing minimum wage rates that must be paid to all workers employed on the Contract Such
Schedule shall continue to be the minimum rate of wages payable to workers on this Contract throughout the term of the Contract
The Contractor shall not have any claim for extra compensation from the Owner if the actual wages paid to employees on the am
Contract exceeds the rates listed on the Schedule. The Contractor shall cause a copy of said Schedule to be kept in a conspicuous
place at the Project site during the term of the Contract. (See MG.L c.149 y26-271-1.) If reserve police officers are employed by
the Contractor,they shall be paid the prevailing wage of regular police officers.(See MG.L c.149§3413).
am
12.5 VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
If the Director of the Department of Labor and Workforce Development has established a Schedule of wage rates to be paid to
the operators of trucks,vehicles or equipment for this Project,the Contractor shall be obligated to pay such operators at
least the minimum wage rate contained on such Schedule.(See M.G.L.c.149§26-27H). am
12.6 EIGHT HOUR DAY AND LODGING
12.6.1 No laborer,workman,mechanic,foreman or inspector working in the employment of the Contractor,Subcontractor or
other person doing or contracting to do the whole or part of the Work,shall be required or permitted to work any more than eight -'
hours in any one day,or more than 48 hours in any one week,or more than six days in any one week,except in cases of
emergency.
12.6.2 Every employee on the Work shall lodge,board,and trade where and with whom he/she elects,and the Contractor no
and any Subcontractor shall not directly or indirectly require,as a condition of employment,that an employee lodge,board,or
trade at a particular place or with a particular person.
12.7 EXECUTIVE ORDERS an
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of MG.L.c.15113;Executive OrderNo.227,Governor's Code of Fair Practices,
Executive Order No.237 pertaining to minority and women business development;Executive Order No.246 pertaining to the
handicapped and all regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. The aforementioned law,Executive Orders,and regulations are
incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Contract am
ARTICLE 13 ,m„
CONTRACTOR'S ACCOUNTING REQUIREMENTS
13.1 DEFINITIONS am
13.1.1 "Contractor"means any person,corporation,partnership,joint venture,sole proprietorship,or other entity
awarded this Contract.
13.1.2 "Contract"means any contract awarded or executed pursuant to M.G.L.c.30§39M or M.G.L.c.149§44A-J, am
which is for an amount greater than one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000).
13.1.3 "Records"means books of original entry,accounts,checks,bank statements and all other banking documents,
correspondence,memoranda,invoices,computer printouts,tapes,discs,papers and other documents or transcribed ,,m
information of any type,whether expressed in ordinary or machine language.
13.1.4 "Independent Certified Public Accountant"means a person duly registered in good standing and entitled to
practice as a certified public accountant under the laws of the place of his/her residence or principal office and who is in
actindependent.
.we
13.1.5 "Audit,"when used in regard to financial statements,means an examination of records by an independent
certified public accountant in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and auditing standards for the
purpose of expressing a certified opinion thereon,or,in the alternative,a qualified opinion or a declination to express an 4W
opinion for stated reasons.
13.1.6 "Accountant's Report,"when used in regard to financial statements,means a document in which an independent
certified public accountant indicates the scope of the audit which he/she has made and sets forth his/her opinion ow
regarding the financial statements taken as a whole with a listing of noted exceptions and qualifications,or an assertion to
the effect that an overall opinion cannot be expressed. When an overall opinion cannot be expressed the reason therefor
shall be stated. An accountant's report shall include a signed statement by the responsible corporate officer attesting that
management has fully disclosed all material facts to the independent certified public accountant,and that the audited ""
financial statement is a true and complete statement of the financial condition of the Contractor.
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS ,W
c.149 8/2004 20 of 29
am
ARTICLE 11
GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
11.1 GENERAL GUARANTY
If at any time during the period of one(1)year from the date of Substantial Completion as defined in Paragraph 9.6,any
part of the Work shall,in the reasonable determination of the Architect or Owner,require replacing or repairing due to
the fact that it is broken,defective,or otherwise does not conform to the Contract Documents,the Owner will notify the
Contractor to make the required repairs or replacement.
11.2 If the Contractor shall neglect to commence such repairs or replacement to the satisfaction of the Owner within
ten(10)days from the date of giving or mailing such notice,then the Owner may employ other persons to make the
same.
11.3 The Contractor agrees,upon demand,to pay to the Owner all amounts which the Owner expends for such
repairs or replacements.
11.4 During this one year guarantee period any corrective work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable
an terms of this Contract. For items of work completed after use and occupancy has been taken,the one year guarantee
shall commence at the time the Owner accepts such items.
11.5 This one year guarantee shall not limit any express guaranty or warranty provided elsewhere in the Contract.
„W 11.2 SPECIAL GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
11.2.1 Guarantees and warranties required in the various sections of the Specifications must be delivered to the
Architect before final payment to the Contractor may be made,or in the case of guarantees and warranties which
originate with a Subcontractor's section of the Work,before final payment for the amount of that subtrade or for the
or phase of Work to which the guarantee or warranty relates.
11.2.2 The failure to deliver a required guarantee or warranty shall constitute a failure to fully complete the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
40 11.2.3 The Contractor's obligation to correct Work asset forth in Paragraph 4.12 is in addition to,and riot in
substitution of,such guarantees or warranties as may be required in the various Sections of the Specifications_
ARTICLE 12
MISCELLANEOUS LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
12.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall stay fully informed of all existing and future state and national laws and municipal ordinances and
40 regulations in any manner affecting those engaged or employed in the work,or the materials used or employed in the work,or
in arty way affecting the conduct of the Work,and of all such orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction
or authority over the Contract Work. All provisions of law that apply to this Contract are hereby made a part of this Contract
If any discrepancy or inconsistency is discovered in the Contract Documents in relation to any such law,ordinance,regulation,
wa order or decree,the Contractor shall forthwith report the same to the Owner in writing.
12.1.1 The Contractor shall cause all of its agents and employees to observe and comply with all such existing and
future laws,ordinances,regulations,orders and decrees.
12.2 CORPORATE DISCLOSURES
The Contractor,if a foreign corporation,shall comply with M.G.L.c.1 Sl §3 and§5,and M.G.L.c.30§391,.
40
12.3 VETERANS PREFERENCE
In the employment of mechanics and apprentices,teamsters,chauffeurs,and laborers in the construction of public works in the
Commonwealth,preference shall fast be given to citizens of the Commonwealth who have been residents of the
Commonwealth for at least six months at the commencement of their employment and who are veterans as defined M.G.L.c.4
§7(34),and who are qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates;and secondly,to citizens of the
Commonwealth generally who have been residents of the Commonwealth for at least six months at the commencement of their
employment,and if they cannot be obtained in sufficient numbers,then to citizens of the United States.
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 19 of 29
40
be valid even if delivered or mailed prior to the seventieth day after the Subcontractor has substantially completed the
Subcontract Work. Within ten days after the Subcontractor has delivered or so mailed a copy to the Contractor,the ...
Contractor may reply to the demand. The reply shall be by a sworn statement delivered to or sent by certified mail to the
Owner,and a copy shall be delivered to or sent by certified mail to the Subcontractor at the same time. The reply shall
contain a detailed breakdown of the balance due under the Subcontract including any amount due for extra labor and
materials furnished to the Contractor and of the amount due for each claim made by the Contractor and of the amount
due for each claim made by the Contractor against the Subcontractor.
.5 Within 15 days after receipt of the demand by the Owner but in no event prior to the 70th day after substantial
completion of the Subcontract Work,the Owner shall make direct payment to the Subcontractor of the balance due
under the Subcontract including any amount due for extra labor and materials fumshed to the Contractor,less any ..
amount(i)retained by the Owner as the estimated cost of completing the incomplete or unsatisfactory items of Work,
(u)specified in any court proceedings batting such payment,or(iii)disputed by the Contractor in the sworn reply;
provided,that the Owner shall not deduct from a direct payment any amount as provided in part(iii)if the reply is not
sworn to,or for which the sworn reply does not contain the detailed breakdown required by Subparagraph.4. The
Owner shall make further direct payments to the Subcontractor forthwith after the removal of the basis for deductions
from direct payments made as provided in part(i)and(ii)of this Subparagraph.
.6 The Owner shall forthwith deposit the amount deducted from a direct payment as provided in part(iii)of .e
Subparagraph.5 in an interest-bearing joint account in the names of the Contractor and the Subcontractor in a bank in
Massachusetts selected by the Owner or agreed upon by the Contractor and the Subcontractor and shall notify the
Contractor and the Subcontractor of the date of the deposit and the bank receiving the deposit. The bank shall pay the
amount in the account,including accrued interest,as provided in an agreement between the Contractor and the
Subcontractor or as determined by decree of a court of competent jurisdiction.
.7 All direct payments and all deductions from demands for direct payments deposited in an interest-bearing account or
accounts in a bank pursuant to Subparagraph.6 shall be made out of amounts payable to the General Contractor at the
time of receipt of a demand for direct payment from a Subcontractor or out of amounts which later become payable to
the Contractor and in order of receipt of such demands from Subcontractors. All direct payments shall discharge the
obligation of the(honer to the Contractor to the extent of such payment.
.8 The Owner shall deduct from payments to the Contractor amounts which,together with the deposits in interest-bearing
accounts pursuant to Subparagraph.6,are sufficient to satisfy all unpaid balances of demands for direct payment received
from Subcontractors. All such amounts shall be eannarked for such direct payments,and the Subcontractors shall have a
right to such deductions prior to any claims against such amounts by creditors of the Contractor.
.9 If the Subcontractor does not receive payment as provided in Subparagraph.1 or if the Contractor does not submit a
periodic estimate for the value of the labor and materials performed or furnished by the Subcontractor and the
Subcontractor does not receive payment for same when due less the deductions provided for in Subparagraph.l,the
Subcontractor may demand direct payment by following the procedure in Subparagraph.4 and the Contractor may
file a sworn reply as provided in that same Subparagraph A demand made after the first day of the month following
that for which the Subcontractor performed or furnished the labor and materials for which the Subcontractor seeks
payment shall be valid even if deliverer)or mailed prior to the time payment was due on a periodic estimate from the
Contractor. Thereafter the Owner shall proceed as provided in Subparagraphs.5,.6,.7,and.8.
10.7 FINAL PAYMENT
10.7.1 Upon completion of the Work,the Contractor shall be entitled to payment of the Contract balance,in
accordance with Subparagraph 10.6.1.2 and per the process described in Division 1 of the Specifications.
10.7.2 The acceptance by the Contractor of the last payment due under this Contract or the execution of the Final
Certificate of Completion,shall operate as a release to the Owner,Department,and the Architect from all claims and
liability related to this Contract.
10.8 PAYMENT LIABILITIES OF CONTRACTOR ..
10.8.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for all expenses,losses,and damages incurred in consequence of
any defect,omission,or mistake of the Contractor or any of its employees,Subcontractors,or suppliers.
10.8.2 The Owner may retain any moneys which would otherwise be payable under this Contract and apply the same,
or so much as may be necessary therefor,to the payment of any expenses,losses,or damages incurred by the Owner as a
direct result of the Contractor's failure to perform its obligations hereunder.
asa
w
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 18 of 29 "*"
W
10.5.3 The Owner may make changes in any Application for Payment submitted by the Contractor in accordance with
so M.G.L.c.30§39K,and the payment due on said Application for Payment shall be computed in accordance with the
changes so made. The provisions of said Section 39K shall govern payments pursuant to Applications for Payment on
which the Owner has made changes.
g► 10.5.4 No certificate for payment nor any progress payment shall constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
10.6 STATUTORY PAYMENT PROVISIONS
10.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor in
accordance with M.G.L.c.30§39K which provides as follows:
.1 Within 30 days after receipt from the Contractor,at the place designated by the Owner if such a place is so designated,of
a periodic estimate requesting payment of the amount due for the preceding month,the Owner will make a periodic
payment to the Contractor for the Work performed during the preceding month and for the materials not incorporated in
the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site(or at some location agreed upon in wrrtmg)to which the Contractor
has tide or to which a Subcontractor has title and has authorized the Contractor to transfer title to the Owner,less(l)a
retention based on its estimate of the fair value of its claims against the Contractor and less(2)a retention for direct
payments to Subcontractors based on demands for same in accordance with the provisions of Section 39F,and less(3)a
retention not exceeding five percent(5%)of the approved amount of the periodic payment.
.2 After the receipt of a periodic estimate requesting final payment and within 65 days after(a)the Contractor fully completes
40 the Work or substantially completes the work so that the value of the Work remaining to be done is,in the estimate of the
Owner,less than one percent(10/6)of the original Contract Sum,or(b)the Contractor substantially completes the Work
and the Owner takes possession for occupancy,whichever occurs first,the Owner shall pay the Contractor the entire
balance due on the Contract less,(1)a retention based on its estimate of the fair value of its claims against the Contractor
40 and of the cost of completing the incomplete and unsatisfactory items of Work less(2)a retention for direct payments to
Subcontractors based on demands for same in accordance with the provisions of Section 39F,or based on the record of
payments by the Contractor to the Subcontractors under this Contract if such record of payment indicates that the
so Contractor has not paid Subcontractors as provided in Section 39F.
.3 If the Owner fails to make payment as herein provided,there shall be added to each such
rate of three a points above the rediscount rate then c interest at the
p � 1p barged by the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston
commencing on the first day after said payment is due and continuing until the payment is delivered or mailed to the
40 Contractor;provided,that no interest shall be due,in any event,on the amount due on a periodic estimate for final
payment until forty-five days after receipt of such a periodic estimate from the Contractor,at the place designated by the
Owner if such a place is so designated The Contractor agrees to pay to each Subcontractor a portion of arty such internist
paid in accordance with the amount due each Subcontractor.
40 10.6.2 DIRECT PAYMENT TO SUBCONTRACTORS
10.6.2.1 The Contractor shall make payments to filed Subcontractors in accordance with M.G.L c.30§39F which
provides as follows:
OF .1 Forthwith after the Contractor receives payment on account of a periodic estimate,the Contractor shall pay to each
Subcontractor the amount paid for the labor performed and the materials fumishW by the Subcontractor,less any amount
specified in any court proceedings barring such payment and also less any amount claimed due from the Subcontractor
by the Contractor.
.2 Not later than the 65th day after each Subcontractor substantially completes the Work in accordance with the plans and
specifications,the entire balance due under the subcontract less amounts retained by the Owner as the estimated cost of
completing the incomplete and unsatisfactory items of Work,shall be due the Subcontractor and the Owner shall pay that
amount to the Contractor. The Contractor shalt forthwith pay to the Subcontractor the full amount received from the
Owner less any amount specified in any court proceedings barring such payment and also less any amount claimed
due from the Subcontractor by the Contractor.
.3 Each payment made by the Owner to the Contractor pursuant to Subparagraphs.1 and.2 of this paragraph for the
labor performed and the materials furnished by a Subcontractor shall be made to the Contractor for the account of that
Subcontractor and the Owner shall take reasonable steps to compel the Contractor to make each such payment to each
such Subcontractor. If the Owner has received a demand for direct payment from a Subcontractor for any amount
which has already been included in a payment to the Contractor or which is to be included in a payment to the
Contractor for payment to the Subcontractor as provided in Subparagraphs.l and.2,the Owner shall act upon the
demand as provided in this section
.4 If,within 70 days after the Subcontractor has substantially completed the Subcontract Work,the Subcontractor has not
received from the Contractor the balance due under the Subcontract including any amount due for extra labor and
materials famished to the Contractor,less any amount retained by the Owner as the estimated cost of completing the
incomplete and unsatisfactory items of World,the Subcontractor may demand direct payment of that balance from the
Owner. The demand shall be by a sworn statement delivered to or sent by certified mail to the Owner,and a copy shall
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 17 of 29
.,
ARTICLE 10 AM
PAYMENTS
10.1 CONTRACT SUM a°
The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total
amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
10.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 'm
10.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values
allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy
as the Architect may require. This schedule;unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing am
the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
10.2.2 The schedule of values shall contain a separate item for each Section of the Specifications broken down in such
form as the Architect may require. Each item in the schedule of values shall include its proper share of overhead and so
profit.
10.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Once each month,on a date established at the beginning of the Work,the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect by so
hand or by registered or certified mail with return receipt,an itemized Application for Payment,supported by such data
substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Architect may require,and reflecting retainage as provided in
Subparagraph 10.6.1. Such Application for Payment shall be submitted on a form available from the Department,(a
copy can be found in the Construction Handbook). The form shall show separately: 4W
.1 The value of labor and materials incorporated in the Work.
.2 The value,kind,and quantity of each item of material or equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the site,during the current pay period.
.3 The value,kind,and quantity of each item of material or equipment not incorporated in the Work but "'
suitably stored at some other location agreed upon in writing,during the current pay period.
.4 All Change Orders approved up to the date of the Application for Payment.
.5 The amounts approved for payment for each item on previous applications. am
10.4 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS
10.4.1 The Contractor shall include in such Application for Payment only such materials as are incorporated in the
Work. Except however,the Contractor may include the value of materials or equipment delivered at the site of the Work a.
(or at some location agreed to in writing)upon delivery to the Owner of:
.1 an acceptable Transfer of Title(see the Construction Handbook);and
.2 receipted invoices or other acceptable proof of prior payment by the Contractor for such materials;and
.3 a stored materials insurance binder(see subparagraph 16.5.2)that covers the materials for which payment is 00
requested,that names the Owner and the Department as an insured party should the stored materials be
subjected to any casualty,loss,or theft prior to their inclusion in the Work.
10.4.2 This material(s)or equipment must,in the judgment of the Architect: ow
.1 meet the requirements of the Contract,including prior shop drawing,product data,and sample approval;and
.2 be ready for use;and
.3 be properly stored by the Contractor and adequately protected until incorporated into the Work.
10.4.3 Failure to comply with subparagraphs 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 may result in Certificates being changed in accordance with .W
M.G.L.c.30§39K.
10.5. CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
10.5.1 The Architect shall mark the date of receipt on the Contractor's Application for Payment The Architect will,within '
seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment either,
.1 issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect
determines is properly due,or
.2 return the application to the Contractor if it is not in proper form or contains computations not arithmetically correct;or
.3 make changes to the application as provided in subparagraph 10.5.2.
10.5.2 The Architect shall notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding
certification in whole or in part as provided in subparagraphs 10.6.1.2 and 10.6.1.3.
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS ,w
c.149 8/2004 16 of 29
ow
40
no 9.5.6 The Contractor shall not be responsible for iwar and tear or damage resulting solely from such use and occupancy.
9.5.7 The Contract Sum will be adjusted by mutually acceptable arrangements between the Owner and the Contractor with
respect to heat,electricity,and water furnished by the Contractor to the portion of the Work so occupied.
ON 9.5.8 When any portion of the building is in condition to receive fittings,appliances,furniture,or other property to be
furnished and installed by the Owner under separate contracts,the Contractor shall allow the Owner to bring such items
into the building and shall provide all reasonable facilities and protection therefor.
40 9.6 SUBSTANTIAL.COMPLETION
9.6.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when,in the opinion of the Architect,the Work
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its
4% intended use.
9.6.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is
substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or
corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct Aems on the list Failure to include an item on such list does
not after the responsibility of the Contactor to complete all Work in aeconlazxe with the Contract Documents.
9.6.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected,the Architect will promptly make a
thorough inspection and prepare a "punch list", setting forth in accurate detail any items on the Contractor's list and
► additional items that are not acceptable or are incomplete.
9.6.4 If,after receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect determines that the Work is not substantially complete,the
Architect shall inform the Contractor of those items that must be completed before the Architect will prepare a punch list.
�wr Upon completion of those items,the Contractor shall again request the Architect to prepare the punch list
9.6.5 When the punch list has beenptep<ar4 the Contactor will arrange a meeting with the Architect and Subcontractors to
identify and explain all punch list items and address questions on the worm which must be done before final acceptance
9.6.6 The Architect may revise the punch list,from time to time,to ensure that all items of the Work are properly completed
9.6.7 The Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial
Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage
to the Work and insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list
accompanying the Certificate within the provisions of Subparagraph 9.7.2.
9.6.8 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall continence on the date of Substantial Completion of the
40 Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The
Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contactor for their written acceptance of
responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate and shall be subject to the approval of the Department
w 9.7 FINAL COMPLETION
9.7.1 After the Architect has certified that the Work is substantially complete,the Contractor shall immediately
proceed to complete all the remaining items of Work as determined by the Architect,including items authorized by
Change Orders,Construction Change Directives,or items disputed by the Contractor.
9.7.2 The Contractor shall complete all the remaining items of Work described in Subparagraph 9.7.1,as soon as
possible,and in any event within one hundred and twenty days after Substantial Completion,unless the Architect
determines that a shorter time period for completion is appropriate,in which event the Contractor must complete the
w Contract work within such period. The Architect may extend such one hundred and twenty day period if the Architect
determines that such extension is justified.
9.7.3 If the Contractor fails to complete the remaining items of Work within the time period provided in
Subparagraph 9.7.2,the Owner may arrange for other contractors to complete such items and the direct and indirect costs
of such completion shall be charged against the balance due the Contractor or,if no such balance remains,the Contractor
shall pay the Owner the costs of such completion
9.7.4 As an alternative to the procedure described in Subparagraph 9.7.3,the Owner may invoke the performance
bond of the Contractor and demand that the surety shall complete the remaining items of work in a timely manner.
9.7.5 The Architect will conduct up to three(3)inspections of completed punchlist items. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the costs of additional inspections required to verify successful completion of the punchlist
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 15 of 29
no
.2 When the Owner or its Architect fails to make a decision within the thirty day period described in Subparagraph ..
8.6.3 and such failure delays the Work,or a portion thereof,for fifteen days or more.
9.3.3.3 The Owner may,for its convenience,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay,or interrupt all or any part
of the Work for such period of time as it may determine appropriate,provided however,that if there is a suspension,delay, aw
or interruption for fifteen days or more,or there is a failure of the Owner to act within the time specified in this Contract,the
Owner shall make an adjustment in the Contract Sum for any increase in the cost of performance of this Contract,but shall
not include any profit to the Contractor on account of such increase,and provided further,that the Owner shall not make any
adjustment in the Contract Sum under this provision for any suspension,delay,mtemrption,or failure to act to the extent am
that such is due to any cause for which this Contract provides for an equitable adjustment of the Contract Sum under any
other Contract provisions.M.G.L.c.30§390(a).
9.3.3.4 The Contractor must submit the amount of a claim under Subparagraph 9.3.3.3 to the Owner in writing as soon .m
as practicable after the end of the suspension,delay,interruption,or failure to act and,in any event,not later than the date
of fmal payment under this Contract and except for costs due to a suspension order,the Owner shall not approve any
costs in the claim incurred more than twenty days before the Contractor notified the Owner in writing of the act or failure
to act involved in the claim. M.G.L.c.30§390(b). *�^
9.3.3.5 The Owner and the Contractor agree that the preceding Subparagraph 9.3.3.4 places a burden on the Contractor to
inform the Owner,whenever the Contractor considers that an action or inaction of the Owner or its Architect could result or
has resulted in a delay in the Project,thereby providing the Owner with the opportunity to take action to avoid or lessen the ■""
time extensions or damages that might be associated with such action or inaction.
9.3.3.6 The Contractor must file any claim for additional compensation made pursuant to Subparagraph 9.3.3.4 as a
Change Order request. The amount of any such claim shall be calculated only in accordance with the provisions of
Subparagraph 8.3.1.3 items a through i,and shall be subject to the provisions of Subparagraph 8.3.2.
9.4 CONSTRUCTION AND PAYMENT SCHEDULES
9.4.1 Prior to commencement of the Work the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a construction schedule in bar .,
graph form,satisfactory to the Architect,showing in detail the proposed progress for the construction of the various parts
of the Work,the proposed times for receiving materials required,and the interrelationship between the various
construction operations and the percentage of completion and the dollar value of the completed work on the first day of
each month for each section of the specifications and the entire Work.Submission of said schedule shall be a condition
precedent to approval of the Contractor's first application for payment.
9.4.2 At the end of each month,or more often if required,the Contractor shall furnish the Architect an updated
schedule showing actual progress of the various parts of the Work in comparison with the originally proposed progress w
and payment schedules. If the Architect raises any objections to progress or payment schedules submitted by the
Contractor,the Contractor shall immediately address and resolve such objections to the reasonable satisfaction of the
Architect.
9.4.3 If the Contractor submits a construction schedule that anticipates Substantial Completion before the date established
in the Owners Notice to Proceed,the Contractor shall have no claim for additional compensation on account of any delays that
prevent Substantial Completion before the date set in said Owner's Notice to Proceed.
9.5 USE AND OCCUPANCY
9.5.1 Prior to the date of Substantial Completion of the entire Project stipulated in the Notice to Proceed,the Owner shall have
the right,from time to time,to occupy and use any portion of the Project as the Work in connection therewith is substantially
completed,provided such use and occupancy does not unduly interfere with the Contractor's operations.
9.5.2 The Architect will,prior to any such use and occupancy,give written notice to the Contractor,indicating the
areas intended to be occupied and used,and the intended commencement date of such use and occupancy. Occupancy and
use shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor.
9.5.3 Upon receipt of such notice of intent,the Contractor shall promptly secure and submit to the Architect
endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use and occupancy of the Work,or any designated portion thereof,by
the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Project. The Contractor shall be permitted to cancel its special
perils insurance for that portion of the Project used and/or occupied by the Owner.
9.5.4 Partial or entire use and occupancy by the Owner shall not constitute an acceptance of Work not completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents nor relieve the Contractor from the obligation of performing any Work required
by the Contract but not completed at the time of use and occupancy. Before such use and occupancy,the Architect will
give the Contractor a list of items to be completed prior to Final Completion occurring in the areas to be occupied.
9.5.5 The Contractor shall be relieved of all maintenance costs of the portion of the Project occupied under the provisions of
this Article.
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS ..e
c.149 8/2004 14 of 29
s
ARTICLE 9
TIME,SCHEDULES,AND COMPLETION
9.1 DEFINITIONS
9.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,as extended by approved Change Order,
allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
9.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed from the Owner. The
commencement date shall not be postponed by the failure to act by the Contractor or by persons or entities for whom the
Contractor is responsible.
9.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Subparagraph 9.6.7.
40 9.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.
9.2. PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
9.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Contract the
go Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
9.2.2 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Completion within the Contract Time.
9.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
40 9.3.1 The Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time for completion of the Work because of;
.1 acts of God;
.2 labor disputes;
me .3 abnormal weather conditions;or
.4 acts of neglect of the Owner,Architect,or Department as described in Subparagraph 8.6.3.
9.3.1.5 Except in unusual circumstances,delays caused by suppliers,Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors shall be
considered to be within the control of the Contractor.
40 9.3.1.6 Should the Contractor require additional time to complete the Work,the Contractor shall document the reasons
therefor and request an extension of time at the time the alleged delay occurs,as provided in this Article and Article 8.
9.3.1.7 Failure to notify the Architect of any delay as provided in this Article shall preclude the Contractor from
qw subsequently claiming any damages due to said delay.
9.3.1.8 Requests for extensions of time shall be submitted as a change order request to the Architect under Article 8 for
the Owner's consideration.
9.3.2 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY FOR DELAYS
The Contractor shall be liable for,and shall pay,to the Owner,all of the Owner's Project related costs incurred after
the time stipulated for Substantial Completion,as extended by Change Order. Such costs shall include: fees paid to
OR the Architect as extra services for inspection services and administration of the Contract,at the rate stipulated in the
Contract for Architectural Services between the Owner and the Architect; the costs of the Project Representative at
the current salary rate;lost rental income based on the average rent collected by the Owner,and/or increased rental
subsidies and any other direct expenses, The Owner may retain from moneys otherwise due the Contractor whatever
sums accrue to the Owner pursuant to this provision. The Contractor shall not be liable for costs for delay in
performance for any period for which an extension of the Contract Time has been granted pursuant to the provisions
of Subparagraph 9.3.
w0 9.3.3 OWNER DELAYS
9.3.3.1 The Owner may delay the commercement of the Work,or any part thereof,due to unforeseen circumstances or
conditions which have a bearing on the Work required under this Contract or for any other reason if it is deemed to be in the
best interest of the Owner to do so. Except as expressly provided in the following Subparagraphs 9.3.3.2,9.3.3.3,and 9.3.3.4,
the Contractor shall have no claim for additional compensation on account of such delay,but shall be entitled to an extension of
Contract Time as determined reasonable by the Architect.
9.3.3.2 The Contractor and the Owner agree that the following Subparagraphs provide the Contractor with the right to
to request additional compensation for Owner caused delays only in the following two circumstances:
.1 When the Owner provides the Contractor with a written order to suspend or delay the Work,or a portion
thereof,for a period of fifteen days or more.
40
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 13 of 29
40
.o
8.6 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS,M.G.L. c.30§39N "'
8.6.1 If,during the progress of the Work,the Contractor or the Owner discovers that the actual subsurface or latent
physical conditions encountered at the site differ substantially or materially from those shown on the plans or indicated in
the Contract Documents,either the Contractor or the Owner may request an appropriate time extension and an equitable aw
adjustment in the Contract Sum applying to work affected by the differing site conditions. A request for such an
adjustment shall be in writing and shall be delivered by the party making such claim to the other party as soon as possible
after such conditions are discovered.
8.6.2 Upon receipt of such a claim from a Contractor,or upon its own initiative,the Owner shall make an investigation of such MW
physical conditions,and,if they differ substantially or materially from those shown on the plans or indicated in the Contract
Documents or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the
plans and Contract Documents and are of such nature as to cause an increase or decrease in the cost of performance of the work or a .0
change in the construction methods required for the performance of the work which results in an increase or decrease in the cost of
the work,the Owner shall upon submission by the Contractor of a properly submitted Change Order request,make an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum and the Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly.
8.6.3 TIMELY DECISION BY OWNER.M.G.L.c.30§39P no
Whenever this Contract requires the Owner or its Architect to make a decision during construction of the Project,on
interpretation of the specifications,approval of equipment,material or any other approval,or progress of the work,that
decision shall be made promptly and,in any event,no later than thirty days after receipt of a written submission for such 4W
decision by the Contractor;but if such decision requires extended investigation and study,the Owner or the Architect
shall,within thirty days after the receipt of the submission,give the Contractor written notice of the reasons why the
decision cannot be made within the thirty day period and the date by which the decision will be made.
w�
8.7 CLAIMS
8.7.1 If the Contractor has any claim or dispute of any nature arising under this Contract,including a claim based on
the Owner's failure or refusal to approve a change order request of the Contractor,in full or in part,the Contractor shall
submit such claim or dispute to the Architect,in the form of a change order request,for initial review and consideration,
subject to further appeal to the Administrator. If the Contractor is not satisfied with the Architect's decision or,if the
Architect fails to render a decision within thirty days after receiving written notice of such claim or dispute from the
Contractor,the Contractor may file a written request for a decision with the Department pursuant to Subparagraph 8.7.2.
8.7.2 Appeal of an Architect's decision under Subparagraph 8.7.1 must be made directly to the Administrator by
certified mail,copy to the Architect and Owner,within twenty-one(21)calendar days after the date on which the party
making the appeal receives the Architect's written decision or within twenty-one(2 1)days after the thirty(30)day non-
decision period noted in 8.7.1. Failure to appeal within this period will result in the Architects decision becoming final
and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor.
8.7.3 Pending resolution of the claim or dispute,the Contractor must proceed with the disputed Work,as directed by
the Architect. The Contractor must give written notice to the Department and the Architect stating that it is proceeding
with the disputed work under protest. Accurate records of the nature and extent of the disputed Work and of the time
spent and equipment used on the disputed Work shall be maintained by the superintendent and verified daily by the
Project Representative,or the Owner's designee. Failure of the Contractor to maintain such records shall cause the
Contractor to forfeit its claim to additional compensation for such disputed work. 4M
8.7.4 Meetings or administrative conferences held by the Department to review the basis of the claim or dispute are
conducted in accordance with the procedure described in the Construction Handbook. Such conferences are not subject
to the State Administrative Procedures Act. ••
8.7.5 At the conclusion of these proceedings,the Department shall issue a decision which shall be final under the
Contract. The matter may then be appealed to a court of competent jurisdiction.
8.7.6 Requests for administrative conferences by subcontractors must be made by the Contractor;subcontractors am
cannot make such requests directly.
No
am
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS 4.
c.149 8/2004 12 of 29
ow
40
8.1.5 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor,Architect,and Department;a
Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner,Architect,and the Department,and may or may not be
agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a Minor Change in the Work may be issued by the Architect with the
concurrence of the Construction Advisor.
8.1.6 Change Orders and Construction Change Directives must be counter-signed by the Administrator in accordance
with Subparagraph 3.3.1,to be effective.
8.2 REQUEST FOR A CHANGE IN THE WORK
A change order request shall be in writing and may originate with the Owner,the Department,the Architect,or the
Contractor. If such a request would cause a change in the Contract Sum,the Contractor shall promptly submit to the
Architect its cost and pricing data for such proposed change. Such data shall be accurate,current and complete at the
er time of submission and shall be computed in accordance with Subparagraph 8.3.1.
8.3 METHOD FOR DETERMINING AMOUNT OF CHANGE
8.3.1 Changes in the Contract Sum shalt be calculated in accordance with one or a combination of the following methods,as
determined by the Architect:
1 Lump sum basis,provided the lump sum amount shall include the estimated cost of the change,broken down
by Items a through i in the following Subparagraph.3.
.2 Unit price basis, to be adjusted in accordance with contract unit prices, or other agreed upon unit prices
provided that the unit prices shall be inclusive of all costs related to such equitable adjustment.
.3 Time and materials basis, on a not-to-exceed predetermined upset amount determined by the Architect, to be
subsequently adjusted on the basis of the Contractor's actual costs based on the following items a though is
40 a. Cost of labor at the rates found elsewhere in this document,including foremen;
b. Costs of matenals,supplies and equipment including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed,
c. Rental cost of machinery and equipment exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others.
d A percent of the net increase or decrease of Item a to cover Worker's Compensation,F.I.CA.,and unemployment
we contributions.
e. The percentage for Worker's Compensation in Item d above shall not exceed the standard manual rate for the
involved trade,as set by the Worker's Compensation Rating and Inspection Bureau of Massachusetts. This rate shall
not include any surcharges such as experience modifications and all risk factor adjustment programs,etc.
f. For work performed by the Contractor's own forces,there shall be added an amount of 15%of items a-d for
overhead,superintendence,and profit.
g. For work performed by any Subcontractor,there shall be added an amount of 15%of the Subcontractor's costs
for Items a-d for the Subcontractor's overhead,superintendence and profit. The Contractor shall be entitled to
an additional 101/o mark-up on the total amount of the Subcontractor's price as compensation for assuming full
responsibility and supervision for the Subcontractor's work.
h. Actual increases in the premium costs for performance and payment bonds required of the Contractor and filed
Subcontractors,provided tyre will be an appropriate credit for reduced premiums for a credit change order.
L On an change in the Contract Sum that involves a
Y �$ credit,the amount of the credit will not include an overhead and profit
factor,however,the credit will include an amount for item d which shall not be less than 25%of item a.
8.3.2 The method provided in Subparagraph 8.3.1,for compensating the Contractor and Subcontractors for changes
in the Work,shall be considered to adequately compensate the Contractor and Subcontractors for any and all costs
directly,indirectly,or consequentially related to,or caused by,such change in the work.
8.4 WORK PERFORMED UNDER PROTEST
The Contractor shall perform all work as directed by the Architect,and if the Architect determines that certain work for
which the Contractor has requested a change order does not represent a change in the Contract,or if the Contractor and
the Architect cannot agree to the amount of compensation for a change order,the Contractor shall perform said work
under protest and must follow the notice requirements and maintain the records required by Subparagraph 8.7.3.
8.5 STATUTORY CHANGE ORDER PROVISIONS
The Contractor's attention is directed to the Massachusetts General Laws Chapter 30, 391,39J,39N,390 and 39P,the
provisions of which apply to this Contract.
w�
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 11 of 29
.A
ARTICLE 7
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION
AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
7.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own
forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the
Contractor shall make such claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
7.1.2 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate 4W
contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other
separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing and coordinating their construction schedules with one another when
directed to do so.
sm
7.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
7.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. no
7.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends on proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the
Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to
the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper Aw
execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or
separate contractors'completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,
except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
4W
7.2.3 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors
ow
ARTICLE 8
CHANGES IN THE WORK
am
8.1 CHANGES-DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 All changes in the work,including any increase,decrease,or other equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or
in the time for perforating the Contract,shall be authorized in the form of one,or a combination of,the following written am
instruments: Change Order,Construction Change Directive,or a Minor Change in the Work. The term"equitable
adjustment"as used in this paragraph shall include all adjustments to the Contract Sum or time to which the Contractor is
entitled pursuant to M.G.L.c.30§§39N and 390 and such equitable adjustment shall be made in accordance with the
provisions of this Article. so
8.1.2 A Minor Change is a written order binding on the Owner and Contractor issued by the Architect,with the
concurrence of the Construction Advisor,not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract
Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders
promptly.
8.1.3 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Department,
Contractor,and Architect,stating their agreement regarding a change in the work,including a change in the Contract w
Sum or Contract Time.
8.1.4 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,
Architect,and Department,directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment if any,in the
Contract Sum,or Contract Time,or both. The Owner may,by Construction Change Directive,and without invalidating `
the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or
other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 10 of 29 ..
4W
ON
5.3.4 The Architect shall reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect
considers it necessary or advisable to achieve the intent of the Contract Documents,the Architect will have authority to
require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 4.8.
No 5.3.5 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as
Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking such submittals for conformance
with the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. This review shall be in
w accordance with the provisions of Subparagraph 4.6.3 and the procedures described in Section 01300 of the Specifications,
and shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
5.3.6 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize Minor
Changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 8.1.
5.3.7 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of
Final Completion,will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and
related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for
Payment upon the Contractor's compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
5.3.8 If the Owner,Architect,and Department agree,the Owner may provide one or more project representatives to
assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties,responsibilities,and limitations of authority of
10 such project representatives shall be as described in the Construction Handbook and explained at the pre-construction
conference.
5.3.9 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract
ww Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architects written response to such requests will
be made within the thirty day time limit prescribed in Paragraph 8.6.3.
5.3.10 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.
5.4 PROCEDURES AND PRACTICES
The Department's procedures,forms,and practices which must be employed on the Project are described in the
Construction Handbook,and will be explained at the pre-construction conference.
5.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Prior to commencement of the Work,the Contractor shall meet in conference with representatives of the Owner,
Department,and Architect to discuss and develop mutual understandings relative to administration of the quality
assurance program,safety program,labor provisions,the schedule of work,and other Contract procedures.
ARTICLE 6
SUBCONTRACTORS
6.1 DEFINITION
6.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
work at the site.
6.1.2 The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract
Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor assumes
toward the Owner and the Architect.
40 6.1.3 Subcontracts between the Contractor and a filed sub-bidder shall be in the form required by M.G.L c.149§44F.
6.2 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that:
1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph
19.1 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in
writing;and
2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety obligated under bond relating to the Contract.
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 9 of 29
aw
4.20 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
4.20.1 The Contractor must comply with all Federal,State,and Local safety laws and regulations of the applicable to am
work performed under this Contract.
4.20.2 If the Contractor uses or stores toxic or hazardous substances it is subject to M.G.L.c.l I IF§2,the"Right to
Know"law and regulations promulgated by the Department of Public Health, 105 CMR 670,the Department of am
Environmental Protection,310 CMR 33,and the Department of Labor and Workforce Development,441 CMR 21;and
must post a Workplace Notice obtainable from the Department of Labor and Workforce Development.
4.20.3 The Contractor must comply with Dig-Safe Laws. Dig-Safe is the Utility Underground Plant Damage am
Prevention System,331 Montvale Ave.,Woburn,MA 01801, 1.888.344.7233. The Contractor must notify Dig-Safe of
contemplated excavation,demolition,or explosive work in public or private ways,and in any utility company right of
way or easement,by certified mail,with a copy to Department of Environmental Protection(DEP). This notice must be
given at least 72 hours prior to the work,but not more than sixty days before the work is to be done. Such notice shall
state the name of the street or the route number of the way and an accurate description of the location and nature of the
proposed work. Dig-Safe is required to respond to the notice within 72 hours of receipt by designating the location of
pipes,mains,wires or conduits at the site. The Contractor shall not commence work until Dig-Safe has responded. The
work shall be performed in such manner and with reasonable precautions taken to avoid damage to utilities under the
surface at the work location. The Contractor shall provide the Superintendent with current Dig-Safe regulations,and a
copy of M.G.L.c.82§40. Any costs related to the services performed by Dig-Safe shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.20.4 This project is subject to compliance with Public Law 92-596"Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970"
(OSHA),with respect to all rules and regulations pertaining to construction,U-S.Code Title 29,sections 651 et seq.
including Volume 36,numbers 75 and 105,of the Federal Register as amended,and as published by the U.S.Department
of Labor.
4.20.5 If this Project requires the containment or removal of asbestos or material containing asbestos,lead or waste
containing lead based paint,the Contractor shall ensure that the person or company performing the asbestos or lead
related services is licensed pursuant to applicable State laws and regulations.
4.21 ACCESS TO WORK ..
The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work at all times and shall cooperate with the Owner
whenever the Owner invites visitors to the site.
ARTICLE 5
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT .�
5.1 ARCHITECT
The Architect is the person or entity licensed to practice architecture or engineering,who is responsible for performing
the duties assigned to the Architect by the Contract Documents.
5.2 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,
the Owner and Contractor shall communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architects
consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be
through the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
5.3 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5.3.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be
the Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,
from time to time during the guaranty period described in Article 11. The Architect will advise and consult with the
Owner.
5.3.2 The Architect will regularly visit the site,conduct job meetings,and keep the Owner informed of the progress
and quality of the Work,and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. The *■
Architect's minutes of meetings shall be the official minutes kept on the Project.
5.3.3 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the
Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will submit to the Owner and the Department for
their consideration Certificates for Payment in such amounts as the Architect determines appropriate.
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 8 of 29
4W
40
so 4.14 SALES TAX EXEMPTION AND OTHER TAXES
4.14.1 To the extent that materials and supplies are used or incorporated in the performance of this Contract,the
Contractor is considered an exempt purchaser under the Massachusetts Sales Act,Chapter 14 of the Acts of 1966.
40 4.14.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all other taxes and tariffs of any sort,related to the work.
4.15 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
so The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the use and information of the Owner,one record copy of the Drawings,
Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders,and other Contract Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record
changes and selections made during construction,and in addition approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,
updated construction schedule,and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be
00 delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
4.18 PERMITS,FEES,AND NOTICES
4.16.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for any and all permits,licenses,and feesrequired for the proper execution of the
40 Work. The Contractor shall coordinate all efforts required to obtain these permits
4.16.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations,and lawful
orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work.
4.16.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations. However,if the Contractor observes that
portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and
Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
4.16.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and
rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
such Work and shall bear the attributable costs.
go
4.17 DEBRIS,CHEMICAL WASTE
4.17.1 The Contractor shall not permit the accumulation of debris,both exterior and interior,and the work area shall at
all times be kept satisfactorily clean.
4"
4.17.2 The Contractor shall remove debris from the site of the work and Iegally dispose of it at any private or public
dump that the Contractor may choose. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and obtain any approvals necessary
for said disposal from the owners or officials in charge of such dumps and shall bear all cost,including fees resulting
from such disposal. Garbage shall be removed daily.
4.17.3 No open fire shall be permitted on site.
4.17.4 Chemical Waste: Chemical waste shall be stored in corrosion resistant containers,removed from the Project site,
and disposed of not less frequently than monthly unless directed otherwise. Disposal of chemical waste shall be in
accordance with requirements of the U.S.Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)and the Massachusetts Department of
Environmental Protection(DEP).Fueling and lubricating of vehicles and equipment shall be conducted in a manner that
w affords the maximum protection against spills and evaporation. Lubricants to be discarded or burned shall be disposed of in
accordance with approved procedures meeting all applicable Federal,State and local regulations. In the event of an oil or
hazardous materials spill large enough to violate Federal,State,or applicable local regulations,the Architect shall be notified
immediately. The Contractor shall be responsible for immediately cleaning up any oil or hazardous waste spills resulting
00 from its operations. Any costs incurred in cleaning up any such spills shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.18 SITE AND WEATHER PROTECTION
4.18.1 The Contractor shall take precaution during the execution of work involving demolition not to disturb or
08 damage any existing structures,landscaping,walks,roads,or other items scheduled to remain. The Contractor shall
restore any damaged items to original condition and as directed by the Architect. The Contractor shall provide and
erect acceptable barricades,fences,signs,and other traffic devices to protect the work from traffic and the public as
reasonably necessary and as required by the Massachusetts Building Code.
4.18.2 The Contractor shall install weather protection and provide adequate heat in the protected area from
November l to March 31 as required by M_G.L.c.149§44G.
4.19 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL RESOURCES
All items having any apparent historical or archaeological interest which are discovered in the course of any construction
activities shall be carefully preserved and reported immediately to the Architect for determination of appropriate actions
to be taken.
ON
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 7 of 29
40
ow
4.8 SAMPLES AND TESTS *W
4.8.1 Materials to be used in the Work may be tested or inspected after reasonable notice by the Architect and may be rejected
if they fail the specified tests. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract,all testing of material specifically requested by the
Architect will be paid for by the Owner,except that the cost of testing of materials that fail the testing criteria shall be borne by the .�
Contractor. If the Contractor requests permission to use a material that was not specified in the Contract Documents and the
Architect requires testing of such material before approving its use,the Contractor shall pay for such testing.
4.8.2 The source of material proposed by the Contractor shall be designated in time to permit all required testing and mTection
before the material is needed for incorporation into the Work The Contractor shall have no claim for delays due to testing if it fails
to designate the proposed source or to order the material in time to provide for adequate testing and inspection. Necessary
arrangements shall be made to permit the Architect to make factory,shop,or other inspection of materials or equipment ordered for
the Work,in process of manufacture or fabrication,or in storage elsewhere than the site of the Work.
w.
4.8.3 The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with samples of the materials it proposes to use in the execution of the work in
sufficient time to afford the Architect the opportunity to adequately review and,if necessary,arrange for testing of such materials.
4.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
4.9.1 Materials and equipment shall be progressively delivered to the site so that there will be neither delay in the
progress of the Work nor an undue accumulation of materials that are not to be used within a reasonable time.
4.9.2 Materials stored off-site shall be stored at the expense of the Contractor in a manner that preserves their quality **�
and fitness for the Work. Material shall be placed on wooden platforms or other hard clean surfaces and not on the
ground and shall be properly protected.
4.9.3 If the Contractor requests the Architect's inspection of materials stored ofd site,the Contractor shall assume the .�
Architect's reasonable costs for travel,room,and meals associated with such inspection.
4.9.4 Materials stored either at the site or at some other location agreed upon in writing shall be located so as to
facilitate prompt inspection and may again be inspected prior to their use in the work.
4.9.5 The Contractor shall take charge of and be liable for any loss of or injury to the materials delivered at or in the
vicinity of the place where the Work is being done and shall notify the Architect as soon as any such materials are so
delivered and allow them to be examined by the Architect.
4.9.6 Payment for stored materials shall be made in accordance with Paragraph 10.4.
4.10 WARRANTY
The Contractor wan-ants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of
good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from
defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and
authorized,may be considered defective. If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence *�
as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
4.11 REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
The Architect may reject materials if the Architect reasonably determines that such materials do not conform to the ..e
Contract Documents. No rejected materials,the defects of which have been subsequently corrected,shall be used in the
Work except with the written permission of the Architect. No extra time shall be allowed for completion of the Work
due to the rejection of non-conforming materials.
4.12 REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Architect's inspection of the Work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities to fulfill the Contract
obligations,and defective work shall be corrected. Unsuitable work may be rejected by the Architect,notwithstanding
that such work and materials have been previously overlooked or misjudged by the Architect and accepted for payment.
If the Work or any part thereof shall be found defective at any time before the final acceptance of the whole Work,the
Contractor shall forthwith correct such defect in a manner satisfactory to the Architect,and if any material brought upon
the site for use in the Work,or selected for the same,shall be rejected by the Architect as unsuitable or not in conformity .�
with the Contract requirements,the Contractor shall forthwith remove such materials from the vicinity of the Work.
4.13 MATERIALS ATTACHED OR AFFIXED TO THE WORK
Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as vesting in the Contractor any right of property in the materials used after then have
been attached or affixed to the Work or the soil;but all such materials shall,upon being so attached or affixed,become the property
of the Owner.
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 6 of 29
0
or
4.6.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Architect with any information and test results the
Architect reasonably requires to determine if a material is equal to a material named or described in the Contract
Documents.
4.6.3.3 Whenever the Contractor submits a material for approval as a substitute for a material named or described in the
Contract Documents,such submission shall be made at least one hundred and twenty(120)days prior to the date the
materials will be used on the Project In no event shall the Contractor maintain a claim for delays based upon the
Architect's review of such substituted materials if the Contractor has failed to comply with the one hundred and twenty
(120)days submission requirement.
4.7 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
4.7.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor,Sub-subemtractor,manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate a portion of the Work.
4.7.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and
other information furnished by the Contractor or its Subcontractors and suppliers to illustrate materials or equipment for
some portion of the Work.
4.7.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment,or workmanship and establish standards
by which the Work will be judged.
4.7.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of
their submission is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the
Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
w Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.7.9.
4.7.5 The Contractor shall review,approve,and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar
submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the
Worm or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by
the Contract Documents may be returned without action. The Contractor's attention is directed to the provisions of
Subparagraph 4.6.3 entitled"Or Equal"Submissions/Substitutions and Section 01300 of the Specifications.
4.7.6 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which is
coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule submitted pursuant to Paragraph 9.4,and allows the Architect
reasonable time to review submittals.
4.7.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product
Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective pective submittal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall
be in accordance with approved submittals.
4.7.8 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor
represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements,and field construction criteria
related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
4.7.9 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by
the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically
informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Department has given explicit written
approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals by the Architect's actions.
4.7.10 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.
4.7.11 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action maybe so
identified in the Contract Documents.
4.7.12 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials,systems or equipment is required by the
Contract Documents,the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and
certifications.
!r�
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 812004 5 of 29
4"
MW
4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all Work and the coordination of the operations of am
all trades,Subcontractors,or materialmen engaged upon the Work.
4.3.3 All necessary cutting,coring, drilling, grouting, and patching required to fit together the several parts of the
Work shall be done by the Contractor,except as may be specifically noted otherwise under any particular filed sub-bid .m
section of the Specifications.
4.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees,
Subcontractors,and their agents and employees,and other persons performing portions of the Work. aw
4.3.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to
determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
4.3.6 The Contractor shall do engineering required for establishing grades,lines,levels,dimensions,layouts,and am
reference points for the trades;shall be responsible for maintaining bench marks and other survey marks;and shall
replace any bench marks or survey marks which have been disturbed or destroyed.
4.3.7 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,or directed in writing by the Architect,Work shall be w
done during regular working hours. However,if the Contractor desires to carry on the Work outside of regular working
hours or on Saturdays,Sundays,or Massachusetts holidays it shall allow ample time to enable satisfactory arrangements
to be made for inspecting Work in progress and shall bear the costs of such inspection. The Owner shall bill the
Contractor directly for such costs.
4.3.8 Work done outside of regular working hours without the consent or knowledge of the Architect shall be subject
to additional inspection and testing as directed by the Architect. The cost of this inspection and testing shall be paid by
the Contractor whether the Work is found to be acceptable or not.
4.4 SUPERINTENDENT
4.4.1 The Contractor shall employ a Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project
site during performance of the Work. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the ,
Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing.
Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. The Superintendent shall attend each
job meeting.
4.4.2 The Superintendent shall be a competent and responsible employee,satisfactory to the Owner,who is regularly am
employed by the Contractor and is designated by the Contractor as its representative to be in full time attendance at the
Project site throughout the construction of the Work. The Superintendent shall be responsible for coordinating all the Work
of the Contractor and the Subcontractors. The Superintendent shall be licensed consistent with the Massachusetts Building MW
Code. The Superintendent's resume shall be submitted to the Owner prior to commencement of construction and must
demonstrate to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction that the Superintendent has performed similar duties on previous
construction projects similar to the Project
4.5 LABOR so
The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons
carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks
assigned to them,and whenever the Owner shall notify the Contractor,in writing,that any worker is,in its opinion, *■
incompetent,unfaithful,disorderly,or otherwise unsatisfactory,such employee shall be discharged from the Work and
shall not again be employed on the Project except with the consent of the Owner.
4.6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT am
4.6.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for materials,
equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and
services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or
not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. aw
4.6.2 Materials and Equipment to be installed as part of the Contract(both or either of which are hereinafter referred
to as"Materials")shall be new,unused,of recent manufacture,assembled,and used in accordance with the best
construction practices. sw
4.6.3 "OR EQUAL"SUBMISSIONSISUBSTITUTIONS
4.6.3.1 Except where a product has been specified as a proprietary material,the words"or equal"are understood to follow the
name of any maker,vendor,or product specified to be used in the Contract Documents. To determine if the materials or articles SW
proposed by the Contractor are equal to those specified,the Architect shall determine whether the materials or articles proposed
are at least equal in quality,durability,appearance,strength and design to the material or articles named or described,and will
perform at least equally the functions imposed by the design. See M.G.L.c.30§39M.
DHCD !Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS ow
c.149 8/2004 4 of 29
sm
3.2 PROJECT FUNDING
The Work under this Contract is funded b the Commonwealth of Massachusetts through ugh the Department pursuant to a
contract for financial assistance between the Department and the Owner.
3.3 DEPARTMENT'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.3.1 The Contractor is advised that various actions taken or decisions made by the Owner and/or the Architect under
this Contract,require the prior approval and counter-signature of the Administrator. Those actions or decisions include,
but are not limited to,the following:
.1 Approval,substitutions,and final selection of Sub-Bidders pursuant to M.G.L.c.149§44F
.2 Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, whether or not they affect a change in the Contract
Sum or in the Contract Time.
No .3 Written orders,notices,and approvals given by the Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents or pursuant
to any Laws applicable to this Contract,including approval of the Contractor's payment requests.
.4 Approval of"or equal"submissions and substitutions pursuant to Subparagraph 4.6.3.
.S Stop Work order.
6 Certificate of Substantial Completion.
.7 Final payment.
.8 Termination of Contract.
3.3.2 In any instance where the Contractor requires clarification as to whose approval is required,the Architect shall
provide such clarification.
3.3.3 Work undertaken by the Contractor or a Subcontractor at the Owner's or other person's order without the
Administrator's countersignature prior to the start of such work shall be considered unauthorized work and shall not be
considered cause for extra payment. The Contractor or Subcontractor shall be responsible for performing,at their own
expense,corrective measures required by the Architect due to any failure to obtain the prior approval of the
Administrator pursuant to Subparagraph 3.3.1.
3.3.4 The Department and its authorized representatives and agents shall at all times have access to,and be permitted
to observe and review all Work,materials,payrolls,records of personnel,conditions of employment,invoices of
materials,and other relevant data and records maintained by the Contractor on the Project.
ARTICLE 4
CONTRACTOR
4.1 DEFINITION
The Contractor,sometimes referred to as the General Contractor,is the person or entity identified as such throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term Contractor means the Contractor or its authorized representative.
4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS&FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information
furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors,inconsistencies,or
omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors,
inconsistencies,or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,inconsistency,or
omission and knowingly failed to notify the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it
involves a recognized error,inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect,the
Contractor shall assume responsibility for such performance and shall bear the attributable costs for correction.
4.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field
measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before
commencing activities. Errors,inconsistencies,or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once.
4.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved
pursuant to Paragraph 4.7.
4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES,
COORDINATION,AND CUTTING AND PATCHING
4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and
procedures,and for coordinating all portions of the Wort:tinder the Contract.
40
DHCD$10000 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 x/2004 3 of 29
am
1.3 USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS,AND OTHER DOCUMENTS aw
The Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect,and copies thereof furnished to the
Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project
outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,the Architect,and the Department. '""'
ARTICLE 2
OWNER
2.1 DEFINITION
The term"Owner",sometimes also referred to as the"Awarding Authority"or"Authority",means the Housing Authority
identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement,organized and existing under the provisions of M.G.L.c.121B.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER ..
2.2.1 The Owner will furnish to the Contractor,free of charge,a reasonable number of copies of the Contract
Documents for the execution of the Work,including a set for record purposes. In addition,the Owner,through the
Architect,will furnish to the Contractor a reproducible transparency and one black line print of detail and clarification
drawings issued after the Contract has been awarded. The Contractor shall provide and distribute such number of prints
of these transparencies as required for the Contractor's and Subcontractors'use.
2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish available surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility
locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents or persistently fails to cant'out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner by written MW
order signed personally or by its authorized agent,may order the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,
until the cause for such order has been eliminated.
2.3.2 Stop work orders require the Administrator's prior approval. (See Subparagraph 3.1.2) ow
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Architect at the Owner's direction to commence and .o
continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may,without prejudice to other
remedies,hire one or more contractors to correct such deficiencies.
2.4.2 In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the OR
Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies,including compensation for the Architect's additional services and
expenses made necessary by such default,neglect,or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not
sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
MW
ARTICLE 3
DEPARTMENT
dw
3.1 DEFINITIONS
3.1.1 The term"Department"means the Massachusetts Department of Housing and Community Development, 100
Cambridge St Suite 300, Boston, MA 02114.
3.1.2 The tern"Administrator"means the person appointed by the Department to administer the terms of the
Contract for Financial Assistance between the Owner and the Department,who is also empowered to take certain actions
under this Agreement. Contractor should address mail to the Administrator c/o the Construction Management Unit.
3.1.3 The term"Construction Advisor"means the person designated by the Administrator to assist the Administrator.
The duties,responsibilities and limitations of the Construction Advisor's authority are described in the Construction
Handbook.
DHCD!Ok-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149 8/2004 2 of 29
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ARTICLE 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Owner-Contractor Agreement,Advertisement,Instructions to Bidders,Bidding
Documents,Contract Forms,Conditions of the Contract,Specifications,Drawings,DHCD publication known as the
Construction Handbook,all addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,and other documents listed in the
Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the
Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a
�u
minor change in the Work issued by the Architect-
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated
r agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or
oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.
1.1.3 THE WORK
The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or
partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment,and services provided or to be provided by the
Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a
part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
1.1.6 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents,whemver located and whenever issued,showing the
design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules,and diagrams.
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment,construction systems,standards,and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services.
1.1.7 THE CONSTRUCTION HANDBOOK
The Construction Handbook is published by and available free of charge,from the Department. It outlines the procedures that the
Contractor,Owner,Architect,and Department shall follow during the construction of the Work. The most recent version,at the time
of bid opening,of the Construction Handbook is incorporated by reference into the Contract Documents.
1.2 EXECUTION,CORRELATION,AND INTENT
rw 1.21 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become familiar with
Iocal conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
40 1.22 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work
by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all.
Performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent cm%stant with the Contact Documents and reasonably inferable
from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. In case of inconsistent requirements in the Contract Documents,the
w requirement for the greater quantity or higher quality shall take precedence and shall be the Contract requirement
1.23. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well known technical or construction industry
meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
40
1.24. Where reference is made to standards or trade association publications,it shall be considered to refer to the latest edition
and revision thereof,if any,in effect on the date the Contract Documents were advertised for bid.
tit
DHCD$100k-10 Mil GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149$!2004 1 of 29
aea
-A-
Acceptanceof Work............................................................................9.5.4 Indemnification..............................................................................Article 17
Access to Work.....................................................3.3.4,4.9.5,4.21.1,7.2.1 Information Provided by Owner................. ..............................2.2,4.2.1
Acts and Omissions..............................4.2.1,4.2.2,4.3.4,4.7.9,10.8,17.1 Inspections.................................................................................4.16.1,5.3.7
Addenda..................................................................................1.1.1,4.15.1 instructions to Bidders...................................................1.1.1,15.2.1,15.4.3
Administration of Contract............................................................Article 5 Insurance.........................................................................................Article 16 am
Administrator.......................--..........2.3.2,3.12,3.1.3,3.3.1,3.3.3,8.1.5
8.7.1,8.72,19.4 -M-
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid.......................................................1.1.1
Architect,Definition of........................................................ .5.1,5.1.1 MBE/WBE.................................................--...............................Article 15
Architect's Approval.........................................................4.7.6,4.7.7,4.7.9 Methods,Means,Sequences............... ........*......... 4.3.1,8.6.2.2
5.3.5,8.1.2,8.1.3,8.1.4 dw
Architect's Decision...........................................43.7,4.8.1,4.11.1,5.3.10
8.3.1.3,8.6.3.1,8.7.1,8.7.2,9.3.3.2.2 Notice to Proceed.................................................. ........9.1.2,9.5.1,14.43
9.6.4,93.1,932,10.4,10.5
Architect's Inspection...................................4.3.7,4.3.8,4.8.2,4.9.3,4.9.4 -0-
4.12.1,5.3.7,9.3.2.1,9.6.3 aaa
Architect's Interpretations.....................................3.3.2,4.19.1,5.3.9,8.5.1 Occupancy..................................................................................4.16.1,5.3.7
Architect's Authorization to Reject Work 4.8.1,4.11.1,4.12.1,5.3.4 Owner(Local Housing Authority,Authority)..................................Article 2
Architect's Site Visits..................................................................5.3.2,5.3.7
Aesthetic Effect.....................................................-.........................5.3.10 -p-
Authority(Awarding Authority)-.............................................See Owner
Payments .............................2.4.2,3.3.3,4.9.6,4.12,5.3.3,Article 10
-B- 14.6.2.2,15.5.1,15.5.2,17.1,19.2,19.3
Payments,Application for......................5.33,102.1,10.3,10.4,10.5,10.6
Bonds...................................................62.1.2,8.3.1.3(g),9.7.4,15.4.5,18 Payments,Certification of....................................................5.3.7,10-5,10.6
Payment,Final 3.3.1,5.3.1,5.3.7,9.3.3.4,10.7, ,13.2,13.4,16.1
-C- Permits..........................--.......................................................................4.16
Product Data...........................................................................43,4.15,53.5
Change Orders.........................................1.1.1,2.4.2,3.3.1.2,4.15.1,5.3.6 Project Representative.....................................................5.3.8,8.7.3,9.3,2.1
8.1,1,8.1.2,8.1.4,8.1.5,8.2.1,83.1,8.5.1,8.6,8.7,1
9.1.1,9-3.1,9.3-2.1,9.3.3.6,9.7.l,10.3.L4,18.2 -R-
Claims for Additional Costs.........................7.1.1,8.7,10.72,17.1,19.3.2 Retainage................................................................................10.3.1,10,6.2
Claims for Additional Time.........................................................-7.1.1,8.7 4W
CleaningUp........................................................................................4.17.1 -S-
Completion(Substantial/Final) 3.3.1.6,4.11.1,5.3.7,92.2,9.6.1,9.7
ConstructionAdvisor........................................................3.1.3,8.1.4,8.4.1 Safety.................................... .............................................................4,20
Construction Change Directive....................1.1.1,3.3.1.2,5.3.6,8.1.1,9.7 Samples................................................................. 4.7,4.8,4.15,5.3.5
Construction Handbook 1.1.1,1.1.7,3.1.3,5.3.8,5.4.1,8.7.4,103.1 Schedule of Values......--.......................................................................10.2 4W
Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors............1.1.4,Article 7 Schedule,Construction.................................................4.15.1,5.5,7.12,9.4
Construction Schedule....................................................4.15.1,7.1.2,9.4.1 Schedule,Payment...................--............................................................9.4
Contract Documents................................................................................1.1 Schedule,Participation.........................15.2.1,15.4.1,15.4.2,15.4.3,15.4.4
Contract,Owner Contractor Agreement 1.1.1,1-2.1,2.1.1,12.1,33.1, 15.4.6,15.4.7,15.4.9,15.5.1
62.1,8,6,9.3.3.1,9.3.3.3,10.1.1,10.82 Site..........................1.2.1,222,4.4.1,4.42,4.82,4.9.1,4.9.2,4.9.3,4.9.4
Contract Sum........................3.3.1,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.1,83.1,8.4.1,8.622. 4.12,4.15,4.172,4.173,4,17.4,4.18,420.3 am
9.3.3.3,9.5.7,10.1.1,14.6 2.1,15.1.12,15.3.4 4.21.1,53.2,53.8,6.1.1,7.1.1,8.6.2,10.4.1,10.6.1.1,12.4.1,14.3.4,19.1.4
Contract Time..............................................3.3.1,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2,1,8.4.1, SOMWBA......................................................................................Article 15
9.1,1,9.2,9.3.2.1,9.3.3.1 Specifications..................................1.1.1,1.1.6,1.3,4.3.3,4.7.5,4.15,5.3.5
Contractor........................................................................................kilicle:4 8.6.3,9.4.1,10.2.2,10.7.1,11.2.1,12*1
Cutting And Patching.............................................................................4.3 Stored Materials...................................................................4.9.4,4.9,6,10.4 am
Subcontractors................................................................................Article 6
-D- Submittals...................................................................-4-2.3,43,4.15,5.3.5
Substantial Completion....................................................................5.3.7,9.6
Damage to Work..................................................................................9.6.7 Substitutions,Materials(or equals)..................................4.6.3,4.7.5,4.10.1
Delays/Extensions of Time...............................................4.6.3.3,4.8.2,9.3 Substitutions,MBE/WBE.............................................15.4.2,15.4.4,15.4.7
Department,DHCD........................................................................Article 3 Superintendent.....................................................................4.4,4.20.3,8.7.3 as
(DEP)Department of Environmental Protection 4.17.4,420.2,4.20.3 Supervision&Construction Procedures..........................................4.3,8.3.1
(DL WD)Departirient of Labor&Workforce Development4.20.2,12.4,12.5 Surety........................--.........62.1,9.7.4,15.4.5,15.5.3,Article 18,19.1.5
Disputes......................................................................................8.7.3,9.3.1 Surveys...................................................................................................2.2.2
Drawings....................................................1.1.1,1.1.5,1.3,2.2.1,4.7,4.15
aw
Taxes.......................................................................................................4.14
Equal Employment Opportunity..................................................Article 14 Termination...................3.3.1,6.2.1,14.2.1,14.2.2,14.6.2.3,15.4-6,15.5.3
ExecutiveOrder....................................................................................12.7 Testing&Inspection.................................................................................4.8
-F- -U- am
Filed Subcontractors....................................................6.1.3,83.1,10.6.2.1 Unit Prices......................................................-.............-.....................8.3.1
Final Completion................................................................5.3.7,9.5.4,9.7
Final Payment..................................3.3.1.7,5.3.1,9.3.3.4,10.6.1,10.6.11 -W-
10.7,IL2.1,13.2.1,13.2.2,13.4.1
Funding............. ...............................................................................-3.2 Warranties..........................................................4.10,5.3.7,9.6.8.Article 11 am
WeatherProtection.................................................................................4.18
Guarantees....................................................................................."icle I I
-H- am
Hazardous Materials.........................--.............................................4J7.4
aw
aw
DHCD GENERAL CONDITIONS
c.149112003 2 of 2
Imm
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE PAGE
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS.................................................... 1.
2. OWNER................................................................................2.
3. DEPARTMENT......................................................................3.
4. CONTRACTOR .....................................................................4.
S. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.............................9.
6. SUBCONTRACTORS ..........................................................10.
.. 7. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER / SEPARATE CONTRACT...10.
8. CHANGES IN THE WORK..................................................11.
9. TIME, SCHEDULE, COMPLETION .....................................14.
10. PAYMENTS ........................................................................17.
11. GUARANTEES + WARRANTEES .......................................20.
12. MISCELLANEOUS LEGAL REQUIREMENTS......................21.
13. CONTRACTOR'S ACCOUNTING REQUIREMENTS ...........22.
14. EEO REQUIREMENTS........................................................23.
15. MBE - WBE REQUIREMENTS............................................25.
16. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS..........................................28.
17. INDEMNIFICATION ..........................................................3 .
18. BONDS...............................................................................30.
19. TERMINATION ..................................................................31.
DHCD GENERA;CONDITIONS
049 1/2003 of 2
FORM OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S EQUAL EMPLOYMENT CERTIFICATION
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Housing and Community Development
This form must be completed and submitted by all Filed Subcontractors prior to
the validation of the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
This certifies that:
sw
Name of Fred Subcontractor
+CAI!
Street Address
City/State/Zip Code
1. Intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under this contract:
4"
40
2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained in
Article 14 of the Conditions of this Contract; and
3. Will obtain similar certifications from each of its subcontractors and submit to the Owner prior to the award of
any subcontract under this contract the subcontractor's certification.
Signature of Authorized Representative of Subcontractor
Name and Title
Date
DHCD $100k-10MH FORM OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
8/2004 1 of 1
C �1
SUBCONTRACTOR'S
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, as Principal,hereinafter called the
Subcontractor and as Surety,are held and firmly bound unto
as Obligee,hereinafter called General Contractor in the sum of
dollars $ ,
lawful money of the United States of America to be paid to the Obligee,for which payments,well and truly to be made,we
bind ourselves,our respective heirs,executors,administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally,firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS THE SAID SUBCONTRACTOR entered into a certain subcontract with the said General
Contractor bearing date of the day of ,20 _ for:
which contract is by reference made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the subcontractor shall faithfully perform
the subcontract and shall indemnify and hold harmless the General Contractor and the surety or sureties under
the labor and materials or payment bond furnished by such General Contractor to the awarding authority
against(1)any and all loss and expense arising out of any and all claims in connection with the performance of
said subcontract which would be required to be paid under the labor and materials or payment bond furnished
by the General Contractor to the awarding authority and(2)attorney's fees in the event the subcontractor after
notice,fails to assume the defense of and defend such claims,then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this:
Day of 200 —
PRINCIPAL SURETY
By,. By:
Seal Attomey-in Fact Seal
Attest: Attest
F
The rate for this bond is %for the first $ and %for the next $
The total premium for this bond is $
r ..
DHCD$1001<410M Subcontractor Bond
�' c149 0812004 1 of 1
FORM OF SUBCONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT MADE THIS DAY OF 20 by and between
a corporation organized and existing underthe laws of an individual doing
business as hereinafter called the"Contracbt'and
4" a corporation organized and existing under the laws of an individual doing business as
hereinafter called the"Subcontractor".
1. The Subcontractor agrees to furnish all labor and materials required for the completion of all work specified in Section No.
of the specifications for and the plans referred to therein and
(Name of Sub-Trade)
Addenda No. and for the:
on
MR all as prepared by for the sum of ($ )
(Name of Architect or Engineer) '
and the Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractor said sum for said work This price includes the following alternates(and
other items set forth in the sub-bid):Alternates No(s).
ur (a)The Subcontractor agrees to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the hereinbefore described plans;specifications
(including all general conditions stated therein)and Addenda No(s). and to assume to the Contractor all
the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor by those documents assumes to the
Housing Authority hereinafter called the"Awarding Authority",except to the extent that
provisions contained therein are by their terms or by law applicable only to the Contractor.
go
(b)The Contractor agrees to be bound to the Subcontractor by the terms of the hereinbefore described documents and to
assume to the Subcontractor all the obligations and responsibilities that the Awarding Authority by the terms of the
hereinbefore described documents assumes to the Contractor,except to the extent that provisions contained therein are by
ew their terms or by law applicable only to the Awarding Authority.
2. The Contractor agrees to begin,prosecute and complete the entire work specified by the Awarding Authority in an
orderly manner so that the Subcontractor will be able to begin,prosecute and complete the work described in this
subcontract;and,in consideration thereof,upon notice from the Contractor,either oral or in writing,the Subcontractor agrees
OR to begin,prosecute and complete the work described in this Subcontract in an orderly manner and with due consideration to
the date or time specified by the Awarding Authority for the completion of the entire work.
3. The Subcontractor agrees to furnish to the Contractor within a reasonable time after the execution of this subcontract,
evidence of workmen's compensation insurance as required by law and evidence of public liability and property damage
insurance of the type and in limits required to be furnished to the Awarding Authority by the Contractor.
4. The Contractor agrees that no claim for services rendered or materials furnished by the Contractor to the Subcontractor
shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given by the Contractor to the Subcontractor during the first ten(10)days of the
calendar month following that in which the claim originated.
5. This agreement is contirgent upon the execution of a general contract between the Contractor and the Awarding Authority for the complete
work
IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the parties hereto have executed this agreement the date and year first above-written.
SEAL
ATTEST
+11M Name of Subcontractor
By:
Signature
SEAL
ATTEST
Name of Contractor
011111, By:
Signature
aeu DHCD$100K-$10M Subcontract Form
cl 49 08/2004 1 of 1
fw
p 111r, ir 111 11 111, 111 111
PAYMENT BOND
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS
DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, as Principal,
I bound unto
and as Surety,are held and firm y �J
the Housing Authority,as Obligee,in the sum of
dollars $ r
to be paid to the Obligee,for which payments,well and truly to be made,we bind ourselves,our respective heirs,executors, YI•
administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally,firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,the said Principal has made a contract with the Obligee,bearing the date of 200
forthe construction of in Massachusetts
Project Title
NOW the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal and all subcontractors under said contract shall pay for
go all labor performed or furnished and for all materials used or employed in said contract and in any and all duly authorized
modifications, alterations, extensions of time, changes or additions to said contract that may hereafter be made, notice to
the Surety of such modifications,alterations,extensions of time,changes or additions being hereby waived,the foregoing to r
include any other purposes or items set out in,and to be subject to,provisions of M.G.L.c.30§39A,and M.G.L.c.149§29,
as amended,then this obligation shall become null and void;otherwise it shall remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this: �•
�1 Day of 200
PRINCIPAL SURETY
a. By: By:
Seal Attomey-in Fact
Attest: Attest
The rate for this bond is %for the first $ and %for the next $
The metal premium for this bond is $
►`I �
DHCD$100K-$10M Payment Bond
c149 08/2004 1 of 1
� � �
r�s�riti
PERFORMANCE BOND
COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS "'
DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT ',
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:,
That we, as Principal,
go and as Surety,are held and firmly bound unto
the Housing Authority,as Obligee,in the sum of
dollars $ '
to be paid to the Obligee,for which payments,well and truly to be made,we bind ourselves,our respective heirs,executors, .
administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally,firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,the said Principal has made a contract with the Obligee,bearing the date of 200
�► for the construction of in Massachusetts
+ter !► Project TRIe
NOW,the condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal and all Subcontractors under said contract shall well and
truly keep and perform all the undertakings, covenants,agreement,terms and conditions of said contract on its part to be
kept and performed during the original term of said contract and any extensions thereof that may be granted by the Obligee,
with or without notice to the Surety,and during the life and any guarantee required under the contract, and shall also well
and truly keep and perform all the undertakings, covenants, agreements, terms and conditions of any and all duly
` authorized modifications,alterations changes or additions to said contract that may hereafter be made,notice to the Surety
� of such modifications,alterations,changes or additions being hereby waived,then this obligation shall become null and void;
otherwise,it shall remain in full force and virtue.
` IN THE EVENT,that the contract is abandoned by the Principal,or in the event that the Obligee,under the provisions of
Article 19 of the General Conditions of said contract terminates the employment of the Principal or the authority of the
Principal to continue the work, said Surety hereby further agrees that said Surety shall, if requested in writing by the
Obligee,take such action as is necessary to complete said contract.
` IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this:
Day of 200
►' PRINCIPAL SURETY "'
I• By. By:
Sea] Attomey-in Fact '
'""" Attest: Attest
The rate for this bond is %for the first $ and %for the next $
�A
The total premium for this bond is $ "
44
DHCD$100K-$10M Performance Bond �►
c149 08/2004 1 of 1
; _
Zd
FORM OF CONTRACTOR'S EQUAL EMPLOYMENT CERTIFICATION
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Housing and Community Development
This form must be completed and submitted by the Contractor prior to the signing of the Owner-Contractor Agreement
This certifies that:
Contractor
Street Address
JIM
City/State2ip Code
1. Intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under this contract:
No
on
2. Will comply with the minority manpower ratio and specific affirmative action steps contained in
Article 14 of the Conditions of this Contract; and
3. Will obtain similar certifications from each of its subcontractors and submit to the Owner prior to the award of
any subcontract under this contract the subcontractor's certification.
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF
CONTRACTOR
40
NAME AND TITLE
40
DATE
DHCD$100K-$10M GC EEO CERTIFCATE
c149 082004 1 of 1
�4lR
CERTIFICATE OF VOTE OF AUTHORIZATION
200
I hereby certify that a meeting of the Board of Directors of the:
NAME OF CORPORAT"
duly called and held at on the day of 200
At which a quorum was present and acting, it was voted that
Name of Corporate Officer
of the be and hereby is authorized to execute and deliver for
and on behalf of the Corporation a Contract with Housing Authority, for
work to be done at State-Aided Housing Project No. In the City/Town of
And to act as principal to execute bonds in connection therewith, which Contract and Bonds were
presented to and made part of the records of said meeting.
I further certify that Is duly qualified and acting
Name of Corporate Officer
of the Corporation and that said vote has not been
Title
Repealed, rescinded or amended
A true copy of the record,
ATTEST:
(CORPORATE SEAL)
On this day of 200_, before me, the undersigned Notary Public, personally r
appeared , duly designated by the board of directors and proved
to me, through satisfactory evidence of identification,which was , that
S/he is the person whose name is signed on the foregoing documents, and acknowledged to me
r that s/he signed it voluntarily for its stated purpose and that it was her/his free act and deed.
G.
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
DHCD$100K-$10M CORPORATE VOTE
c149 08/2004 1 of 1
Article 5. Alternates: The following Alternates have been accepted and their costs are included in the Contract
Sum stated in Article 3 of this Agreement: Alternate No(s): and
Article 6. REAP Certification: Pursuant to M.G.L. c.62(c), sec.49(a), the individual signing this Contract on .w
behalf of the Contractor, hereby certifies, under the penalties of perjury, that to the best of their knowledge and
belief the Contractor has complied with all laws of the Commonwealth relating to taxes, reporting of employees and
contractors, and withholding and remitting child support.
Article 7.Validation: This Contract will not be valid until signed by the Director of the Massachusetts Department of
Housing and Community Development.
..a
In Witness Whereof,the Parties Hereto Have Caused This Instrument to be Executed Under SeaL
' CONTRACTOR
2..AWARDING AUTHORITY
Name of Contractor Name of Housing Authority
Address Signature and Seal
By:
Signature and Seat Tile Im
Witness Attest:
' If a Corporation,attach a notarized copy of the 2 If signed by someone other than a Housing Authority
Corporate Vote authorizing signatory to sign Contract. Board member attach a copy of Certified Board Vote
authorizing the signatory to sign Contract. ow
DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING &COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT
In accordance with M.G.L. 1216, and Revisions thereto.
.W
Director
.W
Date
am
AM
■ ,
4W
..
DHCD$100K-$10M Owner Contractor Agreement
cl 49 08/2004 2 of 2
am
40
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Housing and Community Development
This agreement made the day of 20 by and between Housing Authority hereinafter
called the"Owner", and hereinafter called the"Contractor
d1M Name of Contractor
Witnesseth,that the Owner and the Contractor,for the consideration hereinunder named,agree as follows:
Article 1.Scope of Work: The Contractor shall perform all Work required by the Contract Documents for
referred to in the Contract Documents prepared by
Description of Project
acting as and referred to as the"Architect'
ww Architect/Engineer
Article 2.Time of Completion: The Contractor shall commence work under this Contract on the date specified in the
written Notice to Proceed"and shall bring the Work to Substantial Completion within calendar days of said date
Days
Damages for delays in the performance of the Work shall be in accordance with Article 9 of the General Conditions of
the Contract.
Article 3.Contract Sum: The Owner shall pay the Contractor, in current funds, for the performance of the Work,
t Dollars$
Contract Amount in Words Contract Amount in Dollars
The Contract Sum is divided as follows:
Item 1: The Work of the Contractor, being all Work other than that covered by Item 2 $
Item 2: Subcontractors as follows
aw Section-Trade Subcontractor Amount
1 $
2 $
3 $
4 $
5 $
6 $
7 $
g $
9 $
10 $
Total for Item 2 $
Article 4.The Contract Documents: The following, together with this Agreement, form the Contract and all are
as fully a part of the contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein: The Advertisement, Bidding
Documents, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, and Specifications as enumerated in the Table of
Contents, the drawings as enumerated in the List of Contract Drawings, DHCD publication known as the
Construction Handbook, and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. Terms used in this
Agreement which are defined in the Conditions of the Contract shall have the meanings designated in those
Conditions.
DHCD$1001<410M Owner Contractor Agreement
c149 0812004 1 of 2
411
an
SOMWBA CERTIFIED ENTERPRISE
LETTER OF INTENT
a* Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Housing and Community Development
• This form is provided for SOMWBA Certified Enterprises(SCEs)being utilized as MBEs and WBEs on this contract.
• This form must be completed by each SOMWBA Certified Enterprise and submitted by the bidder using the SCE.
• General bidders or filed sub-bidders that are SCEs may omit this form.
TO:General Bidder FROM SOMWBA Certified Enterprise (SCE)
40 Name Name:
Street Street Address:
Address:
40 City/Town City/Town
Phone: Phone:
Fax: Fax:
Am
:Email Email
RE: State-Aided Project:
Name of Housing Authority and Project Number
40 1. My company intends to perform work in connection with the above project as:
❑ an individual ❑a corporation ❑a partnership
+" ❑ a joint venture with
❑ other(explain)
40 2. My company is certified by SOMWBA as a ❑ MBE ❑ WBE in the following categories:
Warning:
Misrepresenting your firms SOMWBA
40 certification may result in
disqualification from this and other
DHCD funded projectsH
40 3. My company has not changed its ownership,control, or management in any ways that affect certification
since obtaining SOMWBA certification
4. My company understands that if your company is awarded the contract, your company intends to enter
tR into an agreement to perform the work described below for the price indicated. My company also
understands that your company will make substitutions only as allowed by Article 15 of the General
Conditions for the above project
5. My company intends to Brief Description of work
This Work includes: ❑ Labor& Materials ❑ Labor Only ❑ Materials only
for a total amount of Dollars $
Date
Authorized Signature of SCE
Name and Tide
Please advise DHCD immediately if either party attempts to renegotiate this agreement
DHCD$100K-$10M LETTER OF INTENT
cl 49 0812004 1 of 1
44
40
SOMWBA CERTIFIED ENTERPRISE (SCE) PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Department of Housing and Community Development
Aw This form must be submitted by the apparent low general bidder within five working days of receipt of bids.
• Filed sub-bidders who are SOMWBA certified MBEs or WKS or filed subcontractors who intend to sub-
subcontract with a SOMWBA certified MBE or WBE may submit this form with their Filed sub-bid.
• Letters of Intent from all SCEs listed must be submitted with this Participation Schedule.
4,10 State-Aided Project
LHA DEVELOPMENT NUMBER
The undersigned intends to subcontract with the following firms for the listed work and dollar amounts:
Name of MBE Supplier or Value of
Company Description of Work WBE Subcontractor Participation
$
40 2 $
3 $
4 $
5 $
6 $
7 $
g $
4P
Dollar Value of MBE Commitment: $
„a,, Dollar Value of WBE Commitment: $
Total Dollar Value Commitment: $
4W
Name of General Contractor
W
Date
Authorized Signature
40
Address
on City,State&Zip Code
DHCD $100k-10Mil MBE WBE PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE
c.149 8/2004 1 of 1
F. The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids of the undersigned represents bona fide bids based on
hereinbefore described plans, specifications and addenda, and that, if the undersigned is awarded the contract,
they will be used for the work indicated at the amounts stated, if satisfactory to the awarding authority.
G. The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the general contractor by the terms of the hereinbefore described
plans, specifications (including all general conditions stated therein) and addenda, and to assume toward him all
the obligations and responsibilities that the contractor, by those documents, assumes toward the owner.
H. The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of the contractor's qualifications to perform the work
as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and specifications;
1. Have been in business under present business name for years
2. Ever failed to complete any work awarded?
3. List one or more recent buildings with names of general contractor and architect on which you
served as subcontractor for work of similar character as required for the above-named building
Building Type Architect General Contractor Contract Amount
$
$
$
4. Bank Reference:
C
I. The undersigned hereby certifies that it is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other ..
elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that it will comply fully with all laws and
regulations applicable to awards to subcontracts subject to section 44F of Chapter 149.
The undersigned further certifies under penalty of perjury that this sub-bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and
made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this subsection the word "person" shall
mean any natural person, joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The
undersigned further certifies under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from ..
doing public construction work in the Commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F of chapter
twenty-nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or any
rule or regulation promulgated there under.
..w
NAME OF SUB-BIDDER
Signature Cff� BY:
Signature&Title of person signing bid
Date:
Printed Name&Title of Person Signing Bid
Business Address
(City and State)
Business Telephone No. and Business Fax No.
w
NOTE: If the bidder is a corporation, indicate state of
incorporation under signature, and affix corporate seal;
if a partnership, give full names and residential addresses
DHCD $100k-10Mi1 of partners if different from business addresses.
c.149 8/2004
Form for Sub Bid
2 of 2
FORM FOR SUB-BID
TO ALL GENERAL BIDDERS EXCEPT THOSE EXCLUDED:
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for completing, in accordance
with the hereinafter described plans, specifications and addenda, all the work specified in
Section No of the specifications and in any plans specified in such section
prepared by for
Name or ArdMeci/Ergneer Proled
no for the HOUSING AUTHORITY in Massachusetts,
City/Town Citylrown
for the contract sum of
Dollars $
Bid Amount in Words Bid Amount in Numbers
For Alternate No. Add$ Subtract$
No. $ $
No. $ $
No. $ $
w Each Alternate shalt be listed separately
B. This Sub-bid includes addenda number(s)
C. This Sub-bid
l F1 May be used by any General Bidder Except:
❑ May only be used by the following General Bidders:
To exclude general bidders,insert"X"in one box only and fib in blank following that box.
Do not answer C if no general bidders are excluded
t D. The undersigned agrees that, if selected as a sub-bidder,they will,within five days, Saturdays, Sundays and
legal holidays excluded, after presentation of a subcontract by the general bidder selected as the general contractor,
execute with such general bidder a subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid, and contingent upon the
execution of the general contract, and, if requested to do so in the general bid by such general bidder,who shall pay
the premiums therefor, furnish a performance and payment bond of a surety company qualified to do business under
the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority, in the full sum of the subcontract price.
E. The names of all persons, firms and corporations furnishing to the undersigned labor or labor and materials for
the class or classes or part thereof of work for which the provisions of the section of the specifications for this sub-trade
require a listing in this paragraph, including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons on his own payroll and
in the absence of a contrary provision in the specification the name of each such class of work or part thereto and the
bid price for such Gass of work or part thereof are:
r NAME CLASS OF WORK BID PRICE
(Do not give bid price for any class or part thereof furnished by the undersigned).
DHCD $10000Mil Form for Sub Bid
c.149 8/2004 1 OF 2
till
MW
.m
The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used for the work indicated at the
amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The undersigned further agrees to pay the premiums for the
performance and payment bonds furnished by sub-bidders as requested herein and that all of the cost of all Am
such premiums is included in the amount set forth in Item I of this bid.
The undersigned agrees that if selected as general contractor,they will promptly confer with the awarding
authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that the awarding authority may substitute for any sub-bid listed am
above a sub-bid filed with the awarding authority by another sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose
standing and ability the undersigned makes no objection; and that the undersigned will use all such finally
selected sub-bidders at the amounts named in their respective sub-bids and be in every way as responsible for MW
them and their work as if they had been originally named in this general bid,the total contract price being
adjusted to conform thereto.
E. The undersigned agrees that,if selected as general contractor,we will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, MW
and legal holidays excluded,after presentation thereof by the awarding authority, execute a contract in
accordance with the terms of this bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or
payment bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and
satisfactory to the awarding authority and each in the sum of the contract price,the premiums for which are to •"
be paid by the general contractor and are included in the contract price.
The undersigned hereby certifies that they are able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other
elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that they will comply fully with all laws and am
regulations applicable to awards made subject to section forty-four A of Chapter 149.
The undersigned further certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all respects bona fide,fair and am
made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this subsection the word"person"shall
mean natural person,joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned
further certifies under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public
construction work in the Commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F of chapter twenty-nine, .•
or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or any rule or
regulation promulgated thereunder.
Name of General Bidder
Signature 1�r BY:
Signature&Title of person signing bid
Date:
Printed Name&Title of Person Signing Bid
am
Business Address
am,
(City and State)
Business Telephone No. and Business Fax No. .m
NOTE: If the bidder is a corporation, indicate state of
incorporation under signature, and affix corporate seal; .e.
if a partnership, give full names and residential addresses
of partners if different from business addresses.
am
DHCD $100k-10Mil Form for General Bid
c.149 82004 2 OF 2
MW
40
to
FORM OF GENERAL BID
40
TO THE AWARDING AUTHORITY
qft A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for for the
PROJECT
HOUSING AUTHORITY in Massachusetts
TOWN TOWN
in accordance with Contract Documents prepared by
Name of Engineer/Architect
For the contract price specified below,subject additions and deductions according to the terms of the
specifications
B. This bid includes addenda number(s)
C. The proposed contract price is:
Dollars $
Bid Amount in Words Bid Amount in Numbers
For Alternate No. Add$ Subtract$
No. $ $
No. $ $
No. $ $
No. $ $
Each Alternate shall be listed separately
40
D. The subdivision of the proposed contract price is as follows:
ITEM 1.The work of the general contractor, being all work other than that covered by ITEM 2.
TOTAL OF ITEM 1 $
ITEM 2. Sub-bids as follows:
40 Sub-trade Name of Filed Sub-bidder Sub-bid Amount Bond Required
Yes No
4M
Jar
TOTAL OF ITEM 2...........................................$
J
W DHCD $100k-10Mit Form for General Bid
c.149 8/2004 1 OF 2
a
AW
ARTICLE 10-CONTRACT VALIDATION
10.1 The Owner-Contractor Agreement shall not be valid until signed by the Director of DHCD. �.
10.2 The Notice to Proceed for construction shall not be issued until the Owner/Contractor Agreement
has been validated by the Director of DHCD
10.3 Incomplete or unacceptable submissions of forms required by paragraphs 9.2-9.7 will delay the
validation of the Owner/Contractor Agreement by DHCD.
END OF SECTION
dW
4M
AM
.M
no
.W
.m
am
DHCD $100k-10Mil Instructions to Bidders
c149 08/2004 6 of 6 w
MW
MR
4►
8.3 The Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible and eligible Bidder,except in the event of
substitution as provided under M.G.L. c.149§§44E and 44F, in which cases the procedure as
40 required by said sections shall govern the award of the Contract.
8.4 The award of this Contract is subject to the approval of the Director of the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts, Department of Housing and Community Development.(DHCD). Contracts without
40 DHCD approval shall not be considered valid.
8.5 The Housing Authority reserves the right to waive any informalities in or to reject any or all Bids if it
be in the public interest to do so.
e% 8.6 The Housing Authority also reserves the right to reject any sub-bid if it determines that such sub-
bid does not represent the bid of a person competent to perform the work as specified, or if less
than three sub-bids are received for a sub-trade,or if bid prices are not reasonable for acceptance
w without further competition.
8.7 As used herein,the term"lowest responsible and eligible bidder"shall mean the General Bidder
whose bid is the lowest of those Bidders demonstrably possessing the skill, ability,and integrity
necessary for the faithful performance of the work, and who meets the requirements for Bidders set
so forth in M.G.L. c.149§44A-J and is not debarred from bidding under M.G.L. c.149§44C; and who
shall certify that they are able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of
labor employed or to be employed on the work.
no ARTICLE 9-FORMS REQUIRED FOR CONTRACT APPROVAL
9.1 Upon Award,the General Bidder shall complete the following forms to ensure prompt contract
,,,s„ validation. These forms will be provided to the selected General Bidder by DHCD. Submit(3)
originals of each.
9.2 Owner/Contractor Agreement and Form of Corporate Vote.
40 9.3 Form of Contractor's Equal Employment Certification in accordance with Article 14 of the
General Conditions.
Form of Sub-Contractor's Equal Employment Certification in accordance with Article 14 of
40 the General Conditions.
9.4.1 Form of Performance Bond and Form of Payment Bond must be submitted by the General
Contractor on DHCD's form, in accordance with Article 18 of the General Conditions.The dates on the
40 bonds must coincide with the contract date,and a current Power-of-Attomey must be attached to each
bond.
9.4.2 Performance and Payment Bonds must also be submitted for all filed subcontractors, if
required by the General Bidder on its Form for General Bid, in the total amount of the
subcontract payable to the General Contractor.
9.5.1 Insurance Certificates for the General Contractor and all filed subcontractors are required
and must be submitted in accordance with Article 16 of the General Conditions.
40
9.5.2 General Contractors must indicate on special perils insurance or installation floater if stored materials
are covered.
9.6.1 Form of Subcontract for all filed subcontractors-executed and submitted on the statutory
w subcontract form.
9.6.2 Subcontracts with MBE/WBE subcontractors-executed on a form agreeable between both
parties.
9.6.3 Purchase Orders to,or Invoices from, MBEIWBE suppliers.
9.7 Statement of Management on Internal Accounting Controls and a Statement prepared by
4" a CPA expressing an opinion to the state of Management Controls,as required by M.G.L. c.30
§39R.
This applies to all General Contractors with contracts of$100,000 or more.
40 DHCD $100k-10W Instructions to Bidders
c149 08/2004 5 of 6
ON
am
ARTICLE 7-WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
7.1 Before Opening of Bids a
7.1.1 Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the time designated for receipt of bids upon written request.
Withdrawal of bids must be confirmed over the Bidder's signature by written notice post-marked
or sent by facsimile on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. ow
7.1.2 Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids.
7.2 After Opening of Bids ow
Bidders may withdraw a bid,without penalty, any time up to the time of Award as defined in paragraph
8.1, and upon demonstrating,to the satisfaction of the Housing Authority,that a bona fide clerical error
was made during the preparation of the bid. Failure to conclusively demonstrate a bona fide clerical "`
error may result in forfeiture of the bid deposit.
7.3 In the event of a General Bid Withdrawal after Opening of Bids, the Housing Authority shall consider
the bid from next lowest eligible and responsible bidder. aw
7.4 Sub-bid Withdrawal/Substitution
7.4.1 Selection - Should a filed sub-bidder listed on the Form for General Bid of the selected ow
General Contractor (per Article 8 of these instructions)withdraw its bid, be unable to provide
performance and payment bonds as required by the selected General Contractor, or otherwise
refuse to sign a subcontract with the selected General Contractor, the housing authority and ow
the selected General Contractor shall consider the other sub-bids to which the housing
authority and the selected General Contractor make no objection and substitute a new sub-
bidder for such trade.
7.4.2 Process: If the selected General Contractor. "`
.1 required bonds(on the Form for General Bid)for the sub-bidder who withdrew then the
selected General Contractor's contract amount shall be adjusted to account for:
.1 the difference between the amount of the sub-bid listed on the Form for General Bid and am
the amount of the replacement sub-bid, and
.2 the incremental difference in the cost of the General Contractor bonds premiums, but
.3 there will be no compensation for additional subcontractor bond premiums ""
.2 did not require bonds (on the Form for General Bid)for the sub-bidder who withdrew
and now the selected General Contractor wants bonds from the replacement sub-bidder, then
the selected General Contractor's contract amount shall be adjusted: ..
.1 to account for the difference between the amount of the sub-bid listed on the Form for
General Bid and the amount of the replacement sub-bid,
.2 the amount for the new sub-bidder's performance and payment bonds, and am
.3 the incremental difference in the cost of the General Contractor bond premiums.
7.4.3 There shall be no adjustment to the selected General Contractor's contract amount except as
set forth in 7.4.2.1 and 7.42.2. Additional overhead and profit is not allowed on the
incremental difference in the sub-bids nor on the costs for the additional bond premiums. am
ARTICLE 8-CONTRACT AWARD
..
8.1 Award means both the determination and selection of the lowest, responsible and eligible bidder,
by Housing Authority board vote.
8.2 The Housing Authority will award the contract to the lowest responsible and eligible bidder within AW
thirty days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded after the opening of bids in
accordance with M.G.L. c.149§44A.
DHCD $100k-10Mil Instructions to Bidders
c149 08/2004 406 "'
am
5.3 Delivery of Bids
ww 5.3.1 Sub-bids, including the bid deposit shall, be enclosed in a sealed inner and outer envelope,
iwith the following plainly marked on both envelopes:
Filed Sub-Bid for:
• Name of Housing Authority and Project Number
40 • Sub-bid Section Number
• Trade
• Sub-bidder's Name,Business Address,and Phone Number
40 5.3.2 General Bids, including the bid deposit, Division of Capital Asset Management and
Maintenance Certificate of Eligibility (CQ7)and Update Statement(CQ3)shall be enclosed
in a sealed inner and outer envelope, with the following plainly marked on both envelopes:
OR General Bid for:
• Name of Housing Authority and Project Number
• Bidder's Name, Business Address,and Phone Number
40 5.3.4 Date and time for receipt of bids is set forth in the Advertisement.
5.3.5 Timely delivery of a bid to the location designated shall be the full responsibility of the Bidder.
5.4 Sub-Trade Solicitations
No 5.4.1 If the General Bidders are instructed to carry an amount for a given sub-trade listed under Item
2,General Bidder's shall list the sub-trade, and amount provided by the Housing Authority.
The line under bonds required on the General Bid Form should be left blank or marked N/A in
*s order for subparagraph 5.4.2.2 to be applicable.
5.4.2 Upon solicitation of a subcontractor to perform the work required by the sub-trade as mentioned
in subparagraph 5.4.1,the selected General Contractors contract amount will be adjusted as
follows:
.1 The difference between the subcontract amount and the amount carried in the bid.
.2 The total cost of the subcontractor's bonds, if the selected General Contractor requires
go such bonds after the solicitation is completed and if the selected General Contractor
complied with 5.4.1 above, and
.3 The resultant cost difference for General Contractor's Bonds premiums.
5.4.3 Overhead and Profit for supervision of the sub-trade in question shall be included by all
go General Bidders in Item 1.
5.4.4 Additional overhead and profit is not allowed on the incremental difference as stated in M.G.L.
c.149§44F(4)(a)(2)nor on the costs for the additional bond premiums.
am
ARTICLE 6-ALTERNATES
6.1 Each General Bidder shall acknowledge Alternates in Section C on the Form for General Bid by
4111111 entering the dollar amount of addition or subtraction necessitated by the Alternate.
6.2 In the event an Alternate does not involve a change in the amount of the base bid,the Bidder shall
so indicate by writing"No Change",or"N/C"or"0"in the space provided for that Alternate.
6.3 Sub-bidders shall enter on the Form for Sub-bid the amount of addition or subtraction necessitated
by the Alternate which pertains to the work of that trade. If the Alternate does not involve a change
in the bid amount so indicate by writing"No Change","N/C"or"0".
If the alternate does not affect your category of work so indicate by writing "N!A".
6.4 General Bidders shall enter on the Form for General Bid a single amount for each Alternate which shall
consist of the Sub-bidders'amounts and the amount for work performed by the General Contractor.
6.5 The low Bidder will be determined on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted
alternates.
DHCD $100k-10Mil Instructions to Bidders
ct 49 08r2004 3 of 6
OR
ow
..
,.
ARTICLE 4-REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION
4.11 Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error which they may Aw
discover upon examination of the Contract Documents,the site,and local conditions.
4.2 Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Contract Documents shall make a written request
to the Architect. The Architect will answer such requests if received seven(7)calendar days before the
date for receipt of the bids.
4.3 Interpretation, correction, or change in the Contract Documents will be made by written Addendum
which will become part of the Contract Documents. Neither the Housing Authority nor the Architect will
be held accountable for any oral interpretations, corrections, or changes.
4.4 Addenda will be mailed by the Architect by U.S Postal Service, certificate of mailing,to every individual
or firm on record as having taken a set of Contract Documents.
4.5 Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection at the locations listed in the Advertisement
where Contract Documents are on file.
ARTICLE 5-PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS am
5.1 Forms and Bid Preparation
Bids shall be submitted on the"Form for General Bid"or the"Form for Sub-Bid", as appropriate, ow
furnished at no cost by the Housing Authority.The forms enclosed in the Project Manual shall not be
extracted or used. Additional forms are available at the location listed in the Advertisement.
5.1.1 All entries on the bid form shall be made by typewriter or in ink ow
5.1.2 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures in the space indicated on the bid form,.
Where there is a discrepancy between the bid sum expressed in words and the bid sum
expressed in figures, the words shall control.
5.1.3 If the requirement of Performance and Payment Bonds for filed sub-contractors is left blank by aw
the General Bidder on the Form for General Bid,the Housing Authority shall interpret this as a
"yes". No increase in contract price will be allowed for providing these bonds.
5.1.4 Costs for subcontractor's bond premiums shall be paid for by the General Contractor in so
accordance with M.G.L. c.149§44F.
5.2 Bid Deposits shall be:
5.2.1 at least five percent(5%)of the greatest possible bid amount, considering all altemates; 4W
5.2.2 made payable to the housing authority;
5.2.3 conditioned upon faithful performance by the principal of the agreements contained in the bid,
and
ow
5.2.4 in the form of:
.1 cash,
.2 certified check,treasurer's or cashier's check issued by a responsible bank or trust company,or
.3 a bid bond issued by a surety company licensed to do business in the Commonwealth of *�
Massachusetts.
5.7.5 retained until the execution and delivery of the Owner/Contractor Agreement if they represent
the bid deposit of one of the three(3)lowest responsible and eligible General Bidders or one of .�.
the(3)lowest Sub-bidders in a filed sub-bid trade, or a sub-bidder listed by one of the
(3).lowest General Bidders.
M.
am
DHCD $100k-10W Instructions to Bidders
cl49 08/2004 2 of 6 aw
am
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 1 -BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION
1.1 Each General Bidder or Sub-bidder(hereinafter called the"Bidder")by making a bid or sub-bid
(hereinafter called"bid")represents that:
1. The Bidder has read and understands the Contract Documents and the bid is made in accordance
therewith.
'W 2. The Bidder has visited the site and is familiar with the local conditions under which the Work has to
be performed.
1.2 Failure to so examine the Contract Documents and site will not relieve any Bidder from any obligation
OR under the bid as submitted.
ARTICLE 2-GENERAL BIDDER'S CERTIFICATION
+0 2.1 General bids shall be submitted with the following:
1. A Certificate of Eligibility issued by the Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance
Form CQ7, showing that the Bidder has been approved to bid on projects the size and nature of
"' this project; and
2. A Contractor Update Statement, Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance Form CQ3.
2.2 It is the Bidder's responsibility to obtain the necessary forms from Division of Capital Asset
• Management and Maintenance and make application in sufficient time for evaluation of the application
and issuance of a Certificate of Eligibility prior to bid.
2.3 The Contractor Update Statement is not a public record as defined in M.G.L.c.4§7 and will not be
40 open to public inspection.
ARTICLE 3-MBE AND WBE PARTICIPATION
40 3.1 Refer to the Advertisement for applicability of Article 3.
3.2 The minimum percentage that must be contracted with minority-owned and women-owned businesses
is stated in the Advertisement.
3.3 The apparent low Bidder must submit the SOMWBA Certified Enterprise Participation Schedule and
Letters of Intent from all of the firms listed on the Schedule within five(5)working days after receipt of
bids. The Housing Authority and the Department may, at their discretion,grant an extension of time to
00 submit these documents, if deemed to be appropriate and in the public interest to do so. Letters of
Intent are not required for filed Subcontractors. However,filed Sub-bidders who are SOMWBA-
Certified shall be listed on the Participation Schedule. Submit the completed Participation Schedule
and Letters of Intent to: (with a copy to the Housing Authority)
4* Department of Housing and Community Development
DHCD-Legal Office/MBE Coordinator
100 Cambridge Street—3rd Floor
40 Boston, MA 02114
ATTENTION: MBENVBE Participation for(project name).
3.4 The Bidder must submit prior to, and as a condition of Contract approval, signed subcontracts with all
0 subcontractors or a purchase order or invoice from material suppliers or manufacturers listed on the
Participation Schedule.
3.5 Filed Sub-bidders are not required to submit a Participation Schedule. They may, at their option, submit
a Letter of Intent with their bid if they are a SOMWBA certified enterprise. If a filed subcontractor
on intends to sub-sub work to a SOMWBA certified enterprise, and the General Contractor wishes for that
subcontract to be credited towards participation for this contract, a Participation Schedule and Letter of
Intent is required.
DHCD $100k-10Mii Instructions to Bidders
c149 08/2004 1 of 6
ADVERTISEMENT
The Northampton Housing Authority, the Awarding Authority, invites sealed bids from General
Contractors for the construction of New State Aided Housing 167-2 for the Northampton Housing
Authority in Northampton, Massachusetts, in accordance with the documents prepared by Juster Pope
Frazier LLP, 45 Conway Street, Shelburne Falls, MA 01370.
The Project consists of: six one-bedroom apartments in a single wood framed building with wood roof
trusses, asphalt shingle roofing, vinyl &fiber-cement siding, vinyl windows and radiant heated concrete
slab floors on an existing compacted fill base.
4W The work is estimated to cost $955,000.00 Dollars.
General bidders must be certified by the Division of Capital Asset Management in the following category of work.
DCAM Category: General Building Construction.
on Bids are subject to M.G.L. c.149 §44A-J &to minimum wage rates as required by M.G.L. c.149 §§26 to 27H
inclusive.
40 General Bids will be received until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, January 26, 2006 and publicly opened, forthwith.
Filed Sub-Bids for the trades listed below will be received at the address noted below on: 2:00 p.m.,
Thursday, January 5, 2006.
SUBTRADES
Section 09911 & Section 09912 Painting (Combined Sub-Bid)
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15600 HVAC
Section 16000 Electrical
All Bids should be sent to: Northampton Housing Authority,49 Old South Street, Northampton, MA 01060.
and received no later than the date&time specified above.
General bids and sub-bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit that is not less than five (5%) of the greatest
possible bid amount(considering all alternates), made payable to the Northampton Housing Authority.
p ( 9 ), p Y p 9 Y•
Bid Forms and Contract Documents will be available for pick-up on December 8, 2005 at the Northampton
Housing Authority,49 Old South Street, Northampton, MA 01060.
There is a plan deposit of$100.00 dollars per set(maximum of 2 sets) payable to the Awarding Authority. Plan
deposits must be a certified or cashier's check. This deposit will be refunded for up to two sets for general bidders
and for one set for sub-bidders upon return of the sets in good condition within thirty days of receipt of general bids.
Otherwise the deposit shall be the property of the Awarding Authority. Additional sets may be purchased for$100.00
per set.
Bidders requesting Contract Documents to be mailed to them shall include a separate check for$20.00 Dollars per
set, payable to the Awarding Authority, to cover handling and mailing costs.
General bidders must agree to contract with minority and women-owned businesses as certified by the State Office of
Minority and Women Business Assistance(SOMWBA). The amount of participation which shall be reserved for such
enterprises shall not be less than seventeen (%) percent of the final contract price, including accepted alternates, of
which at least twelve (%) percent shall be for minority business enterprises and five(%) percent shall be reserved for
women-owned business enterprises.
The Contract Documents may be seen, but not removed at:
Projectdog F.W. Dodge— McGraw Hill Construction
18 Graf Rd., Unit 8, Newburyport, MA 01950 101 Corporate Pl., Rocky Hill, CT 06067
Northampton Housing Authority
c149$100k-10 Mil Advertisement
DHCD 812004 1 of 1
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 12356 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK...............................................................................7
Section12494 - ROLLER SHADES..............................................................................................4
Section 12497 - DRAPERY AND TRACKS...................................................................................2
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
Section 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION...........................................................................................7
*Section 15400 - PLUMBING ......................................................................................................21
*Section 15600 - HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING.......................................52
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
*Section 16000 - ELECTRICAL...................................................................................................35
*Filed Sub-Bid Required
40
�w
DHCD $100k-10Mil TABLE OF CONTENTS
40 c.149 8/2004 3 OF 3
4W
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
DHCD Project No. 214034
..
Section 02600 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING.........................................................................9
Section 02730 - SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM.................................................................................7
Section02800 - PLANTING................................................................................................................. 11 .m
Section 02850 - SEEDING AND SODDING.........................................................................................7
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
no
Section 03300 - SITE CONCRETE.......................................................................................................9
Section 03301 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...................................................................................7
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY (Not Applicable)
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ......................................................................................6
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY...............................................................................................9
Section 06160 - SHEATHING ...............................................................................................................4
Section 06176 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES...................................................6
Section 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY.............................................................................6
Section 06202 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY..............................................................................5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION ............................................................................................5
Section 07311 - FIBERGLASS ASPHALT SHINGLES.......................................................................8
Section07460 - SIDING........................................................................................................................5
Section 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS......................................................................................................9
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES............................................................8
Section 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS.............................................................................................4
Section 08561 - VINYL WINDOWS.......................................................................................................9
Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE................................................................................................ 13
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES..............................................................................7
Section 09310 - CERAMIC TILE...........................................................................................................9
Section 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE...........................................................................................6
*Section 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING (Sub-Bid Combines with Section 09912).............................6
*Section 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING (Sub-Bid Combines with Section 09911)..............................7
Section 09981 - SOLID SURFACE WALL FINISH...............................................................................3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10550 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ............................................................................7
Section 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES........................................................................3
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES ....................................................................................7
am
DHCD $100k-10Mil TABLE OF CONTENTS
c.149 8/2004 2 OF 3 .m
go
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2 August 5, 2005
go DHCD Project No. 214034
TABLE OF CONTENTS
so
Number of Pages
onTITLE SHEET FOR PROJECT MANUAL........................................................................................................... 1
TABLEOF CONTENTS.......................................................................................................................................3
rADVERTISEMENT.............................................................................................................................................. 1
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
INSTRUCTIONSTO BIDDERS..............................................................................................................6
FORMFOR GENERAL BID...................................................................................................................12
FORMFOR SUB-BID..............................................................................................................................2
+w FORM OF SOMWBA CERTIFIED ENTERPRISES PARTICIPATION SCHEDULE............................ 1
FORM OF SOMWBA LETTER OF INTENT........................................................................................... 1
FORMS
FORM OF OWNER/CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT............................................................................2
FORMOF CORPORATE VOTE........................................................................................................... 1
FORM OF CONTRACTOR'S EQUAL EMPLOYMENT CERTIFICATION .......................................... 1
FORMOF PERFORMANCE BOND ..................................................................................................... 1
FORMOF PAYMENT BOND................................................................................................................ 1
FORMOF SUBCONTRACT.................................................................................................................. 1
FORM OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND................................... 1
FORM OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S EQUAL EMPLOYMENT CERTIFICATION................................... 1
40 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS..................................................................................2
40 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT........................................................................................... 29
SPECIFICATIONS
ON DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section01000 - NOTICE TO BIDDERS...............................................................................................4
Section01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK.................................................................................I.............2
ft Section 01040 - EXISTING CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 1
Section 01100 - LABOR REGULATIONS ......................................................................................... 11
Section 01110 - EEO AND MBE/WBE PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS W/FORMS......................4
40 Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS..............................................................................................................4
Section 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES.........................................................................................6
Section01510 - PROTECTION.............................................................................................................2
Section01520 - CLEANING UP............................................................................................................2
Section01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT..............................................................................................2
Section 01720 - SURVEYS AND RECORD DRAWINGS.................................................................. 2
DIVISION 2 —SITE CONSTRUCTION
Section 02150 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ...................................................................6
Section 02200 - EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING................................................................21
APPENDIX A—GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS ........14
Section02300 - SITE DRAINAGE................................................................................. ...6
DHCD $100k-10Mil TABLE OF CONTENTS
c.149 8/2004 1 OF 3
40
oft PROJECT MANUAL
MODERNIZATION OF STATE AIDED PUBLIC HOUSING
STATE-AIDED PROJECT: Mary McColgan Apartments
Grove Street Development 167-2
DHCD Project No.214061
Northampton MASSACHUSETTS
Massachusetts Department of
.. .!Housing and Community Development
NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
49 Old South Street
an
Northampton, MA 01060
Phone: 413-584-4030
FAX: 413-582-1350
Joseph A. DeFazio, Chairperson Jon Hite, Executive Director
Architect Mechanical&Electrical Engineer
Juster Pope Frazier LLP Robt. W. Hall Consulting Engineers, Inc.
45 Conway Street 540 Meadow Street Extension, Suite 2
Shelburne Falls, MA, 01370 Agawam, MA 01001
Telephone: 413-625-2572 Telephone: 413-789-0960
FAX# : 413-625-8379 FAX#: 413-789-3295
40 Email: mail @justerpopefrazier.com Email: mail @rwhall.com
Structural Engineer Landscape Architect&Civil Engineering
Barry Engineering The Berkshire Design Associates
40 176 Churchill Street 4 Allen Place
Pittsfield, MA 01201 Northampton, MA 02060
Telephone: 413-443-6591 Telephone: 413-582-7000
Fax: 413-443-6591 FAX# 413-582-7005
40 Email: mbarry176 @aol.com Email: bdg @berkshiredesign.com
Environmental Engineer Geotechnical Engineer
ATC Associates, Inc. O'Reilly, Talbot& Okun Associates
40 39 Spruce Street 293 Bridge Street, Suite 500
East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Springfield, MA 01103
Telephone: 413-525-1198 Telephone: 413-788-6222
FAX#: 413-525-8227 FAX#: 413-788-8830
Email: wissman81 @atc-enviro.com Email: office @oto-env.com
DATE: August 5, 2005
1 OF 1
2.2 All General Bidders are instructed to carry $70,000.00 for Section 015400 —
Plumbing in Item 2 on the Form for General Bid. There will be sub bid solicitation
for new sub-bids after the general bid opening.
2.3 For bid preparation refer to the Project Manual - Instructions to Bidders 5.4
Sub-Trade Solicitations.
ITEM 3. FILED SUB BIDS—HVAC—SECTION 156000
3.1 All filed sub bids received in this category have been rejected do to the fact that the
one (1) bidder (the low bidder) failed to submit the proper DCAM Sub-Bidder
Certification Forms as prescribed by DCAM in accordance with MGL c.149 sec.
44D and the contract documents, leaving only one (1) eligible filed sub bid. Since
there are less than three (3) eligible filed sub bids in this category, the awarding
authority has determined that the price of the remaining bid is not reasonable for
acceptance without further competition.
3.2 All General Bidders are instructed to carry$65,000.00 for Section 015400—HVAC
in Item 2 on the Form for General Bid. There will be sub bid solicitation for new
sub bids after the general bid opening.
3.3 For bid preparation refer to the Project Manual - Instructions to Bidders 5.4
Sub-Trade Solicitations.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4
Page 2 of 2
Juster Pope Frazier LLP
Architecture J Planning
45 Conway Street
Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts 01370
www.justerpopefrazier.com
41 3 625 2572 phone
4 1 3 6 2 5 8379 tax
ADDENDUM NO. 4— MARCH 1, 2006
NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
Mary McColgan Apartments 167-2
DHCD Project No.214061
Plans and Specifications dated August 5, 2005
Prepared by Juster Pope Frazier LLC
TO ALL GENERAL BIDDERS
This Addendum No. 4 forms a part of the Contract Documents. Therefore, all 4 addenda
issued shall be acknowledged individually by number in paragraph B on the Form for
General Bid. Failure to do so could result in the rejection of the bid.
This addendum consists of two (2) pages.
ITEM 1.SUB-BID TABULATION
1.1 Any previous information bidders may have obtained either written or verbally
regarding the filed sub-bids received in connection with the above-referenced
project shall be disregarded and shall not be used for the purposes of preparing
your General Bid.
1.2 All general bidders are required to utilize the information contained in the official
filed sub bid tabulation.
ITEM 2. FILED SUB BIDS - PLUMBING— SECTION 15400
2.1 All filed sub bids received in this category have been rejected do to the fact that the
two (2).low bidders failed to submit the proper DCAM Sub-Bidder Certification
Forms as prescribed by DCAM in accordance with MGL c.149 sec.441) and the
contract documents, leaving only one (1) eligible filed sub-bid. Since there are less
than three (3) eligible filed sub-bids in this category, the awarding authority has
determined that the price of the remaining bid is not reasonable for
acceptancewithout further competition.
Page l of 2
Juster Pope Frazier LLC
Architecture I Planning
45 Conway Street
Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts 01370
www.justerpopefrazier.com
4 1 3 6 2 5 2 5 7 2 phone
4 1 3 6 2 5 8379 fax
February 27, 2006
Mary McColgan Apartments
Grove Street Development 167-2
DHCD Project No. 214061
Addendum Number Three
TO ALL GENERAL BIDDERS OF RECORD:
This addendum forms part of the contract documents and modifies the original
specifications and drawings dated August 5, 2005. Acknowledge receipt of this
addendum in Paragraph B on the Form for General Bid. Failure to do so could
result in the rejection of the bid.
This addendum consists of one(1) page.
ITEM 1. GENERAL BID OPENING
1.1 The General Bid opening scheduled for Wednesday March 1, 2006 is cancelled
and is rescheduled for March 8, 2006 at 2:00 p.m.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. THREE
Page 1 of 1
"ARTICLE 2 - GENERAL BIDDERS AND FILED SUB-BIDDERS
DCAM CERTIFICATION
2.1 General bids shall be submitted with the following:
1. A Certificate of Eligibility on the appropriate form prescribed
and issued by the Division of Capital Asset Management and
Maintenance showing that the Bidder is eligible to bid on public
projects of this size in the specified category of work; and
2. A Bidder's Update Statement, Division of Capital Asset
Management and Maintenance Form CQ3.
2.2 Filed Sub Bids shall be submitted with the following:
1. A Certificate of Eligibility on the appropriate form prescribed
and issued by the Division of Capital Asset Management and
Maintenance showing that the Bidder is eligible to bid on
public projects in the specified category of work; and
2. A Filed Sub Bidder's Update Statement on a form prescribed by
the Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance.
2.3 It is the Bidder's responsibility to obtain the necessary forms from the
Division of Capital Asset Management and Maintenance and make
application in sufficient time for evaluation of the application and issuance
of a Certificate of Eligibility prior to bid.
2.4 The Contractor Update Statement is not a public record as defined in
M.G.L. c.4 §7 and will not be open to public inspection."
4.2 Substitute the following Article 5.3 in the Instructions to Bidders in place of
the existing Article 5.3:
"5.3 Delivery of Bids
5.3.1 Sub-bids, including the bid deposit, Division of Capital Asset Management
and Maintenance Certificate of Eligibility and Filed Sub Bidder's Update
Statement, shall be enclosed in a sealed inner and outer envelope with the
following plainly marked on the outside of both envelopes:
Filed Sub-Bid for:
• Name of Housing Authority and Project Number
• Sub-bid Section Number
• Trade
• Sub-bidder's Name, Business Address, and Phone Number"
ITEM 5. SECTION 12356-RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
On page 12356-4,Revise paragraph 2.1 D to read:
"D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood
or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility."
END OF ADDENDUM NUMBER TWO
Page 2 of 2
Juster Pope Frazier LLC
Architecture I Planning
45 Conway Street
Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts 01370
www.justerpopefrazier.com
41 3 625 2572 phone
4 1 3 6 2 5 8379 fax
January 20, 2005
Mary McColgan Apartments
Grove Street Development 167-2
DHCD Project No. 214061
Addendum Number Two
TO ALL BIDDERS:
This addendum forms part of the contract documents and modifies the original
specifications and drawings dated August 5, 2005. Acknowledge receipt of this
addendum in Paragraph B on the Form for Sub-Bid and the Form for General Bid.
Failure to do so could result in the rejection of the bid.
This addendum consists of two(2) pages.
ITEM 1. GENERAL BID OPENING
1.1 The General Bid opening scheduled for Thursday, January 26, 2006 is cancelled
and is rescheduled for March 1, 2006 at 2:00 p.m.
ITEM 2. FILED SUB BIDS
2.1 All the filed sub bids received in painting, plumbing, HVAC and electrical are
rejected and must be re-bid because the specification did not comply with MGL
c.149 sec.44F which requires all filed sub bidders to be DCAM certified in their
prospective trades. Notice of the filed sub-bid bidding schedule will appear in
the February 1, 2006 Central Register and in the Daily Hampshire Gazette. Filed
sub-bids will be opened on February 16, 2006 at 2:00 p.m.
ITEM 3. ADVERTISEMENT
3.1 Insert the following paragraph in the Advertisement above the listed filed
sub bid trades:
"All filed sub bidders shall be DCAM Certified in the trade(s) listed below
and shall submit with their bid a DCAM Certificate of Eligibility and Filed
Sub-Bidder's Update Statement".
ITEM 4. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
4.1 Substitute the following Article 2 in the Instructions to Bidders in place of
the existing Article 2:
Page 1 of 2
22' 12'
in 'IK
rn
C) �,...
zz
O A
_ N
�a o
0
O O N O
O
4'-0' 22" f 2"
t/] NP. TIP.
C)
w_.
N
� IIII II I� a
ill
�'D N VIII
NOW -
A�
� IIWEIII=III
~ VIII p •
..
z
N
111 1-11111 f=_
N
z
o z O
7Za
O D
�7cpp rn
z n0 N D n D 70 70
70 C) n != 0 O O
O O z z N �? U, �
03 D v rn O n c' O 0 ry
o z N o O
--1 O O N z = (P N D LD
= Z >
n D a O z z �n z O G O D
O �'P N N ^� � "a <
c
c N 03 O
O O -t120
The Detail
Berkshire
Design Mary McColgan Apartments
Group,Inc. Northampton,MA SK1
4 Men Puce Northampton,Ma55achuxtt5 01060
(4 1 3)562-7000 FAX(413)582-7005 SCALE: NT5 DATE: January 10,2006
2. Concrete wall units shall have a minimum 28 day compressive
strength of 3,000 psi. The concrete shall have a maximum moisture
absorption of 8%.
3. Exterior dimensions may vary is accordance with ASTM C-90.
Standard and compact units shall have a minimum of 1 square foot
face area each.
4. Standard units shall provide a minimum of 150 psi of wall face area.
Fill which is contained within the dimensions of the units may be
considered as 82% effective weight.
5. Units shall have angled sides capable of concave and convex alignment
curves with a minimum radius of 3.5 feet. (where applicable, for
straight walls, use non-angled straight side cap units.)
6. Units shall be interlocked with non-corrosive fiberglass pins.
7. Units shall be interlocked and provide either a near vertical setback or
a built in setback of 1:8. A setback of 1:16 can be achieved by
integrating near vertical and V setback units.
8. Fiberglass connecting pins,cap seal,leveling pad material, unit fill,
and backfill material shall be as per manufacturer's specifications.
9. Manufacturer's specification to be submitted for approval.
Section 08561 On page 08561-6, paragraph 2.5 C, delete the following
sentence:
Provide security latches for partial night opening.
Drawings
Sheet L-3 Add the attached sketch SKI, detail for steps and
handrails at southwest corner of retaining wall.
Sheet A3.3 Delete handrails at sloped porch walk shown on Section
DD/A3.3.
Page 2 of 2
Juster Pope Frazier LLP
Architecture I Planning
45 Conway Street
Shelburne Falls, Massachusetts 01370
www.justerpopefrazier.com
41 3 625 2572 phone
4 1 3 6 2 5 8379 fax
January 16, 2005
Mary McColgan Apartments
Grove Street Development 167-2
DHCD Project No. 214061
Addendum Number One
To All General Bidders:
This addendum forms part of the contract documents and modifies the original
specifications and drawings dated August 5, 2005. Acknowledge receipt of this
addendum with the project bid.
This addendum consists of two (2) pages and one sketch.
Clarification
DHCD Project No. 214061 on the Project Manual Cover is the correct project
number for this job. Change all other references to DHCD Project No. in
drawings and specs to reflect the correct number.
Juster Pope Frazier contact information is correct as listed on the Project Manual
Cover. Change all other references to Jester Pope Frazier in drawings and specs
to reflect the correct information.
Specifications
Section 02200 Add the following to paragraph 1.02 A Scope of Work:
8. Block Retaining Wall System
Add the following as 2.01 M Block Retaining Wall System:
M. BLOCK RETAINING WALL SYSTEM
1. Masonry units shall be Standard Versalock Retaining Wall Units with
Weathered ) option manufactured in accordance with ASTM C-90
and ASTM C-140 or approved equal.
Page 1 of 2
3ZC , A
R
C
PROJECT MANUAL C
C
0
86
03
MODERNIZATION OF STATE AIDED PUBLIC HOUSING NORTHA TON wl
STATE-AIDED PROJECT: Mary McColgan Apartments
Grove Street Development 167-2
DHCD Project No. 214061
Northampton MASSA CHUSETTS I
vir t7 z
r1assachusetts Department of
Housing and Community Development
0 F N;,,
NORTHAMPTON HOUSING AUTHORITY
49 Old South Street i E.
Northampton, MA 01060 s Ll 955
&
Phone: 413-584-4030 SSIONAk-
FAX: 413-582-1350
Joseph A. DeFazio, Chairperson ion Hite, Executive Director OF
Room
Architect Mechanical& Electrical Engineer ME
Juster Pope Frazier LLP Roll W. Hall Consulting Engineers, Inc.
0 45 Conway Street 540 Meadow Street Extension, Suite 2
Shelburne Falls, MA, 01370 Agawam, MA 01001
Telephone: 413-625-2572 Telephone: 413-789-0960 IVAI t
413-625-8379 FAX#: 413-789-3295
#P frazier.com Email: mail@rwhall.com
Email: maiQusterpope Landscape &C.ivil Engineering
Structural Engineer Engineering The Berkshire Design Associates
176 Churchill Street 4 Allen Place
Barry Pr yd
Northampton, MA 02060
Pittsfield, MA 01201 Telephone: 413-582-7000 ME PAOTECTm
Telephone: 413-443-6591 FAX# 413-582-7005 No.42W4
Fax: 413-443-6591 Email: bdg@berkshiredesign.com V#J.
Email: mbarryl76@aol.com YE
Environmental Engineer Geotechnical Engineer NA t
ATC Associates, Inc. O'Reilly, Talbot&Okun Associates
39 Spruce Street 293 Bridge Street, Suite 500 OF
East Longmeadow, MA 01028 Springfield, MA 01103
Telephone: 413-525-1198 Telephone: 413-788-6222
FAX#i 413-525-8227 FAX#: 413-788-8830
Email� wissman8l@atc-enviro.com Email: office@oto-env.com rw DATE: August 5,_2005
1OF1